JP2021166790A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can prevent game players from feeling uneasy.SOLUTION: A state of distribution means is set by state setting means, according to a privilege game's state of progress, in a first state where a game ball is distributed to a first flow path and in a second state where a game ball is distributed to a second flow path by the state setting means, respectively at least one time. In one privilege game, as a setting content for setting a state of a ball-entrance-port by ball-entrance-port setting means, one setting content is selected by selecting means from among a plurality of setting contents that at least include a first setting content and a second setting content. In the first setting content, a ball entrance permission state is set when the first state is being set by the state setting means, while in the second setting content, the ball entrance permission state is set when the second state is being set by the state setting means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

For gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery will be drawn to determine whether or not a game ball will win a jackpot based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and whether or not to shift to a probability fluctuation state will be drawn separately during the jackpot. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from becoming a mere task for obtaining a large number of balls, to allow the player to play the game during the jackpot with a sense of expectation of shifting to a probability fluctuation state, and to improve the interest of the player in the game. I am trying to.

Some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are provided with a plurality of routes through which the gaming ball can pass in a predetermined area where the gaming ball can enter only when the lottery in the probability fluctuation state is performed. In this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuates after the end of the jackpot, depending on which route the game ball is distributed to among the plurality of routes provided in the predetermined area.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-180999

However, in such a gaming machine, the route on which the gaming ball that has entered the predetermined region travels changes depending on the angle of entry of the gaming ball into the predetermined region, vibration, and the like. As a result, every time a jackpot is hit, there is a risk that the player may be worried that his or her own game method may affect the route on which the game ball travels. That is, there is a problem that every time a big hit is made, the player feels uneasy.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing anxiety from being caused to a player.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a ball entry port into which the game ball enters and a state of the ball entry port, a ball entry permission state in which the game ball can easily enter, and a game ball. The game is provided with a ball-entry opening setting means for setting the ball-entry restricted state in which the ball is restricted, and is switched to the ball-entry permitted state by the ball-entry opening setting means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. This is a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and is compared with the first area in which the game ball that has entered the ball entrance can be entered and the case where the game ball enters the first area. The second region, which is advantageous for the player when the game ball enters, and the flow path through which the game ball that has entered the ball entrance port travels are the first flow path or the first flow path thereof. The state of the distribution means for distributing the game ball to the second flow path in which the game ball is more likely to advance to the second region and the state of the distribution means is determined by the game ball in the first flow based on the progress status of the privilege game. The state setting means for setting the first state, which is a state of being distributed to the road, and the second state, which is a state of being distributed to the second flow path, at least once, and the above-mentioned ball entry in the above-mentioned privilege game of 1. As the setting contents for setting the state of the ball entry port by the mouth setting means, the first setting content in which the ball entry permission state is set when the first state is set by the state setting means, and the above-mentioned It is provided with a selection means for selecting one setting content from a plurality of setting contents including at least the second setting content in which the ball entry permission state is set when the second state is set.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the selection means selects either the first setting content or the second setting content.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 includes a lottery means for drawing whether or not a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, and the selection means is determined by a lottery by the lottery means. When the result of the lottery is obtained, the second setting content is selected.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the flow path through which the game ball that has entered the ball entry port travels to the first flow path or a second region from the first flow path by the sorting means. And the game ball is distributed to the second flow path where it is easy to proceed. The state of the distribution means is divided into a first state in which the game ball is distributed to the first flow path by the state setting means and a second state in which the game ball is distributed to the second flow path based on the progress of the privilege game. It is set at least once. As a setting content for setting the state of the ball entrance by the ball entry setting means in the privilege game of 1, the first setting content in which the ball entry permission state is set when the state setting means is set to the first state. One setting content is selected by the selection means from a plurality of setting contents including at least the second setting content in which the ball entry permission state is set when the second state is set.

As a result, when the first setting content or the second setting content is selected by the selection means, the game ball that has entered the ball entry port proceeds to the same flow path regardless of the player's game method. Therefore, the player can play the game without paying attention to his / her own game method. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious about the game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, either the first setting content or the second setting content is selected by the selection means. In all the privilege games, the game ball that has entered the ball entrance can be advanced to the same flow path regardless of the player's game method. Therefore, since the player can play the game by his / her favorite game method, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious about the game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, whether or not a predetermined lottery result is obtained is drawn by a lottery means, and the predetermined lottery result is obtained. In this case, since the second setting content is selected by the selection means, it is determined whether to set the ball entry permission state in the first state or the second state depending on whether or not the predetermined lottery result is obtained. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that various playability can be realized according to the ratio in which the ball entry permission state is set in the second state, depending on the lottery content by the lottery means.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a figure which shows the outline of the lottery apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the flow path of a lottery apparatus. It is sectional drawing in the modified example of the flow path of a lottery apparatus. It is a continuation of the cross-sectional view in the modified example of the flow path of the lottery apparatus. It is a figure which shows the way of allocating the traveling direction of a game ball by the traveling direction distribution part of the lottery apparatus. It is a figure which shows the outline of the distribution rotating body of a lottery apparatus. It is a figure which shows the outline of the ball entry opening distribution part of a lottery apparatus. It is a figure which shows the outline of the case where a game ball passes through a back route in a state where a distribution rotating body of a lottery device swings to the right side. It is a figure which shows the outline of the case where a game ball passes a front route in a state where a distribution rotating body of a lottery device swings to the right side. It is a figure which shows the outline of the case where a game ball passes through a back route in a state where a sorting rotating body of a lottery device swings to the left side. It is a figure which shows the outline of the case where a game ball passes a front route in a state where a distribution rotating body of a lottery device swings to the left side. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship between the distribution rotating body of a lottery apparatus, and each entry port. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. , (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the structure position initialization process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery gate processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the rotating body position detection process executed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control process. It is a flowchart which showed the special effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the round number command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the second embodiment, and (b) is a correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 in the second embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol. Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the above, and FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit random number counter C1 in the second embodiment and the small hit in the special symbol. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit gate processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit control process executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 in the third embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the flow path switching process executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart comparing the opening / closing timing of the special winning opening and the opening / closing timing of the guide passage in the third embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the state of the pachinko machine and the effect to be executed in the fourth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a variation pattern effect that is a jackpot in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an effect executed during the jackpot game. (A) is a diagram showing a chance-up pattern of variation pattern production in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a chance-up pattern of variation pattern production which is a big hit. (A) is a diagram showing an effect executed during the jackpot game when re-entry into the loop state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is executed in the jackpot game which shifts to the low probability state after the end. It is a figure which showed the production to be performed. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of the lottery apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a perspective view of the second variable winning device and the traveling direction distribution portion of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is the second variable winning device and the traveling direction of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment. It is a front view of the distribution part. (A) is a plan view of the second variable winning device and the traveling direction sorting portion of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is the second variable winning device and the traveling direction sorting portion of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment. It is sectional drawing of a part. It is a figure which shows the way of allocating the traveling direction of a game ball by the traveling direction distribution part of the lottery apparatus in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of a modified example of the second variable winning device and the traveling direction distribution portion of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the way of allocating the traveling direction of a game ball by the modified example of the traveling direction distribution part of the lottery apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a perspective view when the ball entry port distribution portion of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment is observed from the front right direction, and (b) is a perspective view when the ball entry port distribution portion of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment is observed. It is a perspective view when the part part is observed from the front left direction. It is an exploded front perspective view of the ball entry opening distribution part of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of the distribution rotating body of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of the case where a game ball passes a front route in a state which the distribution rotating body of the lottery apparatus in 5th Embodiment swings to the right. It is a figure which shows the outline of the case where the game ball passes through the back route in the state which the distribution rotating body of the lottery apparatus in 5th Embodiment swings to the right. It is a figure which shows the outline of the case where a game ball passes a front route in a state where the distribution rotating body of the lottery apparatus in 5th Embodiment swings to the left. It is a figure which shows the outline of the case where the game ball passes through the back route in the state which the distribution rotating body of the lottery apparatus in 5th Embodiment swings to the left. (A) is a diagram showing the outline of the time change of the second large opening and the traveling direction distribution portion when the front route jackpot is obtained in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the outline of the time change in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of the time change of the 2nd big opening and the traveling direction distribution part at the time of a big hit of a back route. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 in the fifth embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the jackpot type in the fifth embodiment and the state of the second large opening for each time counter value. (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type in the fifth embodiment and the state of the traveling direction distribution unit for each time counter value. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the round start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd large opening opening setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the flow path setting setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ball entry detection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 17) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changing the effect content of the super reach. Be manipulated.

The stage is a production mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified. In this pachinko machine 10, there are three stages: "city stage", "empty stage", and "island stage". There are two stages. Then, various effects such as variable effects and reach effects that are performed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during the high-speed fluctuation, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, the "city stage" → "empty stage" "→" Island stage "→" City stage "→ ... It is changed repeatedly in this order. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the area around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push-button type stop switch 51b that stops firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The ball entry port 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 17) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when the ball enters the first entrance 64, and when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, a normal symbol (first symbol) is drawn. 2 symbols) will be drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. Is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) It is released, and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are two types of jackpots for special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B". After the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the jackpot, the game according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the special symbol is displayed. A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first symbol. It is shown by the device 37 and also shown by the third symbol display device 81. When the variation display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the variation display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. The special winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first entry opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, whether or not the ordinary symbol is a hit is determined. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64. Become in a state. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball easily enters the first ball entry port 64, and as a result, the lottery of the special symbol is easily performed.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the number of reserved balls 37. It is also indicated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

As described above, there are two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B". Both "Big hit A" and "Big hit B" are big hits with a maximum number of rounds of eight.

"Big hit A" and "Big hit B" are the flow path switching valves 331a, in the transition lottery to the high probability state of the special symbol performed by the lottery device 300 (see FIG. 5) after the winning of the big hit is confirmed. Depending on 331b (see FIG. 9), there is a difference in whether the flow path through which the game ball passes is the flow path on the front side (front route) or the flow path on the back side (back route) of the rotating body 341. That is, in "big hit A", the flow path on the front side (front route) is switched (see FIG. 9B), and in "big hit B", the flow path on the back side (back route) is switched (FIG. 9). See (a)).

Here, the "front side" and the "back side" of the distribution rotating body 341 indicate whether the player is on the front side or the back side, respectively, and in the case of the flow path on the front side (front route), the pachinko machine The flow path is closer to the player playing the game at 10 (far side from the base plate 60), and in the case of the back flow path (back route), the flow path is farther from the player (to the base plate 60). It is a flow path on the side closer to the opposite side).

Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 5 to 16, but whether the flow path is on the back side or the front side (that is, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b) and the flow path switching. Of the time-saving ball opening 501 and the probability variation ball opening 501 to 504 provided below the sorting rotating body 341, depending on the state of the sorting rotating body 341 arranged directly under the valves 331a and 331b. It is sorted which entry port the game ball enters. When the game ball enters the time-saving entry slot 501, the special symbol shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot ends, and the time is shortened for the normal symbol during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of fluctuations is 100). It becomes a state. On the other hand, when the game ball enters any of the probabilistic entry ball ports 502 to 504, the ball shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

When the flow path switching valve 331a is set to the flow path (front route) on the front side, the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is probabilistically changed by the distribution rotating body 341. And, it is distributed to either the probability variation winning opening 504. Therefore, when it is set in the flow path on the front side (front route), it always shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, when the game ball is set in the flow path (back route) on the back side, the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is divided by the distribution rotating body 341 into a time-saving ball entrance 501 and a probability variation entry ball port. Since it is distributed to either of 503, when it is distributed to the time-saving entry slot 501, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends, and during the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of fluctuations is 100), it is a normal symbol. It becomes a time saving state of. On the other hand, when the game ball is distributed to the probability variation ball opening 503 by the distribution rotating body 341, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol after that is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol). In other words, it is a state of the game in which it is easy to shift to the special game state. On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change. In addition, in the "low probability state of special symbol", the time saving state of the normal symbol (during the time saving) is the normal state of the jackpot probability, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the normal symbol increases. It refers to a state of a game in which a ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 is opened or one hit is made according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The number of times the electric accessory is opened may be changed.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or the fluctuation of the balls entered in the first entry port 64 is not executed. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED is different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, it corresponds to the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) using the ball as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets, which are almost full on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 20) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. In the case of "big hit A" in which the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b of the lottery device 300 are switched to the front route, and in the case of "big hit B" in which the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b of the lottery device 300 are switched to the back route. A variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which any number from "0" to "9" is added are aligned. That is, it is configured so that it is not possible to distinguish between the "big hit A" and the "big hit B" from the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the LED 37a displays a special symbol (first symbol) according to the jackpot type. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

Although the details will be described later, when the game ball enters the lottery device 300 with the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b set to the front route, they are arranged on the front side of the ball entry port distribution unit 340. The ball will be entered into either the probability-changing ball opening 502 or the probability-changing ball opening 504, and no matter which entry port the ball is entered into, the ball will shift to a high-probability state of a special symbol after a big hit. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the lottery device 300 with the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b set to the front route, the time-saving ball entry port arranged on the back side of the ball entry port distribution unit 340. The ball will enter either 501 or the probability variation entrance 503, and there is a possibility that the ball will shift to a low probability state of a special symbol after a big hit. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to win the "big hit A" than to win the "big hit B", so the player is made to play the game with the expectation that he will win the "big hit A". be able to.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area that displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have been entered into the first entry port 64, and is the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying the advance notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears. A notice will be produced by issuing it.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the maximum number of ball entry times is four. It is held, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that it is 4 balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not a lottery of ordinary symbols performed when the ball passes through the second entry port 67 is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is operated for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol hold lamp 84. NS. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st ball entrance 64, and the number of times the ball passes through the second ball opening 67 is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. It may be set to (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

A lottery device 300 for drawing whether or not to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol after the end of the big hit is arranged in the right direction of the front view with respect to the variable display unit 80. The lottery device 300 is provided with a lottery gate 310 that is opened based on winning a big hit (see FIG. 5), and enters the lottery gate 310 while the lottery gate 310 is open. Based on the fact that the balled game ball enters any of the probabilistic entry ball openings 502 to 504 inside the lottery device 300, the game shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 enters the time-saving entry slot 501 inside the lottery device 300, it shifts to a low-probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot ends and during a predetermined number of fluctuations. (For example, the number of fluctuations is 100 times) The normal symbol is in a time-saving state.

The details of the lottery device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 16. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the appearance of the lottery device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the lottery device 300 includes a lottery gate 310, a flow path 320, a traveling direction distribution unit 330, a ball entry port distribution unit 340, and a ball discharge unit 350 for lottery. The game ball that has entered the gate 310 is discharged to the outside of the lottery device 300 through the ball discharge unit 350 via the flow path 320, the traveling direction distribution unit 330, and the ball entry port distribution unit 340.

Flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are provided inside the traveling direction distribution unit 330, and the flow position of the game ball is set to the front side of the rotating body 341 according to the direction of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b. You can switch between doing and doing it on the back side. Further, a distribution rotating body 341 is oscillatedly arranged inside the ball entry port distribution unit 340. Although the details will be described later, the distribution rotating body 341 is provided with four passages (guidance passages 408a to 408d), and each passage is associated with the time-saving entry ball opening 501 and the probability variation entry ball port 502 to 504. Has been done.

The cover portion 332, which is the outer wall portion of the traveling direction distribution portion 330, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b arranged inside the traveling direction distribution portion 330 are all transparent members (for example, PS material). It is composed of. Similarly, the cover portion 423, which is the outer wall portion of the ball entry port distribution section 340, and the distribution rotating body 341 disposed inside the ball entry port distribution section 340 are also made of transparent members. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the distribution rotating body 341 during the game. As a result, the player can confirm the game ball passing through the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the distribution rotating body 341. It is possible to visually check which entry port the ball enters. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the special symbol will be in a high probability state after the end of the jackpot. In addition, since the appearance of the game ball flowing down can be visually observed, the player is expected to enter any of the probabilistic entry ball ports 502 to 504 while the game ball is flowing down. It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Furthermore, by allowing the player to visually recognize the flow of the game ball until it enters one of the entrances, it is possible to make the player recognize that the lottery is being conducted fairly, and the player can play pachinko. It is possible to suppress distrust of the machine 10 and the hall.

Next, the flow path 320 provided in the lottery device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a schematic view showing the configuration of the flow path 320 and the operation of the game ball advancing to the flow path 320. As shown in FIG. 6A, the flow path 320 includes a guide passage 321 through which the game ball entered from the lottery gate 310 passes, and a guide passage 322 for guiding the passing game ball to the traveling direction distribution unit 330. Close one of the ball discharge passage 323 for guiding the passing game ball to the discharge port and the guide passage 322 or the ball discharge passage 323, and advance the game ball to one of the passages. It is composed of a passage closing valve 324 for making the passage closed. The passage closing valve 324 is driven by a solenoid (not shown), and is directed to the direction shown in FIG. 6A (that is, the direction in which the guidance passage 322 is opened and the ball discharge passage 323 is closed) based on the winning of the jackpot. It switches to.

After winning the jackpot, the game ball that first entered the lottery gate 310 and flowed down the guide passage 321 reaches the passage closing valve 324 (FIG. 6A), and when the passage closing valve 324 reaches the short closing valve 324b. Contact. Since the passage closing valve 324 is configured to rotate about the shaft 324c, the game ball comes into contact with the short closing valve 324b, and the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the short closing valve 324b. A downward force acts on the closing valve 324b, and the short closing valve 324b rotates until it hits the inner wall of the induction passage 322. The rotation of the short closing valve 324b causes the game ball to advance to the guide passage 322, the long closing valve 324a closes the guidance passage 322, and the ball discharge passage 323 is opened (FIG. 6B). ..

The guide passage 322 is closed by the long closing valve 324a, and the ball discharge passage 323 is opened. Therefore, all the game balls that enter the lottery gate 310 and flow down the guide passage 321 are the ball discharge passage 323. It will be discharged via (Fig. 6 (c)). As a result, the number of game balls that can advance to the guidance passage 322 can be limited to one, so that the game balls that advance to the entry slot distribution unit 340 arranged at the rear stage of the guidance passage 322 can be reliably performed. It can be limited to only one ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that a plurality of game balls enter one of the time-saving entry openings 501 and the probability variation entry openings 501 to 504 multiple times.

In the present embodiment, the passage closing valve 324 is configured to rotate with the weight of the game ball, but the passage of the game ball is detected by using a known sensor means or the like, and guidance is provided based on the detection result of the sensor means. It may be configured to control the opening and closing of the passages 322 and 323. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8, the configuration of the flow path 320 using the sensor means will be described as a modification of the flow path 320 of the first embodiment.

7 and 8 are schematic views schematically showing a configuration in which the number of game balls that can travel to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later by using the sensor means can be limited to only one ball. In the flow path 320 of this modification, a sprocket 601, ball passage sensors 602a and 602b, a lever 604, and a ball passage sensor 603b are provided between the guidance passage 321 and the guidance passage 322, and a passage closing valve is further provided. It differs from the first embodiment in that the short closing valve 324b is not provided in the 324.

When the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 advances through the guidance passage 321 and reaches the sprocket 601, the progress of the game ball is hindered by the convex portion 601a of the sprocket 601. The game ball whose progress has been stopped by the sprocket is determined whether or not the flow is permitted based on the detection result of the ball passing sensor 602a. Specifically, after the lottery gate 310 is opened, the ball is allowed to pass until the ball passage sensor 602a detects the passage of the ball, the sprocket 601 is rotated clockwise by a motor means or the like, and the game ball is released. It becomes possible to flow down the guide passage 321.

When the game ball flows down the one-ball guidance passage 321, the ball passage sensor 602a detects the flow of the ball, and the convex portion 601a of the sprocket 601 projects into the guidance passage 321. Therefore, all the game balls that have subsequently entered the lottery gate 310 and flowed down the guide passage 321 will be hindered by the convex portion 601a of the sprocket 601.

On the other hand, the game ball whose passage is detected by the ball passage sensor 602a is hindered by the lever 604 again (FIG. 7A). The lever 604 operates so as to block or open the flow path according to the state of the ball passage sensor 602b, the ball passage sensors 603a, 603b, and the passage closing valve 324.

The lever 604 first rotates counterclockwise about the axis 604 based on the detection of the arrival of the ball at the upper part of the lever 604 by the ball passage sensor 602b. Then, when the lever 604 is sufficiently rotated so as not to obstruct the passage, the game ball stopped at the upper part of the lever 604 starts to flow down again (FIG. 7 (b)). Then, based on the detection by the ball passage sensors 603a and 603b that the game ball has passed through the guidance passage 322, the lever 604 rotates clockwise around the shaft 604a and projects to the guidance passage 321 again. Prevents the progress of other game balls. Further, based on the detection results of the ball passage sensors 603a and 603b, the passage closing valve 324 falls in the direction of the ball discharge passage 323, and the ball discharge passage 323 is opened (FIG. 7 (c)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls other than the game balls that have previously advanced to the guidance passage 322 from advancing to the guidance passage 322, and to discharge the game balls from the ball discharge passage 323.

While the passage closing valve 324 is tilted, the lever 604 is controlled so as not to operate (that is, the guide passage 322 is kept blocked) regardless of the detection result of the ball passage sensor 602b. Further, the sprocket 601 rotates clockwise based on the fact that the passage closing valve 324 collapses and the ball discharge passage 323 is opened, and only one game ball flows down the guide passage 321. Then, in the state where the passage closing valve 324 is collapsed, the ball passage sensors 602a and 602b are controlled to let the game ball flow down one ball each time the passage of the game ball is detected (FIG. 8 (a), FIG. 8 (b)).

As described above, the configuration of the flow path 320 for advancing the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later has been described, but the configuration of the flow path 320 is the configuration of the present embodiment. It is not limited. As an example of another configuration, for example, instead of the passage closing valve 324 of the first embodiment, it is possible to prevent the passage of the game ball from the shaft 324c of the passage closing valve 324 to the downstream side by one game ball. By providing a shutter and closing the shutter portion, only one game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 is stopped at the shutter portion. Since only the space for one game ball is provided in the shutter part, by stopping the game ball in the shutter part, other game balls cannot be stopped in the shutter part connected to the guidance passage 322. Proceed to the ball discharge passage 324. Then, the shutter portion may be opened after a sufficient time has elapsed from the closing of the lottery gate 310, and the game ball stopped at the shutter portion may be advanced to the guidance passage 322. With this configuration, it is possible to limit the number of game balls advancing to the distribution rotating body 341 to only one.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the traveling direction distribution unit 330 into which the game ball flowing down the guidance passage 322 of the flow path 320 enters will be described. FIG. 9 is a schematic view schematically showing the traveling direction distribution unit 330. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the traveling direction distribution unit 330, the flow path 320 joined to the traveling direction distribution unit 330, and the ball entry port distribution unit 340 as viewed from the side surface of the game board. In both FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b), the base plate 60 is arranged to the right. As shown in FIG. 9, the traveling direction distribution unit 330 is composed of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the cover unit 332, and the traveling direction of the game ball is in the front direction or the back direction with respect to the game board. It is distributed to either one.

Both the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are electrically connected to the flow path solenoid 265 and are configured to tilt in the same direction and stand still. As shown in FIG. 9A, when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are inclined to the right (that is, the back side for the player), the game ball is to the right (that is, the back side for the player). ), And flows down to the back side of the distribution rotating body 341. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are inclined to the left (that is, the front side for the player), the game ball is to the left (that is, for the player). Proceeds on the front side) and flows down to the front side of the distribution rotating body 341. As described above, in a state where the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are inclined to the right (that is, the back side for the player), the entry port where the game ball can enter is the time saving entry opening 501 or the probability change. It is a ball entrance 503. On the other hand, in a state where the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are inclined to the left (that is, the front side for the player), the entry port where the game ball can enter is the probability variation entry port 502 or the probability variation entry ball. Mouth 504. That is, it is more advantageous for the player that the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are inclined to the left (that is, the front side for the player).

The flow path solenoid 265 switches the direction of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b to the direction corresponding to the jackpot type when the lottery device 300 draws the game state after the jackpot ends, and also switches the flow path after the lottery ends. The directions of the valves 331a and 331b are switched to the right (that is, the back side for the player). Also, when it is detected that the RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on, the directions of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the right direction (that is, the back side for the player). That is, in the state where the lottery device 300 is not performing the lottery, the direction of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is controlled to be in the right direction (that is, the back side for the player).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16, the ball entry port distribution unit 340 of the lottery device 300 will be described. The ball entry port distribution unit 340 distributes the game ball to any of the time-saving ball entry ports 501 or the probabilistic ball entry ports 501 to 504. In this description, first, the outline of each figure will be described.

10A and 10B are perspective views (FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b)) and side views (FIG. 10 (c)) of the distribution rotating body 341 arranged so as to be swingable in the ball inlet distribution unit 340. It is a top view (FIG. 10 (d)), and FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the entire ball inlet distribution portion 340. Further, FIGS. 12 to 15 schematically show the operation of the distribution rotating body 341 and the game ball when the game ball enters each of the time-saving entry ball opening 501 and the probability variation entry ball port 501 to 504. It is a schematic diagram. Further, FIG. 16 is a schematic view schematically showing the positional relationship between the distribution rotating body 341, the time saving ball opening 501, and the probability variation input ball port 502 to 504 when the sorting rotating body 341 is viewed from the vertical direction. Is.

The distribution rotating body 341 is configured to have four guide passages 408a to 408d through which the game ball can pass (see FIG. 10B). Further, the distribution rotating body 341 is configured to be swingable in the left-right direction about the shaft 406, and the game ball can pass through the guide passages 408a and 408b according to the swinging direction of the derivative 341. And, the state in which the game ball can pass through the guidance passages 408c and 408d is switched, and in the initial arrangement, the state in which the game ball can pass through the guidance passages 408a and 408b (that is, shown in FIG. 10A). It is in a state of swinging to the right). The initial arrangement is returned by the rotary motor 264 when the RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on. In addition, the game ball that has reached the distribution rotating body 341 jumps out of the ball entry port distribution unit 340 without entering each entry port (time-saving ball entry port 501 and probability variation entry ball port 502 to 504). In order to suppress this, the distribution rotating body 341 is surrounded on all sides by a cover portion 423.

Although the details will be described later, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408b, the derivative 341 swings due to the weight of the ball as the game ball goes down the inclined portion 403b, reaches the ball stop portion 403a, and stands still. , The state is switched to a state (FIG. 10 (b)) in which the game ball can pass through the guide passages 408c and 408d. Further, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408c, the derivative 341 swings due to the weight of the ball when the game ball goes down the inclined portion 405b, reaches the ball stop portion 405a, and stands still, and the guide passage 408a, It switches to a state in which the game ball can pass through 408b (FIG. 10 (a)). When the game ball passes through the guidance passages 408a and 408d, the distribution rotating body 341 does not swing and the state does not switch.

As shown in FIG. 11, the distribution rotating body 341 stands still inside the ball entry port distribution unit 340 in a state of being tilted to the left (FIG. 11 (b)) or to the right (FIG. 11 (a)). When the player is stationary in a state of being tilted to the left (FIG. 11 (a)), the upper ends of the guidance passages 408c and 408d are located directly below the ball entry port 411, so that the game has passed through the ball entry port 411. The sphere passes through the guidance passage 408c or 408d. On the other hand, when the distribution rotating body 341 is stationary in a state of being tilted to the right (FIG. 11 (b)), the upper ends of the guide passages 408a and 408b are located directly below the ball entry port 411, so that the ball entry port is located. The game ball that has passed through 411 passes through the guidance passage 408a or 408b.

The game ball that has passed through the guidance passage 408a enters the time-saving ball entrance 501 and is discharged to the outside through the ball discharge passage 419. Further, the game ball that has passed through the guidance passage 408b enters the probability variation entry ball port 502 and is discharged to the outside through the ball discharge passage 416. Further, the game ball that has passed through the guidance passage 408c enters the probability variation entry ball port 503 and is discharged to the outside through the ball discharge passage 417. Then, the game ball that has passed through the guidance passage 408d enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 504 and is discharged to the outside through the ball discharge passage 418. Which entry port the ball has entered is detected by the winning sensors 420a to 420d provided in the ball discharge passages 416 to 419 in the subsequent stage of each entry opening. Based on the detection results of these winning sensors 420a to 420d, it is determined whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. Further, the ball discharge passages 416 to 420 are configured to join the ball discharge passage 421 downstream. The ball discharge passage 421 is provided with a discharge ball sensor 422 for detecting the game ball to be discharged.

Further, on the side surface side of the distribution rotating body 341, a magnet 407a (side surface of the distribution rotating body 341 on the front side in front of the front view, FIG. A) and a magnet 407b (a side surface of the distribution rotating body 341 on the back side of the front view, see FIG. 10B) are provided. Further, a magnet 424a and a magnet 424b are provided on the inner wall portion of the cover portion 423 of the ball entry port distribution portion 340. These magnets 424a and 424b are provided at positions where the distribution rotating body 341 does not swing to the right or left (upright state) and overlaps the magnets 407a and 407b, respectively.

Here, the magnet 407a and the magnet 424a are installed so as to repel each other when the distribution rotating body 341 swings and rotates to a position where it stands upright. Similarly, both the magnet 407b and the magnet 424b are installed so as to repel each other. Therefore, even if the distribution rotating body 341 slightly swings around the shaft 406 due to vibration applied to the distribution rotating body 341 or the like, the magnets 407a and 407b provided on the side surface portion of the distribution rotating body 341 Since the magnets 424a and 424b provided on the inner wall portion of the ball entry port distribution portion 340 repel each other, it is possible to prevent the distribution rotating body 341 from rotating beyond the portions of the magnets 424a and 424b. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the distribution rotating body 341 from being switched even though the game ball has not passed through the guidance passage 408b or 408c.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 12 to 15, the operation of the distribution rotating body 341 and the game ball when the game ball passes through each passage of the distribution rotating body 341 will be described. First, referring to FIG. 12, when the game ball advances to the guidance passage 408a (that is, the traveling direction of the game ball is distributed inward by the traveling direction distribution unit 330, and the distribution rotating body 341 is tilted to the right. If this is the case), it will be described.

The game ball that has advanced to the guidance passage 408a (FIG. 12 (a)) flows down the back side of the passage wall 402 along the floor portion 401 (FIG. 12 (b)) and falls from the lower end of the distribution rotating body 341. Then, the ball enters the time-saving ball entrance 501 and passes through the ball discharge passage 419. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408a, it shifts to a low-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit, and during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of fluctuations is 100), the time is shortened of the normal symbol. .. Since the flow path passing through the guidance passage 408a simply flows down along the floor portion 401, a force that causes the distribution rotating body 341 to swing acts as the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408a. The distribution rotating body 341 keeps swinging to the right (that is, the guide passages 408a and 408b are directly below the entry port 411). Therefore, the game ball that next passes through the entry port 411 will pass through either one of the guidance passages 408a and 408b. A partition plate 412 is provided below the distribution rotating body 341 (see FIG. 11). The partition plate 412 prevents the game ball flowing down the guide passage 408a from entering the probabilistic entry ball port 502 on the front side without entering the time-saving entry ball 501 on the back side.

Next, referring to FIG. 13, when the game ball advances to the guidance passage 408b (that is, the traveling direction of the game ball is distributed toward the front by the traveling direction distribution unit 330, and the distribution rotating body 341 is directed to the right. (When it is in a tilted state) will be described.

When the game ball enters the guidance passage 408b, the game ball first reaches the ball stop portion 403a via the floor portion 401 and the inclined portion 403b. Since the ball stop portion 403a extends in the direction perpendicular to the floor portion 401 (that is, in the direction perpendicular to the traveling direction of the game ball), the game ball is hindered from advancing and is in contact with the ball stop portion 403a. (Fig. 13 (a)). Then, when the game ball comes to rest at the ball stop portion 403a, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stop portion 403a, and a force in the direction of pushing down the ball stop portion 403a acts.

When the ball stop portion 403a is pushed down, the distribution rotating body 341 rotates about the shaft 406 and is in the direction shown in FIG. 13B. In the direction shown in FIG. 13 (b), the ball stop portion 403a is in a state of being inclined in the lower right direction in FIG. The ball enters and passes through the ball discharge passage 416. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408b, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends. The distribution rotating body 341 continues to maintain a state in which the game ball swings to the left as shown in FIG. 13 (c) (that is, a state in which the guide passages 408c and 408d are directly below the ball entry port 411) even after the game ball has fallen. .. Therefore, the game ball that next passes through the entry port 411 will pass through either one of the guidance passages 408c and 408d. Further, as described above, since the partition plate 412 is provided at the lower part of the distribution rotating body 341 (see FIG. 11), the game ball flowing down the guide passage 408b enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 501 on the front side. It suppresses the ball from entering the time-saving ball entrance 501 on the back side without doing so.

Next, referring to FIG. 14, when the game ball advances to the derivative passage 408c (that is, the traveling direction of the game ball is distributed inward by the traveling direction distribution unit 330, and the distribution rotating body 341 moves to the left. (When it is in a tilted state) will be described.

When the game ball enters the guidance passage 408c, the game ball first reaches the ball stop portion 405a via the floor portion 401 and the inclined portion 405b. Since the ball stop portion 405a extends in the direction perpendicular to the floor portion 401 (that is, in the direction perpendicular to the traveling direction of the game ball), the game ball is hindered from advancing and is in contact with the ball stop portion 405a. (Fig. 14 (a)). Then, when the game ball comes to rest at the ball stop portion 405a, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stop portion 405a, and a force in the direction of pushing down the ball stop portion 405a acts.

When the ball stop portion 405a is pushed down, the distribution rotating body 341 rotates about the shaft 406 and is in the direction shown in FIG. 14 (b). In the direction of FIG. 14 (b), the ball stop portion 405a is in a state of being inclined in the lower left direction in FIG. 14 (b), so that the game ball flows down along the inclined portion 414 and enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 503. The ball will pass through the ball discharge passage 417. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408c, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends. The distribution rotating body 341 continues to maintain a state in which the game ball swings to the right as shown in FIG. 14 (c) (that is, a state in which the guide passages 408a and 408b are directly below the ball entry port 411) even after the game ball has fallen. Therefore, the game ball that next passes through the entry port 411 will pass through either one of the guide passages 408a and 408b. Further, as described above, since the partition plate 412 is provided at the lower part of the distribution rotating body 341 (see FIG. 11), the game ball flowing down the guide passage 408c enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 503 on the back side. It suppresses the ball from entering the probabilistic ball opening 504 on the front side without doing so.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, when the game ball advances to the guidance passage 408d (that is, the traveling direction of the game ball is distributed toward the front by the traveling direction distribution unit 330, and the distribution rotating body 341 moves to the left. (When it is in a tilted state) will be described.

The game ball that has advanced to the guidance passage 408d (FIG. 15 (a)) flows down the front side of the passage wall 402 along the floor portion 401 (FIG. 15 (b)) and falls from the lower end of the distribution rotating body 341. Then, the ball enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 504 and passes through the ball discharge passage 418. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408d, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends. Since the flow path passing through the guidance passage 408d simply flows down along the floor portion 401, a force that causes the distribution rotating body 341 to swing acts as the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408d. The distribution rotating body 341 keeps swinging to the left (that is, the guide passages 408c and 408d are directly below the entry port 411). Therefore, the game ball that next passes through the entry port 411 will pass through either one of the guidance passages 408c and 408d. Further, as described above, since the partition plate 412 is provided at the lower part of the distribution rotating body 341 (see FIG. 11), the game ball flowing down the guide passage 408d enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 504 on the front side. It suppresses the ball from entering the probabilistic ball opening 503 on the back side without doing so.

As described above, the game ball is either the short-time entry ball opening 501 or the probabilistic entry ball opening 501 to 504, depending on which of the four passages provided in the distribution rotating body 341 passes through. It is distributed to the entrance of the ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the positional relationship between the distribution rotating body 341, the time-saving entry ball port 501, and the probability variation entry ball port 501 to 504 will be described. FIG. 16A is a view showing a state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right and stands still, as viewed from the direction of the ball entry port 411 of the ball entry port distribution unit 340, and FIG. 16B. ) Is a diagram showing a state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left and stands still, as viewed from the ball entry port 411 direction of the ball entry port distribution unit 340. As shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, a time-saving ball opening 501 is arranged on the right back side of the distribution rotating body 341, and a probability variation ball opening 502 is arranged on the right front side. Therefore, when the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right side, there is a possibility that the ball enters either the time-saving entry slot 501 or the probability variation entry slot 502. On the other hand, the probability-changing ball opening 503 is arranged on the left back side of the distribution rotating body 341, and the probability-changing ball opening 504 is arranged on the left front side. Therefore, when the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left side, there is a possibility that the ball enters either the probability variation entry port 503 or 504.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 5 to 16, the game ball determines whether the lottery device 300 shifts to the high-probability state of the special symbol or the low-probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends. It is specified based on the entry port (one of the time-saving entry opening 501 and the probability variation entry opening 501 to 504). The game ball is distributed to any of the entry ports according to the state of the flow path by the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the direction (right direction or left direction) of the distribution rotating body 341.

The state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched between the front route and the back route according to the winning jackpot type, and the direction of the distribution rotating body 341 is the guidance passage 408a to which the game ball is provided in the distribution rotating body 341. It changes depending on which passage of 408d is taken.

When the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408a while the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right (that is, the guidance passages 408a and 408b are directly below the entrance 411), the state of the distribution rotating body 341 changes. Without (that is, while swinging to the right), the game ball enters the time-saving entry slot 501. Therefore, even when the next big hit is won, the distribution rotating body 341 remains in the state of swinging to the right, and if the game ball is distributed to the guidance passage 408a again, the special symbol will be continuously in a low probability state. In some cases.

When the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408b with the distribution rotating body 341 swinging to the right, the distribution rotating body 341 rotates to the left around the axis 406 based on the weight of the game ball, and the game ball Enters the probability change ball opening 502. Therefore, when the next big hit is won, the game ball reaches the distribution rotating body 341 in a state where the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left side (that is, a state in which the guidance passages 408c and 408d are directly below the entrance 411). Therefore, in the next lottery, the game ball will enter either the probability-changing ball opening 503 or the probability-changing ball opening 504. That is, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408b, not only the game shifts to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, but also the next jackpot always shifts to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. It is.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408c in a state where the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left side (that is, a state where the guidance passages 408c and 408d are directly below the entrance 411), the weight of the game ball is applied. Based on this, the distribution rotating body 341 rotates to the right around the axis 406, and the game ball enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 503. Therefore, when the next big hit is won, the game ball reaches the distribution rotating body 341 in a state where the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right side (that is, a state in which the guidance passages 408a and 408b are directly below the entrance 411). Therefore, in the next lottery, the game ball will enter either the time-saving entry slot 501 or the probability variation entry slot 502. That is, in the next jackpot, there is a possibility of shifting to a high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, or a transition to a low-probability state of the special symbol.

Further, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408d with the distribution rotating body 341 swinging to the left side, the state of the distribution rotating body 341 does not change (that is, the game ball remains swinging to the left side). Enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 504. Therefore, even if the next big hit is won, the distribution rotating body 341 remains in the state of swinging to the left. Therefore, in the next lottery, the game is played to either the probability variation entry ball opening 503 or the probability variation entry ball opening 504. The ball will enter. That is, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408d, not only the game shifts to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, but also the next jackpot always shifts to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. It is.

In this way, if the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the left, regardless of whether the game ball passes through the guidance passages 408c or 408d, it always shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, so that the player Can recognize that the result of the lottery by the lottery device 300 is a high probability state of the special symbol only by confirming that the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the left side, and the lottery by the lottery device 300. You can check the situation with confidence.

On the other hand, when the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the right, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol, so that the lottery result by the lottery device 300 is changed to the high probability state of the special symbol. It will be confirmed while holding both the expectation for the transition and the anxiety about the transition to the low probability state of the special symbol.

Therefore, the orientation of the distribution rotating body 341 is confirmed, and if it swings to the left side, it gives the player a sense of security, and if it swings to the right side, it gives the player a sense of expectation and anxiety. Therefore, it is possible to play a game with sharpness.

Furthermore, if the game ball is distributed to the guidance passage 408b or the guidance passage 408d, not only the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, but also the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the next big hit. Since the game is confirmed, the player is guaranteed three times of big hits that will be won in the high probability state of this big hit, the next big hit, and the special symbol that will be transferred after the next big hit. It is possible to recognize that the player is present, give a great sense of satisfaction to the player, and improve the player's interest in the game.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the first ball entry port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entry port switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first entry opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (8 rounds of jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 8 times (8 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward on the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box It is cut to the cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 19A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a random number table 202a per first, a type selection table 202b per first, and a random number table 202c per second as a part of the fixed value data described above. , At least the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored.

The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 (not shown), which will be described later, is stored. The details of the first random number table 202a will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1. The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 19 (b)) is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. The details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described later together with the description of the first hit type counter C2.

The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 19 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. The details of the second random number table 202c will be described later together with the description of the second random number counter C4. The variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is set for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 18, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 34). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first ball entry port. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and the balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first is special. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special symbol) with a higher probability of becoming a jackpot of a special symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the probability is high, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers that become big hits different in this way, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the high probability of the special symbol and the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the low probability of the special symbol are in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is the one at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are three random number values that are big hits of the special symbol when the probability of the special symbol is low, and the random number values "7,107,282" are the special symbols for the low probability. It is stored in the jackpot random number table. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 3 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/100".

On the other hand, when the probability of the special symbol is high, there are 30 random numbers that are the jackpots of the special symbol, and the values are "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78,83,99,106, 112,122,134,140,151,168,176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. It is stored in. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 30 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/10".

In the present embodiment, the random number value that becomes the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability and the random number value that becomes the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. So, the random number values that are the jackpots for each are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value for the jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 19B, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B".

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. From the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2, the random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol is set by the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 19B). , This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99) that stops at the same time, and "Reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) that the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99, and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and rear" and "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79, when the probability is low. The table for is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. NS. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 34) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. There is.

In the variation pattern table, for example, as variation patterns for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", "disengagement special reach" Various types are specified, and various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for jackpot A and jackpot B, and "special" is specified as fluctuation patterns for jackpot A. Various types of "reach" are specified, and various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for both hit and miss. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type).

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of this, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that hits the normal symbol is set by the random number table per normal symbol (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the normal symbol. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the hit random number table, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and for the high probability of hitting the normal symbol (for the normal symbol). It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 19 (c), there are 24 random numbers that hit the normal symbol at a low probability of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in a random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a normal symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The fluctuation display of is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. , The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random numbers that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the jackpot of the normal symbol is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The fluctuation display of is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 18, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 34) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 32) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 17, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a probability change flag. It has a 203e, a time saving / medium counter 203f, a round number counter 203g, a lottery flag 203h, an opening flag 203i, and a rotating body flag 203j.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a random number counter C1 per first. , Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a shifts to the execution area. Then, based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting prize, a big hit lottery of the original special symbol is drawn. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the starting prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) is obtained. It is described that the prediction is to pre-read the lottery result of the special symbol thereafter. The various types of information include hit / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the look-ahead is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the look-ahead is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. Store in 223a.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas The shift process is performed to pack the data into the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S404 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 26).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 26 and S405 in FIG. 28). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the reserved ball number (standby) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the game ball passing through the second entry port 67. It is a counter that counts the number of times) up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time the game ball passes through the second entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S704 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 29).

When the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is less than 4, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not done (S703: No in FIG. 30).

The probability change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). If the probability change flag 203e is on, the pachinko machine 10 is the probability change state of the special symbol. When the probability variation flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial value of the probability variation flag 203e is set to zero, and the game ball has entered any of the probability variation entry slots 502 to 504 in the lottery by the lottery device 300 performed based on the jackpot of the special symbol. Is turned on based on (S1614 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203e is turned off when the game ball enters the time-saving entry slot 501 in the lottery by the lottery device 300 (S1620 in FIG. 35).

When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, the value of the probability variation flag 203e is referred to, and if the state is on, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, while the probability variation flag 203e. If is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability.

The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time saving medium counter 203f is set to zero, and a specific value is obtained based on the game ball winning the time saving winning opening 501 in the lottery by the lottery device 300 performed based on the jackpot of the special symbol. It is set to (for example, 100) (see S1620 in FIG. 35). After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variation effect of the special symbol is completed until the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f becomes 0 (S214 in FIG. 26).

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the lottery for the normal symbol is based on the random number table per normal symbol for high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability time (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 29).

The round number counter 203g is a counter indicating the number of rounds during the jackpot game, and the value of the round number counter 203g indicates the current number of rounds in the jackpot game. The value of the round number counter 203g is set to 0 at the start of the jackpot, and the value is added by 1 at the start of each round.

The lottery flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not it is the timing to perform the lottery by the lottery device 300, and is turned on when it is the timing to perform the lottery. On the other hand, the lottery flag 203h is turned off after making various settings for starting the lottery by the lottery device 300. That is, the lottery flag 203h is a flag that is turned on only between the time when the lottery device 300 determines that the lottery is performed and the time when the lottery is actually started.

The open flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is open. When the opening flag 203i is on, it indicates that the lottery gate 310 is open, and when it is off, it indicates that the lottery gate 310 is closed. The opening flag 203i is normally set to off, and is turned on after the opening of the lottery gate 310 is set in the various settings for performing the lottery by the lottery device 300 (S1603, S1604 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, when the lottery by the lottery device 300 is detected and the lottery gate 310 is closed, the lottery is turned off (S1608, S1609 in FIG. 35).

The rotating body flag 203j is a flag indicating the direction of the sorting rotating body 341 arranged inside the lottery device 300, and when the position of the sorting rotating body 341 shifts before and after the power is turned on, the sorting rotating body 341 is rotated. It is used to return the arrangement of the body 341 to the state before the power was turned off. When the rotating body flag 203j is on, it indicates that the distribution rotating body 341 is swinging to the left side, and when it is off, it indicates that the sorting rotating body 341 is swinging to the right side. The rotating body flag 203j is switched in conjunction with the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 by the position detection sensor 263, and the distribution rotating body 341 is swung to the left by the position detection sensor 263 (face down state). The rotating body flag is turned on when it is detected to be present, and turned off when it is detected that the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the right (face-up state).

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, a flow path switching valve 331a and 331b in the lottery device 300 are driven to flow a game ball. A flow path solenoid 265 for switching the path is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, the input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown), a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and each entry port in the lottery device 300. A winning sensor 420 that detects the entry of a game ball, a position detection sensor 263 that detects the direction of the distribution rotating body 341 in the lottery device 300, and a rotation motor 264 for correcting the direction of the distribution rotating body 341 are connected. The MPU 201 performs various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208, the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253, the ball entry signal output from the winning sensor 420, the detection signal of the position detection sensor 263, and the like. To execute.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The variation pattern table 222a is stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and a special effect flag 223e. ing.

The variation pattern table 222a is a table used for determining the mode of the variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, by the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the mode of the rough fluctuation pattern such as "off normal reach", "shared normal reach", and "shared special reach". The fluctuation pattern table 222a is used to determine a detailed mode of the fluctuation pattern based on the mode of the rough fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command, and is used to determine a rough mode of the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command. A plurality of detailed variation pattern modes that can be selected are defined for each mode.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize when the main control device 110 wins the start. Therefore, various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. , The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variation display is added by entering the ball into the first entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variation display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command, and specially It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1407 in FIG. 40). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2701 in FIG. 41), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1702 in FIG. 43). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1404 in FIG. 40), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1707 in FIG. 43). The stop type selection flag 223d is also turned off when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The special effect flag 223e is in a state where the distribution rotating body 341 arranged inside the lottery device 300 is swung to the left side (see FIG. 11A), and the game ball can be entered in the next lottery. When the mouth is in either the probability-changing ball opening 503 or the probability-changing ball opening 504 (that is, the state in which it is confirmed that the special symbol will be transferred to the high-probability state in the next lottery by the lottery device 300). , It is a flag for making a variation pattern effect in a special mode different from usual. This special effect flag 223e is turned on when a loop state command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S3702 in FIG. 42), and is turned off when a normal state command output from the main controller 110 is received. (See S3704 in FIG. 42).

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 40) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control program (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) executed after the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 44) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 44).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 21, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 21 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 21 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the “x” symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 21 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 21 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 21 (b) and 21 (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the device is not used.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the demo production is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variation effect was stopped. Therefore, the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect and one display data table corresponding to the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. Information on effects and characters is defined as one or more according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backs A to. Information that specifies whether to display a back image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because the symbol changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 14). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 23). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 23).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 23, in the example of FIG. 23). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 44) (see S1805 in FIG. 44). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 55 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 46 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 46B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 46B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 46 (b) see S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 47 to 51) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 55 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later, which describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the display data can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 46 (b). ), The pointer update process (see FIG. 54) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one (see S3201 in FIG. 54).

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 24) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 24, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 starts an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 46 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 in FIG. 52). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231. It is said. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3513 in FIG. 56). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3514 in FIG. 56). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 47).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, the display process of displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 46B) is executed, it is performed (see S3602 in FIG. 57).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 25 to 37. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt processing, first, the reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then the special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate is passed along with the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67. The process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless the special symbol is in the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S209: No) has not elapsed, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 27. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of the lottery this time is a big hit of a special symbol (S211: Yes), the lottery flag 203h is turned on (S212), and this process ends.

In the process of S211 if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S213), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1. If the above is the case (S213: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S214), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S213: No), the processing of S214 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is an execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are used. This is a process for determining the effect pattern of the variable effect (variable effect pattern).

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

Next, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 and the first random number table 202a, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S302). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a one by one. As described above, there are three random number values of "7,107,282" stored in the first random number table 202a for the low probability when the special symbol has a low probability. , The random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol at the time of high probability of the special symbol is stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability, "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78". , 83,99,106,112,122,134,140,151,168,176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 ". ..

Further, whether the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol can be determined by referring to the state of the probability variation flag 203e. Specifically, when the probability variation flag 203e is on, it is a high probability state of the special symbol, and when the probability variation flag 203e is off, it is a low probability state of the special symbol. In the processing of S302, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a according to the state of the probability variation flag 203e, and when these values match, it is special. Judge that it is a big hit of the symbol.

If it is determined in the processing of S302 that the jackpot is a special symbol (S302: Yes), the display mode at the time of jackpot is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301 (S302: Yes). S303). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the jackpot of two types of special symbols (big hit). It is determined which of the A and the jackpot B) is the jackpot type. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (front route jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is a jackpot. It is determined to be B (back route jackpot) (see FIG. 19B).

In the process of S303, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, in order to display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol common to the jackpot types (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S304). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S304, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are specified. , Various types of "shared normal reach", various types of "shared super reach", and various types of "shared special reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns shared by jackpot A and jackpot B, and various types of "special reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for jackpot A. Is stipulated, and various "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are stipulated as fluctuation patterns for both hit and miss.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S302: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S305). In the process of S305, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S306). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S304, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To determine.

When the process of S304 or the process of S306 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S304 or the process of S306 is set (S307). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S303 or S305 is set (S308). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 24). NS. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S308 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and when there is a starting winning. , The process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the process for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the hold fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, based on the various counter values stored in the processing of S406, the winning / failing of the lottery in the special symbol (whether it is a big hit or not), the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S407). Here, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit depends on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406 and the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 19A). It is determined by comparing (hit value) one by one. As described above, there are three random number values of "7,107,282" stored in the first random number table 202a for the low probability when the special symbol has a low probability. , The random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol at the time of high probability of the special symbol is stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability, "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78". , 83,99,106,112,122,134,140,151,168,176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 ". ..

Further, whether the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol is determined by referring to the probability variation flag 203e. Specifically, when the probability variation flag 203e is on, it is a high probability state of the special symbol, and when the probability variation flag 203e is off, it is a low probability state of the special symbol. In the processing of S407, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a according to the state of the probability variation flag 203e, and when these values match, it is special. Judge that it is a big hit of the symbol.

Then, when it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the processing of S406 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table. It is determined which of the two types of special symbol jackpots (big hit A, jackpot B) is the jackpot type. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (a jackpot in which the flow path in the lottery device 300 is switched to the front route, a front route jackpot). However, if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined that it is a jackpot B (a jackpot in which the flow path in the lottery device 300 switches to the back route, a jackpot on the back route) (see FIG. 19B).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment, the front / rear out reach is set as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the processing of S406. It is determined whether it is a reach other than the front-back deviation, or a complete deviation. Here, if the probability change flag 203e is on, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Determine the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", it is determined that it is completely out of range, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", it is determined that it is reach other than the front and rear deviation. However, if it is "98,99", it is determined that the reach is out of front and back. On the other hand, when the probability change flag 203e is off, the stop type is determined by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", it is determined that it is completely out of range, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", it is determined that it is reach other than the front and rear deviation. However, if it is "98,99", it is determined that the reach is out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The fluctuation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is set to the predicted lottery result or the predicted stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) from the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202. It will be selected accordingly. In the variation pattern table, for example, as variation patterns for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", "disengagement special reach" Various types are specified, and various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for jackpot A and jackpot B, and "special" is specified as fluctuation patterns for jackpot A. Various types of "reach" are specified, and various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for both hit and miss. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type).

If the winning / failing of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S407, then the predicted winning / failing of the lottery, the predicted stopping type, and the predicted stopping type are determined. A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S408), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25).

The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as the winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entry port 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. Includes during and during. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S609). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), so that the electric accessory attached to the first entry opening 64 is released. This is to prevent the ball that is to be won in the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first entry opening 64 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the first one Many balls enter the ball entry port 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

In the processing of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 19 (c)).

In the process of S608, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 19 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the special symbol is currently being hit. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first entry port 64 as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. . In addition to setting to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the variation in the second symbol display device 83. The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the first entry port 64 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1009) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next, the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? Is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 is set (S625), and this process is completed. When the start of opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry port 67, and if the ball has passed, the ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S702). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entry port 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the hold fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S913 in this case as well.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S913 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 34, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S913). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S914, S915) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S914, S915) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 33, but in the rotating body position initialization process (see FIG. 33) of S910, the position of the sorting rotating body 341 arranged inside the lottery device 300 is set as necessary. And fix it. After the completion of the rotating body position initialization process (S310), the process proceeds to the process of S911, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and various types are sent to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The execution of the production is permitted (S911). Next, the interrupt is permitted (S912), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the rotating body position initialization process (S910) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this rotating body position initialization process (S910).

As described above, this rotating body position initialization process (S910) is a process of correcting the position of the distribution rotating body 341 arranged inside the lottery device 300 as necessary. The case where correction is necessary is, for example, a case where the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 has changed between the time when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the time when the power is turned on next. The distribution rotating body 341 can be arranged in a state of swinging to the right (face-up state) (see FIG. 11B) and a state of swinging to the left (face-down state) (FIG. 11). (See (a)) exists. The state of swinging to the right (face-up state) occurs when initialization is performed (that is, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on) or when the game ball is turned on. Passed through the guidance passage 408c provided in the distribution rotating body 341 (see FIG. 14). On the other hand, the state of swinging to the left (face-down state) is when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408b provided in the distribution rotating body 341 (see FIG. 13).

In the rotating body position initialization process (S910), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1501), and it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. (S1501: Yes) shifts the process to S1502. On the other hand, in the process of S1501, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (that is, it is turned off), it is further determined whether or not the rotating body flag 203j is turned on (S1503) and turned on. If it is determined that it is not (that is, it is off), the process shifts to S1502.

In the process of S1502, the rotation motor 264 for rotating the distribution rotating body 341 is driven, and the distribution rotating body 341 is arranged in a state of swinging to the right (face-up state) (see FIG. 11B). It is rotated about the shaft 406 so as to be (S1504), and this process is completed and the process returns to the start-up process.

In the process of S1503, when it is determined that the rotating body flag 203j is on (S1503: Yes), the state of the sorting rotating body 341 before turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10 is swinging to the left (face down). (State), so the rotation motor 264 for rotating the distribution rotating body 341 is driven, and the distribution rotating body 341 is swung to the left (face down state). (Refer to FIG. 11A), this process is completed, and the process returns to the start-up process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1009 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1012 and S1013 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls is corresponded to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command and the winning information command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) and the starting winning processing (see FIG. 28) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 36) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened or closed. The lottery gate process is executed (S1004). In the lottery gate processing (S1004), the stop symbol of the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated (that is, a lottery for whether or not to set the special symbol in a high probability state is performed. The lottery gate 310 is opened (at the timing performed by the lottery device 300). Further, when it is detected that a game ball has entered the lottery gate or the maximum opening time (for example, 30 seconds) of the lottery gate 310 has elapsed, the lottery gate 310 is closed. Further, in this process, it is detected which of the time-saving entry slot 501 and the probability variation entry openings 501 to 504 the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 has entered, and the game ball enters the lottery gate 310. Performs processing according to the entrance of the ball. In the present embodiment, the lottery gate process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

After the lottery gate processing (S1004) is completed, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed and the jackpot control for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65. The process is executed (S1005). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, a rotating body position detection process for determining the arrangement of the sorting rotating body 341 arranged inside the lottery device 300 based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263 is performed (S1006). In the present embodiment, the rotating body position detection process (S1006) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

When the rotating body position detection process (S1006) is completed, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first entry port 64 is executed (S1007). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 29), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1008). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S304 or the process of S306 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S304 or the process of S306 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) ends, the first symbol display device The change display executed in 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S303 or the process of S305 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1009). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 29), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) after ending the variable display. (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1010), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1010: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1011). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1011: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1011: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1012, S1013).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1012). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1009 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1010, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1010: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 31 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1014 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1014), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1015). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1016), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1017), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1010 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1009, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1012 and S1013 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the lottery gate process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this lottery gate processing process (S1004). This lottery gate process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34), and controls the lottery gate of the lottery device 300 for drawing whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol. , This is a process for detecting the entry port where the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 enters.

In the lottery gate processing, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery flag 203h is on. When it is determined that the lottery flag 203h is on (S1601: Yes), it indicates that it is the timing to start the lottery as to whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol, so the lottery device 300 performs the lottery. (S1602 to S1604), turn off the lottery flag 203h (S1605), and end this process.

In various settings for performing lottery by the lottery device 300, first, the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set based on the jackpot type (S1602). Specifically, if the jackpot type is "big hit A", the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set as the front route, and if the jackpot type is "big hit B", the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set in the back. Set to the root. When the processing of S1602 is completed, the opening of the lottery gate 310 is set so that the game ball can enter the inside of the lottery device 300 (S1603). After that, by turning on the release flag 203i, it is shown that the lottery gate 310 is open (S1604), and various settings are completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery flag 203h is not on (that is, is off) as a result of the processing of S1601 (S1601: No), it is determined whether or not the release flag 203i is on, and the release flag 203i is set. If it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off) (S1606: No), the processes of S1607 to S1612 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1613. On the other hand, when it is determined that the open flag 203i is on (S1606: Yes), it indicates that the lottery gate 310 is open, so it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the lottery gate 310. (S1607).

In the process of S1607, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the lottery gate 310 (S1607: Yes), the game ball necessary for performing the lottery by the lottery device 300 has entered the lottery device 300. Therefore, in order to prevent the game ball from entering the lottery device 300 thereafter, the lottery gate 310 is closed (S1608), the open flag 203i is turned off (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1613. ..

In the process of S1607, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the lottery gate 310 (S1607: No), it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is satisfied (S1610). Here, the condition that the lottery gate 310 is closed without the game ball entering the lottery gate 310 is that the maximum opening time (for example, 30 seconds) of the lottery gate 310 has elapsed. If it is determined that the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is not satisfied (that is, within the maximum opening time of the lottery gate 310) (S1610: No), the process proceeds to S1613. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is satisfied (that is, the maximum opening time of the lottery gate 310 has elapsed) (S1610: Yes), the probability change flag 203e is turned off and the time saving medium counter 203f is set. 100 is set (S1611), and a time-saving jackpot game is set (S1612). Then, the lottery gate is closed (S1608), the open flag 203i is turned off (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1613.

In the process of S1613, based on the detection results of the winning sensors 420a to 420d, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered any of the probabilistic entry ball openings 502 to 504 (S1613). When it is determined that the ball has entered any of the probability variation entry ports 502 to 504 (S1613: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is turned on (S1614), and the start of the probability variation jackpot game is set (S1615). Then, it is determined whether or not the entry port into which the game ball has entered is the probability variation entry slot 503 (S1616), and if it is determined to be the probability variation entry slot 503 (S1616: Yes), the voice lamp control is performed. A normal state command is set as a command to be transmitted to the device 113 (S1618), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1616, when it is determined that the entry port into which the game ball has entered is not the probability variation entry port 503 (that is, the probability variation entry ball port 502 or the probability variation entry ball port 504) (S1616: No), a loop state command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1617), and this process is terminated.

Here, the normal state command and the loop state command will be described in detail. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the probabilistic entry ball port 503, the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the right based on the game ball passing through the guidance passage 408c. (See FIG. 14). When the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the right, in the next lottery by the lottery device 300, the game ball is a time-saving entry slot 501, which is an entry slot arranged on the right side of the lottery device 300, or a probability change entry. Since the ball will enter one of the ball mouths 502 (see FIG. 16A), it does not necessarily shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the next jackpot, and the game ball enters the ball in a short time. If you enter the mouth 501, you will be in a low-probability state with a special symbol.

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the probability-changing ball opening 502 or the probability-changing ball opening 504, the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the left (see FIGS. 13 and 15), so that the lottery device 300 In the lottery at the time of the next big hit by, the entry port to which the game balls are distributed is the probability variation entry slot 503 or the probability variation entry slot 504, which is the entry slot arranged on the left side of the lottery device 300. (See FIG. 16 (b)), even after the next big hit, the game shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the probabilistic ball opening 502 or the probabilistic ball opening 504 than the game ball enters the probabilistic ball opening 503.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has entered the probability-changing ball port 502 or the probability-changing ball port 504 (S1616: No), the voice lamp control device 113 is in a loop state which is advantageous for the player. It is configured to send a command (loop state command) indicating that it has transitioned to. Then, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 41, the voice lamp control device 113 indicates that the player is currently in an advantageous state based on receiving the loop state command. The effect (loop state effect) is configured to be executable. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the present is an advantageous state due to the occurrence of the loop state effect, which is an effect different from the usual one, and thus the loop state, which is an advantageous state for the player. It is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing that he / she is in an advantageous state even though he / she is in the middle.

On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the probabilistic entry ball port 503 (S1616: Yes), the voice lamp control device 113 is in a normal state indicating that the current state is not the loop state (that is, the normal state). It is configured to send commands. The voice lamp control device 113 can determine whether or not to execute the loop state effect based on which of the normal state command and the loop state command is received.

Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. In the process of S1613, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered any of the probabilistic entry ports 502 to 504 (S1613: No), whether or not the game ball has entered the time-saving entry slot 501. Is determined based on the detection result of the winning sensor 420c (S1619), and if it is determined that the ball has not entered the time-saving entry slot 501 (S1619: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, in the process of S1619, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the time-saving entry slot 501, it shifts to the low-probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, so the probability change flag 203e is turned off and the time-saving medium counter 203f Is set to 100 (S1620) to set the start of the time-saving jackpot game (S1621). Then, as a command to be output to the voice lamp control device 113, a normal state command for notifying that the current state is not in the loop state (that is, the normal state) is set (S1622), and this process is terminated.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1005). This jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (see FIG. 34). Large opening port) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the process of S1612, S1615, or S1621 of the lottery gate processing (see FIG. 35) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. do. In the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), 0 is set to the value of the round number counter 203 g (S1102), and this process is terminated. The number of rounds during the jackpot is determined by the round number counter 203g.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1103). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S1103: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1103, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (1103: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1105), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1106). The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. After setting the number of rounds command, 1 is added to the value of the number of rounds counter 203g to match the number of rounds of the newly started round with the value of the number of rounds counter 203g (S1107), and this process ends. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (S1108). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls are played. When a prize is won (for example, 10 pieces), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

If it is determined in the process of S1108 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1108: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1108: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1109), and the round number counter 203g is used. It is determined whether or not the value is 8 (S1110). If it is determined in the process of S1110 that the value of the round number counter is not 8 (that is, it is any of 1 to 7) (S1110: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is 8 (S1110: Yes), the current end timing of 8 rounds (that is, the final round) is set, so the end of the jackpot is set (S1111), and this Ends the process and returns to the main process.

Next, the rotating body position detection process (S1006) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this rotating body position detection process (S1006). This rotating body position detection process (S1006) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34), the arrangement of the sorting rotating body 341 is stored in the rotating body flag 203j, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Is also a process for returning the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 to the same arrangement as immediately before the power is turned off at the time of power recovery.

In this rotating body position detection process (S1006), first, it is determined whether or not the rotating body flag 203j is on (S2501). When it is determined that the rotating body flag 203j is not on (that is, off) as a result of the processing of S2501 (S2501: No), the arrangement of the distributed rotating body 341 is ostensibly in the previous rotating body position detection processing (S2501: No). Since it indicates that the arrangement was (swinged to the right), whether or not the current arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 is ostensibly (swinged to the right) based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263. By determining whether or not, it is determined whether or not the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 has changed between the previous rotating body position detection process and the current rotating body position detecting process (S2502).

Then, when it is determined that the current arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 is in the face-up state (the state of swinging to the right) (S2502: Yes), the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 is at the time of the previous rotating body position detection process. Since it has not changed from, this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 is in a face-down state (a state of swinging to the left side) (S2502: No), the distribution rotating body 341 has been subjected to since the time of the previous rotating body position detection process. Since it indicates that the arrangement has changed, the rotating body flag 203j is turned on (S2503) to end this process.

In the process of S2501, when it is determined that the rotating body flag 203j is on (S2501: Yes), the current arrangement of the sorting rotating body 341 is ostensibly (on the right side) based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263. If it is determined whether or not it is in a swinging state (S2504), and if it is determined that the current arrangement of the sorting rotating body 341 is in a face-down state (swinging state to the left) (S2504: No), sorting is performed. Since the arrangement of the rotating body 341 has not changed since the time of the previous rotating body position detection processing, this processing is ended and the process returns to the main processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 is in an ostensibly state (a state of swinging to the right) (S2504: Yes), the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 from the time of the previous rotating body position detection process Indicates that is changing, so the rotating body flag 203j is turned off (S2505) to end this process.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1316 (see FIG. 39) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1313 in FIG. 39), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1316. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1316 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1316. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1316 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the data shifts to S1208.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1316, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1316 is executed (see S1315 in FIG. 39). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1316 is executed, the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1316 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1211) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S1208 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after, for example, the power supply is completely cut off, so that the processing of S1208 is performed via the processing of S1204 to S1206. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1209, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process shifts to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that when the processing of S1208 is reached via the processing of S1204 to S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1301 this time was executed (S1301), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1311 and the variation display setting process of S1312 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1312 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process proceeds to the process of S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage is changed and the rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image according to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a possessable effect, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1307 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to the process of S1311. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1311). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. When the command determination process (S1311) is completed, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

When the processing of S1312 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1313). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1313 (S1313: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1315), and the power-off process is executed (S1316). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1317), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power off processing, the occurrence of the interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1313 (S1313: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1314), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1314: No), the process returns to the process of S1301 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1314: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. It is a process.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation pattern selection process for selecting the mode of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed (S1402), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type selected here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 43) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1403). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1403: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1404), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1405), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 43) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1403: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1406). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1406: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). The number of holdings N) of the fluctuation display in the above is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1407). Further, in the process of S1407, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1407 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, so that the starting winning is won. Is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the processing of S1407 to the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning prize is detected or special. At the time of the symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1407 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1406, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S1406: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1408). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1408: Yes), various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) is extracted as winning information from the received winning information command (S1409). After the processing of S1409 is completed, next, the winning information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) extracted in the processing of S1409 is the first of the empty areas (first area to fourth area) of the winning information storage area 223a. It is stored in the area (S1410) and returns to the main process.

In the process of S1408, if the winning information command is not received (S1408: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1411). Then, when the round number command is received (S1411: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1412), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number command (S1411: Yes). S1413), this process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1411, when the round number command is not received (S1413: No), then the special effect setting process for determining whether or not the current state is the loop state is executed (S1414). .. Based on the determination result by this special effect execution process, it is determined whether or not to perform a special effect suggesting a loop state which is an advantageous state for the player.

When the process of S1414 is completed, it is then determined whether or not another command has been received, the process according to the received result is executed, and (S1419) this process is terminated. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

Next, the variation pattern selection process (S1402) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1402). This fluctuation pattern selection process (S1402) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1402 in FIG. 40), and as described above, the main control device 110 This is a process for selecting the type of variation pattern executed in the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern command from.

In the variation pattern selection process (S1402), first, the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2701), and then it is determined whether or not the special effect flag 223e is on (S2702).

Then, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is on, the fluctuation pattern type for the loop state is extracted from the fluctuation pattern types based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 (S2703). , End this process. In the process of S2703, in addition to the variation pattern type that is selected even in the normal state, a variation pattern type that is not selected in the normal state can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that the state is special to the player by selecting the variation pattern effect of the mode dedicated to the loop state different from the normal state and displaying it on the third symbol display device 81. .. In addition, the mode dedicated to the loop state includes, for example, a character that does not appear in the normal state appears during the fluctuation of the third symbol, a symbol different from the normal state is displayed, a sound effect different from the normal state, and the like. Sound effects are performed, etc.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2702: No), among the fluctuation pattern types based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the normal state The variation pattern type for is extracted (S2704), and this process is terminated. Based on the variation pattern type extracted by the processing of S2703 or S2704, the variation pattern effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the current state is in the loop state based on the state of the special effect flag 203e, and if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the loop state, the player is notified. The mode of the variation pattern production for suggesting that the present is in an advantageous state can be selected. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the present is an advantageous state by executing the variation pattern effect in a mode different from the usual one, and thus the loop state is an advantageous state for the player. It is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing that he / she is in an advantageous state even though he / she is in the middle.

In the loop state, the fluctuation pattern type selected in the normal state may not be selected at all. As a result, the player can determine whether or not the current state is in the loop state by performing the fluctuation pattern effect only once, so that the player is in the loop state even though it is in the loop state. It is possible to more reliably suppress quitting the game without noticing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the special effect setting process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the special effect setting process (S1414). This special effect setting process (S1414) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1414 in FIG. 40), and as described above, the current state is It is a process for determining whether or not it is in a loop state and executing a variable pattern effect in an effect mode according to whether or not it is in a loop state.

In the special effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a loop state command has been received (S3701). The loop state command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fact that the game ball has entered either the probability-changing ball opening 502 or the probability-changing ball opening 504 in the above-mentioned lottery gate processing (see FIG. 35). This is a command that is output, and is a command that indicates that the player has transitioned to a loop state that shifts to a high-probability state of a special symbol not only after the current jackpot but also after the next jackpot.

When it is determined that the loop state command has been received (S3701: Yes), the special effect flag 223e is turned on to indicate that the current state is in the loop state (S3702), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the loop state command has not been received (S3701: No), it is subsequently determined whether or not the normal state command has been received (S3703). The normal state command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fact that the game ball has entered either the time-saving entry slot 501 or the probability variation entry slot 503 in the above-mentioned lottery gate processing (see FIG. 35). It is a command that is output, and it is a command that indicates that it has shifted to the normal state that may shift to either the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol after the next big hit. ..

When it is determined that the normal state command has been received (S3703: Yes), the special effect flag 223e is turned off to indicate that the current state is not in the loop state (S3704), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3703, if it is determined that the normal state command has not been received (S3703: No), this process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 41), the state of the special effect flag 223e set in this process is determined, and the variation pattern is executed in a special mode for the loop state, or for the normal state. It is determined whether to execute the variation pattern in the mode. As a result, during the loop state, the variation pattern effect is executed in a mode different from the usual mode, so that the player can easily recognize that the present is an advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing that the current state is in the loop state even though the current state is in the loop state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the variation display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1312). This variation display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1706 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1702), and then the fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 41), S2703 or S2704, is performed. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In the process of S1705, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1707), and then in the process of S1405 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

Next, the extracted stop type is set as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1709), and the display stop for notifying the display control device 114 based on the set stop type. A type command is generated, the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1710), and this process is terminated. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 57. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 44, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR type ROM has a high speed because a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S1902, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 44) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S1801) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 45, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S1902. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S1902 and S1902, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 44. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1803, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S1804). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1804, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S1805). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 55 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 55 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 21 is drawn. The determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 46 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 46 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. This can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entering (starting prize) at the first entry port 64, and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. 21 (b) and 21 (c) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period. A simple variable effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that the transfer takes a long time, and the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S1805, interrupt permission is set (S1806), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (a). FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (b). FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 24) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 46B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S2102) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2103) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51.

In the display setting process (S2103), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2104). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2103) or the simple display setting process (S2109). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), which are determined in the task process (S2104), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 21 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed to display the image of S2104. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 47, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2203).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2204), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2301).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter fluctuation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2306), the variation pattern command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2305, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2302e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 47. In the processing of S2204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variable type command (S2206: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2207), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (various jackpots, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, or complete out of order) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2401). , The change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by comparing the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) is executed. The stop symbol after the production is finally set (S2402).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (S2403) and end this process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2104), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2403, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S2402.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2206, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2206: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2208). If there is a display round number command (S2208: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2209), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S2601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2604). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2605), the fanfare command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 47. In the processing of S2208, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2208: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2210), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S2210: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2211), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 51 (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S3303) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S2801). .. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are displayed. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2802), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S2801 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S2802. .. Then, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task process (S2104), when it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by S2802 is specified. Therefore, the type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM address of the normal video RAM 236 corresponding to the back image is specified. do.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2802, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 47. In the processing of S2210, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2210: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2212), and there is an error command. If (S2212: Yes), the error command processing is executed (S2213), and the process returns to the processing of S2201.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (b). FIG. 51 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S2902), and the error command is set. The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S2902 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S2902, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 47. When it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2212 (S2212: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2219), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

In the processing of S2201 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes). ), The processing of S2202 to S2219 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2201 to S2219 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2201 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 21 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 48) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 49), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and the other commands are the commands. Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 48) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2301. Further, since the image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on required in that case are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. In the process of S2302, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3001: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3002), S3003 to S3004 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to, and all the error discrimination set to be turned on is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3101).

In the task processing (S2104), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 52. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3005.

In S3005, the pointer update process is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3201, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3203), and if it is a demo display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this processing is completed. And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3203: No). S3206), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 52 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the types of sprites (display objects) that compose the image are specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S3006 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates are displayed for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S3009).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S3009: No), the confirmation display has not yet been produced and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. As such, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2104), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3015, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmation display flag is on (S3009: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3017) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3018). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S3016, if the demo display flag is on (S3016: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. A process of setting the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, which specifies that the image (either of FIGS. 21B and 21C) to be stopped and displayed, is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S3301 (S3301: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (b). FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3402). In the process of S3402, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3403. Further, as a result of the processing of S3401, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3403.

In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 46 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 46 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 47 to 51) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) (see S3301: No in FIG. 55 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 is displayed by image data of frequently displayed images such as a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, a voice lamp control device 113, a display control device 114, and the like. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the determination is made, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the third operation is performed by the player at an arbitrary timing. It is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S3502), and if it is the transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

Further, in the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

In the process of S3506, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3506: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3507. Further, as a result of the processing of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3505: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3507.

In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S3509). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3509: No), there is no image data to be transferred, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S3509: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S3510), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3511). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3512), and the process proceeds to S3513.

In the process of S3513, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513). The discrimination in the process of S3513 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S3513, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3513 (S3513: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3514). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S3514, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3515), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the back image is changed. The image data used in the image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 24 (S3601). That is, in the processing of S3601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2104). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the process of S3602 (S3603). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 46B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be a "special symbol jackpot", and after the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is confirmed and displayed, the lottery device 300 specializes after the jackpot. A lottery will be held to determine whether or not to shift to the high-probability state of the symbol. In this lottery, the game balls that have entered the lottery device 300 are entered from any of a plurality of entry ports (short-time entry ball opening 501 and probability variation entry ball opening 501 to 504) arranged in the lottery device 300. Whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol is determined based on whether or not the ball enters the ball mouth. Further, the lottery device 300 is provided with flow path switching valves 331a, 331b and a distribution rotating body 341 that control the traveling direction of the game ball that has entered the lottery device 300, and the game is played according to these states. The entrance to which the ball enters is determined.

The states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are determined according to the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B), and when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the game ball flows down to the front side of the distribution rotating body 341. It switches to the direction (see FIG. 9B). On the other hand, when the jackpot type is jackpot B, the game ball switches in the direction of flowing down to the back side of the distribution rotating body 341 (see FIG. 9A). Further, the state of the distribution rotating body 341 is switched according to which of the four guidance passages 408a to 408d provided in the distribution rotating body 341 the game ball passes through.

Specifically, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408a in a state where the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right side (that is, a state in which the guidance passages 408a and 408b are directly below the entrance 411), the distribution rotation body The game ball enters the time-saving entry slot 501 without changing the state of 341 (that is, while swinging to the right). Therefore, even when the next big hit is won, the distribution rotating body 341 remains in the state of swinging to the right, and if the game ball is distributed to the guidance passage 408a again, the special symbol will be continuously in a low probability state. In some cases.

When the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408b with the distribution rotating body 341 swinging to the right, the distribution rotating body 341 rotates to the left around the axis 406 based on the weight of the game ball, and the game ball Enters the probability change ball opening 502. Therefore, when the next big hit is won, the game ball reaches the distribution rotating body 341 in a state where the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left side (that is, a state in which the guidance passages 408c and 408d are directly below the entrance 411). Therefore, next time, the ball will be entered into either the probability-changing ball opening 503 or the probability-changing ball opening 504. That is, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408b, not only the game shifts to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, but also the next jackpot always shifts to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. It is.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408c in a state where the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left side (that is, a state where the guidance passages 408c and 408d are directly below the entrance 411), the weight of the game ball is applied. Based on this, the distribution rotating body 341 rotates to the right around the axis 406, and the game ball enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 503. Therefore, when the next big hit is won, the game ball reaches the distribution rotating body 341 in a state where the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right side (that is, a state in which the guidance passages 408a and 408b are directly below the entrance 411). Therefore, next time, the ball will be entered into either the time-saving entry slot 501 or the probability variation entry slot 502. In other words, after the big hit this time, it will shift to the high probability state of the special symbol, but in the next big hit, there is a possibility that it will shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit, but it will also move to the low probability state of the special symbol. There is also the possibility of migrating.

Further, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408d with the distribution rotating body 341 swinging to the left side, the state of the distribution rotating body 341 does not change (that is, the game ball remains swinging to the left side). Enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 504. Therefore, even if the jackpot is won next time, the distribution rotating body 341 remains in the state of swinging to the left, so next time, the ball should be entered into either the probability variation entry 503 or the probability variation entry 504. It becomes. That is, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408d, not only the game shifts to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, but also the next jackpot always shifts to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. It is.

In this way, if the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the left, regardless of whether the game ball passes through the guidance passages 408c or 408d, it always shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, so that the player Can recognize that the result of the lottery by the lottery device 300 is a high probability state of the special symbol only by confirming that the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the left side, and the lottery by the lottery device 300. You can check the situation with confidence.

On the other hand, when the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the right, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol, so that the lottery result by the lottery device 300 is changed to the high probability state of the special symbol. It will be confirmed while holding both the expectation for the transition and the anxiety about the transition to the low probability state of the special symbol.

Therefore, the orientation of the distribution rotating body 341 is confirmed, and if it swings to the left side, it gives the player a sense of security, and if it swings to the right side, it gives the player a sense of expectation and anxiety. Therefore, it is possible to play a game with sharpness.

Furthermore, if the game ball is distributed to the guidance passage 408b or the guidance passage 408d, not only the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, but also the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the next big hit. Since the game is confirmed, the player is guaranteed three times of big hits, which will be won in the high probability state of this big hit, the next big hit, and the special symbol that will be transferred after the next big hit. This can be recognized, a great sense of satisfaction can be given to the player, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the left side, it shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol after the next big hit. That is, since the special symbol is continuously won in the high probability state, it is in a very advantageous state for the player. Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 10 is in an advantageous state, a variation pattern effect different from the usual mode can be selected. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the present is an advantageous state by executing the variation pattern effect in a mode different from the usual one, and thus the loop state is an advantageous state for the player. It is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing that he / she is in an advantageous state even though he / she is in the middle.

In the present embodiment, the lottery device 300 is arranged to the right of the front view with respect to the variable display unit 80, but the present invention is not limited to this position, and a game ball can enter the lottery gate 310. As long as it is in any position, it may be arranged at any position. Further, the lottery gate 310 is composed of a lid-shaped gate as shown in FIG. 6, but instead of this, a shutter-shaped gate that opens and closes up and down may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution rotating body 341 is configured to be able to switch to a state of swinging to the right or to a state of swinging to the left according to the guidance passage through which the game ball has passed. In the next lottery after the game ball enters the ball, the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously generated by making it possible to enter only the probability variation entry ball opening 503 or the probability variation entry ball opening 504. Although it is configured to win twice or more, it may be realized in a controlled manner.

For example, the first hit type selection table 202b is won for the first hit (when a big hit is won in the low probability state of the special symbol), and the first hit type selection table 202b1 for the first hit and the high probability state of the special symbol are won. It may be configured to provide the first type selection table 202b2 for the loop for the case. In this case, the first hit type selection table 202b1 for the first hit shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, and in the next lottery, the first hit type selection table 202b2 for the loop state is used for the jackpot and the special symbol. The jackpot that shifts to the low probability state is specified, while the first hit type selection table 202b2 for the loop state shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, but the first hit in the next lottery. Specify the jackpot in which the first hit type selection table 202b1 is used for the first hit, and the jackpot in which the first hit type selection table 202b2 for the loop state is used in the next lottery after shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol. Just do it.

In the present embodiment, the lottery by the lottery device 300 is executed before the big hit game is started, but the lottery by the lottery device 300 may be executed during the big hit game. For example, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 may be opened in the first round.

In this case, the ejection ball detection sensor 422 of the lottery device 300 may be configured to give a prize ball to the player each time one game ball is detected. Then, in the round in which the lottery is executed, the lottery gate 310 is opened until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won, similar to the operation of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a in the other rounds. It may be configured to be. That is, in the round in which the lottery is performed, the lottery device 300 also serves as the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. By executing the lottery by the lottery device 300 during the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the player from having the jackpot game simply to obtain a ball, and to improve the player's interest in the jackpot game. be able to.

Further, in the case where the lottery is performed by the lottery device 300 during the big hit game, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a may be closed in the round in which the lottery is performed. That is, the lottery device 300 may be configured to have the role of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. In this case, the lottery device 300 is defined as the first specific winning opening, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is defined as the second specific winning opening, and the first specific winning opening and the second specific winning opening are defined according to the jackpot type. It may be configured to change the opening pattern with. Then, the setting of the flow path may be configured to be switched for each round.

For example, regardless of the jackpot type, the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set as the front route in the first round, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set as the back route in the second round. If the jackpot type is jackpot A, only the first specific winning opening (lottery gate 310) is set to open in one round, and only the second specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) is opened in the 2nd to 8th rounds. Set to be set. Since the first specific winning opening (lottery gate 310) is opened only in the first round in which the front route is set, the game ball always advances the front route in the lottery by the lottery device 300.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is jackpot B, only the second specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) is set to be open in the first round and the third to eighth rounds, and the first specific winning opening (lottery) is set in the second round. It is set to open only the gate 310). Since the first specific winning opening (lottery gate 310) is opened only in the second round in which the back route is set, the game ball always advances in the back route in the lottery by the lottery device 300.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 64. In the first embodiment described above, only two types of jackpot A and jackpot B are provided as jackpot types of special symbols, and the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched according to the jackpot type.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the jackpot A and the jackpot B, the jackpot C and the jackpot D having the number of rounds of 2R, and the jackpot A and the jackpot having the number of rounds of 2 rounds are the small hits. It is configured to provide B.

The state of small hit A and small hit B does not change after the end of each small hit, and if any small hit is won in the low probability state of the special symbol, the special symbol is low even after the end of the small hit. The probability state is maintained, and conversely, if any small hit is won in the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol is maintained even after the end of the small hit. In addition, if any of the small hits is won in the time saving state, the game is started from the continuation of the time saving state even after the end of the small hit.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to open the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 before the start of the small hit even when the small hit is won, and the operation of the lottery gate 310 is as follows. , It will be exactly the same as when the jackpots A to D are won. The difference between the small hit and the big hit is that the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 is discharged from the ball discharge passage 323 without proceeding to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later. That is, the player cannot recognize whether the winning is a big hit or a small hit until it can be determined whether or not the game ball advances to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later.

Therefore, when the lottery gate 310 is opened, the player first expects that the game ball advances to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later (that is, this hit is one of the big hits). , When the game ball advances to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later, it is expected that the game ball will enter any of the probabilistic entry ball openings 502 to 504, and further, after the start of the jackpot game, the ball will be released. The game will be played with the expectation that it will be a big hit in many 8 rounds. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be raised on a regular basis, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that in the main control device 110, the contents of the first type selection table 202b of the ROM 202 are partially changed. The point is that the small hit type selection table 202e is added, and the small hit flag 203k is provided in the RAM 203. Further, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and a part of the process included in the main process (FIG. 34) are different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The first embodiment describes other configurations, other processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 58, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The RAM 203 included in the main control device 110 of the present embodiment is provided with a small hit flag 203k in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not it is the opening timing of the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 when the small hit is won, and is turned on when it is the timing to open the lottery gate 310. NS. On the other hand, the small hit flag 203k is turned off after setting the opening of the lottery gate 310.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the contents of the ROM 202 included in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 shows the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first embodiment, a small hit type selection table 202e is provided (FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (c)). Further, in the first hit type selection table 202b, the pachinko machine of the first embodiment is added in that the tables of "big hit C" and "big hit D" are added in addition to "big hit A" and "big hit B". It is different from 10.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 39", the jackpot type is "big hit A". .. Further, when the random number value is "50 to 89", the jackpot type is "big hit B". Further, the jackpot type when the random number value is "40 to 49" is "big hit C", and the jackpot type when the random number value is "90 to 99" is "big hit D". The "big hit C" and the "big hit D" added in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment are both jackpots with a maximum number of rounds of two.

"Big hit C" and "Big hit D" are the flow path switching valves 331a, in the transition lottery to the high probability state of the special symbol performed by the lottery device 300 (see FIG. 5) after the winning of the big hit is confirmed. According to 331b (see FIG. 9), the flow path through which the game ball passes is divided into a flow path on the front side (front route) or a flow path on the back side (back route) of the rotating body 341. That is, in "big hit C", the flow path on the front side (front route) is switched (see FIG. 9B), and in "big hit D", the flow path on the back side (back route) is switched (FIG. 9). See (a)).

"Big hit C" and "Big hit D" are big hits with a smaller number of rounds (that is, a smaller number of prize balls can be acquired by the player) than "Big hit A" and "Big hit B", so the lottery device 300 If the game ball enters inside and the jackpot game starts by the game ball entering one of the entrances, the player can expect to pay out more prize balls in 8 rounds. Expect a big hit ("Big hit A" or "Big hit B"). Therefore, if the jackpot is 8 rounds as expected by the player, a greater sense of satisfaction can be given.

The small hit type selection table 202e defines the random number value of the first hit random number counter C1 when a small hit is won for each small hit type (FIG. 59 (c)). In the first hit random number counter C1, when the random number value is "15 to 24", the small hit type is "small hit A". Further, when the random number value is "141-150", the small hit type is "small hit B".

As described above, the states of "small hit A" and "small hit B" do not change after the end of each small hit, and if any small hit is won in the low probability state of the special symbol, the small hit is small. The low probability state of the special symbol is maintained even after the end of the hit, and conversely, if any small hit is won in the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol is maintained even after the end of the small hit. .. In addition, if any of the small hits is won in the time saving state, the game is started from the continuation of the time saving state even after the end of the small hit.

Further, "small hit A" and "small hit B" are used when the lottery gate 310 is opened by the lottery device 300 (see FIG. 5) after the winning of the small hit is confirmed (to a high probability state). Whether to set the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b (see FIG. 9) as the front flow path (front route) when performing a fake operation in which the lottery is not actually performed by pretending to be a transition lottery. There is a difference in whether to use the flow path (back route) on the back side. That is, in "small hit A", it is switched to the flow path on the front side (front route) (see FIG. 9B), and in "small hit B", it is switched to the flow path on the back side (back route) (see FIG. 9B). (See FIG. 9 (a)).

Actually, even if each small hit is won, the game ball does not advance to the traveling direction distribution portion 330 or later where the flow path switching valves 331a, 331b are arranged, so that the flow path switching valves 331a, 331b There is no direct effect on the game even if switching is performed, but by performing the switching operation of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b in the same manner as when various jackpots are won, the winning is a jackpot or a small hit. It is difficult for the player to determine whether or not there is a jackpot, and the expectation of winning the jackpot can be maintained for a longer period of time.

<Regarding the control process in the second embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. First, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In each of the special symbol variation processes (S104), S201 to S211 and S213 and S214, the processes of S201 to S211 and S213 and S214 of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as is executed. Then, in the special symbol variation processing in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S211 that the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is not a big hit of the special symbol. (S211: No), then determines whether or not the lottery result this time is a small hit of a special symbol (S221). Then, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a small hit (S221: No), the process proceeds to S213. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit (S221: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is turned on (S222), and this process is terminated.

By turning on the small hit flag 203k, in the small hit gate processing (S1021) described later with reference to FIG. 62, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened before the start of the small hit, and a special symbol is displayed. It can be pretended to be a lottery to move to a high probability state. Therefore, it is possible to delay the timing at which the player can recognize whether the winning is a small hit or a big hit, so that the player's expectation for the big hit and the expectation for the high probability state of the special symbol can be maintained for a longer time. Can be added.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control device 110.

Among the main processes of the main control device 110, in each of the processes S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to S1017, S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S1017 is executed. Then, in the main process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment, when the process of S1004 is completed, the small hit gate process (S1021) is executed. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 62, the small hit gate processing (S1021) opens the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 when a small hit is won, and shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol. It is a process for operating as if a lottery is performed.

When the small hit gate process is completed, the big hit control process 2 (S1022) is then executed instead of the big hit control process (FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. Similar to the jackpot control process (FIG. 36), the jackpot control process 2 is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.
Further, when the big hit control process 2 (S1022) is completed, the small hit control process (S1023) is executed. This small hit control process (S1023) is a process for executing various effects according to the small hit and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. When the small hit control process (S1023) is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S1006.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the small hit gate processing (S1021) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control measure 110 will be described. As described above, in the small hit gate processing (S1021), when a small hit is won, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened, and a lottery as if to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol is drawn. Is a process for operating as if is performed.

In the small hit gate processing (S1021), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203k is on (S3801). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is on (S3801: Yes), a setting is made to fake the transition lottery to the high probability state of the special symbol based on the winning of the small hit. Specifically, first, the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to a route determined according to the small hit type (S3802), and the opening of the lottery gate 310 is set (S3803). Next, the release flag 203i is turned on (S3804), the small hit flag is turned off (S3805), and the present process is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is not on (that is, it is off) (S3801: No), then it is determined whether or not the release flag 203i is on (S3806), and the release flag 203i is set. If it is on (S3806: Yes), it indicates that the lottery gate 310 is open, so it is determined whether or not a ball has been detected in the lottery gate 310 (S3807).

When it is detected that a game ball has entered the lottery gate 310 (S3807: Yes), the lottery gate 310 is closed (S3808) so that no additional game ball enters the lottery gate 310. , The release flag 203i is turned off, and the process proceeds to S3812.
On the other hand, when it is not detected that the game ball has entered the lottery gate 310 (S3810: No), it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is satisfied (S3810). The closing condition of the lottery gate 310 other than the entry of the game ball is that the maximum opening period (for example, 30 seconds) of the lottery gate 310 elapses.

If it is determined that the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is satisfied as a result of the processing of S3810 (S3810: Yes), the start of the small hit game is set (S3811), and the closing of the lottery gate 310 is set (S3811). S3808), the release flag 203i is turned off (S3809), and the process proceeds to S3812. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is not satisfied (S3810: No), the processing of S3808, S3809, and S3811 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3812. If it is determined in the process of S3806 that the release flag 203i is not on (that is, it is off) (S3806: No), the processes of S3807 to S3809 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3812.

In the process of S3812, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the ball discharge passage 323 (S3812), and if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge passage 323, the small hit game is started. After setting (S3813), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball discharge passage 323, this process is terminated as it is.

If the start of the small hit game is set at the timing when the ball entering the lottery gate 310 is detected, the small hit game starts shortly after it is determined whether or not the game ball reaches the traveling direction distribution unit 330. Without giving a feeling of expectation that the game ball advances to the traveling direction distribution unit 330, the player may recognize that this hit is a small hit, and there is a risk that the interest will be lost. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if it is a small hit, the small hit game is not started until it is determined that the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 has passed the ball discharge passage 323. It is configured so that the player can maintain the expectation for the big hit for a longer time by delaying the timing when it is possible to judge whether it is a small hit or a big hit.

Next, the jackpot control process 2 (S1022) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1022).

In each of the jackpot control processes 2 of S1101 to S1111, the same processes as those of S1101 to S1111 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, in the jackpot control process 2 in the second embodiment, when the process of S1109 is completed, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (S1121), and the jackpot A or jackpot B is determined. If it is determined (S1121: Yes), the process proceeds to S1110.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot this time is neither jackpot A nor jackpot B (that is, jackpot C or jackpot D) (S1121: No), then whether or not the value of the round number counter is 2. (That is, whether or not it is the second round) is determined (S1122), and when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is 2 (that is, it is the second round) (S1122: Yes), the number of rounds. Means that is the end timing of the jackpot C or the jackpot D, which is the jackpot of two rounds. Therefore, the process shifts to the process of S1111 to set the end of the jackpot (S1111), and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is not 2 (that is, 1) (S1122: No), since the jackpot game of the second round remains, this process is terminated as it is.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, jackpot types having different numbers of rounds are provided. By performing the processes of S1121 and S1122 of the jackpot control process 2 (S1022), the jackpot game with the number of rounds according to the jackpot type is performed. Can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the small hit control process (S1023) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this small hit control process (S1023). As described above, this small hit control process (S1023) is a process for executing various effects according to the small hit and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

In the small hit control process (S1023), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit A or the small hit B (S3901). The start of the small hit is set in the processing of S3811 or S3813 of the small hit gate processing (see FIG. 62).

If it is determined as the start timing of the small hit A or the small hit B as a result of the processing of S3901 (S3901: Yes), 0 is set to the value of the round number counter 203g and the present processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the start timing of the small hit A nor the start timing of the small hit B (S3901: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit game is currently in progress (S3903).

Then, when it is determined that the small hit game is not currently in progress (S3903: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit game is currently in progress (S3903), it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (S3904). Then, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S3904), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S3905), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S3904). S3906). The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. After setting the round number command, 1 is added to the value of the round number counter 203g to match the number of rounds of the newly started round with the value of the round number counter 203g (S3907), and this process ends. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S3904, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S3904: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (S3908). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls are played. When a prize is won (for example, 10 pieces), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

If it is determined in the process of S3908 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S3908: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S3908: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S3909), and the round number counter 203g. It is determined whether or not the value is 2 (S3910). If it is determined in the process of S3910 that the value of the round number counter is not 2 (that is, 1) (S3910: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is 8 (S3910: Yes), the end timing of the second round (that is, the final round) is set, so the end of the small hit is set (S3911). This process ends and returns to the main process.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, as the type of "special symbol jackpot", the rounds during the jackpot game are 8 rounds of jackpot A and the jackpot B, and the rounds during the jackpot game. Is configured to provide a jackpot C and a jackpot D for two rounds. By providing a 2-round jackpot with a small number of prize balls that can be obtained, the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that he / she will win the 8-round jackpot with a large number of prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, if the player wins the jackpot of 8 rounds as expected, the player can be given a greater sense of satisfaction. That is, by providing the jackpot C and the jackpot D with a small number of balls, the joy of winning the jackpot A and the jackpot B with a large number of balls is increased, and the gratitude of the jackpot A and the jackpot B can be enhanced.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a small hit A and a small hit B are provided in addition to the various big hits. When various jackpots are won, based on the lottery result performed by the lottery device 300, after the jackpot, the special symbol is shifted to the high probability state, or the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state and the normal symbol is shortened. However, in the case of a small hit, the state immediately before winning the small hit continues even after the end of the small hit game. That is, when the small hit A or the small hit B is won, the lottery device 300 does not perform a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when the small hit A or the small hit B is won, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened and the lottery device 300 is opened before the small hit game is started. It is configured so that a game ball can be put inside the ball. Further, the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are also switched to the front route or the back route in the same manner as when the jackpot is won. Then, the game ball that has entered is configured to be discharged from the discharge passage 323 without flowing down to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later. As a result, even if various small hits are won, it seems as if a lottery is performed for the player as to whether or not the game ball entered in the lottery device 300 shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol. Can be made. Therefore, the player cannot distinguish whether the winning ball is a big hit or a small hit until it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has flowed down to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later, and the expectation for the big hit. The feeling can be sustained for a longer period of time. Then, if the jackpot is as expected by the player, a greater sense of satisfaction can be given. In other words, by providing small hits A and small hits B where the lottery for transitioning to the high probability state of the special symbol is not performed, it is a pleasure to win various big hits that may shift to the high probability state of the special symbol. In addition, it is possible to enhance the gratitude of various jackpots.

During the game, the player determines whether the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b provided in the traveling direction distribution unit 330 of the lottery device 300 are in the front route state or the back route state. It can be visually recognized. In addition, the player also determines whether the state of the distribution rotating body 341 provided in the ball entry port distribution unit 340 of the lottery device 300 is a state of swinging to the left or a state of swinging to the right during the game. It can be visually recognized. When the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the back route and the distribution rotating body 341 is swung to the right, the game ball that has entered the lottery device 300 is a time-saving ball entry port. I will enter 501. That is, it shifts to a low probability state of a special symbol. Therefore, in such a case, the player feels that he / she does not want the game ball to proceed to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later, and therefore enters the lottery device 300 in the expectation that this hit will be a small hit. The whereabouts of the ball will be confirmed.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, it is expected that the pachinko machine 10 will switch to the front route, which is an advantageous state for the player, from the time when the third symbols are aligned until the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched. It is possible to have a player play a game. When the game ball flows down the front route, the ball enters either the probability-changing ball opening 502 or the probability-changing ball opening 504, so that the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the left (FIG. 13). , See Fig. 15), this is because the next lottery will also shift to a high-probability state of special symbols.

Further, from the time when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the front route until the game ball enters the lottery device 300, the game ball advances to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later (that is, this hit is It is possible to have the player play the game with the expectation that it will be a big hit. Further, from the start of the jackpot game to the end timing of the second round, the player can be expected to enter the third round and perform the jackpot game. This is because there are only two types of jackpots, an 8-round jackpot and a 2-round jackpot, so it is confirmed that the jackpot is an 8-round jackpot at the stage of entering the third round.

On the other hand, if the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the back route side when a hit (any of various big hits and various small hits) is won, when the game ball advances to the traveling direction distribution unit 330, It will flow down the back route. Therefore, the state of the distribution rotating body 341 becomes a state of swinging to the right side (see FIGS. 12 and 14), which is a disadvantageous state as compared with the state of swinging to the left side. It is possible to have the player play the game with the expectation that it will not proceed to 330 or later (that is, this hit is a small hit).

Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game at various timings with various expectations depending on the conditions such as the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the state of the distribution rotating body 341. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 72. In the second embodiment described above, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the lottery device 300 for performing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol is placed in front of the variable display unit 80. It was arranged in the right direction of the view, and was configured to draw a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a high-probability state of a special symbol before the start of the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, the jackpot game starts, and the specific winning opening (large opening opening) is started. When the opening port) 65a is opened, a game ball can be inserted into the lottery device 300.

Since the lottery gate 310 is arranged inside the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, the open / closed state of the lottery gate 310 and the game balls that have entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are drawn. Whether or not the ball has entered the gate 310 is difficult for the player to see, but each configuration of the lottery device 300 after the flow path 320 is configured to be visible to the player as in the other embodiments. There is.

In addition to the lottery device 300, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a can be discharged into the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a when the game ball passes through. A ball discharge passage 701 (not shown) is provided, and when the lottery gate 310 is closed, the game ball is discharged via the ball discharge passage 701. .. On the other hand, if the game ball enters the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a when the lottery gate 310 is open, the game ball can enter the lottery device 300 from the lottery gate 310. The game ball that has entered the lottery device 300 is discharged from the ball discharge passage 323 or the ball discharge passage 421. Even when the lottery gate 310 is open, the discharge passage 701 does not enter the lottery gate 310 due to the trajectory of the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. May progress to.

With the above configuration, it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity by the lottery device 300 while acquiring the prize ball simply by launching the game ball aiming at the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, four types of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, and jackpot D are provided as jackpot types of special symbols, and the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b according to the jackpot type. Although the number of rounds in the jackpot game was switched, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, there are 6 types of jackpot types (front route jackpot A, front route jackpot B, front route jackpot C, back route jackpot A, back route). The number is increased to jackpot B and back route jackpot C).

The front route jackpot A and the front route jackpot B are jackpots with 8 rounds of jackpot. In addition, the front route jackpot C is a jackpot with two jackpot rounds. In the front route jackpots A to C, the lottery gate 310 is opened when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set to distribute the game ball to the front route.

The back route jackpot A and the back route jackpot B are jackpots with 8 rounds of jackpot. In addition, the back route jackpot C is a jackpot with two jackpot rounds. In the back route jackpots A to C, the lottery gate 310 is opened when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set to distribute the game ball to the back route.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 66, but in each jackpot, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the front route or the back route according to the number of rounds of the jackpot.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is that the content of the first type selection table 202b of the ROM 202 is changed in the main control device 110. , And, instead of the small hit flag 203k provided in the RAM 203, a round start flag 203l, a closing flag 203m, a lottery execution flag 203n, a big hit end flag 203o, and a passage opening flag 203p are provided. Further, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and a part of the process included in the main process (FIG. 61) are different from the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. The second embodiment describes other configurations, other processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 65, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The RAM 203 included in the main control device 110 of the present embodiment replaces the small hit flag 203k provided in the RAM 203 of the second embodiment with the round start flag 203l, the closing flag 203m, the lottery execution flag 203n, and the big hit end flag 203o. , The passage opening flag 203p is provided. Since other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The round start flag 203l is a flag indicating the timing for determining whether or not to open the lottery gate 310, and is turned on when a new round is started in a big hit or a small hit (see S1134 in FIG. 69). , After setting the opening of the lottery gate 310, it is turned off (see S4007 in FIG. 71).

The closing flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not it is the timing to close the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 in the big hit game, and the round ends during the big hit and the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is closed. If so, it is turned on (see S1135 in FIG. 69). On the other hand, it is turned off at the start of the jackpot and when the lottery gate 310 is set to be closed.

The lottery execution flag 203n is a flag indicating whether or not the lottery device 300 has executed the lottery for shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol. It is turned on when it is detected that the ball has entered any of the entry ports, and is turned off at the start of the jackpot (see S1133 in FIG. 69).

The jackpot end flag 203o is turned on when the jackpot end is set (see S1137 in FIG. 69) and turned off at the start of the jackpot (see S1134 in FIG. 69). Further, the passage opening flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not the lottery gate 310 is opened and the game ball can enter the guidance passage 321. The flag is turned on when the lottery gate 310 is opened. (See S4006 in FIG. 71), it is turned off at the start of a big hit or when the lottery gate 310 is closed (see S4005 and S4014 in FIG. 71).

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the contents of the ROM 202 included in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 shows the configuration of the first type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 included in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. In the first hit type selection table 202b of the second embodiment, the correspondence relationship between the random value of the first hit type counter and the jackpot type is defined, but in the third embodiment, in addition to this, the jackpot The state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the state of the lottery gate 310 for each number of rounds are defined for each jackpot type.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the third embodiment, when the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 0 to 9, the front route jackpot A is won. Further, in the front route jackpot A, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route in the first round, the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round. Further, in these rounds, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened, and a game ball can enter the guidance passage 321.

On the other hand, in the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, and the eighth round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the back route. Further, in these rounds, the lottery gate of the lottery device 300 is not opened, and therefore, the game ball cannot enter the guidance passage 321.

When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 10 to 59, the front route jackpot B is won. Further, in the front route jackpot B, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route in the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, and the eighth round. Further, among these rounds, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened in the rounds other than the second round, and the game ball can enter the guidance passage 321.

On the other hand, in the 1st round, the 3rd round, the 5th round, and the 7th round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the back route. Further, in these rounds, the lottery gate of the lottery device 300 is not opened, and therefore, the game ball cannot enter the guidance passage 321.

When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 60 to 69, the front route jackpot C is won. In the front route jackpot C, in the second round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route, and the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened to enter the guidance passage 321. Can enter the ball. On the other hand, in the first round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the back route. Then, since the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is not opened, the game ball cannot enter the guidance passage 321.

When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 70 to 74, the back route jackpot A is won. In the back route jackpot A, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the back route in the first round, the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round. Further, in these rounds, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened, and a game ball can enter the guidance passage 321.

On the other hand, in the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, and the eighth round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route. Further, in these rounds, the lottery gate of the lottery device 300 is not opened, and therefore, the game ball cannot enter the guidance passage 321.

When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 75 to 95, the back route jackpot B is won. Further, in the back route jackpot B, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the back route in the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, and the eighth round. Further, among these rounds, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened in the rounds other than the second round, and the game ball can enter the guidance passage 321.

On the other hand, in the 1st round, the 3rd round, the 5th round, and the 7th round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route. Further, in these rounds, the lottery gate of the lottery device 300 is not opened, and therefore, the game ball cannot enter the guidance passage 321.

When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 96 to 99, the back route jackpot C is won. In the back route jackpot C, in the second round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the back route, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened, and the game ball is sent to the guidance passage 321. It becomes possible to enter the ball. On the other hand, in the first round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route. Then, since the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is not opened, the game ball cannot enter the guidance passage 321.

As described above, even if the lottery gate 310 is open, it is not always possible for the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a to proceed into the lottery gate 310, and the ball discharge passage 701 You may enter the ball. In addition, the round may end without any ball entering the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a in one round. For these reasons, if the game ball does not enter the lottery gate in the round in which the lottery gate 310 is opened inside the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, the player enters the lottery round. Since it is not possible to determine whether or not it was, just checking the status of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is whether it is a jackpot on the front route (front route jackpots A to C) or a jackpot on the back route (back route jackpots A to C). ) I can't tell. Therefore, the expectation that the current jackpot is a jackpot on the front route that is advantageous to the player can be maintained for a longer period of time.

When the small hit A is won, the operation of the flow path distribution valves 331a and 331b is switched in the same way as the front route big hit C, but the lottery gate 310 is not opened during the small hit. Further, when the small hit B is won, the operation of the flow path distribution valves 331a and 331b is switched in the same manner as the back route big hit C, but the lottery gate 310 is not opened during the small hit.

In this way, by making the operation of the flow path distribution valves 331a and 331b common between a part of the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, the big hit is small just by confirming the operation of the flow path distribution valves 331a and 331b. It can be difficult to determine whether it is a hit or not. Therefore, the expectation for the big hit can be maintained for a longer time.

The first type selection table 202b is not limited to the combination shown in FIG. 66. For example, the round for opening the lottery gate 310 may be limited to only one round regardless of the jackpot type. Further, for example, the passage switching valves 331a and 331b may operate in common, and only the round for opening the lottery gate 310 may be changed.

<Regarding the control process in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 72, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In each of the special symbol variation processing (S104), S201 to S211, S221, and S213, S214, respectively, S201 to S211, S221, and S213 of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S214 is executed. Then, in the special symbol variation processing in the third embodiment, in the processing of S211 it is determined that the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is a big hit of the special symbol. In the case (S211: Yes), then the start of the jackpot game is set (S231), and this process ends. Further, in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S221 that the lottery result of this time is a small hit of a special symbol (S221: Yes), the start of the small hit game is set (S232), and the present End the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control device 110.

Among the main processes of the main control device 110, in each of the processes S1001 to S1003 and S1006 to S1017, S1001 to S1003 and S1006 to the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S1017 is executed. Then, in the main process of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment, when the process of S1003 is completed, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) is executed instead of the jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 63) in the second embodiment. .. Similar to the jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 63), the jackpot control process 3 is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

When the big hit control process 3 is completed, the small hit control process 2 (S1032) is executed instead of the small hit control process (FIG. 64) in the second embodiment. Similar to the small hit control process (FIG. 64) in the second embodiment, the small hit control process 2 (S1032) executes various effects according to the small hit and opens the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. Or it is a process for closing.

When the small hit control process 2 (S1032) is completed, the flow path switching process (S1033) is then executed. This flow path switching process (S1033) is a process for setting the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the lottery gate 310. When this flow path switching process (S1033) is completed, the small hit setting process (S1034) is executed. This small hit setting process (S1034) is a process of switching the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b during the small hit. When the small hit setting process (S1034) is completed, each process after S1006 is executed.

Next, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 3 (S1031).

In each of the jackpot control processes 3 of S1101 to S1111 and S1122, the same processes as those of S1101 to S1111 and S1122 of the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 63) in the second embodiment are executed. NS. Then, in the jackpot control process 3 of the third embodiment, when the process of S1102 is completed, the round start flag 203l, the closing flag 203m, and the lottery execution flag 203n are turned off (S1131 to S1133). Further, the jackpot end flag 203o and the passage opening flag 203p are also turned off after the processing of S1102 (not shown).

Further, in the jackpot control process 3, when the process of S1105 is completed, the round start flag 203l is turned on (S1134), and it is the timing to set the open / closed state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the lottery gate 310. After showing, the process proceeds to the process after S1106. Based on the fact that the round start flag is turned on by the process of S1134, various settings according to the jackpot type are performed by the flow path switching process (S1033) described later.

Further, in the jackpot control process 3, when the process of S1109 is completed, the closing flag 203m is turned on to indicate that it is the closing timing of the lottery gate 310 (S1135). Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot game is the back route jackpot C or the front route jackpot C (that is, whether or not it is a jackpot for two rounds) (S1136). As a result of the processing of S1136, if it is determined that neither the back route jackpot C nor the front route jackpot C (that is, it is a jackpot of 8 rounds) (S1136: No), the process proceeds to S1110.

On the other hand, if it is determined as the back route jackpot C or the front route jackpot C as a result of the processing of S1136 (S1136: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the round number counter 203g is 2 (S1122), 2 If not (that is, if it is 1,) this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the round number counter 203g is 2 (S1122: Yes), the end of the jackpot is set (S1111), the jackpot end flag 203o is turned on (S1137), and this process is terminated.

Next, the small hit control process 2 (S1032) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process 2 (S1032).

In each of the small hit control processes 2 of S3901 to S3911, the same processes as those of S3901 to S3911 of the small hit control process (see FIG. 64) in the second embodiment are executed. Then, in the small hit control process 2 in the third embodiment, when the process of S3902 is completed, the round start flag 203l is turned off (S3921), and this process ends. When the processing of S3905 is completed, the round start flag 203l is turned on in order to set the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b according to the small hit type in the small hit setting process (see FIG. 72) described later. (S3922), S3906 and subsequent processes are executed.

Next, the flow path switching process (S1033) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this flow path switching process (S1033). The flow path switching process (S1033) is a process for setting the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the lottery gate 310.

In this flow path switching process (S1033), first, it is determined whether or not the round start flag 203l is on (S4001), and when it is determined that the round start flag 203l is on (S4001: Yes), the jackpot type is determined. The flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set based on the first type selection table 202b (S4002). For example, when the jackpot type is the front route jackpot B and the value of the round counter 203g is 5 (that is, when it is the start timing of the 5th round), in the first hit type selection table 202b, "▲ Since it is specified that the flow path is the back route, the setting of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the back route.

In the present embodiment, since the round start flag 203g is turned on at both the round start timing of various big hits and the round start timing of various small hits, the round start flag 203g is set based on the round start timing of the small hits. It may be turned on and shift to the processing of S4002, but in this case, it is configured to determine that it is not a big hit (that is, a small hit) and end this processing.

When the processing of S4002 is completed, it is specified whether or not to open the lottery gate 310 based on the jackpot type and the first hit type selection table 202b (S4003). For example, when the jackpot type is the front route jackpot B and the value of the round counter 203g is 5 (that is, when it is the start timing of the 5th round), in the first hit type selection table 202b, "▲ ”Is attached, and it is stipulated that the lottery gate 310 is closed so that the game ball cannot proceed to the guidance passage 323. Therefore, it is specified that the lottery gate 310 is closed. ..

When the processing of S4003 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the specific result of whether or not to open the lottery gate 310 indicates the closure of the lottery gate 310 (S4004), and the specific result indicates the closure. If it is (S4004: Yes), the lottery gate 310 is closed, the passage opening flag 203p is turned off (S4005), and the process proceeds to S4007. On the other hand, if the specific result is not closed, that is, it indicates that the lottery gate 310 is open (S4004: No), the lottery gate 310 is opened and the passage opening flag 203p is turned on (S4006). The process proceeds to S4007. In the process of S4007, the round start flag 203 g is turned off (S4007), and the present process is terminated.

In the process of S4001, when it is determined that the round start flag 203l is not on (that is, it is off) (S4001: No), it is determined whether or not the closing flag 203m is on (S4008). Then, when it is determined that the closing flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S4008: No), the processing of S4009 to S4014 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4015.

On the other hand, if the closing flag 203m is on (S4008: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag 203o is on (S4009), and if it is not on (that is, if it is off), the jackpot end timing is determined. Therefore, the processing of S4010 and S4011 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S4012.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end flag 203o is on (S4009: Yes), it is determined whether or not the lottery execution flag 203n is on (S4010). If the lottery execution flag 203n is on (S4010: Yes), a game ball has already been placed in any of the entry ports (one of the time-saving entry opening 501 and the probability variation entry opening 501 to 504) in the lottery device 300. Since it is determined whether to shift to the high-probability state or the low-probability state of the special symbol after the ball is entered and the jackpot ends, the process of S4011 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4012.

On the other hand, if the lottery execution flag 203n is off (S4010: No), it means that it has not been determined whether to shift to the high-probability state or the low-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. The probability change flag 203e is turned off, 100 is set in the time reduction / medium counter 203f (S4011), and the process proceeds to S4012 so that the jackpot does not end without the state after the end being determined. That is, if it is not decided whether to shift to the high-probability state or the low-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot even just before the end of the jackpot, the game ball enters the time-saving entry slot 501. It will be in the same state as it was.

In the process of S4012, it is determined whether or not the passage opening flag 203p is on (S4012), and if the passage opening flag 203p is on (S4012: Yes), the lottery gate 310 is opened, so that it is opened. The lottery gate 310 is closed (S4013), the passage opening flag 203p is turned off (S4014), and the process proceeds to S4015. On the other hand, if the passage opening flag 203p is not on (that is, if it is off), the processing of S4013 and S4014 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4015.

Next, in the process of 4015, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered any of the entrances of the probability variation entrances 502 to 504 based on the detection results of the winning sensors 420a to 420d (S4015). If it is determined that a ball has been detected in one of the probabilistic ball entrances (S4015: Yes), the probabilistic flag 203e is turned on (S4016) in order to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, and further. , The lottery execution flag 203n is turned on to end this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered any of the probabilistic entry ports 502 to 504 (S4015: No), whether or not the game ball has entered the time-saving entry slot 501. Based on the detection results of the winning sensors 420a to 420d (S4017), if it is determined that the ball has entered (S4017), the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state after the jackpot is completed, and the time of the normal symbol is shortened. In order to set the state, the probability variation flag 203e is turned off, 100 is set in the time saving / medium counter (S4018), and the lottery execution flag 203n is turned on to end this process. Further, in the process of S4017, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the time-saving entry slot 501, the main process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the main process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the small hit setting process (S1034) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this small hit setting process (S1034). The small hit setting process is a process of switching the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b during the small hit.

In this small hit setting process (S1034), first, it is determined whether or not the round start flag 203g is on (S4101), and if it is determined that the round start flag 203g is on (S4101: Yes), the round counter The flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set based on the value of 203 g and the small hit type (S4102). As described above, the small hit A and the front route big hit C have the same setting of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b in each round. That is, if the small hit type is small hit A, the flow path regardless of whether the value of the round counter 203g is 1 or 2 (that is, whether it is the first round or the second round). The settings of the switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the front route (see FIG. 66). Similarly, the small hit B and the back route big hit C have the same settings of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b in each round. That is, if the small hit type is small hit B, the flow path regardless of whether the value of the round counter 203g is 1 or 2 (that is, whether it is the first round or the second round). The setting of the switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the back route (see FIG. 66).

After setting the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b by the processing of S4101, the lottery gate 310 is then closed to prevent the game ball from entering the guidance passage 323 (S4103), and the round start flag 203l is turned off. Then (S4104), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round start flag 203l is off in the processing of S4101, the processing of S4102 to S4104 is skipped and the main processing is terminated as it is.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment has a configuration in which the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. The lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are provided at different positions, and the game ball is played to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a until the lottery result by the lottery device 300 is confirmed. If the configuration is such that the ball cannot be entered, if the game ball does not enter the lottery gate 310 well, the game ball will be consumed, and the player may feel that the ball has been lost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the start of the big hit game, only by launching the game ball aiming at the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, the lottery opportunity by the lottery device 300 is obtained while getting the ball. Can be done. Therefore, since a lot of game balls are not consumed for the lottery device 300 to perform the lottery, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling that he / she has lost.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery by the lottery device 300 is also performed during the jackpot game, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched according to the round, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched. Since the pattern of is also different depending on the jackpot type, it is difficult for the player to grasp the round in which the lottery by the lottery device 300 is performed.

Therefore, since the player can be made to perform the jackpot game while carefully checking the state of the lottery device 300, the jackpot game becomes like a monotonous work merely for obtaining a ball. It can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a and the lottery gate 310 (opening of the guidance passage 321) are opened with almost no time lag. Similarly, the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a and the closing of the lottery gate 310 were performed with almost no time lag. On the other hand, the opening / closing timing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a may be configured to deviate from the timing of the start of the round. Further, the opening / closing timing of the guidance passage 321 may be configured to deviate from the opening / closing timing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

The difference in opening / closing timing will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a timing chart showing the timing of opening and closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a and the timing of opening and closing the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310) in one round during the jackpot game. .. In FIGS. 73 (a) and 73 (b), the chart described as "large opening" indicates the open / closed state of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, which is referred to as "guidance passage". The chart described shows the open / closed state of the guide passage 321 (open / closed state of the lottery gate 310). Further, in each chart, "open" indicates an open state, and "closed" indicates a closed state.

In FIG. 73A, the jackpot type is one of the front route jackpots A to C, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are in the front route state, and the jackpot type is the back. When the route jackpot is any of A to C and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are in the back route state (that is, the game ball can enter the guide passage 321). It is a timing chart which shows the timing of opening and closing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, and the timing of opening and closing of the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310) in the case of the round.

As shown in FIG. 73A, there is a time lag (for example, 3 seconds) before the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened with respect to the start timing of the round. Then, a time lag (for example, 2 seconds) occurs between the opening of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and the opening of the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310). As a result, the game ball can be entered into the guidance passage 321 after the settings of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are surely switched, so that the game ball is distributed in the traveling direction during the switching of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b. It is possible to prevent the game ball from advancing on a route opposite to the setting of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b after passing through the unit 330.

Further, there is a time lag (for example, 2 seconds) between the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and the closing of the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310). As a result, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a just before the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is also entered into the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310). Therefore, the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is closed before the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a reaches the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310). , It is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

In FIG. 73 (b), the jackpot type is one of the front route jackpots A to C, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are in the back route state, and the jackpot type is the back route. One of the route jackpots A to C, and the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is the state of the front route (that is, the game ball cannot enter the guidance passage 321). It is a timing chart which shows the timing of opening and closing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a in (in the case of a round), and the timing of opening and closing of the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310).

As shown in FIG. 73 (b), the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds) before the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, and the specific winning opening (large opening) is opened. The opening port) 65a is configured to be opened at the timing when the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is closed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310). Further, as described above, since the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is configured to be recognized in the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, the player can recognize the opening. Even if the lottery is not held, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the lottery may be held in this round.

The timing at which the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is opened depends on whether or not the round allows the game ball to enter the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310). The timing at which the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is opened in all rounds is specified before the winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, instead of before or after the opening) 65a is opened. You can do it.

Then, in a round that allows the game ball to enter the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310), the flow path is switched in order to allow the game ball to enter after the setting of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is completely completed. The valves 331a and 331b may be configured to be set at the same time as the start of a new round.

With this configuration, even if the opening timing of the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is confirmed, whether or not the round allows the game ball to enter the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310). Since it is not possible to determine whether or not this round is a round in which a lottery for transitioning to a high probability state of a special symbol is performed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not this round is a round in which the player's expectation is maintained for a longer period of time. Can be done.

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the lottery device 300 is provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, and among the game balls that have entered the lottery gate 310, the game balls that can proceed to the guidance passage 322 The passage closing valve 324 was provided so as to be limited to one ball. The game ball whose progress to the guide passage 322 is restricted by the passage closing valve 324 is configured to be discharged to the outside of the lottery device 300 through the ball discharge passage 323.

On the other hand, in this modification, all the game balls that have entered the lottery gate 310 can proceed to the guidance passage 322. That is, the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are not provided so that all the game balls that have entered the lottery gate 310 can reach the distribution rotating body 341.

Further, in the present embodiment, based on the entry port (one of the time-saving entry opening 501 and the probability variation entry opening 501 to 504) into which the game ball first enters after the lottery gate 310 is opened, After the jackpot ends, it is configured to determine whether to set the special symbol to the high probability state or the special symbol to the low probability state.

With this configuration, the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 can be omitted, so that the lottery device 300 can be made compact. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a and the lottery device 300 provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 15, the operation of the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a in the round in which the lottery gate 310 is opened will be described.

As described above, in this modification, since the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are not provided, the ball enters the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and goes to the open lottery gate 310. All the game balls that have entered the ball reach the traveling direction distribution unit 330. As described above, in the traveling direction distribution unit 330, the route on which the game ball travels is determined according to the jackpot type, and in the case of the front route jackpots A to C, the flow path switching valve 331a of the traveling direction distribution unit 330 , 331b is the state shown in FIG. 9B (the state of the front route). Therefore, the game ball flows down to the front side of the distribution rotating body 341. On the other hand, in the case of the back route jackpots A to C, the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b of the traveling direction distribution unit 330 are the states shown in FIG. 9A (the state of the back route). Therefore, the game ball flows down to the back side of the distribution rotating body 341.

First, the state of the back route and the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right side will be described with reference to FIG. In the state of the back route and the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right side, the game ball that first reaches the distribution rotating body 341 advances in the guidance passage 408a (FIG. 12A). As described above, the game ball that has traveled through the guidance passage 408a (FIG. 12 (b)) falls as it is without swinging the distribution rotating body 341 and enters the time-saving entry slot 501 (FIG. 12 (c)). ). That is, the entry port for the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is the time-saving entry opening 501. As a result, after the jackpot ends, the special symbol shifts to a low-probability state, and the normal symbol is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of fluctuations is 100).

Further, in the same round of the jackpot, the game ball that subsequently reaches the distribution rotating body 341 also advances in the guidance passage 408a, so that all the game balls do not swing the distribution rotating body 341 and the time-saving entry port. Enter 501. Therefore, when the back route is in the state at the start of the round and the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the right, the jackpot is the same as when the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are provided. At the end of the process, the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the right, and at the same time, it shifts to a low probability state of the special symbol and during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of fluctuations is 100) of the normal symbol. It will be in a short time state.

Further, the state of the front route and the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right side will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 15. In the state of the front route and the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right side, the game ball that first reaches the distribution rotating body 341 advances in the guidance passage 408b. As described above, the game ball that has traveled through the guidance passage 408b is hindered by the ball stop portion 403a (FIG. 13 (a)). After that, based on the weight of the game ball being applied to the ball stop portion 403a, the distribution rotating body 341 rotates until it swings to the left side (FIG. 13B), and the distribution rotating body 341 rotates. After the operation is completed, the game ball falls and enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 502. That is, the entry port at which the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a first enters is the probability variation entry opening 502. As a result, after the jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in the same round of big hits, the game ball that subsequently reaches the distribution rotating body 341 advances in the guidance passage 408d due to the direction of the distribution rotating body 341 changing to the left (FIG. 15). Then, as described above, the game ball flowing down the guidance passage 408d (FIG. 15 (a)) enters the probabilistic entry ball port 504 without swinging the distribution rotating body 341 (FIG. 15 (c)). Therefore, the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 enters the probability variation ball opening 504 without swinging the distribution rotating body 341, except for the game ball that first reaches the distribution rotating body 341.

Therefore, when the front route is in the state of the front route at the start of the round and the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the right, the jackpot is the same as when the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are provided. At the end of the process, the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the left, and shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol.

Further, the state of the back route and the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left side will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 14. In the state of the back route and the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left side, the game ball that first reaches the distribution rotating body 341 advances in the guidance passage 408c. As described above, the game ball that has traveled through the guidance passage 408c is hindered by the ball stop portion 405a (FIG. 14 (a)). After that, based on the weight of the game ball being applied to the ball stop portion 405a, the distribution rotating body 341 rotates until it swings to the right (FIG. 14B), and the distribution rotating body 341 rotates. After the operation is completed, the game ball falls and enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 503. That is, the entry opening for the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is the probability variation entry opening 503. As a result, after the jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in the same round of big hits, the game ball that subsequently reaches the distribution rotating body 341 advances in the guidance passage 408a due to the direction of the distribution rotating body 341 changing to the right (FIG. 12). Then, as described above, the game ball flowing down the guidance passage 408a (FIG. 12 (a)) enters the time-saving entry slot 501 without swinging the distribution rotating body 341 (FIG. 12 (c)). Therefore, the game balls that have entered the lottery gate 310 enter the time-saving ball entrance 501 without swinging the distribution rotating body 341, except for the game balls that first reach the distribution rotating body 341. As described above, since the state after the end of the jackpot is set based on the type of the entry slot that first enters the ball, the game ball other than the game ball that first reaches the distribution rotating body 341 is the time-saving entry slot. No matter how many balls enter 501, the setting of the state after the big hit is not overwritten.

Therefore, when the back route is in the state at the start of the round and the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the left, a big hit is performed as in the case where the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are provided. At the end of the process, the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the right, and shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol.

Next, the state of the front route and the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left side will be described with reference to FIG. In the state of the front route and the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left side, the game ball that first reaches the distribution rotating body 341 advances in the guidance passage 408d (FIG. 15A). As described above, the game ball that has traveled through the guidance passage 408d (FIG. 15 (b)) falls as it is without swinging the distribution rotating body 341 and enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 5034 (FIG. 15 (c)). ). That is, the entry opening for the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is the probability variation entry opening 504. As a result, after the jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol.

Further, in the same round of the jackpot, the game ball that subsequently reaches the distribution rotating body 341 also advances in the guidance passage 408d, so that all the game balls are probable change balls without swinging the distribution rotating body 341. Enter the ball into the mouth 504. Therefore, when the front route is in the state of the front route at the start of the round and the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the left, a big hit is performed as in the case where the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are provided. At the end of the process, the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the left, and shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol.

As described above, in this modification, the lottery gate 310 is based on the entry port (either the time-saving entry opening 501 or the probability variation entry opening 501 to 504) in which the game ball first enters after the lottery gate 310 is opened. By configuring so as to determine whether the special symbol is in the high-probability state or the special symbol is in the low-probability state after the jackpot is completed, even if a plurality of game balls advance to the distribution rotating body 341, a lottery is performed. The lottery result by the device 300 can be the same result as other embodiments. Further, the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 at the end of the jackpot can be the same as that of other embodiments.

As a result, the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 can be omitted, and the lottery device 300 can be made compact, so that the degree of freedom in arranging the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a can be increased.

In the third embodiment and the modified example of the third embodiment, the lottery device 300 is provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, and the opening pattern of the lottery gate 310 and the switching pattern of the flow path are arranged. Was changed according to the jackpot type. On the other hand, the lottery device 300 may be provided outside the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the lottery device 300 and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a may be used as the specific winning openings, respectively. In this case, the lottery device 300 is defined as the first specific winning opening, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is defined as the second specific winning opening, and the lottery gate 310 is opened in the first type selection table 202b. In the round in which the game ball can enter the guidance passage 321, the first specific winning opening (lottery device 300) is opened and the second specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) is closed. On the other hand, in the round in which the lottery gate 310 is closed to limit the game balls to the guidance passage 321 in the first hit type selection table 202b, the first specific winning opening (lottery device 300) is closed and the second specific winning opening is closed. (Specific winning opening 65a) may be opened.

In the third embodiment and the modified example of the third embodiment, the lottery device 300 is provided inside one specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, but the specific winning opening (large opening opening) is 2 The game balls that have won the special winning opening (large opening opening) 65a1, 65a2) and the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a1 are configured to flow down to the front side of the distribution rotating body 341, and the specific winning opening is provided. The game ball winning the mouth (large opening) 65a2 may be configured to flow down to the back side of the distribution rotating body 341. Then, in the round in which the lottery gate 310 is stipulated to be opened in the first type selection table 202b, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a1 is opened and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a2 is closed. do. On the other hand, in the round in which the lottery gate 310 is stipulated to be closed in the first type selection table 202b, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a1 is closed and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a2 is opened. do it. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide the lottery gate 310 and the traveling direction distribution unit 330, so that the lottery device 300 can be made compact.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 81. In the first embodiment described above, when it is detected that the ball has entered the probability change entry ball port 502 or the probability change entry ball port 504, the voice lamp control device 113 shifts to a loop state which is advantageous for the player. It is configured to send a command (loop state command) indicating. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute the variation pattern in a special mode for the loop state based on receiving the loop state command, and can suggest that the player is in an advantageous state at present. It was configured like this.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in addition to the variation pattern effect, the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot is executed in a mode corresponding to the state of the lottery device 300 and the like. It is configured so that it can be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the stop symbol of the jackpot is stopped, the lottery device 300 is used to draw a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol before the start of the jackpot game. However, in the present embodiment, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened at the start of the eighth round, which is the final round, to shift to a high probability state of the special symbol. It is configured as follows.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that in the voice lamp control device 113, the ROM 222 has a jackpot battle variation pattern table 222b and a jackpot battle selection table 222c. Is provided, and the state flag 223f is provided in the RAM 223. Further, a part of the processing included in the command determination processing (FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The first embodiment describes other configurations, various processes executed by the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 74, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. The ROM 222 included in the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment is provided with a jackpot battle variation pattern table 222b and a jackpot battle selection table 222c in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment. Further, the RAM 223 included in the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment is provided with a state flag 223f in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The jackpot battle fluctuation pattern table 222b is used to determine the detailed mode of the fluctuation pattern based on the mode of the rough fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command as in the fluctuation pattern table 222a. For each general mode of the variation pattern notified by the command, a plurality of detailed variation pattern modes that can be selected are defined. The difference between the jackpot battle variation pattern table 222b and the variation pattern table 222a is that the jackpot battle variation pattern table 222b defines an effect mode of the variation pattern effect in which the winning of the jackpot is notified.

The jackpot battle selection table 222c defines the mode of the display effect performed in the third symbol display measure 81 during the jackpot, and the selectable effect mode differs depending on the state of the lottery device 300 and the like. ..

The state flag 223f is a flag indicating which of the states A to F defined in the state setting table (not shown later) is the current state, and the mode of the fluctuation pattern is selected from the jackpot battle fluctuation pattern table 222b. This flag is taken into consideration when the game is to be performed (see S2713 in FIG. 80) or when the effect mode during the big hit is selected from the jackpot battle selection table 222c (see S4206 in FIG. 81).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a big hit is obtained in the present embodiment, and the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit. The production mode will be described.

FIG. 75 is a state setting table showing the flow of the effect of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. This state setting table is set in ROM 222. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has three states, state A, state C, and state E, as states when the variable pattern effect that becomes a big hit is executed by the third symbol display device 81, and each state. The selected variation pattern effect is different.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has three states, state B, state D, and state F, as states when the display effect is executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game. In each state, the effect mode of the selected display effect is different.

In each of the states A to F, a story-like effect is executed, and it is suggested whether or not it is in a loop state or whether or not it shifts to a high-probability state of a special symbol according to the result of the executed effect. It is configured as follows. Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described in order from the state A.

The state A refers to the normal state (that is, in the low probability state of the special symbol), and the jackpot type of the jackpot won while staying in the state A is either jackpot A or jackpot B. A common production is performed. Specifically, when a jackpot is won in state A, the main character with a shield and a sword searches for an enemy monster and encounters it in a variable pattern production in which the jackpot is notified. .. In this production, you can meet monsters, and when the battle starts, a stop symbol indicating a big hit is confirmed and displayed. Further, when the stop symbol indicating the jackpot is confirmed and the jackpot game is started, the state B is entered (see state A in FIG. 75).

In addition, in the deviation fluctuation production, the main character searches for the enemy, but the production that the enemy cannot be found (the enemy cannot be met) is executed. As a result, it is not possible to determine whether the effect of searching for the enemy is a big hit or a miss, so that the player can pay attention to the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 until the end. ..

FIG. 76A shows the display content when the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed in the effect performed in the state A. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the characters "Battle started !!" are displayed above the scene where the hero and the enemy are glaring at each other, and the player can tell that the battle between the hero and the enemy will start from now on. Is notified to. Further, in the upper right of the third symbol display device 81, a state in which three "8" symbols are aligned is displayed. As described above, the stop symbol at the time of a big hit is not limited to "8".

Below the main character and the enemy, HP gauges showing the hit points of each character are displayed. The HP gauge is a gauge that represents the vitality of each character, and in a battle between the main character and an enemy, the gauge decreases when attacked by the opponent, and when the gauge becomes 0, it becomes a knockout state. Details will be described later, but if the HP gauge of the main character is exhausted due to the enemy's attack, it is suggested to the player that the player will shift to the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends, and conversely by the main character's attack. When the HP gauge of the enemy becomes 0, it suggests to the player that the player shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

The state B is a state in which the stop symbol indicating the jackpot is confirmed and displayed in the state A, and the jackpot game is started. In this state B, the battle production between the main character and the enemy is settled in the 8th round, which is the final round of the jackpot, and whether to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol It is suggested.

Specifically, if the hero attacks the enemy, sets the enemy's HP gauge to 0, and can destroy the enemy, it is suggested that after the jackpot ends, it will shift to a high probability state of a special symbol. .. On the other hand, if the hero is attacked by an enemy and the hero's HP gauge becomes 0, it is suggested that after the jackpot ends, the game shifts to a low probability state of a special symbol. Further, when the state B shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, the transition to the state C is performed, but when the transition to the low probability state of the special symbol shifts, the transition to the state A occurs. That is, unless the jackpot A is won and the state shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, the state A and the state B are repeated (see the state B in FIG. 75).

The state C is a state in which the main character wins the enemy in the state B and shifts after the end of the jackpot game in which the victory effect is performed, and the effect to be executed is the same as the state A. The difference from the state A is that if the jackpot is won in the state A, the symbol indicating the jackpot is confirmed and then the state B is entered, whereas if the jackpot is won in the state C, the jackpot is won. The difference is that the symbol to be shown shifts to the state D after being confirmed and displayed (see the state C in FIG. 75).

The state D is a state in which the stop symbol indicating the jackpot is confirmed and displayed in the state C, and the jackpot game is started. Even in this state D, if the main character can set the enemy's hit points to 0 in the 8th round, which is the final round of the jackpot as in the state B, it is suggested that after the jackpot ends, it will shift to the high probability state of the special symbol. Will be done.

On the other hand, unlike the state B, in the state C, even if the main character is attacked by the enemy, the HP gauge does not become completely 0 and the state becomes a pinch. The state D is a state in which the state D shifts only when the state B shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, but when the state B shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, the ball enters the lottery device 300. This is a case where the game ball enters the probability variation entrance 501 after rotating the state of the distribution rotating body 341 to the leftward arrangement (see FIG. 13). Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game performed in the state D, it is confirmed that the special symbol will shift to the high-probability state regardless of the jackpot type, suggesting that the special symbol will shift to the low-probability state. However, it is not necessary to produce the main character's HP gauge to be 0.

However, if the jackpot B is won with the distribution rotating body 341 swinging to the left, the game ball that has entered the lottery device 300 will be distributed to the guidance passage 408c of the distribution rotating body 341, and the distribution rotating body 341 will be distributed. After rotating the state to the right direction, the ball enters the probabilistic entry ball port 503 (see FIG. 14), so if the jackpot B is won again next time, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol. It will be in a state where there is a possibility that it will end up.

Therefore, if the jackpot type is jackpot B in state D, the main character attacks from the enemy in the display effect to suggest that there is a risk of shifting to the low probability state of the special symbol after the next jackpot. It is configured to perform an effect that causes a pinch in response to it. In addition, the effect of becoming a pinch is executed, and after the jackpot is completed, the state shifts to the state E (see the state D in FIG. 75).

FIG. 76B shows the effect performed in the final round (8th round) of the jackpot B when the jackpot B is won in the state C and the state D is entered. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), the main character has been attacked by the enemy's rush, and the HP has decreased significantly. By putting the hero in a pinch state by the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player is informed that the player is in a disadvantageous state (a state in which the distribution rotating body 341 is swung to the right). It can be easily recognized.

In addition, after being attacked by the enemy's rush in FIG. 76 (b), the hero is blown away by the impact of the rush, and both the hero and the enemy lose sight of each other. Therefore, although the details will be described later, in the state E of the transition after the end of the jackpot game, the main character searches for the enemy again.

Further, in the state D, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the game ball that has entered the lottery device 300 flows down the guidance passage 408d. Therefore, since the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 does not change in the state of being swung to the left side (see FIG. 15), the state shifts to the state C again. That is, unless the jackpot B is won and the state shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol, the state C and the state D are repeated (see the state D in FIG. 75).

The state E is a state in which the jackpot B is won in the state C, and the hero shifts after the hero is attacked by the enemy and becomes a pinch in the state D. Searches for the enemy, and if he can meet the enemy, the jackpot will be confirmed. On the other hand, in the state E, when searching for an enemy or encountering an enemy, a preliminary effect that is not performed in the state A or C is performed.

Specifically, when the hero discovers medicinal herbs while searching for an enemy (see Fig. 77 (a)), or when he encounters an enemy, a dog character who is a friend of the hero assists the hero. (See FIG. 77 (b)). If you discover the herbs, you can suggest that you may be able to recover the damage caused by the attack received from the enemy in state D, and you can suggest that the resistance to the enemy will improve if your friends help.

These effects are likely to be performed if the winning jackpot in the state E is the jackpot A, and are difficult to be performed if the winning jackpot is the jackpot B (see state E in FIG. 75). By performing this effect, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player to destroy the enemy. If a jackpot is won in the state E, the state F is entered after the symbol indicating the jackpot is confirmed and displayed (see the state E in FIG. 75).

The state F is a state in which the stop symbol indicating the jackpot is confirmed and displayed in the state E, and the jackpot game is started. In this state F as well, as in the state B and the state D, if the enemy is attacked and the HP gauge of the enemy is set to 0, it is suggested that the state shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. However, in the state F, the HP gauge may be reduced or fellow characters may be merged, so that the mode is different from the state B and the state D.

Specifically, when shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends, the effect of destroying the enemy is executed in the display mode as shown in FIG. 78 (a), and the special symbol has a low probability after the jackpot ends. When shifting to the state, the effect of defeating the enemy is executed in the mode of display as shown in FIG. 78 (b). If the enemy is defeated, the state C shifts to the state C after the jackpot ends, and if the enemy loses, the state A shifts to the state A after the jackpot ends.

In addition, when the enemy is defeated in the state F, the HP gauge is restored after the victory and the HP is restored to the perfect state. As a result, the HP is always in a perfect state in the state C, so it is confirmed whether or not the present is in an advantageous state (that is, the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 is swung to the left) just by checking the HP of the main character. can do.

<Regarding the control process in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment. This command determination process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) of the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process of determining a command received from the main control device 110 as described above.

Among the command determination processes of the voice lamp control device 113, in each of the processes S1401, S1403 to S1410, and S1419, S1401 and S1403 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of ~ S1410 and S1419 is executed. Then, in the command determination process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S1401 is completed, the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1421) is replaced with the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 41) in the first embodiment. To execute. The variation pattern selection process 2 is a process for selecting the variation pattern effect corresponding to each of the above-mentioned states A, C, and E.

If the determination result in the process of S1408 is No, it is determined whether or not a command related to the jackpot game has been received (S1422). The commands related to the jackpot game include all commands related to the jackpot such as the round number command, the opening command, and the interval command.

If it is determined in the process of S1422 that a command related to the jackpot game has been received (S1422: Yes), the jackpot effect processing is executed (S1423), and this process is terminated. This jackpot effect processing (S1423) is a process for setting the display effect during the jackpot in the above-mentioned states B, D, and F. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command related to the jackpot game has not been received (S1422: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1419), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1421) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 114 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern selection process 2.

Of the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1421), in the process of S2701, the same process as the process of S2701 of the variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 41) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, in the variation pattern selection process 2 of the fourth embodiment, when the process of S2701 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 indicates a jackpot variation pattern. (S2711).

In the process of S2711, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot is shown (S2711: Yes), then the status flag 223f is set from the status setting table (FIG. 75) and the jackpot type (S2712). Next, based on the setting content of the state flag 223f, the fluctuation pattern for the jackpot is selected (S2713), and this process is terminated. For example, when the state flag 223f indicates the state E and the jackpot type is jackpot A, an effect of acquiring medicinal herbs or an effect of encountering an enemy with a companion coming to help is performed.

In the process of S2711, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot is not shown (that is, it is the fluctuation pattern of the deviation), the fluctuation pattern for deviation is extracted from the received command (S2714), and this processing is terminated. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the jackpot effect processing (S1423) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 114 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this jackpot effect processing.

In the jackpot effect processing (S1423), first, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S4201), and if it is determined that the opening command has been received (S4201: Yes), the state setting table (FIG. 75) is displayed. The status flag is set from the jackpot type (S4202). For example, when the state flag 223f indicates the state C and the jackpot type is the jackpot B, the state flag is updated to indicate the state D (see state D in FIG. 75).

Then, the pattern of the jackpot effect is set based on the state of the set state flag 223f (S4203), and this process is terminated. For example, if the state flag 223f is set to indicate the state D and the jackpot type is jackpot B, the effect that the hero is attacked by the enemy and becomes a pinch is set as the jackpot effect.

If it is determined in the process of S4201 that the opening command has not been received, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the ball entry port different from the setting of the state flag 223f (S4204). For example, when the setting of the state flag 223f indicates the state B and the jackpot type is jackpot B, the game ball should enter the time-saving entry slot 501, but with respect to the pachinko machine 10. If the ball enters any of the probabilistic entry points 502 to 504 due to vibration, etc., the jackpot ends even though it has been decided that the main character will be defeated. Since it later shifts to a high-probability state of a special symbol, there is a risk of giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Therefore, in the processing of S4204, if it is determined that the ball has entered a ball entry port different from the setting of the state flag 223f (S4204: Yes), the ball is attacked by the enemy and collapses according to the type of the different entry port. The main character stands up with the last power and sets the effect of attacking and destroying the enemy, or conversely, the defeated enemy gets up and attacks the main character, and the main character loses in reverse. (S4205), and this process is terminated.

By performing the processing of S4205, the game state after the end of the big hit and the result of the display effect during the big hit can be matched, so that the game state after the end of the big hit and the result of the display effect during the big hit It is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player due to the discrepancy.

In the process of S4204, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the ball entry port different from the setting of the state flag 223f (that is, the ball has entered the ball entry port as set by the state flag 223f) (S4204: No). , The mode of the display effect during the jackpot is set based on the jackpot effect pattern set in the process of S4203 (S4206), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is configured to execute a series of productions with a story based on the state of the distribution rotating body 341 of the lottery device 300, the winning jackpot type, and the like. ing. Further, these series of effects are configured to be executed in a variable pattern effect in which the jackpot stop symbol is displayed and a display effect during the jackpot game executed after the variable pattern effect.

As a result, the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 has entered any of the entry ports (time-saving entry opening 501 and probability variation entry opening 501 to 504). Even if you overlook this, by checking the result of the display effect executed in the third symbol display device 81, you can easily recognize whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. be able to.

Further, also in the present embodiment, the distribution rotating body 341 of the lottery device 300 is configured to be visible to the player, and the player can confirm the distribution rotating body 341 in a state advantageous to the player (that is, that is). It is configured so that it can be recognized whether or not the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the left side). However, when a player who is not accustomed to the game plays the game, he / she may play the game without knowing what is different between the state where the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right side and the state where the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left side.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the display effect during the jackpot game not only suggests whether or not to shift to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot, but also the HP of the main character is in the high-probability state of the special symbol. It is configured so that it can be recognized whether or not the current state is advantageous depending on whether the state is sufficient or in a pinch state in which HP is decreasing. Therefore, even a player who is not accustomed to the game can easily recognize whether or not the current state is advantageous.

In the present embodiment, only two types of HP gauges of the main character are provided, that is, a pinch state or a perfect state, but other states may be provided. For example, in addition to the perfect state and the pinch state, the state where the HP gauge is reduced by about 20%, the state where the HP gauge is reduced by half, and the state where the HP gauge is reduced by about 70% are added. Is also good. In this case, the state of the HP gauge of the main character is configured to be stored in the RAM 223, and the HP gauge is held while the high probability state of the special symbol continues, and the special symbol is held. It may be configured to reset when the state shifts to the low probability state of. As a result, the display effect can be changed in a natural flow including the HP gauge, so that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the present embodiment, the lottery is performed by the lottery device 300 in the eighth round, but the lottery may be performed in another round. Further, after the stop symbol indicating the big hit is confirmed and displayed, the lottery may be performed before the start of the big hit game.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 105. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the lottery device 300 is provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, and among the game balls that have entered the lottery gate 310, the game balls that can proceed to the guidance passage 322. The passage closing valve 324 was provided so that the number of balls was limited to one ball. The game ball whose progress to the guide passage 322 is restricted by the passage closing valve 324 is configured to be discharged to the outside of the lottery device 300 through the ball discharge passage 323. Further, during the jackpot, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the open / closed state of the lottery gate 310 are switched for each round based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66). Was. Further, the game ball distributed to the front route or the back route by the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b flows down any of the guide passages 408a to 408d of the distribution rotating body 341, and the time saving entry port 501, Alternatively, the ball is configured to enter any of the probabilistic entry ball ports 502 to 504.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a second variable winning device 140 capable of entering a game ball is provided in addition to the variable winning device 65. The second variable winning device 140 includes a second specified winning opening (second large opening) 140a, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a, and opening / closing thereof. It is equipped with a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening and closing of the plate forward with the lower side as the axis. Like the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In addition, in the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily opening the open state where the ball can easily win the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 140a. Form.

Further, in the present embodiment, instead of the lottery device 300 (see FIG. 5) used in the first to fourth embodiments, the lottery device 700 is configured to draw the game state after the jackpot is completed. The lottery device 700 is provided inside the second variable winning device 140. Although the details will be described later, the lottery device 700 of the present embodiment is provided with an entry slot distribution unit 740 (see FIGS. 92 to 95) for distributing the game ball to the entry slot, and the game ball is provided. It is configured to set the game state after the end of the big hit based on the type of the ball entrance. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a game ball that has entered either the front route guide hole 742a or the back route guide hole 742b provided on the upper surface of the ball entry port distribution portion 740 is inserted. , The distribution rotating body 741 is configured to distribute the ball to either the time-saving entry port 501 or the probability variation entry port 502 to 504.

All the game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a are configured to enter either the front route guidance hole 742a or the back route guidance hole 742b. .. The game ball that has entered the front route guide hole 742a is configured to flow down the flow path (front route) on the front side of the distribution rotating body 741. Further, the game ball that has entered the back route guide hole 742b is configured to flow down the flow path (back route) on the back side of the distribution rotating body 741.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the start of the jackpot is set, it is based on the type of the ball entry port (one of the time-saving entry ball opening 501 and the probability variation entry ball opening 501 to 504) in which the game ball first enters. Therefore, it is configured to determine whether the special symbol is in the high-probability state or the special symbol is in the low-probability state after the jackpot ends. The second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is configured to be opened only in the first round, and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is configured to be opened in the second and subsequent rounds. doing. That is, the opportunity to draw a lottery for the game state to be transferred after the big hit is limited to the first round of the big hit.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, only the opening / closing operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is changed according to the big hit type, and the way of switching between the back route and the front route is a big hit. It is configured to be the same regardless of the type. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are provided to switch between the back route and the front route (see FIG. 9), but in the present embodiment, instead of these, the pachinko machine 10 is provided. A flow path switching valve 731 (see FIG. 85) is provided. The flow path switching valves 331a and 331b may be applied instead of the flow path switching valve 731.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time-saving entry ball port 501 and the probability variation entry ball port 503 are arranged on the front side of the front view, and the probability variation entry ball port 502 and the probability variation entry ball port 504 are on the back side of the front view. (The placement of the ball entrance is reversed from that of other embodiments). Therefore, if the game ball flows down the front route, it may enter the time-saving entry slot 501, so that the special symbol may be in a low probability state after the big hit, but when the game ball flows down the back route. , Basically, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol. That is, the state in which the back route is selected is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the state in which the front route is selected.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is that the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is different from the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Port) 140a is provided, and a lottery device 700 is provided after the second specific winning port (second large opening) 140a. The flow path switching valve 731 (FIG. 85) is replaced with the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b. (See) is provided. Further, in the main control device 110, the content of the first hit type selection table 202b of the ROM 202 is the same as the content of the first hit type selection table 202b of the first embodiment, and the small hit type selection table 202e is abolished. The point is that the second large opening switching table 202f, the flow path switching table 202g is provided, and the RAM 203 has a timing counter 203q, a ball entry standby flag 203r, a large opening opening flag 203s, a flow path flag 203t, The point that the payout flag 203u is provided, the round start flag 203l, the closing flag 203m, the lottery execution flag 203n, the jackpot end flag 203o, and the passage opening flag 203p are deleted.

Further, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and a part of the process included in the main process (FIG. 68) are different from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. The third embodiment describes other configurations, other processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<About the configuration of the lottery device in the fifth embodiment>
First, the configuration of the lottery device 700 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 96.

FIG. 82 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82, in the present embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is provided below the front view of the game board 13, and the second variable winning device 140 is in front of the game board 13. It is provided on the right side of the view. In addition, a lottery device 700 is provided directly below the second variable winning device 140. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a of the second variable winning device is guided to the lottery device 700. Since the lottery device 700 of the present embodiment is provided inside the board surface of the game board 13, the lottery device 700 does not hinder the progress of the game ball. Further, since the portion of the board surface of the game board 13 of the present embodiment on the front side of the lottery device 700 is made of a transparent member, the player can use the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a. It is possible to check how the game ball that has entered the game flows down during the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the outline of the second variable winning device 140 and the lottery device 700 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an outline of the second variable winning device 140 and the lottery device 700.

As shown in FIG. 83, the lottery device 700 is provided directly below the second variable winning device 140, and reaches the second variable winning device 140 via the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. All the game balls that have entered are configured to flow down to the lottery device 700. The joint portion between the second variable winning device 140 and the lottery device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86 that follow.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a second variable winning device 140 and a flow path leading to the lottery device 700 provided inside the second variable winning device 140. As shown in FIG. 84 (a), a substantially rectangular parallelepiped region in which a game ball can enter through the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is provided inside the second variable winning device 140. ing. A lottery device guide hole 141 leading to the ball entry port distribution portion 740 is provided in the central portion of the bottom surface of this substantially rectangular parallelepiped-shaped region. All the game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a enter the lottery device guide hole 141.

As shown in FIG. 84B, the left and right sides of the bottom surface of the second variable winning device 140 are provided with inclinations (inclined portions 142a, 142b) so that the game ball descends in the direction of the lottery device guide hole 141. Has been done. Further, these inclined portions 142a and 142b are configured so that the upper end of the inclination is at the same height as the lower side of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is suppressed from staying inside the second variable winning device 140, and the drawing device guide hole 141 is surely reached. You can enter the ball.

Downstream of the lottery device guide hole 141, the traveling direction for distributing the game ball to the flow path on the front side of the front view (front flow path 732a) or the flow path on the back side of the front view (back side flow path 732b). A distribution unit 730 is provided. Inside the traveling direction distribution unit 730, a flow path switching valve 731 (see FIG. 85 (b)) for switching the flow path in which the game ball travels is provided. When the game ball is distributed to the front flow path 732a by the flow path switching valve 731, the ball enters the front route guide hole 742a provided on the front side of the upper surface of the ball entry port distribution portion 740, and the distribution rotation is performed. Proceed through the flow path (front route) on the front side of the body 741. On the other hand, when the game ball is distributed to the back side flow path 732b, it enters the back route guide hole 742b provided on the back side of the upper surface of the ball entry port distribution portion 740, and enters the back side of the distribution rotating body 741. Proceed through the flow path (back route).

Next, the traveling direction distribution unit 730 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. 85 (a) is a plan view of the second variable winning device 140 as viewed from above, and FIG. 85 (b) shows the second variable winning device 140 and the traveling direction distribution unit 730 in FIG. 85 (a). It is sectional drawing in the case of cutting along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb shown in 1.

As shown in FIGS. 85 (a) and 85 (b), a lottery device guide hole 141 is provided in the center of the bottom surface of the variable winning device 140. Further, a flow path switching valve 731 for switching the flow path through which the game ball flows down is provided downstream of the lottery device guide hole 141. The drive shaft 731a of the flow path switching valve 731 and the flow path solenoid 265 are electrically connected, and by controlling the flow path solenoid 265, the flow path switching valve uses the drive shaft 731a as a rotation axis. The 731 is configured to be rotatable. As a result, the flow path switching valve 731 can be tilted toward the front or the back. Further, as described above, on the downstream side of the flow path switching valve 731, the front side flow path 732a is provided on the front side of the front view, and the back side flow path 732b is provided on the back side of the front view.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the state of the flow path switching valve 731 when the game ball flows down the front side flow path 732a and the back side flow path 732b will be described.

FIG. 86 (a) shows a state in which the flow path switching valve 731 is switched (tilted) to the front side by controlling the flow path solenoid 265, and the flow path switching valve 731 is cut along the line LXXXXVb-LXXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of the case. As shown in the figure, when the flow path switching valve 731 is switched to the front side, the tip portion of the flow path switching valve 731 is in contact with the inner wall portion on the front side of the traveling direction distribution portion 731. That is, the front side flow path 732a is shielded by the flow path switching valve 731, and the game ball cannot advance to the front side flow path 732a. On the other hand, the upper part of the back side flow path 732b is open so that the game ball can proceed. Therefore, when the game ball enters the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a with the flow path switching valve 731 switched to the front side, the game ball enters the back side flow path 732b. Flow down.

Further, FIG. 86 (b) is a cross-sectional view when the flow path switching valve 731 is switched (tilted) to the back side and cut along the line LXXXXVb-LXXXXVb (see FIG. 85 (a)). As shown in the figure, when the flow path switching valve 731 is switched to the back side, the tip portion of the flow path switching valve 731 is in contact with the inner wall portion on the back side of the traveling direction distribution portion 731. That is, the back side flow path 732b is shielded by the flow path switching valve 731, and the game ball cannot proceed to the back side flow path 732b. On the other hand, the upper part of the front flow path 732a is open so that the game ball can proceed. Therefore, when the game ball enters the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a with the flow path switching valve 731 switched to the back side, the game ball enters the front side flow path 732a. Flow down.

As shown in FIGS. 86A and 86B, the tip portion of the flow path switching valve 731 (that is, the portion in contact with the inner wall of the traveling direction distribution portion 730) is located at a higher position with respect to the drive shaft 731a. It becomes. That is, the flow path switching valve 731 is in a state of being inclined in the downward direction toward the flow path partition portion 733. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has reached the flow path switching valve 731 from stopping on the flow path switching valve 731, and to reliably advance the game ball to the lottery device 700.

Next, a modified example of the traveling direction distribution unit 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. When the flow path switching valve 731 is used, the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted in order to ensure that the game ball does not stand still on the upper part of the flow path switching valve 731 and proceeds to the lottery device 700. It was composed of. Therefore, it is necessary to secure a height sufficient to incline the flow path switching valve 731. On the other hand, in this embodiment, a flow path switching member having a substantially flat plate shape is used to switch the flow path through which the game ball flows. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the traveling direction distribution unit 730 from becoming vertically long.

87 (a) and 87 (b) are both perspective views of a modified example of the second variable winning device 140. Inside the second variable winning device 140, it is controlled whether the game ball is distributed to the front flow path (front route) of the rotating body 741 or to the back flow path (back route). A flow path switching member 734 is provided for this purpose. FIG. 87 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path of the back route is opened by the flow path switching member 734, and FIG. 87 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path of the front route is opened. Is. First, with reference to FIG. 87 (a), a state in which the flow path of the back route is opened will be described.

As shown in FIG. 87 (a), in this modified example, a recess is provided in the center of the bottom surface (between the inclined portion 142a and the inclined portion 142b) of the region inside the second variable winning device 140, and the recessed portion is provided. A front guide hole 143a for guiding the game ball to the front route guide hole 742a provided on the upper surface of the ball entry port distribution portion 740 is provided on the front side of the bottom surface of the device. Further, on the back side of the bottom surface of the recessed portion, a device back guide hole 143b for guiding the game ball to the back route guide hole 742b of the lottery device 700 is provided. Further, a flow path switching member 734 that can be slidably displaced back and forth of the second variable winning device 140 is arranged in the recessed portion.

The height and width of the flow path switching member 734 are configured to be the same as the height and width of the recess provided on the bottom surface of the second variable winning device 140. Since the width of the flow path switching member 734 is the same as the width of the recessed portion, there is no gap between the left and right inner wall portions of the recess and the left and right outer wall portions of the flow path switching member 734. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from getting stuck between the recess and the flow path switching member 734, so that the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a It is possible to prevent the second variable winning device 140 from staying inside.

Further, since the height of the flow path switching member 734 is equal to the height of the recessed portion, the height of the upper surface of the flow path switching member 734 coincides with the height of the lower ends of the inclined portion 142a and the inclined portion 142b. That is, the inclined portion 142a and the inclined portion 142b are smoothly connected to the upper surface of the flow path switching member 734. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from getting stuck between the left and right outer walls of the flow path switching member 734 and the inclined portion 142a or the inclined portion 142b. It is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the opening port) 140a from staying inside the second variable winning device 140.

The flow path switching member 734 is electrically connected to the flow path solenoid 265, and is either the front side (see FIG. 87 (a)) or the back side (see FIG. 87 (b)) of the second variable winning device 140. It can be slid and displaced to either. A notch having a size sufficient for the flow path switching member 734 to pass through is provided on the back side of the second variable winning device 140 so that the flow path switching member 734 moves back and forth through this notch. It is driven by the flow path solenoid 265.

The flow path switching member 734 is provided with a ball passage hole 734a having a size that allows the game ball to pass through, and the game ball that has reached the flow path switching member 734 can flow down through the ball passage hole 734a. .. Further, as described above, the flow path switching member 734 slides and displaces the recessed portion on the bottom surface of the second variable winning device 140 toward the front side or the back side of the front view, so that the flow path switching member 734 has a guide hole in front of the device. It is in a state of being directly above the 143a and the device back guide hole 143b.

FIG. 87A shows a state in which the tip of the flow path switching member 734 is slidably displaced by the flow path solenoid 265 until it comes into contact with the inner wall on the front side (player side) of the second variable winning device 140. There is. When the flow path switching member 734 is slidably displaced toward the front side, the device front guide hole 143a is in a state where the upper side is closed by the flow path switching member 734. That is, the game ball cannot pass through the guide hole 143a in front of the device. Further, the center of the ball passage hole 734a provided in the flow path switching member 734 coincides with the center of the device back guide hole 143b. Therefore, since the device back guide hole 143b is directly below the ball passage hole 734a, the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 140 passes through the ball passage hole 734a and the device back guide hole 143b, and is a lottery device. It is in a state where it can flow down to the back route guide hole 742b of 700. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a flows down the flow path (back route) on the back side of the distribution rotating body 741.

FIG. 87B shows a state in which the flow path solenoid 265 slides and displaces the inner portion of the flow path switching member 734 including the ball passage hole 734a until it projects to the outside of the second variable winning device 140. ing. In this case, the back route guide hole 742b is closed on the upper side by the flow path switching member 734. That is, the game ball cannot pass through the device back guide hole 143b. Further, when the flow path switching member 734 is slid and displaced to the back side, nothing obstructs (exposes) the upper side of the device front guide hole 143a. That is, the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 140 can flow down to the front route guide hole 742a of the lottery device 700 via the device front guide hole 143a. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a flows down the flow path (front route) on the front side of the distribution rotating body 741.

In this way, by setting the flow path switching member 734 in a state where the flow path switching member 734 is slide-displaced toward the front side of the front view or in a state where the flow path switching member 734 is slide-displaced toward the back side of the front view by the flow path solenoid 265, the second variable winning prize is obtained. The flow path through which the game ball that has entered the device 140 flows down can be set to either the front route or the back route.

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the game ball entered into the second variable winning device 140 in each of the state where the flow path switching member 734 is slid and displaced toward the front side and the state where the flow path switching member 734 is slid and displaced toward the back side. The route through which is carried out will be described.

FIG. 88A is a diagram showing a path through which the game ball travels in a state where the flow path switching member 734 is slidably displaced toward the front side of the front view. As shown in FIG. 88 (a), the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 140 via the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is provided on the flow path switching member 734. It passes through the ball passage hole 734a and the device back guide hole 143b located directly below the ball passage hole 734a, and enters the back route guide hole 742b of the ball entry port distribution portion 740. As a result, the game ball flows down the flow path (back route) on the back side of the distribution rotating body 741.

Further, FIG. 88B is a diagram showing a path through which the game ball passes in a state where the flow path switching member 734 is slid and displaced to the back side by the flow path solenoid 265. As shown in FIG. 87 (b), the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 140 through the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a passes through the guide hole 143a in front of the device. , The ball enters the route guide hole 742a in front of the ball entry port distribution unit 740. As a result, the game ball flows down the flow path (front route) on the front side of the distribution rotating body 741.

As described above, in this modification, by controlling the arrangement of the flow path switching member 734 by the flow path solenoid 265, the game ball can be reliably advanced to the flow path to be flowed down.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 89 to 95, the ball entry slot distribution unit 740 provided in the lottery device 700 will be described in detail.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the structure of the ball entrance distribution unit 740. FIG. 89 (a) is a front perspective view when the ball entry port distribution unit 740 is observed from the front right direction, and FIG. 89 (b) is a front view when the ball entry port distribution unit 740 is observed from the front left direction. It is a front perspective view. As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b), the ball entry port distribution unit 740 includes a distribution rotating body 741 and forms a flow path forming unit 743 in which the game ball travels, and a flow path thereof. It is composed of a cover member 744a mounted on the front side of the forming portion 743 and a cover member 744b mounted on the back side of the flow path forming portion 743.

A front route guide hole 742a is bored on the front side of the front view, and a back route guide hole 742b is bored on the back side of the front view. As described above, the game ball that has entered the front route guide hole 742a advances through the flow path (front route) on the front side of the distribution rotating body 741, and the game ball that has entered the back route guidance hole 742b is distributed and rotated. Proceed through the flow path (back route) on the back side of the body 741.

On the right side of the ball entry port distribution unit 740, the probability variation entry port 503 (front side of the front view) and the probability variation entry port 504 (back side of the front view) are used as entry ports for the game balls to be distributed by the distribution rotating body 741. ) Is provided (see FIG. 89 (a)). Further, on the left side surface of the ball entry port distribution unit 740, the time-saving ball entry 501 (front side) and the probabilistic ball entry 502 (front view) are used as the ball entry points for which the game balls are distributed by the distribution rotating body 741. (Back side) is provided (see FIG. 89 (b)). If the entry port to which the game ball is first distributed after the start of the jackpot is the time-saving entry slot 501, the game shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, when the entry port to which the game ball is first distributed is the probability variation entry opening 502 to 504, the state shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit.

Further, the game ball that has entered each entry port is discharged to the outside of the lottery device 700 after the entry is detected by any of the winning sensors 420a to 420d corresponding to each entry port. Since the configuration for discharging the game ball to the outside is the same as that of the ball discharging unit 350 (see FIG. 11) of another embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, unlike other embodiments, when the game ball flows down the front route, the ball is configured to enter either the time-saving entry slot 501 or the probability variation entry slot 503, and the game is played. When the ball flows down the back route, it is configured to enter either the probability-changing ball opening 502 or the probability-changing ball opening 504. Therefore, when the back route is selected, it is configured to be advantageous to the player. In detail, when the front route is selected and the ball enters the time-saving entry slot 501 or the probability variation entry slot 503, the entry slot to which the game balls are distributed in the next big hit lottery by the lottery device 700 Since it is a time-saving entry slot 501 or a probability variation entry slot 502, there is a possibility that a special symbol will be in a low probability state after the next big hit. On the other hand, when the back route is selected and the game ball enters the probability-changing ball opening 502 or the probability-changing ball opening 504, the ball-entry port to which the game ball is distributed is selected by the lottery device 700 at the next big hit. Since it becomes the probability variation entry ball opening 503 or the probability variation entry ball opening 504, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol not only after the current big hit but also after the next big hit.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the back route is configured to be more advantageous to the player, the game ball is pulled toward the front side by using a magnet or the like, and the game ball is illegally moved to the front route. Even if it is advanced, it will be disadvantageous for the illegal player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the illegal act of changing the trajectory of the game ball by using a magnet or the like.

Further, since the flow path forming portion 743 and the cover members 744a and 744b are made of a transparent material (for example, PS material), a game in which the ball enters the front route guide hole 742a or the back route guide hole 742b. The player can visually recognize the progress of the game ball until the ball enters one of the entry ports (time-saving entry opening 501 or probability variation entry opening 501 to 504).

FIG. 90 is an exploded front perspective view of the ball entry port distribution unit 740. The flow path forming portion 743 is provided with a region for storing a substantially fan-shaped distribution rotating body 741 directly below the front route guide hole 742a and the back route guide hole 742b. That is, the distribution rotating body 741 is arranged directly below the front route guide hole 742a and the back route guide hole 742b. Further, the distribution rotating body 741 is configured to be swingable to the left and right around the substantially cylindrical rotating body support shafts 806a and 806b, and the game ball is inserted according to the direction in which the distribution rotating body 741 is swinging. You can change the entrance to the ball. The relationship between the direction in which the distribution rotating body 741 is swinging and the ball entry port into which the game ball enters will be described later with reference to FIGS. 92 to 95.

The rotating body support shafts 806a and 806b of the distribution rotating body 741 are inserted into the cover member 744a mounted on the front side of the flow path forming portion 743 and the cover member 744b mounted on the back side, respectively. Bearing portions 746a and 746b are provided. The bearing portions 746a and 746b are both recessed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and the radius of the recessed portion is slightly larger than the radius of the rotating body support shafts 806a and 806b (that is, the rotating body support shaft is recessed in the recessed portion). The size is such that 806a and 806b can be inserted and can be freely rotated). When the cover members 744a and 744b are attached to the flow path forming portion 743, the rotating body support shafts 806a and 806b are inserted into the bearing portions 746a and 746b, respectively. The distribution rotating body 741 can be stably swung as a rotating shaft.

Further, on the surface of the cover member 744a on the flow path forming portion 743 side, guidance passages 745a and 745c are provided so that the game ball traveling through the flow path (front route) on the front side of the distribution rotating body 741 can flow down the upper surface. Has been done. The guidance passage 745a is a passage inclined downward toward the time-saving entry slot 501. Due to this inclination, the game ball that has advanced to the guidance passage 745a can flow down to the time-saving entry slot 501. Further, the guide passage 745c is a passage inclined in a downward direction toward the probabilistic entry ball port 503. Due to this inclination, the game ball that has advanced to the guidance passage 745c can flow down to the probabilistic entry ball port 503.

On the other hand, on the surface of the cover member 744b on the flow path forming portion 743 side, guidance passages 745b and 745d are provided so that the game ball traveling through the flow path (back route) on the back side of the distribution rotating body 741 can flow down the upper surface. Has been done. The guide passage 745b is a passage inclined downward toward the probabilistic entry ball port 502. Due to this inclination, the game ball that has advanced to the guidance passage 745b can flow down to the probabilistic entry ball port 502. Further, the guide passage 745d is a passage inclined in a downward direction toward the probabilistic entry ball port 504. Due to this inclination, the game ball that has advanced to the guidance passage 745d can flow down to the probabilistic entry ball port 504.

Of the joints between each passage (guidance passages 745a to 745d) and each cover member (cover members 744a, 744b), the upper surface side of each passage gently draws an arc (curves). It has a shape. As a result, when the game ball passes through each passage, the inside (the side close to the distribution rotating body 741) can flow down. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the inner wall portion of each cover member from coming into contact with the game ball, it is possible to prevent the cover member and the flow path forming portion 743 from being separated during the game.

Further, a magnet 747a and a magnet 747b are provided on the surfaces of the cover member 744a and the cover member 744b on the flow path forming portion 743 side, respectively. Further, magnets 807a and 807b are also provided on the front side and the back side of the distribution rotating body 741, respectively. When the cover members 744a and 744b are attached to the flow path forming portion 743, the magnet 747a, the magnet 807a, and the magnet 747b are in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 does not swing to the right or left (neutral state). And the magnet 807b are provided at overlapping positions.

Here, the magnet 747a and the magnet 807a are installed so as to repel each other when the distribution rotating body 741 swings and is displaced to a position where it is in a neutral state. Similarly, both the magnet 747b and the magnet 807b are installed so as to repel each other. Therefore, even if the distribution rotating body 741 swings slightly due to vibration applied to the distribution rotating body 741, the magnets 807a and 807b provided on the side surface portion of the distribution rotating body 741 and the cover member 744a, Since the magnets 747a and 747b provided on the 744b repel each other, it is possible to prevent the distribution rotating body 741 from rotating beyond the portions of the magnets 747a and 747b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the distribution rotating body 741 from being switched even though the game ball has not passed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the structure of the distribution rotating body 741 arranged inside the ball entry port distribution unit 740 will be described. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing the structure of the distribution rotating body 741. FIG. 91 (a) is a front perspective view of the distribution rotating body 741 swinging to the left, and FIG. 91 (b) is a front perspective view of the sorting rotating body 741 swinging to the right. Further, FIG. 91 (c) is a front view in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 is not swinging to the right or left (neutral state), and FIG. 91 (d) is a front view in which the sorting rotating body 741 is also to the right. It is a plan view in a state where it does not swing to the left (neutral state).

As shown in FIGS. 91 (a) and 91 (b), the distribution rotating body 741 is provided with a substantially fan-shaped partition member 801. By providing the partition member 801 even if vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 or the game ball and the cover members 744a and 744b repel each other, the game ball is disconnected from the flow path in which the game ball was traveling. It can be suppressed that it ends up.

Further, on the front side of the partition member 801 there is a ball repulsion portion 802 that bounces the game ball that has flowed down the front route to the left in the front view, and a concave shape that receives the game ball that has flowed down the front route and hinders the progress. A ball stopper 804 is provided. The game ball bounced off by the ball repulsion portion 802 flows down the guide passage 745a provided in the cover member 744a and enters the time-saving ball entrance 501. On the other hand, when the game ball is received by the ball stop portion 804, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stop portion 804. Due to this load, the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right in the front view. As a result, the game ball falls from the ball stop portion 804 onto the guidance passage 745c, and enters the probability variation ball opening 503 through the guidance passage 745c.

On the other hand, on the back side of the partition member 801 is a ball repulsion portion 803 that bounces the game ball that has flowed down the back route to the right in the front view, and a concave shape that receives the game ball that has flowed down the back route and hinders the progress. A ball stopper 805 is provided. As shown in FIGS. 91 (c) and 91 (d), the ball repulsion portion 803 and the ball stop portion 805 have the same shape as the ball repulsion portion 802 and the ball stop portion 804 described above. That is, the shape of the distribution rotating body 741 is the same when viewed from the front direction and when viewed from the back direction.

The game ball bounced off by the ball repulsion portion 803 flows down the guide passage 745d provided in the cover member 744b and enters the probabilistic entry ball port 504. On the other hand, when the game ball is received by the ball stop portion 805, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stop portion 805. Due to this load, the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left in the front view. As a result, the game ball falls from the ball stop portion 805 onto the guide passage 745b, and enters the probabilistic entry ball port 502 through the guide passage 745b.

Next, the operation of the game ball flowing down to the distribution rotating body 741 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 92 to 95. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the operation of the distribution rotating body 741 and the game ball when the game ball flows down the back route in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right, and FIG. 93 is a diagram showing the operation of the distribution rotating body 741 and the game ball. It is a figure which shows the operation of the distribution rotating body 741 and the game ball when the game ball flows down the front route with 741 swinging to the right side. Further, FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the operation of the distribution rotating body 741 and the game ball when the game ball flows down the back route in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left, and FIG. 95 is a diagram showing the operation of the distribution rotating body 741 and the game ball. It is a figure which shows the operation of the distribution rotating body 741 and the game ball when the game ball flows down the front route with the rotating body 741 swinging to the left side.

First, with reference to FIG. 92, a case where the flow path is set to the front route and the distribution rotating body 741 is swung to the right side will be described. Since the flow path of the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is set to the front route, it enters the front route guide hole 742a via the front side flow path 732a. It spheres and flows down the flow path (front route) on the front side of the distribution rotating body 741 (see FIG. 92 (a)).

In the state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right, the ball repulsion portion 802 is located directly under the front route guide hole 742a, so that the game ball flowing down the front route collides with the ball repulsion portion 802 (FIG. 92 (FIG. 92). b) See). As a result, the game ball is bounced to the left in the front view, so that it travels through the guidance passage 745a and enters the time-saving ball entrance 501. That is, the entry port for the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is the time-saving entry opening 501. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, the special symbol shifts to a low-probability state, and the normal symbol is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of fluctuations is 100).

Further, in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right side, the ball repulsion portion 802 forms a slope having an inclination in the direction of rising toward the upper right direction, so that the game ball falling from above the vertical direction is the ball repulsion portion. By colliding with 802, a force in the direction of rotating the distribution rotating body 741 to the right acts. However, when the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right, there is no room for the distribution rotating body 741 to rotate to the right, so even if the game ball collides with the ball repulsion portion 802, the distribution rotating body 741 The state does not change.

In the same round of big hits, the game balls that subsequently reach the distribution rotating body 741 also proceed on the front route, so that all the game balls do not swing the distribution rotating body 741 and the time saving entrance 501 Enter the ball. Therefore, all the game balls that first enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a enter the time-saving entry opening 501 without changing the state of the distribution rotating body 741.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 93 (b) and 93 (c), when the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right, the bottom surface on the left side of the partition portion 801 is in contact with the flow path forming portion 743, but is viewed from the front. The lower part of the ball repulsion portion 802 arranged on the front side and the lower part of the ball stop portion 805 arranged on the back side of the front view do not come into contact with the guide passage 745a and the guide passage 745b, respectively, and a space is created. It is configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower portion of the ball repulsive portion 802 and the lower portion of the ball stop portion 805 from repelling each other with the guide passage 745a and the guide passage 745b due to the impact when the game ball collides with the ball repulsion portion 802. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distribution rotating body 741 that had been swung to the left due to the impact of the game ball colliding with the ball repulsion portion 803 from rotating to the right and switching to the state of swinging to the right. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 92 (a) to 92 (c), in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right, a flow path passing through the lower end of the ball repulsion portion 802 and the center of the flow path through which the game ball flows down. It is configured to intersect the center line O. That is, since the ball repulsion portion 802 is in a state of being closer to the right side with respect to the flow path, the game ball flowing down the flow path is hard to hit the upper side of the ball repulsion portion 802. Here, as the ball moves toward the upper side of the ball repulsion portion 802, the distance from the rotation axis of the distribution rotating body 741 increases. Therefore, when the game ball collides with the upper side of the ball repulsion portion 802, the distribution rotating body 741 moves to the right due to the impact of the collision. The force in the direction of rotating to becomes stronger. When the force in the direction of rotating to the right becomes stronger, the force with which the bottom surface of the partition portion 801 pushes the flow path forming portion 743 also becomes stronger based on the force in the direction of rotating to the right. Therefore, the reaction received by the partition portion 801 from the flow path forming portion 743 is also strong, so that the distribution rotating body 741 is likely to bounce off, and there is a high possibility that the distribution rotating body 741 is switched to a state of swinging to the left. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the game ball is hard to hit the upper side of the ball repulsion portion 802, thereby suppressing the rebound of the distribution rotating body 741 and causing an impact when the game ball collides with the ball repulsion portion 802. Based on this, it is prevented that the distribution rotating body 741 is switched to the state of swinging to the left side.

Next, the state of the back route and the state in which the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right side will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 95. In this state, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a has a flow path set to the back route, so that the back route guide hole 742b is passed through the back side flow path 732b. The ball enters the ball and flows down the flow path (back route) on the back side of the distribution rotating body 741.

In the state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right, the ball stop portion 805 is located directly under the back route guide hole 742b, so that the game ball flowing down the back route is received by the ball stop portion 805 (FIG. 93 (a). )reference). When the game ball is received, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stop portion 805. That is, since a force acting in the direction of rotating the distribution rotating body 741 to the left, the distribution rotating body 741 rotates to the left and swings to the left (see FIG. 93 (b)).

Further, when the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left side, the ball stop portion 805, which is a part of the distribution rotating body, also rotates and tilts to the left side, so that the slope is formed in the downward direction to the lower left. Therefore, the game ball received by the ball stop portion 805 rolls down from the ball stop portion 805 based on the tilt of the ball stop portion 805, advances through the guide passage 745b, and reaches the probabilistic entry ball opening 502. Enter the ball. That is, the entry port for the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is the probability variation entry opening 502. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol.

In the same round of big hits, the game ball that subsequently reaches the distribution rotating body 741 also proceeds on the back route. As described above, the distribution rotating body 741 is in a state of swinging to the left based on the load due to the weight of the game ball that first reaches the distribution rotating body 741. Therefore, the ball repulsion portion 803 is located directly below the back route guide hole 742b (see FIG. 95 (a)), and the game ball flowing down the front route collides with the ball repulsion portion 803 (FIG. 95 (b). )reference). As a result, the game ball is bounced to the right in the front view, so that it travels through the guidance passage 745d (see FIG. 95 (c)) and enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 504.

That is, the game ball that first enters the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a switches the distribution rotating body 741 to a state in which it swings to the left, and enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 502. Then, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a after the second ball enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 504 without changing the state of the distribution rotating body 741.

Further, in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right side, the gap between the upper end portion of the ball stop portion 805 and the ceiling portion of the guidance passage 745d is configured to be less than one game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the back route guide hole 742b from advancing into the guidance passage 745d. Further, by providing a gap between the ball stop portion 805 and the ceiling portion of the guide passage 745d, the distribution rotating body 741 is rotating to the left based on the load due to the weight of the game ball, and then flows down. Suppresses that the game ball is sandwiched between the ball stop portion 805 and the inner wall portion of the flow path downstream of the back route guide hole 742b, and the distribution rotating body 741 cannot operate on either the right side or the left side. be able to.

Next, a state of the front route and a state in which the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left side will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 94. Since the flow path of the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a in this state is set to the front route, the front route guide hole 742a passes through the front side flow path 732a. The ball enters the ball and flows down the flow path (front route) on the front side of the distribution rotating body 741.

In the state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left, the ball stop portion 804 is located directly under the front route guide hole 742a, so that the game ball flowing down the front route is received by the ball stop portion 804 (FIG. 94 (a). )reference). When the game ball is received, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stop portion 804. That is, since a force acting in the direction of rotating the distribution rotating body 741 to the right, the distribution rotating body 741 rotates to the right and swings to the right (see FIG. 94 (b)).

Further, when the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left side, the ball stop portion 804, which is a part of the distribution rotating body 741, also rotates and tilts to the right side, so that a slope is formed in the downward direction in the lower right direction. Therefore, the game ball received by the ball stop portion 804 rolls down from the ball stop portion 804 based on the tilt of the ball stop portion 804, advances through the guide passage 745c, and reaches the probabilistic entry ball opening 503. Enter the ball. That is, the entry port for the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is the probability variation entry opening 503. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol.

In the same round of big hits, the game ball that subsequently reaches the distribution rotating body 741 also proceeds on the front route. As described above, the distribution rotating body 741 is in a state of swinging to the right based on the load due to the weight of the game ball that first reaches the distribution rotating body 741. Therefore, the ball repulsion portion 802 is located directly below the front route guide hole 742a (see FIG. 92 (a)), and the game ball flowing down the front route collides with the ball repulsion portion 802 (FIG. 92 (b). )reference). As a result, the game ball is bounced to the right in the front view, so that it travels through the guidance passage 745a (see FIG. 92 (c)) and enters the time-saving ball entrance 501.

That is, the game ball that first enters the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a switches the distribution rotating body 741 to a state in which it swings to the right, and enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 503. Then, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a after the second ball enters the time-saving entry opening 501 without changing the state of the distribution rotating body 741.

As described above, when the game state after the end of the big hit is set based on the type of the ball entrance where the game ball first enters, the setting is maintained during the big hit. That is, it is configured so that the setting of the game state after the end of the big hit is not overwritten. Therefore, the game state after the jackpot is special is based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a in the first ball enters the probability variation entry opening 503. If the symbol is set to a high probability state, even if a game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a after the second ball enters the time-saving entry opening 501, The game state after the jackpot ends does not become a low probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a configuration in which the number of game balls that can advance to the distribution rotating body 741 is limited to one, so that the structure of the lottery device 700 can be made compact.

Further, in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left side, the gap between the upper end portion of the ball stop portion 804 and the ceiling portion of the guidance passage 745a is configured to be less than one game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the front route guide hole 742a from advancing into the guidance passage 745a. Further, by providing a gap between the ball stop portion 804 and the ceiling portion of the guide passage 745a, the distribution rotating body 741 is rotating to the left based on the load due to the weight of the game ball, and then flows down. Suppresses that the game ball is sandwiched between the ball stop portion 804 and the inner wall portion of the flow path downstream of the front route guide hole 742a, and the distribution rotating body 741 cannot operate on either the right side or the left side. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a case where the flow path is set to the back route and the distribution rotating body 741 is in a state of swinging to the left side will be described. Since the flow path of the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is set to the back route, it enters the back route guide hole 742b via the back side flow path 732b. It spheres and flows down the flow path (back route) on the back side of the distribution rotating body 741 (see FIG. 95 (a)).

In the state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left, the ball repulsion portion 803 is located directly under the back route guide hole 742b, so that the game ball flowing down the back route collides with the ball repulsion portion 803 (FIG. 95 (FIG. 95). b) See). As a result, the game ball is bounced to the right in the front view, so that it travels through the guidance passage 745d and enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 504. That is, the entry port for the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is the probability variation entry opening 504. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol.

Further, in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left side, the ball repulsion portion 803 forms a slope having an inclination in the direction of rising toward the upper left direction, so that the game ball falling from vertically above is the ball repulsion portion. By colliding with 803, a force in the direction of rotating the distribution rotating body 741 to the left acts. However, when the distribution rotating body 741 is in a state of swinging to the left, there is no room for the distribution rotating body 741 to rotate to the left, so even if the game ball collides with the ball repulsion portion 803, the distribution rotating body 741 The state does not change.

In the same round of big hits, the game balls that subsequently reach the distribution rotating body 741 also proceed on the back route, so that all the game balls do not swing the distribution rotating body 741 and the probabilistic entry ball opening 504. Enter the ball. Therefore, all the game balls that first enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 504 without changing the state of the distribution rotating body 741.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the ball entry port (time saving ball entry port 501, and the time saving ball entry port 501) in which the game ball first enters after the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is opened. Based on any of the probabilistic entry ball openings 502 to 504), it is configured to determine whether to set the special symbol in the high probability state or the special symbol in the low probability state after the jackpot ends, and a plurality of games. The sphere is configured so that it can proceed to the distribution rotating body 741. As a result, the configuration for limiting the number of game balls advancing to the distribution rotating body 741 to one can be omitted, so that the configuration of the lottery device 700 can be made compact.

Next, how the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a and the flow path switching member 734 operate in the first round will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a time chart showing the operations of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a and the flow path switching member 734 in the first round. FIG. 96 (a) shows the control when the game ball is caused to flow down to the front route (when the winning jackpot is jackpot A), and FIG. 96 (b) shows the control when the game ball is caused to flow down to the back route. The control of the case (when the winning jackpot is jackpot B) is shown.

First, with reference to FIG. 96 (a), the operation when the game ball is caused to flow down to the front route will be described. In FIG. 96A, the upper diagram shows the elapsed time from the start of the first round and the state (closed or open) of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a. It shows the correspondence. On the other hand, the lower view of FIG. 96A shows the correspondence between the elapsed time from the start of the first round and the open flow path (front side flow path 732a or back side flow path 732b). Is shown.

When the game ball is allowed to flow down to the front route, first, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened immediately after the start of the first round. This open state is a very short time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and immediately closes the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. Then, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed until 7 seconds have passed from the start of the first round. On the other hand, from the elapse of 7 seconds to the end of the first round, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is opened. Then, at the end of the first round, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed. The first round of the jackpot continues until a predetermined time elapses (until 30 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls win the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a).

On the other hand, the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted toward the front side of the second variable winning device 140 (that is, the front side flow path 732a is blocked until 6.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round. The back side flow path 732b is open). Then, after 6.5 seconds have passed, the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted toward the back side of the variable winning device 140 by the flow path solenoid 265 (that is, the front side flow path 732a is opened, and the back side flow path is opened. It is switched to the state where the 732b is blocked). After the flow path switching valve 731 is completely switched to the back side, the flow path switching valve 731 is kept tilted to the back side even after the first round is completed.

When the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted toward you, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened for a short period immediately after the start of the first round (for example, 0. 2 seconds), and it is difficult for the game ball to enter. Therefore, basically, it is more than 7 seconds after the start of the first round that the game ball enters the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a, and the flow path switching valve 731 is on the back side. Since it has been switched to the tilted state (the state where the front side flow path 732a is open), if the jackpot A is won, the ball enters the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a. The game ball can flow down to the front flow path 732a (see FIG. 86 (a)). Therefore, the game ball can be entered into the front route guide hole 742a and flow down the flow path (front route) on the front side of the distribution rotating body 741.

Here, it is the jackpot A and the jackpot B that open the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a for a short period immediately after the first round starts, and at the start of the first round. This is because the operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a in the above is common. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 (b), but when the jackpot B is won, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is opened at the start of the first round. In accordance with the operation at the time of the big hit B, even in the case of the big hit A, the second specific winning opening (second big opening) 140a is opened at the start of the first round. As a result, when the first round starts, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to determine the jackpot type based on the state of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a. Therefore, it is possible to keep the expectation that the player has won the jackpot B, which is advantageous for the player, for a longer period of time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96 (b), the operation when the game ball is caused to flow down to the back route will be described. In FIG. 96 (b), the upper diagram shows the elapsed time from the start of the first round and the state (closed or open) of the second fixed winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a. It shows the correspondence. On the other hand, the lower view of FIG. 96B shows the correspondence between the elapsed time from the start of the first round and the open flow path (front side flow path 732a or back side flow path 732b). Is shown.

When the game ball is allowed to flow down to the back route, first, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is set to be open until 5 seconds have passed from the start of the first round. On the other hand, during the period from the lapse of 5 seconds to the end of the first round, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is closed. This closed state is maintained until the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, the operation of the flow path switching valve 731 is exactly the same as the operation described with reference to FIG. 96 (a). That is, until 1.5 seconds after the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed (6.5 seconds after the start of the first round), it is set to be tilted toward you. It can be switched to the state of leaning to the back side. Therefore, while the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is open, the flow path switching member 734 is always tilted toward the front side, so that the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is open. ) The game ball that has entered 140a can flow down to the back flow path 732b (see FIG. 86 (b)). Therefore, the game ball can be entered into the back route guide hole 742b and advanced to the flow path (back route) on the back side of the distribution rotating body 741.

Further, it is the second specific winning opening (second large opening) that switches the arrangement of the flow path switching valve 731 1.5 seconds after the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed. Mouth) This is to ensure that all the game balls that have entered 140a proceed to the back route. That is, even if the game ball enters just before the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed, the flow path switching valve 731 is kept in the front side position for 1.5 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting (tilting direction) of the flow path switching valve 731 from being switched while the game ball remains inside the second variable winning device 140.

As described above, the operations of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a and the flow path switching valve 731 in the first round of the jackpot have been described in detail, but these are states other than the first round. Is configured to be set to each initial state. The initial state of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a indicates a closed state. The initial state of the flow path switching valve 731 is a state in which the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted to the back side (that is, a state in which the front side flow path 732a is opened and the back side flow path 732b is shielded). .. Therefore, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed based on the end of the first round, and is kept in the closed state until the first round of the next big hit is started. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is open regardless of the state immediately before the power is turned off. It is set to the closed state.

On the other hand, the flow path switching valve 731 is kept tilted to the back side from the end of one round until the next big hit. Then, after the jackpot stop symbol is confirmed and displayed, the game is switched to a state of being tilted toward the front side until the first round starts, and after the start of the first round, the above-mentioned operation is performed. Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erasing switch 122 turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is switched to a state of being tilted toward the front side regardless of the state immediately before the power is turned off.

The timing of switching the flow path and the timing of opening and closing the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a for each jackpot type are not limited to this embodiment. For example, in jackpot A, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is not opened immediately after the start of the first round, and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is not opened until 7 seconds have passed from the start of the first round. The two large openings) 140a may be configured to be closed. As a result, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened only during the period when the front flow path 732a is open, so that the game ball can be reliably advanced to the front flow path 732a. Can be done.

Further, for example, in the jackpot A, the timing at which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened is 27 seconds after the start of the jackpot, and the game ball opens the second specific winning opening (second large opening). Mouth) It may be configured so that it is difficult for the ball to enter 140a. Similarly, in the jackpot B, the period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is open is set to 3 seconds from the start of the first round, and the game ball is the second specific winning opening (second large opening). It may be configured so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the opening port) 140a. As a result, when the game ball is launched into the lottery device 700 in the first round, the player can feel a sense of tension, so that the jackpot is merely a task for obtaining the ball. It can be suppressed. Further, in each jackpot, the period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is opened may be lengthened (for example, 10 seconds). As a result, the game ball can be easily advanced to the inside of the lottery device 700 in the first round, so that the lottery by the lottery device 700 can be easily received. Therefore, it is possible to play the first round while giving the player a sense of security.

Further, in the present embodiment, one round is continued until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 game balls are won in the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a. It is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to continue until 12 seconds have passed, or until 10 game balls have won a prize in the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a. With this configuration, in the case of jackpot A, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened 7 seconds after the start of the first round, and the second is 12 seconds after the start of the first round at the maximum. 2 The specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a will be closed. That is, since the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened for a maximum of 5 seconds, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is opened for the same time as when the jackpot B is won. ) 140a can be opened. Therefore, the prize balls obtained in one round can be equalized between the jackpot A and the jackpot B. Further, in the jackpot B, if 5 seconds elapse before 10 game balls are won in the 1st round, the period until the end of the 1st round can be shortened. That is, even if the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed and the player launches the game ball, the period during which the prize ball cannot be obtained can be shortened, so that the player gets bored. It can be suppressed that it ends up.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, the flow path switching valve 731 is started from the state of being tilted toward the front side, but is started from the state of being tilted toward the back side, and is started from the state of being tilted toward the back side in the middle of the first round. It may be configured to switch to a state of being inclined to. The state of the flow path switching valve 731 before the start of the big hit is a state of being tilted to the back side (that is, a state in which the game ball can pass through the front route). It is not necessary to tilt the path switching valve 731 toward the front side. Therefore, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened before the flow path switching valve 731 is completely tilted to the back side, and the game ball advances to the back side flow path 732b despite the jackpot B. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Further, in the present embodiment, the state in which the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted toward the back side is the initial state, but the state in which the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted toward the front side may be set as the initial state. As a result, the setting at the start of the first round matches the initial state, so that it is not necessary to switch the setting of the flow path switching valve 731 by the time the first round of the jackpot starts. Therefore, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened before the flow path switching valve 731 is completely tilted to the back side, and the game ball advances to the back side flow path 732b despite the jackpot B. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

<About the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. In addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the third embodiment, the RAM 203 included in the main control device 110 of the present embodiment includes a time counter 203q, a ball entry standby flag 203r, a large opening flag 203s, a flow path flag 203t, and a payout flag 203u. It is provided. On the other hand, the round start flag 203l, the closing flag 203m, the lottery execution flag 203n, the jackpot end flag 203o, and the passage opening flag 203p provided in the RAM 203 in the third embodiment are deleted. Since other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The timekeeping counter 203q is a counter that measures the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot round and the elapsed time from the start of the interval period. Based on the time measured by the timekeeping counter 203q, the opening and closing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a can be controlled (see S4503 in FIG. 103), and the route through which the game ball can flow (front route, It controls the switching of the back route) (see S4603 in FIG. 104).

The ball entry standby flag 203r is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball has entered any of the entry ports (time-saving entry ball opening 501 and probability variation entry ball opening 501 to 504) during the jackpot. This ball entry standby flag 203r is set to on when setting the start of the jackpot (see S241 in FIG. 99), and one of the ball entry ports (time saving ball entry port 501 and probability variation entry ball port 501 to 504). It is set to off when it is detected that the game ball has entered the ball (see S4310 and S4315 in FIG. 105). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters one of the entrances in a state where the entry standby flag 203r is set to ON, the pachinko machine 10 corresponds to the entry. It is configured to shift to the above state after the jackpot ends.

The large opening opening flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is in the open state, and when the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is opened. It is set to on (see S4507 in FIG. 103) and turned off when the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed (see S4510 in FIG. 103).

The flow path flag 203t is a flag indicating whether the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a can pass through the front route or the back route. If it is in a state where it can pass through the front route (that is, a state in which the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted toward the back side), it is set to ON (see S4610 in FIG. 104), and it is in a state where it can pass through the back route (that is, the flow path). If the switching valve 731 is tilted toward the front side), it is set to off (see S4607 in FIG. 104).

The payout flag 203u is a flag indicating whether or not the prize ball is to be paid out by detecting the entry of the game ball into the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a. The payout flag 203u is set on after setting the state after the jackpot ends (see S4310 and S4315 in FIG. 105), and is set off at the start of the jackpot (see S1142 in FIG. 101).

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 included in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98A shows the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment. In the present embodiment, the ROM 202 included in the main control device 110 has a second large opening switching table 202f and a flow path instead of the small hit type selection table 202e provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. A switching table 202 g is provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the content of the first type selection table 202b of the present embodiment has the same configuration as that of the first type selection table 202b of the first embodiment. That is, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (front route jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot B (back). It is judged that it is a route jackpot).

The second large opening opening switching table 202f is a table referred to for opening and closing the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a during the first round of the jackpot, and is a table referred to for opening and closing the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a. The state of the second large opening) 140a is defined in association with the value of the timekeeping counter 203g (see FIG. 98 (c)). Specifically, in the case of jackpot A, the value of the timekeeping counter 223g is a value corresponding to the range of 0 to 7 seconds, and it is defined that the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is closed. , It is stipulated that the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened after 7 seconds. If 7 seconds or more have passed since the start of the first round, the flow path through which the game ball flows is set to the front route (see FIG. 96 (a)), so that the second specific winning opening (second) The game ball that has entered the large opening) 140a flows down the front route.

Further, in the case of jackpot B, the value of the time counter 223g is a value corresponding to the range of 0 to 5 seconds, and it is defined that the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is open for 5 seconds. After that, it is defined that the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is opened. During the 5 seconds from the start of the first round, the flow path through which the game ball flows is set to the back route (see FIG. 96 (b)), so the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a The game ball that enters the ball flows down the back route.

The flow path switching table 202g provides a flow path through which the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a flows down during one round of the jackpot and during the interval period after the end of the first round. It is a table referred to for switching, and the state of the flow path is defined in association with the value of the timekeeping counter 203g.

Specifically, the flow path is defined as the back route from the start of one round until 6.5 seconds have passed. As described above, in the case of jackpot B, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed 5 seconds after the start of the first round, so that the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed. There is a 1.5 second margin between the time when the is closed and the time when the flow path is switched. As a result, even if the game ball enters just before the closing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a, the flow path can be switched after surely advancing to the back route.

Further, after 6.5 seconds have passed from the start of the first round, the flow path is defined to be the front route until the end of the first round. As described above, the setting of the flow path is controlled so as to be the front route except for the first round of the jackpot. Therefore, even after the first round is completed, the flow path is maintained in the state of the front route. The state of this front route continues until the next big hit is won and the route is switched to the back route.

<Regarding the control process in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 105. First, FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment. This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In each of the special symbol variation processing (S104), S201 to S211, S221, and S213, S214, respectively, S201 to S211, S231, and S213 of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 67) in the third embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S214 is executed. Then, in the special symbol variation processing in the fifth embodiment, in the processing of S211 it is determined that the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start processing is a big hit of the special symbol (this time). S211: Yes), when the start of the jackpot game is set (S231), then the ball entry waiting flag 203r is set to off (S241), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control device 110.

Among the main processes of the main control device 110, in each of the processes S1001 to S1003 and S1006 to S1017, S1001 to S1003 and S1006 to the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S1017 is executed. Then, in the main process of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S1003 is completed, the jackpot control process 4 (S1041) is executed instead of the jackpot control process 3 (FIG. 69) in the third embodiment. .. The jackpot control process 4 executes various effects according to the jackpot, opens or closes the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or opens or closes the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. It is a process for opening or closing.

When the big hit control process 4 is completed, the ball entry detection process (S1042) is executed instead of the small hit control process 2 (FIG. 70) in the third embodiment. This ball entry detection process (S1042) is performed after the jackpot ends, based on the type of the ball entry port (short-time entry ball opening 501 and probability variation entry ball opening 501 to 504) in which the game ball first enters after the jackpot starts. This is a process for setting the game state of. When this ball entry detection process (S1042) is completed, each process after S1006 is executed.

Next, the jackpot control process 4 (S1041) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 4 (S1041).

In each of the jackpot control processes 4 (S1041), S1101 to S1104 and S1108 to S1111, the same processes as the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 69) in the third embodiment are executed. Then, in the jackpot control process 4 (S1041) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S1102 is completed, instead of the processes of S1131 to S1133 of the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 69) in the third embodiment, S1141 and S1142 Executes the processing of.

Specifically, it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot (S1101: Yes), the value of the round number counter 203g is set to 0 and reset (S1102), and then the flow path switching member 734 is placed on the front side of the front view. By driving to, the flow path is set to the back route (S1141). Then, the large opening flag 203s, the flow path flag 203t, and the payout flag 203u are set to off (S1142), and this process ends.

Further, in the jackpot control process 4 (S1041) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S1104 is completed, instead of each process of S1134, S1135, S1107 of the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 69) in the third embodiment, Round start processing is executed (S1143). This round start process (S1143) is a process of setting the start of a round at the timing of starting each round of jackpots. When the round start process (S1143) is completed, this process ends. The details of the round start process (S1143) will be described later with reference to FIG. 102.

Further, in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 69) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied in the processing of S1108 (S1108: No). However, in the present embodiment, the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is satisfied in the processing of S1108. When it is determined that the process has not been performed (S1108: No), the second large opening setting process (S1144) and the flow path setting process (S1145) are executed, and then the process is terminated. The second large opening opening setting process (S1144) is a process for setting the opening and closing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a, and the flow path setting process (S1145) is the second variable winning device 140. This is a process for setting the inner flow path to either the front route or the back route. The details of the second large opening setting process (S1144) and the flow path setting process (S1145) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 4 (S1041) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S1109 is completed, the process of S1146 is executed instead of the process of S1135 and S1136 in the third embodiment, and the process proceeds to the process of S1110. Transition. In this process of S1146, the large opening flag 203s is turned off (S1146).

Further, in the processing of S1110, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is 8 (S1110: Yes), the processing of S1147 is performed. In the process of S1147, the flow path flag 203t and the payout flag 203u are set to off (S1147). When the processing of S1147 is completed, the end of the jackpot is set (S1111), and the main processing is completed.

Next, the round start process (S1143) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this round start process (S1143). The round start process (S1143) is a process for making various settings for starting a new round.

In this round start process, first, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S4401). The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. After setting the round number command, 1 is added to the value of the round number counter 203g to match the number of rounds of the newly started round with the value of the round number counter 203g (S4402).

When the processing of S4402 is completed, the value of the time counting counter 203q is then reset to time the elapsed time from the start of a new round (S4403), and whether or not the value of the round number counter 203g is 1. Determine (S4404).

As a result of the processing of S4404, if it is determined that the value of the round number counter 203g is not 1 (that is, it is any of 2 to 8) (S4404: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened. After setting (S4405), this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the round number counter 203g is 1, the process of S4405 is skipped and the main process is terminated as it is. By this process, the opening of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a can be set at the start of the 2nd to 8th rounds, and the player can be given an opportunity to obtain a large number of prize balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the second large opening setting process (S1144) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the second large opening setting process (S1144). The second large opening opening setting process (S1144) is a process for setting the opening / closing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a in one round in which the state after the jackpot is completed is drawn by the lottery device 300. be.

In this second large opening setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter 203g is 1. (S4501). Then, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter 203g is not 1 (that is, 2 to 8) (S4501: No), the present is 2 to 8 rounds (and the interval period before the start of these rounds). Since it is not necessary to drive the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4501, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter 203g is 1 (S4501: Yes), first, in order to open / close the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a, first , The second large opening switching table 202f is read out (S4502). Then, of the read second large opening switching table 202f, the portion corresponding to the jackpot type this time is compared with the value of the timekeeping counter 203q, and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is compared. The state is specified (S4503), and it is determined whether or not the current period is the period in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a should be opened (S4504).

In the processing of S4504, when it is determined that the current period should be the open state (S4504: Yes), it is determined whether or not the large opening flag 203s is set to ON (S4505), and the large opening flag 203s is set to ON. If this is done (S4505: Yes), it indicates that the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a has already been opened, so that this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4505, when it is determined that the large opening flag 203s is not on (that is, it is off) (S4505: No), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed. Since it indicates that the state is set, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is set to the open state (S4506), the large opening flag 203s is set to ON (S4507), and this processing is performed. To finish. By setting the large opening flag 203s to ON in the processing of S4507, in the second large opening setting processing (S1144) from the next time onward, in the processing of S4505, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a Is determined to have already been released, so the process can be terminated as it is.

Further, in the processing of S4504, when it is determined that the present is not the period in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a should be opened (that is, the period in which it should be closed) (S4504). : No), then it is determined whether or not the large opening flag 203s is set to off (S4508), and if it is determined to be off (S4508: Yes), the second specific winning opening (second) has already been determined. Since it indicates that the large opening) 140a is in the closed state, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4508, when it is determined that the large opening flag 203s is not off (that is, it is on) (S4508: No), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened. Since it indicates that the state is set, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed (S4509), the large opening flag 203s is set to off (S4510), and this processing is performed. To finish. By setting the large opening flag 203s to off in the processing of S4510, in the second large opening setting processing (S1144) from the next time onward, in the processing of S4508, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a Is determined to have already been released, so the process can be terminated as it is.

Next, the flow path setting process (S1145) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing this flow path setting process (S1145). The flow path setting process (S1145) is a process for setting the flow path through which the game ball flows down to either the front route or the back route in the first round in which the state after the jackpot is completed is drawn by the lottery device 700. be.

In the flow path setting process (S1145), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter 203g is 1. (S4601). Then, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter 203g is not 1 (that is, 2 to 8) (S4601: No), the current time is any of 2 to 8 rounds (or the interval before the start of these rounds). Since it is a period) and there is no need to switch the flow path, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter 203g is 1 (S4601: Yes), first, in order to set the flow path, the flow path switching table 202g is read out (S4602). Then, the read flow path switching table 202 g is compared with the value of the timekeeping counter 203q to identify the state of the flow path (front route, back route) (S4603), and the current period is the period to be set as the back route. It is determined whether or not there is (S4604).

In the process of S4604, when it is determined that the current period should be set to the back route (S4604: Yes), it is determined whether or not the flow path flag 203t is set to off (S4605), and it is set to off. If this is done (S4605: Yes), it indicates that the flow path has already been set to the back route (the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted toward the front side), so that this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4605, when it is determined that the flow path flag 203t is not off (that is, it is on) (S4605: No), it means that the flow path is set to the front route. By tilting the path switching valve 731 toward the front side, the back side flow path 732b is opened, and the game ball is set so that the game ball can travel on the back route through the back route guide hole 742b (S4606). Then, the flow path flag 203t is set to ON (S4607), and this process is terminated. By setting the large opening flag 203s to off in the processing of S4607, it is determined that the flow path has already been set to the back route in the processing of S4605 in the next and subsequent flow path setting processing (S1145). , The process can be terminated as it is.

Further, in the processing of S4604, when it is determined that the current period is not the period to be set in the back route (that is, the period to be set in the front route) (S4604: No), then the flow path flag 203t is turned on. If it is determined whether or not it is set to (S4608), and if it is determined that it is on (S4608: Yes), it indicates that the flow path has already been set to the front route, so this process is terminated as it is. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S4608, when it is determined that the flow path flag 203t is not on (that is, is off) (S4608: No), it indicates that the flow path is set to the back route. Therefore, by tilting the flow path switching member 731 to the back side, the front side flow path 732a is opened, and the game ball is set so that the game ball can advance the front route through the front route guide hole 742a (S4609). Then, the flow path flag 203u is set to ON (S4610) to end this process. By setting the flow path flag 203u to ON in the process of S4610, it is determined that the flow path has already been set to the front route in the process of S4608 in the next and subsequent flow path setting processes (S1145). The process can be terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the ball entry detection process (S1042) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. This ball entry detection process (S1041) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 100) of the main control device 110, and as described above, the game ball first enters the ball after the jackpot starts. This is a process for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot based on the type of the mouth (short-time entry ball opening 501 and probability variation entry ball opening 501 to 504).

In the ball entry detection process (S1042), first, it is determined whether or not the payout flag 203u is on (S4301). When it is determined that the payout flag 203u is on in the processing of S4301 (S4301: Yes), it indicates that the jackpot is in progress and the lottery of the gaming state after the jackpot is completed is completed. It is determined whether or not it is detected that the game ball has entered the winning opening (large opening opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a (S4303).

When it is determined that the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a has been detected in the processing of S4303 is detected (S4303: Yes). , The payout of the prize ball to be given to the player is set (S4304), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if no game ball has entered either the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a (S4303: No), the process of S4304 is performed. Skip and end this process as it is.

In the process of S4301, if it is determined that the payout flag 203u is not on (that is, it is off) (S4301: No), then it is determined whether or not the entry waiting flag 203r is set to on (S4302). ). If it is determined in the processing of S4302 that the ball entry waiting flag 203r is not on (that is, it is off) (S4302: No), it means that the current period is not the period for drawing the game state after the jackpot ends. Therefore, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball entry standby flag 203r is on (S4302: Yes), it is determined that the game ball has entered one of the probability variation entry ports (probability variation entry ball ports 502 to 504). It is determined whether or not it has been detected (S4305), and if it is determined that it has been detected that a game ball has entered, the probability variation flag 203e is turned on to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot ends. (S4306).

When the processing of S4306 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the entry port into which the game ball has entered is the probability variation entry port 503 (S4307), and if it is determined to be the probability variation entry port 503 (S4307). : Yes), a normal state command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S4309), and the process shifts to S4310. On the other hand, in the process of S4307, when it is determined that the entry port into which the game ball has entered is not the probability variation entry port 503 (that is, the probability variation entry ball port 502 or the probability variation entry ball port 504) (S4307: No), a loop state command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S4308), and the process shifts to S4310.

The loop state command set in the process of S4308 or the normal state command set in the process of S4309 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the main process executed by the MPU 201 (FIG. FIG. It is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of (see 100). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 switches the mode of the effect to be executed depending on whether the normal state command or the loop state command is received. Specifically, when a loop state command is received, an effect suggesting that the loop state is advantageous to the player is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing that the player is in the loop state.

In the process of S4310 executed after the process of S4308 or S4309 is completed, the entry waiting flag 203r is set to off and the payout flag 203u is set to indicate that the lottery of the game state after the end of the big hit is completed. Is set to on (S4310) to end this process.

In the process of S4305, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered any of the probabilistic ball entrances (probability change ball ports 501 to 504) (S4305: No), then the time saving ball slot 501 is reached. It is determined whether or not it is detected that the game ball has entered (S4311). Then, when it is determined that it has not been detected that the game ball has entered the time-saving entry slot 501 (S4311: No), then the end condition of the first round, which is a round in which the game state after the big hit is drawn. Is determined whether or not is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the round.

If it is determined in the process of S4312 that the end condition of the first round is not satisfied (S4312: No), it means that the period of drawing the game state after the end of the big hit continues, so this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the end condition of the first round is satisfied (S4312: Yes), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed without setting the game state after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, in order to shift the game state after the jackpot to the low probability state of the special symbol, the process is shifted to S4313.

Here, if one round ends without entering any of the entry ports (short-time entry entry 501 and probability variation entry entry 501 to 504), the game shifts to a low-probability state of a special symbol. The reason for this is to prevent the player from shifting to a high-probability state of a special symbol that is advantageous to the player simply by not launching the game ball in the first round. That is, when a game ball does not enter any of the entry ports (time-saving entry opening 501 and probability variation entry opening 501 to 504), the state is configured to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol. Then, by the game method of not launching the game ball until the end of the first round and launching the game ball after the second round, while winning the prize ball in the 2nd to 8th rounds, the high probability state of the special symbol is continued. You can continue. Therefore, in order to prevent the hall in which the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is installed from suffering a disadvantage, any of the entry ports (time-saving entry opening 501 and probability variation entry opening 501 to 504) However, if the game ball does not enter, it is configured to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol.

Returning to FIG. 105, the description will be continued. In the process of S4311, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the time-saving entry slot 501 (S4311: Yes), in order to shift the game state after the end of the jackpot to the low probability state of the special symbol, S4312 The process is skipped and the process is transferred to S4313.

In the process of S4313, the probability variation flag 203e is set to off, and 100 is set to the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f (S4313). As a result, after the jackpot ends, the special symbol shifts to the low-probability state, and the normal symbol is shortened for 100 fluctuations.

When the processing of S4313 is completed, a normal state command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S4314). Then, in order to indicate that the lottery of the game state after the end of the big hit is completed, the entry waiting flag 203r is set to off, the payout flag 203u is set to on (S4315), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to draw the game state after the end of the jackpot by the lottery device 700 in the first round of the jackpot. Then, by switching the setting of the flow path switching valve 731 during one round of the jackpot, the flow path (front route or back route) in which the game ball travels can be switched. Further, the switching timing of the flow path switching valve 731 is fixed regardless of the jackpot type, and the opening timing of the second specific winning opening (second major opening opening) 140a is changed according to the jackpot type, so that the game ball can be played. It is configured to control the route to proceed. As a result, the game ball can be advanced to the same flow path (front route or back route) for each jackpot type.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of game balls that can be entered into the lottery device 700 is unlimited in the first round of drawing the game state after the jackpot is completed. That is, all the game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 140 are configured to be discharged to the outside via the lottery device 700. As a result, the configuration for limiting the game balls that can enter the lottery device 700 can be omitted, so that the configuration of the lottery device 700 can be simplified.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the guide passage 745a for guiding the game ball to each entry port (short-time entry ball opening 501 and probability variation entry ball opening 501 to 504) in the ball entry port distribution unit 740. ~ 745d are provided on the cover members 744a and 744b. That is, the passage is provided in a member different from the flow path forming portion 743 including the distribution rotating body 741. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the vibration when the game ball flows down the guide passage to be conducted to the distribution rotating body 741, so that the distribution rotating body 741 moves in the opposite direction based on the vibration when the game ball flows down. It is possible to suppress the rotation.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the magnet 807a provided on the distribution rotating body 741 and the magnet 747a provided on the cover member 744a repel each other, and the magnet 807b provided on the distribution rotating body 741 , The magnet 747b provided on the cover member 744b repels each other to prevent the distribution rotating body 741 from swinging to the opposite side due to vibration or the like, but the configuration is not limited to this configuration. ..

For example, magnets may be provided at the right end and the left end of the partition portion 801 provided on the distribution rotating body 741. Further, among the flow path forming portions 743, a portion of the flow path forming portion 743 that comes into contact with the right end of the partition portion 801 in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right and a left end of the partition portion 801 in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left. A magnet may be arranged at a portion that comes into contact with the magnet. Further, the magnet provided on the distribution rotating body 741 side and the magnet provided on the flow path forming portion 743 side may be oriented so as to attract each other. As a result, the distribution rotating body 741 can be stably stopped by being attracted to the magnet provided in the flow path forming portion 743 in a state of being swung to the right side or the left side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the distribution rotating body 741 rotates due to the influence of vibration or the like and swings to the opposite side.

Further, among the flow path forming portions 743, the portion that contacts the right end of the partition portion 801 in the state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right and the left end of the partition portion 801 in the state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left. A cushioning material may be provided at each of the portions in contact with the water. As a result, the state of the distribution rotating body 741 is switched, and the impact when the right end or the left end of the partition portion 801 collides with the flow path forming portion 743 can be alleviated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the opposite side due to the bounce due to the collision. A cushioning material may be provided in the partition portion 801 of the distribution rotating body 741, or the partition portion 801 and the entire flow path forming portion 743 may be composed of the cushioning material.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the portions where the distribution rotating body 741 and the flow path forming portion 743 come into contact with each other are limited to both end portions of the partition portion 801 but are not limited to this. For example, in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right side, the lower portion of the ball stop portion 804 may be configured to come into contact with the guide passage 745c. Similarly, the lower portion of the ball repulsion portion 803 and the guide passage 745d may be configured to come into contact with each other. Further, in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left, the lower portion of the ball stop portion 805 and the guidance passage 745b, and the ball repulsion portion 802 and the guidance passage 745a may be configured to come into contact with each other. As a result, the impact when the game ball collides with the ball repulsion portions 802 and 803 and the impact when the game ball is received by the ball stop portions 804 and 805 are conducted and dispersed in the respective guide passages 745a to 745d. be able to. Therefore, the impact received by the ball repulsion portions 802 and 803 and the ball stop portions 804 and 805 can be alleviated.

Further, when the ball repulsion portions 802, 803 and the ball stop portions 804 and 805 are brought into contact with each of the guide passages 745a to 745d, a cushioning material may be provided at each contact portion. As a result, the impact received by the ball repulsion portion 802,803 and the ball stop portion 804,805 can be further mitigated. Further, since the cushioning material absorbs the impact when the ball repulsion portions 802, 803 and the ball stop portions 804 and 805 collide with the respective guide passages 745a to 745d, it is possible to prevent the distribution rotating body 741 from bouncing back. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the distribution rotating body 741 swings in the opposite direction due to the impact when it collides with each of the guide passages 745a to 745d.

Further, a convex protrusion is provided at the lower part of the ball repulsion portion 802, 803 and the ball stop portion 804, 805, and a concave recess is provided in the guide passages 745a to 745b. It may be configured so that it fits with the concave recess. That is, in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right, a convex protrusion provided at the lower part of the ball repulsion portion 803 and the ball stop portion 804, and a concave portion provided in the guide passage 745d and the guide passage 745c, respectively. In a state where the dents of the shape are fitted and the distribution rotating body 741 is swung to the left side, the convex protrusions provided at the lower parts of the ball repulsion portion 802 and the ball stop portion 805, respectively, It may be configured so that the concave recesses provided in the guide passage 745a and the guide passage 745b are fitted with each other. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the distribution rotating body 741 to rotate, so that it is possible to prevent the distribution rotating body 741 from switching to a state of swinging in the opposite direction due to vibration or the like.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered the front route guide hole 742a and the back route guide hole 742b provided on the upper surface of the ball entry port distribution portion 740 are guided to the distribution rotating body 741. The flow paths for each are configured in a straight line, but the flow path is not limited to this. For example, the shape of the flow path for guiding the game ball that has entered the front route guide hole 742a to the distribution rotating body 741 may be configured to be "inverted" when viewed from the front. .. With this configuration, the game ball flows down the flow path in the lower left direction in the front view, and falls from the flow path to the distribution rotating body 741. That is, when the game ball falls from the flow path to the distribution rotating body 741, it falls in a state of being urged in the lower left direction, so that the game ball is swung to the right while the distribution rotating body 741 is swinging. It is possible to make it difficult to collide with the ball repulsion portion 802. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the distribution rotating body 741 rebounds based on the impact when the game ball collides with the ball repulsion portion 802 and switches to the state of swinging to the left.

Similarly, the flow path for guiding the game ball that has entered the back route guide hole 742b to the distribution rotating body 741 may be configured to have a "dogleg" shape when viewed from the front. With this configuration, the game ball flows down the flow path in the lower right direction in the front view, and falls from the flow path to the distribution rotating body 741. That is, when the game ball falls from the flow path to the distribution rotating body 741, it falls in a state of being urged in the lower right direction, so that the game ball is in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 is swinging to the left. Can make it difficult for the ball to collide with the ball repulsion portion 803. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the distribution rotating body 741 rebounds based on the impact when the game ball collides with the ball repulsion portion 803 and switches to the state of swinging to the right.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the inner diameter of the front flow path 732a for allowing the game ball to flow down to the front route guide hole 742a of the entry port distribution portion 740 is configured to be the same regardless of the position. Similarly, the inner diameter of the back side flow path 732b for flowing down to the back route guide hole 742b, the flow path for guiding the game ball entering the front route guide hole 742a to the rotating body 741, and the back. The inner diameter of the flow path for guiding the game ball that has entered the route guide hole 742b to the rotating body 741 is also configured to be the same regardless of the position, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each of the above flow paths may be tapered. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the position where the game ball flows down from varying, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball deviates from the flow path corresponding to the jackpot type.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution rotating body 741 is fixed in the direction of rotating in the left-right direction in the front view, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ball is rotated 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise around a straight line passing through the center of the upper surface and the center of the bottom surface of the ball entry port distribution portion 740 in the direction of rotation toward the front side and the back side. Orientation) may be used. This makes it difficult for the player to confirm the traveling direction of the game ball, so that the game ball first enters any of the entry ports (short-time entry ball opening 501 and probability variation entry ball opening 5023 to 504). It can be difficult to confirm whether the ball has hit. Therefore, since the lottery result by the lottery device 700 becomes ambiguous, it is possible to continue to hold the expectation that the special symbol will shift to the high probability state even after the first round is completed.

Further, the lottery device 700 may be rotated at a constant speed during the jackpot. As a result, the direction in which the player can easily recognize the path of the game ball traveling inside the lottery device 700 (the direction in which the distribution rotating body 741 rotates in the left-right direction) and the direction in which it is difficult to recognize the path of the game ball (direction in which the distribution rotating body 741 rotates in the left-right direction). The direction in which the distribution rotating body 741 rotates toward the back or the front) can be repeated. Therefore, depending on the timing at which the game ball enters the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a, the game ball in which the game ball has entered can be immediately recognized, and after the big hit is completed. It is possible to realize a different state of playability, that is, a state in which the game state of is not clearly recognized.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and a second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a are provided, and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is provided in the first round. The large opening) 140a was opened, and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a was opened in the 2nd to 8th rounds, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is provided, and in all rounds, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is provided at the timing based on the second large opening switching table 202f. May be configured to open and close. Further, in all rounds, the flow path switching valve 731 may be switched at the timing specified in the flow path switching table 202g. As a result, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a can be used to perform both the lottery of the game state after the big hit and the acquisition of the prize ball during the big hit. Large opening) 65a can be omitted. Therefore, the production cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by simplifying the configuration.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game state after the end of the big hit is drawn by lottery in the first round of the big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the eighth round, which is the final round of the jackpot, the lottery device 700 may be used to draw a lottery for the game state after the jackpot ends. By performing the lottery in the 8th round, it is possible to delay the timing at which the type of entry port (short-time entry slot 501 or probability variation entry slot 501 to 504) into which the game ball enters is determined. It is possible to keep the player feeling the expectation of entering the probabilistic ball opening 502 or the probabilistic ball opening 504, which is advantageous for the player, for a longer period of time.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the state of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is determined based on the setting of the large opening flag 203s, but the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is determined. A sensor for determining whether the open opening (open opening) 140a is open or closed may be provided, and the state of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a may be determined based on the detection result of the sensor. In addition, when the detection result of the sensor indicates an open state even though the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is set to be closed, or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a If the detection result of the sensor indicates a closed state even though the opening of the sensor is set, an error may be notified. As a result, when the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a does not operate normally due to a failure, repair can be performed immediately based on the notification.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

For example, in the above embodiment, a plurality of jackpot types are provided, and the directions of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b (or flow path switching valves 731) are changed according to the jackpot types to determine the route through which the game ball passes. It was decided whether to use the front route or the back route. On the other hand, the route through which the game ball entering the lottery device 300 (or the lottery device 700) passes may be randomly selected as the front route or the back route. That is, the jackpot type may be configured so as not to affect the flow path of the game ball flowing down in the lottery device 300 (or in the lottery device 700). As a configuration for randomly distributing the flow path of the game ball, for example, a known crune means (two-hole crune) having two through holes is used as a flow path switching valve 331a, 331b (or a flow path switching valve 731). ) May be provided instead. Then, when the game ball that has reached the two-hole crune passes through one of the two through holes of the two-hole crune, it is brought to the front side of the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741). When it flows down and passes through the other through hole, it may be configured to flow down to the back side of the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741). With this configuration, does the game ball flow down to the front side of the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) until the game ball actually passes through one of the through holes of the two-hole crune? , It is possible to make it impossible to determine whether it flows down to the back side. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player feeling the expectation that the game ball will pass through the route on the front side, which is advantageous for the player, for a long time.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erasing switch 122 turned on, the setting of the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) is swung to the right. It was configured to reset to (face-up state), but without changing the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741), each ball entry port (time saving ball entry 501, and probability change) The correspondence between the ball mouths 502 to 504) and the state of transition after the end of the big hit may be changed. That is, when it is determined that the state of the distribution rotating body 341 is a state of swinging to the left (face-up state) based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263, the game ball enters the time-saving entry slot 501. After the jackpot ends, the setting is changed to the high probability state of the special symbol, and when the game ball enters the probability variation entry ball opening 504, the setting is changed to the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up by turning on the power, the initial setting can be performed only by changing the setting of the ball entry port by software. Therefore, the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) The rotating motor 264 for returning the machine to the initial position can be omitted, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

If it is detected that the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) has swung to the left when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erasing switch 122 turned on, a hole is formed. The store clerk may be configured to notify the clerk of the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) to switch to the state of swinging to the right. As a result, the rotation motor 264 for returning the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) to the initial position (the state of swinging to the right) can be omitted. Therefore, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, while the notification is being performed, the game may be stopped so that the normal game cannot be performed. Here, the game stopped state is, for example, a state in which the prize ball is not paid out even if the game ball enters the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a, or the probability changing entry ball. Even if the game ball enters the mouths 502 to 504, the state does not shift to the high probability state of the special symbol, or even if the operation handle is operated, the game ball cannot be launched. Point to. That is, even if the player plays a game, it means that the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) cannot receive the benefit of swinging to the left side.

As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erasing switch 122 turned on, the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b (or the flow path switching) are performed regardless of the state immediately before the power is turned off. The state of the valve 731) is set to the initial state. Therefore, when the game ball is thrown into the lottery device 300 (or the lottery device 700) with the sorting rotating body 341 (or the sorting rotating body 741) swinging to the left, the sorting rotating body 341 (or the sorting rotating body 741) is thrown into the lottery device 300 (or the lottery device 700). ) Switches to the state of swinging to the right (see FIGS. 14 and 94). That is, when it is notified that the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) is in a state of swinging to the left when the power is turned on, the clerk in the hall sends the game ball to the lottery device 300 (or the lottery device 700). The distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) can be easily switched to the state of swinging to the right by throwing only one ball. The game ball thrown in by the clerk advances in the guidance passage 408c (or the guidance passage 745c) and enters the probability variation entry ball port 503, but as described above, the game is stopped until the notification is canceled. The transition to the high probability state of the special symbol is suppressed. Therefore, the state of the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) can be reset without changing the state of the gaming machine.

Further, instead of the detection result of the position detection sensor 263, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, and then the distribution rotation is performed based on the type of the ball entry port that first enters the ball. It may be configured to determine whether or not the body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) is in a state of swinging to the left. Specifically, when the game ball first enters the probability-changing ball opening 503 and the probability-changing ball opening 504 in which the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) can enter the ball while swinging to the left. May be configured to display an error. As a result, not only the rotary motor 264 but also the position detection sensor 263 can be omitted, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, even if the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) is swung to the left side, the game is played as it is. May be configured so that As a result, if the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) swings to the left when the power is turned off, the sorting rotating body 341 (or the sorting rotating body 741) swings to the left even after the power is turned on. The player can start the game as it is. Therefore, for example, in a hall where the power is turned on to the gaming machines with the RAM erasing switches 122 turned on all at once when the store is opened, the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) of each pachinko machine 10 is used during the closing time of the hall. It is advantageous for the player to check the state or to search for the pachinko machine 10 in which the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) is swung to the left when the store is opened. That is, since the number of players who play games in the hall when the store is opened or closed can be increased, the operating rate of the hall can be increased.

In addition, when the ball enters the probability change ball opening 502 or the probability change ball port 504 in the previous big hit, the distribution rotation body 341 (or the distribution rotation body 741) is in a state of swinging to the left, so the distribution rotation The state in which the body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) swings to the left is basically a high-probability state of a special symbol. However, if the power is turned off in this state and the power is restored with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, the setting of the high probability state of the special symbol is erased, and the state shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) is in a special state of swinging to the left and a low probability state of the special symbol. It may be configured to perform a display effect dedicated to this special state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing that the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) is in a state of swinging to the left.

In the first to fourth embodiments, the distribution rotating body 341 is mounted on the rectangular floor 401, the pair of rectangular passage walls 402, and the floor below the shaft 406 in the guide passages 408b and 408c. A pair of inclined portions 403b, 405b extending obliquely from 401 to the floor portion 401, and ball stoppers 403a, 405a provided at the ends of the inclined portions 403b, 405b opposite to the floor portion 401. However, the distribution rotating body 341 is not limited to this shape. For example, it may have a windmill shape.

In the first to fourth embodiments, the guide passage 408a and the guide passage 408d of the distribution rotating body 341 are extended to the downstream side of the shaft 406, and the game flows down the guide passage 408a or the guide passage 408d. Even if the sphere passed through the shaft 406, it was configured to flow down on the floor portion 401 (see FIGS. 12 (b) and 15 (b)). On the other hand, of the guide passage 408a and the guide passage 408d, the passage on the downstream side of the shaft 406 may be abolished. Instead of deleting the passage on the downstream side of the shaft 406 of the distribution rotating body 341, a passage on the downstream side of the shaft 406 may be provided on the cover portion 423 side. That is, the guide passage 408a and the guide passage 408d are provided on the right back side of the cover portion 423 in the front view and on the left front side of the cover portion 423 in the front view, on the downstream side of the shaft 406. When the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right with respect to the shaft 406, the guidance passage 408a of the distribution rotating body 341 and the passage on the right back side of the cover portion 423 in the front view are combined with each other to form the above embodiment. It is configured to form a guidance passage similar to the guidance passage 408a. When the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left with respect to the shaft 406, the guidance passage 408d of the distribution rotating body 341 and the passage on the left front side of the cover portion 423 in front view are engaged with each other to guide the above embodiment. A guidance passage similar to the passage 408d is formed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load due to the weight of the game ball on the passage on the downstream side of the shaft 406. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408a or the guidance passage 408d, the ball is distributed. It is possible to reliably prevent the rotating body 341 from rotating due to the weight of the game ball and swinging to the opposite side.

In the first to fourth embodiments, the case where the game ball passes through the front route is more advantageous for the player than the case where the game ball passes through the back route, but the back route is more advantageous than the front route. It may be configured to be. That is, the time-saving entry ball opening 501 and the probability variation entry ball port 503 may be arranged on the back side of the front view, and the probability variation entry ball port 502 and the probability variation entry ball port 504 may be arranged on the front side of the front view. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts in which the game ball is attracted to the front side by a magnet or the like and the game ball is advanced to the front route.

In the fourth embodiment, as a mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, an effect in which the main character and the enemy fight is executed, and the main character wins the enemy in the display effect during the jackpot game. By doing so, it was suggested that after the end of this big hit, it would shift to the high-probability state of the special symbol, and after the end of the next big hit, it would shift to the high-probability state of the special symbol. On the other hand, even if you do not check the result of the battle with the enemy to the end, you may prepare a production that makes it clear that the hero will win. For example, when shifting to a high probability state of a special symbol this time and after the end of the next big hit, a palm-sized enemy may appear with a certain probability (for example, 10%). By the appearance of an enemy whose size is significantly smaller than that of a normal enemy, it is possible to convince the player that the main character will win when the enemy appears. Also, during the fluctuation production that becomes a big hit in state A, state C, and state E, the hero discovers a treasure box containing treasure without encountering an enemy with a certain probability (for example, 10% when winning big hit A). It may be configured so that the effect is performed. Then, in the production during the jackpot game after the production of discovering the treasure is performed, the production of bringing the treasure back to the family may be performed. By performing the production of discovering the treasure, it is possible to convince the player that the game will shift to the high probability state of the special symbol before the start of the jackpot game and after the end of the next jackpot. .. In this way, by giving a plurality of variations to the production, it is possible to have not only a feeling of expectation that the high-probability state of the special symbol is continuous, but also a feeling of expectation that a rare production will be performed. It is possible to further improve the interest in the game of the person.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is not provided. Things can be mentioned. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

A pachinko machine may be a combination of some or all of the above-described embodiments.

In addition to the pachinko machine of the present invention, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Structure of accessory for determining probability change for 2 times)
Front to either the entry port where the game ball can enter, the first and second areas where the game ball that has entered the entry port can enter, and either the first area or the second area. A player is provided with a distribution means for distributing the game balls that have entered the entry ball opening, and based on the fact that the game balls have entered the first area, the player has more than the case where the game balls have entered the second area. In a gaming machine that shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the distribution means shifts to a first state in which the game ball can be distributed to the first region, and to the first region or the second region. A variable means capable of changing the game ball to a second state in which the game ball can be distributed, and a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game ball can pass in the first state. The variable means includes a third flow path and a fourth flow path through which the game ball can pass in the second state, and the variable means allows the game ball to pass through the second flow path. In this case, the distribution means is changed from the first state to the second state, and when the gaming ball passes through the third flow path, the distribution is performed from the second state to the first state. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that the means is variable.

According to the game machine A1, the variable means can distribute the game ball to the first state, which is a state in which the game ball can be distributed to the first region, and the game ball to the first region or the second region. It is variable to the second state, which is a state. Then, in the first state, the game ball can pass through the first flow path and the second flow path, and in the second state, the game ball can pass through the third flow path and the fourth flow path. .. Here, when the game ball passes through the second flow path, the state of the distribution means is changed from the first state to the second state by the variable means, and when the game ball passes through the third flow path, The state of the sorting means is changed from the second state to the first state by the variable means. As a result, if the distribution means is changed to the first state, the player is informed that the game ball is distributed to the first area and shifts to the special game state in the next distribution performed by the distribution means. It can be recognized. Therefore, from the time when the sorting means is changed to the first state until the next sorting is performed by the sorting means, the player feels reassured and satisfied with the transition to the special gaming state. It has the effect of allowing you to play games while hugging.

In the gaming machine A1, the third flow path allows the passed game ball to enter the first region, and the fourth flow path allows the passed game ball to enter the second region. A game machine A2 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball that has passed through the third flow path enters the first region, and the game ball that has passed through the fourth flow path enters the second region. , The game ball enters the first region and shifts to the special game state, and the state of the sorting means changes to the first state. Therefore, since it is possible to continuously shift to the special gaming state which is advantageous for the player, the player who recognizes that the game ball has shifted to the special gaming state based on passing through the third flow path Therefore, there is an effect that a sense of security and satisfaction can be given to the continuous special game state.

A3 of the gaming machine A1 or A2, wherein the variable means can change the state of the sorting means based on the weight of the passing game ball.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the state of the distribution means is changed by the variable means based on the weight of the passing game ball, the state of the distribution means can be changed by the variable means by a natural operation. Therefore, there is an effect that the state of the sorting means is changed at an unnatural timing, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the gaming machine or the hall.

A4 of the gaming machines A1 to A3, wherein the variable means includes a variable suppressing means for suppressing the state of the sorting means from changing when the gaming ball has not passed.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the switching of the state of the distribution means in the state where the game ball has not passed is suppressed by the variable suppressing means, the distribution means is first at a timing different from the timing when the distribution means is changed by the variable means. It is possible to prevent the player from being switched from the state to the second state, causing damage to the player or causing distrust of the game machine or the hall.

<Characteristic B group> (Display effect according to the state of the flow path and structure for the double loop)
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the establishment of the lottery condition, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result by the winning / failing determination means, and an effect of the identification information displayed on the display means. The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player after the effect mode specifying means for specifying the mode and the identification information indicating the predetermined hit / fail determination result are displayed, and the privilege game execution means for the privileged game execution means. A game state specifying means for specifying whether the game state to be executed is a first game state or a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the game is executed. In the gaming machine having If so, the fall setting means for ending the set continuation state and setting the first game state to a fall state in which the first game state is easily specified by the game state specifying means, and the continuation setting means for the continuation. It has an effect mode changing means for changing the effect mode specified by the effect mode specifying means based on whether the state is set or the fall state is set by the fall state setting means. The gaming machine B1 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine B1, the gaming state specifying means is set to the continuous state in which the second gaming state is set to the second gaming state a plurality of times in a row so that the continuous setting means can be easily specified. When the game state specifying means is set to the continuous state, the fall setting means ends the continuous state and sets the first game state to the fall state, which is a state in which the continuous state can be easily specified. Here, the effect mode specified by the effect mode specifying means is changed based on whether the continuation state is set by the continuation setting means or the fall state is set by the effect mode setting means. NS. As a result, the player can determine whether or not the current state is the continuation state only by checking the effect mode displayed on the display means, so that the mode indicating the continuation state is displayed as the effect mode. This has the effect of giving the player a sense of security that the second gaming state is easily identified a plurality of times in a row.

In the game machine B1, after the identification information indicating the predetermined hit / fail determination result is displayed and before the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed, the game state identification means has been specified. The suggestion display control means for controlling the display means to display the suggestion effect suggesting the state is provided, and the suggestion display control means suggests that the specific result by the game state specifying means is the second gaming state. When controlling the display effect to be displayed on the display means, the display is based on whether the continuation state is set by the continuation setting means or the fall state is set by the fall state setting means. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that it specifies a suggestive effect to be caused.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the display means is controlled to display a display effect suggesting that the specific result by the game state specifying means is the second gaming state, the suggestion display control means indicates an identification indicating a predetermined hit / fail determination result. The display means is controlled so as to display a suggestion effect suggesting a state specified by the game state specifying means after the information is displayed and before the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game executing means is completed. Therefore, by displaying the suggestion effect on the display means, there is an effect that the player can feel reassured that the second game state is easily specified a plurality of times in a row. .. In addition, since the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that the suggestion effect will be displayed on the display means during the privilege game, the effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved can be improved. be.

In the gaming machine B2, the continuation setting means sets the continuation state when the specific result of the gaming state specifying means is the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the specific result by the game state specifying means is the second game state, the continuation state is set by the continuation setting means, so that the second game state is passed when the continuation state is reached. Since it is possible to prevent the state from the continuation state to the first identification by the game state specifying means to become the first gaming state, the player can continue the first gaming state. It is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game before being specified by the game state specifying means first.

In the gaming machine B3, the suggestion display control means can suggest that the continuation setting means has been set to the continuation state in the suggestion effect.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the suggestion effect, the suggestion display control means suggests that the continuation state has been set by the continuation setting means, so that the player can easily recognize that the continuation state has been set. Therefore, since it is possible to recognize that the second gaming state has become a state in which it is easy to be identified a plurality of times in succession by being set to the continuous state, it is possible to make the player play the game with peace of mind. There is an effect.

<Characteristic C group> (Distribution in two stages at the time of probabilistic lottery)
Based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination, and the privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means. The privilege game execution means and the game state to be executed after the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means are the first game state and the second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. In a gaming machine having a gaming state specifying means for specifying which state is to be set, the gaming state specifying means is based on the first lottery and a second lottery different from the first lottery. The first game state and the second game state are specified respectively, and as the first lottery, the first specific state in which the first game state is more easily specified than the second game state and the first specific state. The first lottery means for drawing which of the second specific state in which the second gaming state is more easily specified than the first specific state is set, and the second specific state as the second lottery. Even when is set, it is characterized by having a second lottery means for drawing whether or not to set a special state in which the second gaming state is more easily specified than the second gaming state. Pachinko machine C1.

According to the gaming machine C1, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are each specified by the gaming state specifying means based on the first lottery and the second lottery different from the first lottery. Then, as the first lottery, the first specific state in which the first game state is more easily specified than in the second game state and the second specific state in which the second game state is more easily specified than the first specific state. Which of the specific states is set is drawn by the first lottery means. Here, even when the second specific state is set as the second lottery, whether or not to set a special state in which the second game state is more easily specified than the second game state is drawn by the second lottery means. Will be done. As a result, in the identification of one game state by the game state specifying means, two lottery opportunities are given, one is the lottery by the first lottery means and the other is the lottery by the second lottery means. You can feel that you have more opportunities to receive it. Further, even if the result of the lottery by the first lottery means indicates the first specific state, it is expected that the result will be a lottery result in which the special state is set by the second lottery means without discouraging the player. Since the game can be played, there is an effect that the state can be sufficiently enjoyed by the game state specifying means.

In the gaming machine C1, the second lottery means draws a lottery as to whether or not to set a special state at the next identification by the gaming state specifying means based on the identification being performed by the gaming state specifying means. A gaming machine C2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the identification is performed by the game state specifying means, whether or not to set the special state at the time of the next identification by the game state specifying means is drawn by the second lottery means. As a result, even if the lottery result by the first lottery means indicates the first specific state, if it is drawn that the special state is set by the second lottery means, the first specific state is specified by the first lottery means. It is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player for the state being drawn, and it is possible to have the player play the game in anticipation that the identification will be performed in the special state at the time of the next identification by the game state identification means. Further, when the lottery result by the first lottery means shows the second specific state and the lottery result by the second lottery means shows the special state, the advantageous state for the player continues. Since the player can recognize it, there is an effect that a sense of security and satisfaction can be given to the player.

In the gaming machines C1 or C2, the gaming state specifying means is based on the entry port where the game ball can enter and the game ball entering the entry opening, and the privileged game execution means. Based on the first area in which it is specified that the gaming state executed after the execution of the privileged game is set to the first gaming state, and the gaming ball that has entered the entrance of the ball enters the privileged game. The game state executed after the execution of the privilege game by the game execution means is provided with a second area specified to be the second game state, and the first lottery and the second lottery are sent to the entrance. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it determines whether to guide the gaming ball to the first region or the second region by changing the flow direction of the entering gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state is that the game state executed after the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means is set as the first game state based on the game ball entering the ball entrance port entering the first area. Specified by specific means. Then, based on the game ball entering the ball entry port entering the second area, the game state executed after the scoring game is executed by the privilege game execution means is set as the second game state. Specified by specific means. Here, it is determined by the first lottery and the second lottery whether to guide the game ball to the first region or the second region by changing the flow direction of the game ball that has entered the ball entrance. This has the effect that the player can easily determine the result of the lottery by the first lottery and the second lottery only by confirming the flow direction of the game ball.

In the gaming machine C3, the second lottery means is a gaming machine characterized in that it draws whether or not to set a special state based on the distribution of the game balls to the first region or the second region. C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the distribution to the first area or the second area, whether or not to set the special state is drawn by the second lottery means, so that the player can draw the timing of the lottery performed by the second lottery means. Has the effect of being able to easily recognize.

In the gaming machine C4, the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game ball can pass in the special state, and the third flow path in which the passage of the game ball is restricted in the special state. The second flow path includes a flow path and a fourth flow path, and the second lottery means determines that the special state is set when the game ball passes through the third flow path, and determines that the second flow path is set. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that it is determined to release the special state when the gaming ball passes through.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the special state, the game ball can pass through the first flow path and the second flow path. Then, in the special state, the game ball is restricted from passing through the third passage and the fourth passage. Here, when the game ball passes through the third flow path, it is determined by the second lottery means that the special state is set. Further, when the game ball passes through the second flow path, it is determined by the second lottery means that the special state is released. As a result, the player can determine that the special state has been set only by confirming that the game ball passes through the third flow path, and thus confirms that the game ball passes through the third flow path. There is an effect that the player who has performed the game can play the game while having a sense of security and satisfaction that the identification is performed in the special state in the next identification by the game state specifying means.

In the gaming machine C5, the third flow path causes the passed game ball to enter the second region, and the fourth flow path allows the passed game ball to enter the first region. A gaming machine C6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the game ball that has passed through the third flow path enters the second region and the game ball that has passed through the fourth flow path enters the first region, the player passes through the third flow path. By recognizing that, it is possible to recognize that the transition to the second gaming state, which is more advantageous than the first gaming state, and the next lottery performed by the second lottery means are performed in the special state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who recognizes that the game ball has passed through the third flow path can be given a great sense of satisfaction and a sense of security for the continuous advantageous state.

<Characteristic D group> (Suppresses two or more game balls from entering the distribution means)
Front to either the entry port where the game ball can enter, the first area and the second area where the game ball entered into the entry port can enter, and either the first area or the second area. A distribution means for distributing the game balls that have entered the entry ball opening, and a switching means for switching to a ball entry permission state that allows the game balls to enter the entry ball opening for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. It is provided with a transition means for shifting to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than when the gaming ball enters the second region based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the first region. The distribution means can be changed into a first state in which the game ball can be distributed to the first region and a second state in which the game ball can be easily distributed to the second region. When one game ball that has entered the ball entry port reaches the distribution means, the game ball that has entered the ball entry port after the game ball reaches the distribution means. The gaming machine D1 is provided with a limiting means for limiting the fact that the ball is allowed to enter the ball at least while the ball is allowed to enter the ball.

According to the game machine D1, the game ball that has entered the ball entry port is distributed to either the first region or the second region by the sorting means, and the game ball is delivered to the ball entry port based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. Entering the ball is permitted for a predetermined period by the switching means. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first region, the transition means shifts the gaming state to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball enters the second region. .. Further, the variable means changes the sorting means into a first state in which the game ball can be distributed to the first region and a second state in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second region. Here, when one game ball that has entered the ball entry port reaches the distribution means, at least the game ball that has entered the ball entry port after the game ball reaches the distribution means. While the ball is allowed, it is restricted by the limiting means. As a result, it is possible to prevent two or more game balls from being distributed to the first region or the second region by the distribution means in one distribution by the distribution means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to the plurality of gaming balls being distributed to different regions in one distribution.

The gaming machine D1 is provided with a winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and when the determination result of the winning / failing determination means is a predetermined result, the restriction by the limiting means is released. The gaming machine D2, which is provided with a releasing means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination means. Then, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the hit / fail determination means is a predetermined result, the restriction by the limiting means is released by the limiting releasing means. As a result, every time the determination result by the hit / miss determination means becomes a predetermined result, the player can be made to perform the distribution by the sorting means. You can check the result separately. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the gaming machine D1 or D2 includes a discharging means for discharging a game ball whose reach to the sorting means is restricted by the limiting means to the outside of the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the game ball whose access to the distribution means is restricted by the limiting means is discharged to the outside of the game area by the discharging means, the game ball whose access to the distribution means is restricted stays in the game area. It is possible to prevent the remaining game ball from being used as it is at the time of distribution by the next distribution means. As a result, every time the distribution is performed by the distribution means, the player can launch the game ball to the entrance, so that the distribution can be performed at the player's favorite timing. This has the effect of improving the interest in the game.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, in the variable means, the gaming ball that has entered the ball entrance by the sorting means is distributed to either the first region or the second region. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that it can be changed to either one of the first state and the second state based on the above.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the ball entry port is distributed to either the first region or the second region by the distribution means, the distribution means is moved to the first state and the second state by the variable means. It is variable to one of the states. By defining the timing for switching the state of the distribution means, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the timing at which the distribution means is switched.

In the gaming machine D4, a variable suppressing means for suppressing the variable means from being changed to either the first state or the second state by the variable means in a state where the gaming ball has not reached the sorting means. A gaming machine D5 characterized by being equipped.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is suppressed by the variable suppressing means that the game ball is changed to either the first state or the second state by the variable means when the game ball has not reached the sorting means. As a result, the distribution means is switched from the first state to the second state at a timing different from the timing when the distribution means is changed by the variable means, which causes damage to the player or the game machine or the hall. It has the effect of suppressing distrust.

<Feature E group> (Switch the flow path at the timing of the attacker)
The entry port where the game ball enters and the state of the entry port are set to the entry permission state where the game ball is easy to enter and the entry restriction state where the entry of the game ball is restricted. In a gaming machine provided with a ball opening setting means and the privileged game advantageous to the player is given by switching to the ball entry permission state by the ball entrance setting means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the entry It is advantageous for the player when the game ball enters the first area where the game ball that has entered the ball mouth can enter, and compared with the case where the game ball enters the first area. The second region and the flow path in which the game ball that has entered the ball entrance port travels to the first flow path or the second flow path in which the game ball is more likely to travel to the second region than the first flow path thereof. The state of the distribution means for distributing to the flow path and the state of the distribution means are the first state in which the game ball is distributed to the first flow path based on the progress of the privilege game, and the second state. As a state setting means for setting the state of the ball at least once in the second state which is a state of being distributed to the flow path, and as a setting content for setting the state of the ball slot by the ball slot setting means in the privilege game of 1. , The first setting content in which the ball entry permission state is set when the state setting means is set to the first state, and the ball entry permission state when the second state is set. The gaming machine E1 is provided with a selection means for selecting one setting content from a plurality of setting contents including at least a second setting content to be set.

According to the game machine E1, the flow path through which the game ball that has entered the ball entry port travels is moved to the first flow path or a second region from the first flow path by the distribution means. It is distributed to the second flow path where it is easy to proceed. The state of the distribution means is divided into a first state in which the game ball is distributed to the first flow path by the state setting means and a second state in which the game ball is distributed to the second flow path based on the progress of the privilege game. It is set at least once. As a setting content for setting the state of the ball entrance by the ball entry setting means in the privilege game of 1, the first setting content in which the ball entry permission state is set when the state setting means is set to the first state. One setting content is selected by the selection means from a plurality of setting contents including at least the second setting content in which the ball entry permission state is set when the second state is set.

As a result, when the first setting content or the second setting content is selected by the selection means, the game ball that has entered the ball entry port proceeds to the same flow path regardless of the player's game method. Therefore, the player can play the game by his / her favorite game method. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious about the game.

In the gaming machine E1, the gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the selection means selects either the first setting content or the second setting content.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, either the first setting content or the second setting content is selected by the selection means, so that the ball is entered in all the privilege games. A game ball that has entered the mouth can be advanced to the same flow path regardless of the player's game method. Therefore, since the player can play the game by his / her favorite game method, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious about the game.

The gaming machine E1 or E2 includes a lottery means for drawing whether or not a predetermined lottery result is obtained, and the selection means is set as described in the second setting when the lottery by the lottery means results in a predetermined lottery result. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the content is selected.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 or E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, whether or not the predetermined lottery result is obtained is drawn by the lottery means, and when the predetermined lottery result is obtained, the second setting content is selected by the selection means, so whether or not the predetermined lottery result is obtained. Depending on the situation, it is possible to determine whether the ball entry permission state is set in the first state or the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that various playability can be realized according to the ratio in which the ball entry permission state is set in the second state, depending on the lottery content by the lottery means.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming ball that has passed through the first flow path is distributed to the first region or the second region, and the gaming ball that has passed through the second flow path is distributed to the second region. A gaming machine E4 characterized by being provided with area distribution means for distributing to.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming ball that has passed through the first flow path is distributed to the first region or the second region by the region distribution means, and the first region is Since the game ball that has passed through the two flow paths is distributed to the second region by the area distribution means, it is possible to recognize whether or not it is advantageous for the player just by checking the flow path through which the game ball passes. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine E4, the area distribution means has a first distribution state in which a game ball that has passed through the first flow path is distributed to the first area, and a game ball that has passed through the first flow path is the first. A variable means that can be changed to a second distribution state that distributes to two regions, and a first that allows a game ball that has passed through the first flow path to pass through in the first distribution state. One passage, a second passage through which the game ball passing through the second flow path can pass, and a game ball passing through the first flow path in the second distribution state. The third passage is provided with a third passage, and a fourth passage through which the game ball passing through the second passage can pass, and the variable means is used when the game ball passes through the second passage. When the distribution means is changed from the first distribution state to the second distribution state and the game ball passes through the third passage, the second distribution state is changed to the first distribution state. The gaming machine E5, characterized in that the area distribution means is variable.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the gaming machine is divided into a first distribution state in which the game ball passing through the first flow path is distributed to the first region and a second distribution state in which the game ball passing through the first flow path is distributed to the second region. The state of is variable. In the first distribution state, the game ball that has passed through the first flow path passes through the first passage, and the game ball that has passed through the second flow path passes through the second passage. In the second distribution state, the game ball that has passed through the first flow path passes through the third passage, and the game ball that has passed through the second flow path passes through the fourth passage. When the game ball passes through the second passage, the area distribution means is changed from the first distribution state to the second distribution state by the variable means, and when the game ball passes through the third passage, the second distribution means is changed. The area distribution means is changed by the variable means from the distribution state to the first distribution state.

As a result, if the area distribution means is changed to the second distribution state, the game ball is distributed to the second area in the next distribution performed by the area distribution means, which is advantageous for the player. It can be recognized by the player. Therefore, from the time when the area distribution means is changed to the second distribution state until the next distribution is performed by the area distribution means, the player feels a sense of security and satisfaction that it will be advantageous. There is an effect that you can play a game while holding a.

In the gaming machine E5, the first passage allows the passed game ball to enter the first region, and the second passage allows the passed game ball to enter the second region. The gaming machine E6 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5, the gaming ball that has passed through the first passage enters the first region, and the gaming ball that has passed through the second passage enters the second region. Therefore, if the game ball passes through the second passage, the game ball enters the second area and becomes a state advantageous to the player, and the area distribution means is changed to the second distribution state. NS. In the second distribution state, since the game ball is distributed to the second area by the area distribution means, it is possible to make the player recognize that the state is continuously shifted to a state advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have a sense of security and satisfaction for the continuous advantageous state.

In the gaming machines E1 to E6, the gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the first flow path is located on the front side of the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E6, the first flow path is located on the front side of the second flow path, so that the game ball is located in the front side as compared with the case where the game ball advances on the front side. It is advantageous for the player to move to the side. Therefore, even if the game ball is illegally pulled toward the front by using a magnet or the like, there is no merit for the cheating person, so that there is an effect that the cheating can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine E7, the first passage is located on the front side of the second passage, and the third passage is located on the front side of the fourth passage. Game machine E8 to play.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first passage is located on the front side of the second passage and the third passage is located on the front side of the fourth passage, even if it is in the first distribution state, it is in the second distribution state. However, it is more advantageous for the player that the game ball passes through the passage located on the back side than that the game ball passes through the passage located on the front side. Therefore, even if the game ball is illegally pulled toward the front by using a magnet or the like, there is no merit for the cheating person, so that there is an effect that the cheating can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, an information acquisition means for periodically acquiring elapsed time information corresponding to the elapsed time since the start of the privileged game is provided, and the distribution means is provided by the information acquisition means. Based on the acquired elapsed time information, the game machine E9 is characterized in that the flow path in which the game ball travels is distributed to either the first flow path or the second flow path. ..

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the elapsed time information corresponding to the elapsed time since the start of the privilege game is periodically acquired by the information acquisition means. Based on the elapsed time information acquired by the information acquisition means, the flow path in which the game ball travels is distributed by the distribution means to either the first flow path or the second flow path. As a result, the operation of the distribution means can be made the same in each privilege game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust due to the variation in the operation of the sorting means.

The gaming machine E9 is characterized in that the ball entry opening setting means sets the state of the ball entry port to the ball entry permission state based on the elapsed time information acquired by the information acquisition means. Game machine E10 to play.

According to the game machine E10, in addition to the effect of the game machine E9, the state of the ball entry port is set to the ball entry permission state by the ball entry port setting means based on the elapsed time information acquired by the information acquisition means. Therefore, it is possible to control the setting of the flow path by the sorting means and the setting of the ball entry port by the ball entry port setting means based on the same elapsed time information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the setting of the flow path and the setting of the ball entry permission state from being deviated from each other.

<Characteristic F group> (Structure in which the accessory does not easily bounce)
Front to either the entry port where the game ball can enter, the first area and the second area where the game ball entered into the entry port can enter, and either the first area or the second area. A player is provided with a distribution means for distributing the game balls that have entered the entry ball opening, and based on the fact that the game balls have entered the first area, the player has more than the case where the game balls have entered the second area. In a gaming machine that shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the distribution means is a first state in which the gaming balls can be distributed to a plurality of flow paths through which the gaming balls can pass and the first region. And a variable means capable of varying the game ball into a second state in which the game ball can be distributed to the first region or the second region, and the variable means includes the plurality of flow paths. Among them, the gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the first state and the second state are changed based on the passage of the gaming ball through a part of the flow paths.

According to the game machine F1, the distribution means can distribute the game ball to the first region or the first region or the second region, which is a state in which the game ball can be distributed to the first region by the variable means. It is variable to the second state, which is a state. The first state and the second state are changed by the variable means based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a part of the flow paths through which the game ball can pass.

As a result, the player can be made to recognize whether or not the game ball enters the first region in the next distribution based on the state of the distribution means. Therefore, from the time when the sorting means is changed to the first state until the next sorting is performed by the sorting means, the player feels reassured and satisfied with the transition to the special gaming state. It has the effect of allowing you to play games while hugging.

In the gaming machine F1, the plurality of flow paths are the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game ball can pass in the first state, and the game in the second state. It is composed of a third flow path and a fourth flow path through which the ball can pass, and the variable means starts from the first state when the game ball passes through the second flow path. The distribution means is changed to the second state, and when the game ball passes through the third flow path, the distribution means is changed from the second state to the first state. A game machine F2 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first state, the game ball can pass through the first flow path and the second flow path, and in the second state, the game ball passes through the third flow path and the fourth flow path. Is allowed to pass. When the game ball passes through the second flow path, the distribution means is changed from the first state to the second state by the variable means, and when the game ball passes through the third flow path, the second state is changed by the variable means. The sorting means is variable from the state to the first state.

As a result, the state of the distribution means can be changed according to which of the plurality of flow paths the game ball passes through, and the flow path through which the game ball that reaches the distribution means next time passes. Is changed, so that the player can predict the area to be distributed next time by the distribution means depending on the state of the distribution means and the flow path through which the game ball passes. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the gaming machine F2 includes a variable suppressing means for suppressing the variable distribution means when the gaming ball passes through the first flow path or the fourth flow path.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, the variable suppressing means suppresses the variable distribution means when the gaming ball passes through the first flow path or the fourth flow path. , It is possible to prevent the hole from being disadvantageous because it changes to the second state even though it has passed through the first flow path. Further, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust because the game ball changes to the first state even though the game ball has passed through the fourth flow path.

In the gaming machine F3, the distribution means is swingable, and the first state is a state in which the distribution means swings on the opposite side to the second state. Game machine F4.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the first state is a state in which the distribution means is swung to the opposite side to the second state, so that the player can easily change the current state. It has the effect of being able to be recognized.

In the gaming machine F4, the distribution means is arranged in a ball entry area provided inside the ball entry port, and the variable suppression means is provided in the distribution means and the ball entry area. It is composed of magnets installed so as to repel each other, and is installed at the position closest to the distribution means when it swings to an intermediate state between the first state and the second state. A gaming machine F5 characterized by being a magnet.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the distribution means is arranged in the ball entry area provided inside the ball entry port. When the variable suppressing means is composed of a sorting means and magnets installed in a direction that repels each other in the ball entry region, and the sorting means swings to an intermediate state between the first state and the second state. It is installed in the position closest to.

As a result, even if the distribution means fluctuates due to the influence of vibration or the like, it is possible to prevent the state of the distribution means from switching. Therefore, even though the game ball does not pass through the second flow path, the state of the sorting means is switched from the first state to the second state, which suppresses the disadvantage to the hole. be able to. Further, even though the game ball has not passed through the third flow path, the state of the sorting means is switched from the second state to the first state, and the player is distrustful of the game machine or the hall. It has the effect of suppressing the feeling.

In the gaming machine F4, the distribution means is arranged in a ball entry area provided inside the ball entry port, and the variable suppression means is provided in the distribution means and the ball entry area. A gaming machine characterized in that it is composed of magnets installed in a direction of attracting each other, and the distribution means is installed at the closest position in the first state or the second state. F6.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the distribution means is arranged in the ball entry area provided inside the ball entry port. The variable suppressing means is composed of a sorting means and a magnet installed in a direction of attracting each other to the ball entry region, and the sorting means is installed at the position closest to each other in the first state or the second state.

As a result, the distribution means in the first state or the second state can be stably stopped by the attractive force of the magnet, so that there is an effect that the distribution means can be suppressed from swinging due to the influence of vibration or the like. ..

In the gaming machine F5 or F6, the distribution means has a portion that contacts the inner wall of the ball entry region when the first state is changed to the second state, and the second state to the first state. The gaming machine F7 is characterized in that the portion that comes into contact with the inner wall of the ball entry region is made of a material capable of absorbing an impact when the value is changed to.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5 or F6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a portion that contacts the inner wall portion of the ball entry region when changing from the first state to the second state, and a portion that contacts the inner wall portion of the ball entry region when changing from the second state to the first state. Is made of a material that can absorb shocks.

As a result, even if the distribution means and the inner wall portion of the ball entry region come into contact with each other when the first state is changed to the second state or the second state is changed to the first state, the contact It is possible to prevent the sorting means from bouncing off due to an impact. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the return to the state before the state of the sorting means is switched due to the bounce even though the state is switched.

A gaming machine F8, wherein in any of the gaming machines F4 to F7, the sorting means is configured to be visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F4 to F7, the sorting means is configured to be visible to the player, so that the states of the sorting means are the first state and the second state. There is an effect that the player can easily recognize which of the states is.

In the gaming machine F8, the sorting means swings to the right or left side in a front view.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F8, the sorting means swings to the right or left side in the front view, so that the player can easily determine whether it is the first state or the second state. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the game machines F1 to F9, the variable means can change the state of the distribution means based on the weight of the passing game ball.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F9, the state of the sorting means is changed based on the weight of the passing game ball, so that the state of the sorting means is changed by the variable means. Can be changed by natural movement. Therefore, there is an effect that the state of the sorting means is changed at an unnatural timing, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the gaming machine or the hall.

The gaming machine Z1 in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E10, and F1 to F10, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E10, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E10, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The featured gaming machine Z3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

<Others>
For gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery will be drawn to determine whether or not a game ball will win a jackpot based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and whether or not to shift to a probability fluctuation state will be drawn separately during the jackpot. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from becoming a mere task for getting a lot of balls, and to play the game during the jackpot with the expectation of shifting to a probability fluctuation state, and to improve the interest of the player in the game. There is something I'm trying to do.

Some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are provided with a plurality of routes through which the gaming ball can pass in a predetermined area where the gaming ball can enter only when the lottery in the probability fluctuation state is performed. In this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuates after the end of the jackpot, depending on which route the game ball is distributed to among the plurality of routes provided in the predetermined area. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-180999)
However, in such a gaming machine, although it is possible to draw a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state after the current jackpot, it is also possible to determine whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state after the next jackpot. There wasn't. As a result, every time a jackpot is hit, the player feels uneasy that the lottery in a state of probability fluctuation may be leaked, and even if the jackpot is won, the player will not be relieved. There was a problem.

This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problem, and among a plurality of routes for performing a lottery in a probability fluctuation state, the next probability depends on the route passed by the game ball. By configuring the route through which the game ball can pass during the lottery in the fluctuating state to be changeable, the game ball to a route other than the route that shifts to the probability fluctuating state (the route that shifts to the low probability state). It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of providing a pattern in which the progress of the game is restricted, and which can suppress giving anxiety to the player every time a big hit is made.

In addition, in such a gaming machine, when a lottery is made as to whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state after a big hit, the game ball is sent to a route other than the route that shifts to the probability fluctuation state (the route that shifts to the low probability state). As it progressed, there was no room for reversal and it shifted to a low-probability state. As a result, the lottery becomes dull, and there is a risk that the player cannot fully enjoy the lottery.

This technical idea was made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and by configuring the lottery to perform a multi-stage lottery when performing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a probability fluctuation state. Even if the lottery result of 1 shows a disadvantageous result for the player, depending on the result of another lottery, it is possible to expect the winning of the probability fluctuation state, and the player can fully enjoy the lottery. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be played.

Further, in such a gaming machine, if two or more gaming balls enter a predetermined area for lottery in a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a probability fluctuation state once, the gaming balls are drawn in one lottery. Passed through multiple routes, and there was a risk that the gaming machine would malfunction.

This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and is a predetermined area for performing a lottery when a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to a probability fluctuation state using a game ball. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the entry of two or more gaming balls into the ball.

Further, in such a gaming machine, the route on which the gaming ball that has entered the predetermined region travels changes depending on the angle of entry of the gaming ball into the predetermined region, vibration, and the like. As a result, every time a jackpot is hit, there is a risk that the player may be worried that his or her own game method may affect the route on which the game ball travels. That is, there is a problem that every time a big hit is made, the player feels uneasy.

The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing anxiety from being caused to a player.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
140 Second specified winning opening (entry entrance)
501 Time Saving Ball Entrance (1st Area)
502,503,504 Probability change entrance (second area)
731 Flow path switching valve (distribution means)
732a Front flow path (first flow path)
732b Back side flow path (second flow path)
S4502 Selection means S4506, S4509 Inlet opening setting means S4606, S4609 State setting means

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

The game machine of pachinko machines and the like, and lottery whether or not those Tari to become based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, about whether or not to shift to the probability change state separately lottery during this have enough by, with the expectation for migrating to stochastic variation state to perform the game in those have enough, there is what is to improve player's interest in the game of the player.

Some gaming machine described above, for example, a game ball to the specific area YU skill sphere is possible ball entrance is when ball entrance, there is made a stochastic fluctuation state after completion of those or.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-180999

However , further improvement of interest is required.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem or the like, and aims to provide a game machine as possible it is possible to improve the interest in the game of the player.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a discriminating means that executes a discriminant based on the establishment of a discriminant condition, and a game based on the discriminant result of the discriminating means becoming a specific discriminant result. The specific determination result is obtained with the first probability predetermined by the determination of the determination means as the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the person and the state after the execution of the privilege game is completed. Those having a first probability state and a state specifying means for specifying one of a plurality of states including at least a second probability state that results in the specific determination result with a second probability lower than the first probability. The first state setting means for setting the first state advantageous to the player and the second condition predetermined in the first state are satisfied based on the establishment of the predetermined first condition. A second state setting means for setting a second state having a lower degree of advantage than the first state is provided , and after the first state is set, the state specifying means a plurality of times. The first probability state can be continuously specified throughout the privilege game, and in the second state, the second probability state is more likely to be specified by the state specifying means than in the first state. As an aspect in the execution period of the privilege game that is configured and executed at least in the first state, the next privilege game after the privilege game is completed is a first situation in which the next privilege game can be executed in the second state. In the second situation, the first aspect can be determined, and the next privilege game is more likely to be executed in the first state than the first situation, the second aspect is different from the first aspect. aspect Ru configuration der capable determined.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1 , the discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition and the discriminating result of the discriminating means are advantageous to the player based on the specific discriminant result. A privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game, and a first probability state in which the specific determination result is obtained with a first probability predetermined in the determination of the determination means as a state after the execution of the privilege game is completed. It has a second probability state in which the specific determination result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability, and a state specifying means for specifying one of a plurality of states including at least one, and is predetermined. Based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied, the first state setting means for setting the first state advantageous to the player and the second condition predetermined in the first state are satisfied. A second state setting means for setting a second state having a lower degree of advantage than the first state is provided, and after being set to the first state, the state specifying means is used to perform the privilege game a plurality of times. It is a configuration in which the first probability state can be continuously specified over a period of time, and in the second state, the second probability state is more easily specified by the state specifying means than in the first state, and at least the above. As an aspect in the execution period of the privilege game executed in the first state, the first aspect is the case where the next privilege game after the end of the privilege game is the first situation in which the privilege game can be executed in the second state. In the second situation where the next privilege game is more likely to be executed in the first state than in the first situation, a second aspect different from the first aspect can be determined. It is a composition.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a figure which shows the outline of the lottery apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the flow path of a lottery apparatus. It is sectional drawing in the modified example of the flow path of a lottery apparatus. It is a continuation of the cross-sectional view in the modified example of the flow path of the lottery apparatus. It is a figure which shows the way of allocating the traveling direction of a game ball by the traveling direction distribution part of the lottery apparatus. It is a figure which shows the outline of the distribution rotating body of a lottery apparatus. It is a figure which shows the outline of the ball entry opening distribution part of a lottery apparatus. It is a figure which shows the outline of the case where a game ball passes through a back route in a state where a distribution rotating body of a lottery device swings to the right side. It is a figure which shows the outline of the case where a game ball passes a front route in a state where a distribution rotating body of a lottery device swings to the right side. It is a figure which shows the outline of the case where a game ball passes through a back route in a state where a sorting rotating body of a lottery device swings to the left side. It is a figure which shows the outline of the case where a game ball passes a front route in a state where a distribution rotating body of a lottery device swings to the left side. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship between the distribution rotating body of a lottery apparatus, and each entry port. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. , (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the structure position initialization process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery gate processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the rotating body position detection process executed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control process. It is a flowchart which showed the special effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the stop type command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the round number command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the second embodiment, and (b) is a correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 in the second embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol. Is a schematic diagram schematically showing the above, and FIG. 3C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit random number counter C1 in the second embodiment and the small hit in the special symbol. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit gate processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit control process executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 in the third embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the flow path switching process executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart comparing the opening / closing timing of the special winning opening and the opening / closing timing of the guide passage in the third embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the state of the pachinko machine and the effect to be executed in the fourth embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a variation pattern effect that is a jackpot in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an effect executed during the jackpot game. (A) is a diagram showing a chance-up pattern of variation pattern production in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a chance-up pattern of variation pattern production which is a big hit. (A) is a diagram showing an effect executed during the jackpot game when re-entry into the loop state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is executed in the jackpot game which shifts to the low probability state after the end. It is a figure which showed the production to be performed. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of the lottery apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a perspective view of the second variable winning device and the traveling direction distribution portion of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is the second variable winning device and the traveling direction of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment. It is a front view of the distribution part. (A) is a plan view of the second variable winning device and the traveling direction sorting portion of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is the second variable winning device and the traveling direction sorting portion of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment. It is sectional drawing of a part. It is a figure which shows the way of allocating the traveling direction of a game ball by the traveling direction distribution part of the lottery apparatus in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of a modified example of the second variable winning device and the traveling direction distribution portion of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the way of allocating the traveling direction of a game ball by the modified example of the traveling direction distribution part of the lottery apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a perspective view when the ball entry port distribution portion of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment is observed from the front right direction, and (b) is a perspective view when the ball entry port distribution portion of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment is observed. It is a perspective view when the part part is observed from the front left direction. It is an exploded front perspective view of the ball entry opening distribution part of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of the distribution rotating body of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of the case where a game ball passes a front route in a state which the distribution rotating body of the lottery apparatus in 5th Embodiment swings to the right. It is a figure which shows the outline of the case where the game ball passes through the back route in the state which the distribution rotating body of the lottery apparatus in 5th Embodiment swings to the right. It is a figure which shows the outline of the case where a game ball passes a front route in a state where the distribution rotating body of the lottery apparatus in 5th Embodiment swings to the left. It is a figure which shows the outline of the case where the game ball passes through the back route in the state which the distribution rotating body of the lottery apparatus in 5th Embodiment swings to the left. (A) is a diagram showing the outline of the time change of the second large opening and the traveling direction distribution portion when the front route jackpot is obtained in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the outline of the time change in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of the time change of the 2nd big opening and the traveling direction distribution part at the time of a big hit of a back route. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 in the fifth embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the jackpot type in the fifth embodiment and the state of the second large opening for each time counter value. (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type in the fifth embodiment and the state of the traveling direction distribution unit for each time counter value. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the round start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the 2nd large opening opening setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the flow path setting setting process executed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ball entry detection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 17) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changing the effect content of the super reach. Be manipulated.

The stage is a production mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified. In this pachinko machine 10, there are three stages: "city stage", "empty stage", and "island stage". There are two stages. Then, various effects such as variable effects and reach effects that are performed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during the high-speed fluctuation, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, the "city stage" → "empty stage" "→" Island stage "→" City stage "→ ... It is changed repeatedly in this order. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the area around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push-button type stop switch 51b that stops firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The ball entry port 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 17) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when the ball enters the first entrance 64, and when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, a normal symbol (first symbol) is drawn. 2 symbols) will be drawn. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. Is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) It is released, and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are two types of jackpots for special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B". After the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the jackpot, the game according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the special symbol is displayed. A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first symbol. It is shown by the device 37 and also shown by the third symbol display device 81. When the variation display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the variation display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. The special winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first entry opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, whether or not the ordinary symbol is a hit is determined. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64. Become in a state. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball easily enters the first ball entry port 64, and as a result, the lottery of the special symbol is easily performed.

Further, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed. The normal symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the number of reserved balls 37. It is also indicated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

As described above, there are two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B". Both "Big hit A" and "Big hit B" are big hits with a maximum number of rounds of eight.

"Big hit A" and "Big hit B" are the flow path switching valves 331a, in the transition lottery to the high probability state of the special symbol performed by the lottery device 300 (see FIG. 5) after the winning of the big hit is confirmed. Depending on 331b (see FIG. 9), there is a difference in whether the flow path through which the game ball passes is the flow path on the front side (front route) or the flow path on the back side (back route) of the rotating body 341. That is, in "big hit A", the flow path on the front side (front route) is switched (see FIG. 9B), and in "big hit B", the flow path on the back side (back route) is switched (FIG. 9). See (a)).

Here, the "front side" and the "back side" of the distribution rotating body 341 indicate whether the player is on the front side or the back side, respectively, and in the case of the flow path on the front side (front route), the pachinko machine The flow path is closer to the player playing the game at 10 (far side from the base plate 60), and in the case of the back flow path (back route), the flow path is farther from the player (to the base plate 60). It is a flow path on the side closer to the opposite side).

Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 5 to 16, but whether the flow path is on the back side or the front side (that is, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b) and the flow path switching. Of the time-saving ball opening 501 and the probability variation ball opening 501 to 504 provided below the sorting rotating body 341, depending on the state of the sorting rotating body 341 arranged directly under the valves 331a and 331b. It is sorted which entry port the game ball enters. When the game ball enters the time-saving entry slot 501, the special symbol shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot ends, and the time is shortened for the normal symbol during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of fluctuations is 100). It becomes a state. On the other hand, when the game ball enters any of the probabilistic entry ball ports 502 to 504, the ball shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

When the flow path switching valve 331a is set to the flow path (front route) on the front side, the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is probabilistically changed by the distribution rotating body 341. And, it is distributed to either the probability variation winning opening 504. Therefore, when it is set in the flow path on the front side (front route), it always shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, when the game ball is set in the flow path (back route) on the back side, the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is divided by the distribution rotating body 341 into a time-saving ball entrance 501 and a probability variation entry ball port. Since it is distributed to either of 503, when it is distributed to the time-saving entry slot 501, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends, and during the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of fluctuations is 100), it is a normal symbol. It becomes a time saving state of. On the other hand, when the game ball is distributed to the probability variation ball opening 503 by the distribution rotating body 341, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol after that is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol). In other words, it is a state of the game in which it is easy to shift to the special game state. On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change. In addition, in the "low probability state of special symbol", the time saving state of the normal symbol (during the time saving) is the normal state of the jackpot probability, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the normal symbol increases. It refers to a state of a game in which a ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 is opened or one hit is made according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The number of times the electric accessory is opened may be changed.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by the lighting state, or the fluctuation of the balls entered in the first entry port 64 is not executed. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

If a ball enters the first entry port 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED is different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, it corresponds to the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) using the ball as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets, which are almost full on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 20) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. In the case of "big hit A" in which the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b of the lottery device 300 are switched to the front route, and in the case of "big hit B" in which the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b of the lottery device 300 are switched to the back route. A variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which any number from "0" to "9" is added are aligned. That is, it is configured so that it is not possible to distinguish between the "big hit A" and the "big hit B" from the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the LED 37a displays a special symbol (first symbol) according to the jackpot type. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

Although the details will be described later, when the game ball enters the lottery device 300 with the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b set to the front route, they are arranged on the front side of the ball entry port distribution unit 340. The ball will be entered into either the probability-changing ball opening 502 or the probability-changing ball opening 504, and no matter which entry port the ball is entered into, the ball will shift to a high-probability state of a special symbol after a big hit. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the lottery device 300 with the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b set to the front route, the time-saving ball entry port arranged on the back side of the ball entry port distribution unit 340. The ball will enter either 501 or the probability variation entrance 503, and there is a possibility that the ball will shift to a low probability state of a special symbol after a big hit. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to win the "big hit A" than to win the "big hit B", so the player is made to play the game with the expectation that he will win the "big hit A". be able to.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area that displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have been entered into the first entry port 64, and is the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying the advance notice effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears. A notice will be produced by issuing it.

On the other hand, if a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the maximum number of ball entry times is four. It is held, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed for each reserved ball number symbol, and the reserved ball number is displayed according to the display number of the reserved ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is Indicates that it is 4 balls. When the reserved ball number symbol is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the reserved ball number is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not a lottery of ordinary symbols performed when the ball passes through the second entry port 67 is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is operated for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol hold lamp 84. NS. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the 1st ball entrance 64, and the number of times the ball passes through the second ball opening 67 is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. It may be set to (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

A lottery device 300 for drawing whether or not to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol after the end of the big hit is arranged in the right direction of the front view with respect to the variable display unit 80. The lottery device 300 is provided with a lottery gate 310 that is opened based on winning a big hit (see FIG. 5), and enters the lottery gate 310 while the lottery gate 310 is open. Based on the fact that the balled game ball enters any of the probabilistic entry ball openings 502 to 504 inside the lottery device 300, the game shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 enters the time-saving entry slot 501 inside the lottery device 300, it shifts to a low-probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot ends and during a predetermined number of fluctuations. (For example, the number of fluctuations is 100 times) The normal symbol is in a time-saving state.

The details of the lottery device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 16. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the appearance of the lottery device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the lottery device 300 includes a lottery gate 310, a flow path 320, a traveling direction distribution unit 330, a ball entry port distribution unit 340, and a ball discharge unit 350 for lottery. The game ball that has entered the gate 310 is discharged to the outside of the lottery device 300 through the ball discharge unit 350 via the flow path 320, the traveling direction distribution unit 330, and the ball entry port distribution unit 340.

Flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are provided inside the traveling direction distribution unit 330, and the flow position of the game ball is set to the front side of the rotating body 341 according to the direction of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b. You can switch between doing and doing it on the back side. Further, a distribution rotating body 341 is oscillatedly arranged inside the ball entry port distribution unit 340. Although the details will be described later, the distribution rotating body 341 is provided with four passages (guidance passages 408a to 408d), and each passage is associated with the time-saving entry ball opening 501 and the probability variation entry ball port 502 to 504. Has been done.

The cover portion 332, which is the outer wall portion of the traveling direction distribution portion 330, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b arranged inside the traveling direction distribution portion 330 are all transparent members (for example, PS material). It is composed of. Similarly, the cover portion 423, which is the outer wall portion of the ball entry port distribution section 340, and the distribution rotating body 341 disposed inside the ball entry port distribution section 340 are also made of transparent members. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the distribution rotating body 341 during the game. As a result, the player can confirm the game ball passing through the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the distribution rotating body 341. It is possible to visually check which entry port the ball enters. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the special symbol will be in a high probability state after the end of the jackpot. In addition, since the appearance of the game ball flowing down can be visually observed, the player is expected to enter any of the probabilistic entry ball ports 502 to 504 while the game ball is flowing down. It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Furthermore, by allowing the player to visually recognize the flow of the game ball until it enters one of the entrances, it is possible to make the player recognize that the lottery is being conducted fairly, and the player can play pachinko. It is possible to suppress distrust of the machine 10 and the hall.

Next, the flow path 320 provided in the lottery device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a schematic view showing the configuration of the flow path 320 and the operation of the game ball advancing to the flow path 320. As shown in FIG. 6A, the flow path 320 includes a guide passage 321 through which the game ball entered from the lottery gate 310 passes, and a guide passage 322 for guiding the passing game ball to the traveling direction distribution unit 330. Close one of the ball discharge passage 323 for guiding the passing game ball to the discharge port and the guide passage 322 or the ball discharge passage 323, and advance the game ball to one of the passages. It is composed of a passage closing valve 324 for making the passage closed. The passage closing valve 324 is driven by a solenoid (not shown), and is directed to the direction shown in FIG. 6A (that is, the direction in which the guidance passage 322 is opened and the ball discharge passage 323 is closed) based on the winning of the jackpot. It switches to.

After winning the jackpot, the game ball that first entered the lottery gate 310 and flowed down the guide passage 321 reaches the passage closing valve 324 (FIG. 6A), and when the passage closing valve 324 reaches the short closing valve 324b. Contact. Since the passage closing valve 324 is configured to rotate about the shaft 324c, the game ball comes into contact with the short closing valve 324b, and the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the short closing valve 324b. A downward force acts on the closing valve 324b, and the short closing valve 324b rotates until it hits the inner wall of the induction passage 322. The rotation of the short closing valve 324b causes the game ball to advance to the guide passage 322, the long closing valve 324a closes the guidance passage 322, and the ball discharge passage 323 is opened (FIG. 6B). ..

The guide passage 322 is closed by the long closing valve 324a, and the ball discharge passage 323 is opened. Therefore, all the game balls that enter the lottery gate 310 and flow down the guide passage 321 are the ball discharge passage 323. It will be discharged via (Fig. 6 (c)). As a result, the number of game balls that can advance to the guidance passage 322 can be limited to one, so that the game balls that advance to the entry slot distribution unit 340 arranged at the rear stage of the guidance passage 322 can be reliably performed. It can be limited to only one ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that a plurality of game balls enter one of the time-saving entry openings 501 and the probability variation entry openings 501 to 504 multiple times.

In the present embodiment, the passage closing valve 324 is configured to rotate with the weight of the game ball, but the passage of the game ball is detected by using a known sensor means or the like, and guidance is provided based on the detection result of the sensor means. It may be configured to control the opening and closing of the passages 322 and 323. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8, the configuration of the flow path 320 using the sensor means will be described as a modification of the flow path 320 of the first embodiment.

7 and 8 are schematic views schematically showing a configuration in which the number of game balls that can travel to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later by using the sensor means can be limited to only one ball. In the flow path 320 of this modification, a sprocket 601, ball passage sensors 602a and 602b, a lever 604, and a ball passage sensor 603b are provided between the guidance passage 321 and the guidance passage 322, and a passage closing valve is further provided. It differs from the first embodiment in that the short closing valve 324b is not provided in the 324.

When the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 advances through the guidance passage 321 and reaches the sprocket 601, the progress of the game ball is hindered by the convex portion 601a of the sprocket 601. The game ball whose progress has been stopped by the sprocket is determined whether or not the flow is permitted based on the detection result of the ball passing sensor 602a. Specifically, after the lottery gate 310 is opened, the ball is allowed to pass until the ball passage sensor 602a detects the passage of the ball, the sprocket 601 is rotated clockwise by a motor means or the like, and the game ball is released. It becomes possible to flow down the guide passage 321.

When the game ball flows down the one-ball guidance passage 321, the ball passage sensor 602a detects the flow of the ball, and the convex portion 601a of the sprocket 601 projects into the guidance passage 321. Therefore, all the game balls that have subsequently entered the lottery gate 310 and flowed down the guide passage 321 will be hindered by the convex portion 601a of the sprocket 601.

On the other hand, the game ball whose passage is detected by the ball passage sensor 602a is hindered by the lever 604 again (FIG. 7A). The lever 604 operates so as to block or open the flow path according to the state of the ball passage sensor 602b, the ball passage sensors 603a, 603b, and the passage closing valve 324.

The lever 604 first rotates counterclockwise about the axis 604 based on the detection of the arrival of the ball at the upper part of the lever 604 by the ball passage sensor 602b. Then, when the lever 604 is sufficiently rotated so as not to obstruct the passage, the game ball stopped at the upper part of the lever 604 starts to flow down again (FIG. 7 (b)). Then, based on the detection by the ball passage sensors 603a and 603b that the game ball has passed through the guidance passage 322, the lever 604 rotates clockwise around the shaft 604a and projects to the guidance passage 321 again. Prevents the progress of other game balls. Further, based on the detection results of the ball passage sensors 603a and 603b, the passage closing valve 324 falls in the direction of the ball discharge passage 323, and the ball discharge passage 323 is opened (FIG. 7 (c)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls other than the game balls that have previously advanced to the guidance passage 322 from advancing to the guidance passage 322, and to discharge the game balls from the ball discharge passage 323.

While the passage closing valve 324 is tilted, the lever 604 is controlled so as not to operate (that is, the guide passage 322 is kept blocked) regardless of the detection result of the ball passage sensor 602b. Further, the sprocket 601 rotates clockwise based on the fact that the passage closing valve 324 collapses and the ball discharge passage 323 is opened, and only one game ball flows down the guide passage 321. Then, in the state where the passage closing valve 324 is collapsed, the ball passage sensors 602a and 602b are controlled to let the game ball flow down one ball each time the passage of the game ball is detected (FIG. 8 (a), FIG. 8 (b)).

As described above, the configuration of the flow path 320 for advancing the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later has been described, but the configuration of the flow path 320 is the configuration of the present embodiment. It is not limited. As an example of another configuration, for example, instead of the passage closing valve 324 of the first embodiment, it is possible to prevent the passage of the game ball from the shaft 324c of the passage closing valve 324 to the downstream side by one game ball. By providing a shutter and closing the shutter portion, only one game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 is stopped at the shutter portion. Since only the space for one game ball is provided in the shutter part, by stopping the game ball in the shutter part, other game balls cannot be stopped in the shutter part connected to the guidance passage 322. Proceed to the ball discharge passage 324. Then, the shutter portion may be opened after a sufficient time has elapsed from the closing of the lottery gate 310, and the game ball stopped at the shutter portion may be advanced to the guidance passage 322. With this configuration, it is possible to limit the number of game balls advancing to the distribution rotating body 341 to only one.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the traveling direction distribution unit 330 into which the game ball flowing down the guidance passage 322 of the flow path 320 enters will be described. FIG. 9 is a schematic view schematically showing the traveling direction distribution unit 330. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the traveling direction distribution unit 330, the flow path 320 joined to the traveling direction distribution unit 330, and the ball entry port distribution unit 340 as viewed from the side surface of the game board. In both FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b), the base plate 60 is arranged to the right. As shown in FIG. 9, the traveling direction distribution unit 330 is composed of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the cover unit 332, and the traveling direction of the game ball is in the front direction or the back direction with respect to the game board. It is distributed to either one.

Both the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are electrically connected to the flow path solenoid 265 and are configured to tilt in the same direction and stand still. As shown in FIG. 9A, when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are inclined to the right (that is, the back side for the player), the game ball is to the right (that is, the back side for the player). ), And flows down to the back side of the distribution rotating body 341. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are inclined to the left (that is, the front side for the player), the game ball is to the left (that is, for the player). Proceeds on the front side) and flows down to the front side of the distribution rotating body 341. As described above, in a state where the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are inclined to the right (that is, the back side for the player), the entry port where the game ball can enter is the time saving entry opening 501 or the probability change. It is a ball entrance 503. On the other hand, in a state where the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are inclined to the left (that is, the front side for the player), the entry port where the game ball can enter is the probability variation entry port 502 or the probability variation entry ball. Mouth 504. That is, it is more advantageous for the player that the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are inclined to the left (that is, the front side for the player).

The flow path solenoid 265 switches the direction of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b to the direction corresponding to the jackpot type when the lottery device 300 draws the game state after the jackpot ends, and also switches the flow path after the lottery ends. The directions of the valves 331a and 331b are switched to the right (that is, the back side for the player). Also, when it is detected that the RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on, the directions of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the right direction (that is, the back side for the player). That is, in the state where the lottery device 300 is not performing the lottery, the direction of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is controlled to be in the right direction (that is, the back side for the player).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16, the ball entry port distribution unit 340 of the lottery device 300 will be described. The ball entry port distribution unit 340 distributes the game ball to any of the time-saving ball entry ports 501 or the probabilistic ball entry ports 501 to 504. In this description, first, the outline of each figure will be described.

10A and 10B are perspective views (FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b)) and side views (FIG. 10 (c)) of the distribution rotating body 341 arranged so as to be swingable in the ball inlet distribution unit 340. It is a top view (FIG. 10 (d)), and FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the entire ball inlet distribution portion 340. Further, FIGS. 12 to 15 schematically show the operation of the distribution rotating body 341 and the game ball when the game ball enters each of the time-saving entry ball opening 501 and the probability variation entry ball port 501 to 504. It is a schematic diagram. Further, FIG. 16 is a schematic view schematically showing the positional relationship between the distribution rotating body 341, the time saving ball opening 501, and the probability variation input ball port 502 to 504 when the sorting rotating body 341 is viewed from the vertical direction. Is.

The distribution rotating body 341 is configured to have four guide passages 408a to 408d through which the game ball can pass (see FIG. 10B). Further, the distribution rotating body 341 is configured to be swingable in the left-right direction about the shaft 406, and the game ball can pass through the guide passages 408a and 408b according to the swinging direction of the derivative 341. And, the state in which the game ball can pass through the guidance passages 408c and 408d is switched, and in the initial arrangement, the state in which the game ball can pass through the guidance passages 408a and 408b (that is, shown in FIG. 10A). It is in a state of swinging to the right). The initial arrangement is returned by the rotary motor 264 when the RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on. In addition, the game ball that has reached the distribution rotating body 341 jumps out of the ball entry port distribution unit 340 without entering each entry port (time-saving ball entry port 501 and probability variation entry ball port 502 to 504). In order to suppress this, the distribution rotating body 341 is surrounded on all sides by a cover portion 423.

Although the details will be described later, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408b, the derivative 341 swings due to the weight of the ball as the game ball goes down the inclined portion 403b, reaches the ball stop portion 403a, and stands still. , The state is switched to a state (FIG. 10 (b)) in which the game ball can pass through the guide passages 408c and 408d. Further, when the game ball passes through the guide passage 408c, the derivative 341 swings due to the weight of the ball when the game ball goes down the inclined portion 405b, reaches the ball stop portion 405a, and stands still, and the guide passage 408a, It switches to a state in which the game ball can pass through 408b (FIG. 10 (a)). When the game ball passes through the guidance passages 408a and 408d, the distribution rotating body 341 does not swing and the state does not switch.

As shown in FIG. 11, the distribution rotating body 341 stands still inside the ball entry port distribution unit 340 in a state of being tilted to the left (FIG. 11 (b)) or to the right (FIG. 11 (a)). When the player is stationary in a state of being tilted to the left (FIG. 11 (a)), the upper ends of the guidance passages 408c and 408d are located directly below the ball entry port 411, so that the game has passed through the ball entry port 411. The sphere passes through the guidance passage 408c or 408d. On the other hand, when the distribution rotating body 341 is stationary in a state of being tilted to the right (FIG. 11 (b)), the upper ends of the guide passages 408a and 408b are located directly below the ball entry port 411, so that the ball entry port is located. The game ball that has passed through 411 passes through the guidance passage 408a or 408b.

The game ball that has passed through the guidance passage 408a enters the time-saving ball entrance 501 and is discharged to the outside through the ball discharge passage 419. Further, the game ball that has passed through the guidance passage 408b enters the probability variation entry ball port 502 and is discharged to the outside through the ball discharge passage 416. Further, the game ball that has passed through the guidance passage 408c enters the probability variation entry ball port 503 and is discharged to the outside through the ball discharge passage 417. Then, the game ball that has passed through the guidance passage 408d enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 504 and is discharged to the outside through the ball discharge passage 418. Which entry port the ball has entered is detected by the winning sensors 420a to 420d provided in the ball discharge passages 416 to 419 in the subsequent stage of each entry opening. Based on the detection results of these winning sensors 420a to 420d, it is determined whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. Further, the ball discharge passages 416 to 420 are configured to join the ball discharge passage 421 downstream. The ball discharge passage 421 is provided with a discharge ball sensor 422 for detecting the game ball to be discharged.

Further, on the side surface side of the distribution rotating body 341, a magnet 407a (side surface of the distribution rotating body 341 on the front side in front of the front view, FIG. A) and a magnet 407b (a side surface of the distribution rotating body 341 on the back side of the front view, see FIG. 10B) are provided. Further, a magnet 424a and a magnet 424b are provided on the inner wall portion of the cover portion 423 of the ball entry port distribution portion 340. These magnets 424a and 424b are provided at positions where the distribution rotating body 341 does not swing to the right or left (upright state) and overlaps the magnets 407a and 407b, respectively.

Here, the magnet 407a and the magnet 424a are installed so as to repel each other when the distribution rotating body 341 swings and rotates to a position where it stands upright. Similarly, both the magnet 407b and the magnet 424b are installed so as to repel each other. Therefore, even if the distribution rotating body 341 slightly swings around the shaft 406 due to vibration applied to the distribution rotating body 341 or the like, the magnets 407a and 407b provided on the side surface portion of the distribution rotating body 341 Since the magnets 424a and 424b provided on the inner wall portion of the ball entry port distribution portion 340 repel each other, it is possible to prevent the distribution rotating body 341 from rotating beyond the portions of the magnets 424a and 424b. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the distribution rotating body 341 from being switched even though the game ball has not passed through the guidance passage 408b or 408c.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 12 to 15, the operation of the distribution rotating body 341 and the game ball when the game ball passes through each passage of the distribution rotating body 341 will be described. First, referring to FIG. 12, when the game ball advances to the guidance passage 408a (that is, the traveling direction of the game ball is distributed inward by the traveling direction distribution unit 330, and the distribution rotating body 341 is tilted to the right. If this is the case), it will be described.

The game ball that has advanced to the guidance passage 408a (FIG. 12 (a)) flows down the back side of the passage wall 402 along the floor portion 401 (FIG. 12 (b)) and falls from the lower end of the distribution rotating body 341. Then, the ball enters the time-saving ball entrance 501 and passes through the ball discharge passage 419. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408a, it shifts to a low-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit, and during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of fluctuations is 100), the time is shortened of the normal symbol. .. Since the flow path passing through the guidance passage 408a simply flows down along the floor portion 401, a force that causes the distribution rotating body 341 to swing acts as the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408a. The distribution rotating body 341 keeps swinging to the right (that is, the guide passages 408a and 408b are directly below the entry port 411). Therefore, the game ball that next passes through the entry port 411 will pass through either one of the guidance passages 408a and 408b. A partition plate 412 is provided below the distribution rotating body 341 (see FIG. 11). The partition plate 412 prevents the game ball flowing down the guide passage 408a from entering the probabilistic entry ball port 502 on the front side without entering the time-saving entry ball 501 on the back side.

Next, referring to FIG. 13, when the game ball advances to the guidance passage 408b (that is, the traveling direction of the game ball is distributed toward the front by the traveling direction distribution unit 330, and the distribution rotating body 341 is directed to the right. (When it is in a tilted state) will be described.

When the game ball enters the guidance passage 408b, the game ball first reaches the ball stop portion 403a via the floor portion 401 and the inclined portion 403b. Since the ball stop portion 403a extends in the direction perpendicular to the floor portion 401 (that is, in the direction perpendicular to the traveling direction of the game ball), the game ball is hindered from advancing and is in contact with the ball stop portion 403a. (Fig. 13 (a)). Then, when the game ball comes to rest at the ball stop portion 403a, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stop portion 403a, and a force in the direction of pushing down the ball stop portion 403a acts.

When the ball stop portion 403a is pushed down, the distribution rotating body 341 rotates about the shaft 406 and is in the direction shown in FIG. 13B. In the direction shown in FIG. 13 (b), the ball stop portion 403a is in a state of being inclined in the lower right direction in FIG. The ball enters and passes through the ball discharge passage 416. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408b, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends. The distribution rotating body 341 continues to maintain a state in which the game ball swings to the left as shown in FIG. 13 (c) (that is, a state in which the guide passages 408c and 408d are directly below the ball entry port 411) even after the game ball has fallen. .. Therefore, the game ball that next passes through the entry port 411 will pass through either one of the guidance passages 408c and 408d. Further, as described above, since the partition plate 412 is provided at the lower part of the distribution rotating body 341 (see FIG. 11), the game ball flowing down the guide passage 408b enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 501 on the front side. It suppresses the ball from entering the time-saving ball entrance 501 on the back side without doing so.

Next, referring to FIG. 14, when the game ball advances to the derivative passage 408c (that is, the traveling direction of the game ball is distributed inward by the traveling direction distribution unit 330, and the distribution rotating body 341 moves to the left. (When it is in a tilted state) will be described.

When the game ball enters the guidance passage 408c, the game ball first reaches the ball stop portion 405a via the floor portion 401 and the inclined portion 405b. Since the ball stop portion 405a extends in the direction perpendicular to the floor portion 401 (that is, in the direction perpendicular to the traveling direction of the game ball), the game ball is hindered from advancing and is in contact with the ball stop portion 405a. (Fig. 14 (a)). Then, when the game ball comes to rest at the ball stop portion 405a, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stop portion 405a, and a force in the direction of pushing down the ball stop portion 405a acts.

When the ball stop portion 405a is pushed down, the distribution rotating body 341 rotates about the shaft 406 and is in the direction shown in FIG. 14 (b). In the direction of FIG. 14 (b), the ball stop portion 405a is in a state of being inclined in the lower left direction in FIG. 14 (b), so that the game ball flows down along the inclined portion 414 and enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 503. The ball will pass through the ball discharge passage 417. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408c, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends. The distribution rotating body 341 continues to maintain a state in which the game ball swings to the right as shown in FIG. 14 (c) (that is, a state in which the guide passages 408a and 408b are directly below the ball entry port 411) even after the game ball has fallen. Therefore, the game ball that next passes through the entry port 411 will pass through either one of the guide passages 408a and 408b. Further, as described above, since the partition plate 412 is provided at the lower part of the distribution rotating body 341 (see FIG. 11), the game ball flowing down the guide passage 408c enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 503 on the back side. It suppresses the ball from entering the probabilistic ball opening 504 on the front side without doing so.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, when the game ball advances to the guidance passage 408d (that is, the traveling direction of the game ball is distributed toward the front by the traveling direction distribution unit 330, and the distribution rotating body 341 moves to the left. (When it is in a tilted state) will be described.

The game ball that has advanced to the guidance passage 408d (FIG. 15 (a)) flows down the front side of the passage wall 402 along the floor portion 401 (FIG. 15 (b)) and falls from the lower end of the distribution rotating body 341. Then, the ball enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 504 and passes through the ball discharge passage 418. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408d, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends. Since the flow path passing through the guidance passage 408d simply flows down along the floor portion 401, a force that causes the distribution rotating body 341 to swing acts as the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408d. The distribution rotating body 341 keeps swinging to the left (that is, the guide passages 408c and 408d are directly below the entry port 411). Therefore, the game ball that next passes through the entry port 411 will pass through either one of the guidance passages 408c and 408d. Further, as described above, since the partition plate 412 is provided at the lower part of the distribution rotating body 341 (see FIG. 11), the game ball flowing down the guide passage 408d enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 504 on the front side. It suppresses the ball from entering the probabilistic ball opening 503 on the back side without doing so.

As described above, the game ball is either the short-time entry ball opening 501 or the probabilistic entry ball opening 501 to 504, depending on which of the four passages provided in the distribution rotating body 341 passes through. It is distributed to the entrance of the ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the positional relationship between the distribution rotating body 341, the time-saving entry ball port 501, and the probability variation entry ball port 501 to 504 will be described. FIG. 16A is a view showing a state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right and stands still, as viewed from the direction of the ball entry port 411 of the ball entry port distribution unit 340, and FIG. 16B. ) Is a diagram showing a state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left and stands still, as viewed from the ball entry port 411 direction of the ball entry port distribution unit 340. As shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B, a time-saving ball opening 501 is arranged on the right back side of the distribution rotating body 341, and a probability variation ball opening 502 is arranged on the right front side. Therefore, when the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right side, there is a possibility that the ball enters either the time-saving entry slot 501 or the probability variation entry slot 502. On the other hand, the probability-changing ball opening 503 is arranged on the left back side of the distribution rotating body 341, and the probability-changing ball opening 504 is arranged on the left front side. Therefore, when the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left side, there is a possibility that the ball enters either the probability variation entry port 503 or 504.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 5 to 16, the game ball determines whether the lottery device 300 shifts to the high-probability state of the special symbol or the low-probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends. It is specified based on the entry port (one of the time-saving entry opening 501 and the probability variation entry opening 501 to 504). The game ball is distributed to any of the entry ports according to the state of the flow path by the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the direction (right direction or left direction) of the distribution rotating body 341.

The state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched between the front route and the back route according to the winning jackpot type, and the direction of the distribution rotating body 341 is the guidance passage 408a to which the game ball is provided in the distribution rotating body 341. It changes depending on which passage of 408d is taken.

When the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408a while the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right (that is, the guidance passages 408a and 408b are directly below the entrance 411), the state of the distribution rotating body 341 changes. Without (that is, while swinging to the right), the game ball enters the time-saving entry slot 501. Therefore, even when the next big hit is won, the distribution rotating body 341 remains in the state of swinging to the right, and if the game ball is distributed to the guidance passage 408a again, the special symbol will be continuously in a low probability state. In some cases.

When the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408b with the distribution rotating body 341 swinging to the right, the distribution rotating body 341 rotates to the left around the axis 406 based on the weight of the game ball, and the game ball Enters the probability change ball opening 502. Therefore, when the next big hit is won, the game ball reaches the distribution rotating body 341 in a state where the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left side (that is, a state in which the guidance passages 408c and 408d are directly below the entrance 411). Therefore, in the next lottery, the game ball will enter either the probability-changing ball opening 503 or the probability-changing ball opening 504. That is, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408b, not only the game shifts to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, but also the next jackpot always shifts to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. It is.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408c in a state where the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left side (that is, a state where the guidance passages 408c and 408d are directly below the entrance 411), the weight of the game ball is applied. Based on this, the distribution rotating body 341 rotates to the right around the axis 406, and the game ball enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 503. Therefore, when the next big hit is won, the game ball reaches the distribution rotating body 341 in a state where the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right side (that is, a state in which the guidance passages 408a and 408b are directly below the entrance 411). Therefore, in the next lottery, the game ball will enter either the time-saving entry slot 501 or the probability variation entry slot 502. That is, in the next jackpot, there is a possibility of shifting to a high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, or a transition to a low-probability state of the special symbol.

Further, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408d with the distribution rotating body 341 swinging to the left side, the state of the distribution rotating body 341 does not change (that is, the game ball remains swinging to the left side). Enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 504. Therefore, even if the next big hit is won, the distribution rotating body 341 remains in the state of swinging to the left. Therefore, in the next lottery, the game is played to either the probability variation entry ball opening 503 or the probability variation entry ball opening 504. The ball will enter. That is, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408d, not only the game shifts to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, but also the next jackpot always shifts to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. It is.

In this way, if the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the left, regardless of whether the game ball passes through the guidance passages 408c or 408d, it always shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, so that the player Can recognize that the result of the lottery by the lottery device 300 is a high probability state of the special symbol only by confirming that the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the left side, and the lottery by the lottery device 300. You can check the situation with confidence.

On the other hand, when the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the right, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol, so that the lottery result by the lottery device 300 is changed to the high probability state of the special symbol. It will be confirmed while holding both the expectation for the transition and the anxiety about the transition to the low probability state of the special symbol.

Therefore, the orientation of the distribution rotating body 341 is confirmed, and if it swings to the left side, it gives the player a sense of security, and if it swings to the right side, it gives the player a sense of expectation and anxiety. Therefore, it is possible to play a game with sharpness.

Furthermore, if the game ball is distributed to the guidance passage 408b or the guidance passage 408d, not only the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, but also the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the next big hit. Since the game is confirmed, the player is guaranteed three times of big hits that will be won in the high probability state of this big hit, the next big hit, and the special symbol that will be transferred after the next big hit. It is possible to recognize that the player is present, give a great sense of satisfaction to the player, and improve the player's interest in the game.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the first ball entry port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entry port switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first entry opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (8 rounds of jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 8 times (8 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward on the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box It is cut to the cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 19A, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 has a random number table 202a per first, a type selection table 202b per first, and a random number table 202c per second as a part of the fixed value data described above. , At least the variation pattern selection table 202d is stored.

The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 (not shown), which will be described later, is stored. The details of the first random number table 202a will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1. The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 19 (b)) is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. The details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described later together with the description of the first hit type counter C2.

The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 19 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. The details of the second random number table 202c will be described later together with the description of the second random number counter C4. The variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is set for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 18, a counter or the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used for a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such as.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The counter CINI1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 34). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first ball entry port. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and the balls are left and right in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), reaches the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the random number counter C1 per first is special. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is for a low probability time of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability time (special symbol) with a higher probability of becoming a jackpot of a special symbol than the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the probability is high, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers that become big hits different in this way, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the high probability of the special symbol and the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the low probability of the special symbol are in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is the one at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are three random number values that are big hits of the special symbol when the probability of the special symbol is low, and the random number values "7,107,282" are the special symbols for the low probability. It is stored in the jackpot random number table. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 3 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/100".

On the other hand, when the probability of the special symbol is high, there are 30 random numbers that are the jackpots of the special symbol, and the values are "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78,83,99,106, 112,122,134,140,151,168,176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. It is stored in. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 30 while the total number of random numbers is 300, so the probability of the special symbol being the jackpot is "1/10".

In the present embodiment, the random number value that becomes the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability and the random number value that becomes the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. So, the random number values that are the jackpots for each are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random value for the jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random value that becomes the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 19B, in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "big hit A". Further, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B".

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. From the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2, the random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol is set by the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 19B). , This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach other than front and back" (for example, 98,99) that stops at the same time, and "Reach other than front and back" (for example, range of 90 to 97) that the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability times has a wide range of random numbers from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Is selected, and "completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99, and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and rear" and "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79, when the probability is low. The table for is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. NS. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 34) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A fluctuation pattern table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. There is.

In the variation pattern table, for example, as variation patterns for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", "disengagement special reach" Various types are specified, and various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for jackpot A and jackpot B, and "special" is specified as fluctuation patterns for jackpot A. Various types of "reach" are specified, and various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for both hit and miss. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type).

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of this, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that hits the normal symbol is set by the random number table per normal symbol (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the normal symbol. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the hit random number table, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this random number table per normal symbol is used for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period during which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and for the high probability of hitting the normal symbol (for the normal symbol). It is divided into two types, one for (the period during which the time is shortened) and the other, and the number of random numbers that are the jackpots contained in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers to be hit different in this way, the probability of being hit is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 19 (c), there are 24 random numbers that hit the normal symbol at a low probability of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in a random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 24 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of a jackpot of a normal symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The fluctuation display of is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. , The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random numbers that are big hits of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 204". These random number values are stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be the jackpot is 200 while the total number of random numbers is 240, so the probability of the jackpot of the normal symbol is "1 / 1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The fluctuation display of is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is completed. ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry port 64. A table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second hit random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only "1 second x 2 times" when the normal symbol hits, but it is opened. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. It is possible to execute the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83.

Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 18, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 34) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 32) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 17, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a probability change flag. It has a 203e, a time saving / medium counter 203f, a round number counter 203g, a lottery flag 203h, an opening flag 203i, and a rotating body flag 203j.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a random number counter C1 per first. , Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th area on hold), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a shifts to the execution area. Then, based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting prize, a big hit lottery of the original special symbol is drawn. Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the starting prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) is obtained. It is described that the prediction is to pre-read the lottery result of the special symbol thereafter. The various types of information include hit / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the look-ahead is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the look-ahead is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. Store in 223a.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, the winning prizes stored in the other hold areas The shift process is performed to pack the data into the holding area that is one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standbys) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S404 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 26).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variation display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 26 and S405 in FIG. 28). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110 by a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the reserved ball number (standby) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the game ball passing through the second entry port 67. It is a counter that counts the number of times) up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time the game ball passes through the second entry port 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 1 It is added (see S704 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 29).

When the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is less than 4, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right second entry port 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not done (S703: No in FIG. 30).

The probability change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol (high probability state of the special symbol). If the probability change flag 203e is on, the pachinko machine 10 is the probability change state of the special symbol. When the probability variation flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The initial value of the probability variation flag 203e is set to zero, and the game ball has entered any of the probability variation entry slots 502 to 504 in the lottery by the lottery device 300 performed based on the jackpot of the special symbol. Is turned on based on (S1614 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203e is turned off when the game ball enters the time-saving entry slot 501 in the lottery by the lottery device 300 (S1620 in FIG. 35).

When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, the value of the probability variation flag 203e is referred to, and if the state is on, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, while the probability variation flag 203e. If is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability.

The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time-saving / medium-time counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time saving medium counter 203f is set to zero, and a specific value is obtained based on the game ball winning the time saving winning opening 501 in the lottery by the lottery device 300 performed based on the jackpot of the special symbol. It is set to (for example, 100) (see S1620 in FIG. 35). After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variation effect of the special symbol is completed until the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f becomes 0 (S214 in FIG. 26).

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the lottery for the normal symbol is based on the random number table per normal symbol for high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0, a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability time (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 29).

The round number counter 203g is a counter indicating the number of rounds during the jackpot game, and the value of the round number counter 203g indicates the current number of rounds in the jackpot game. The value of the round number counter 203g is set to 0 at the start of the jackpot, and the value is added by 1 at the start of each round.

The lottery flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not it is the timing to perform the lottery by the lottery device 300, and is turned on when it is the timing to perform the lottery. On the other hand, the lottery flag 203h is turned off after making various settings for starting the lottery by the lottery device 300. That is, the lottery flag 203h is a flag that is turned on only between the time when the lottery device 300 determines that the lottery is performed and the time when the lottery is actually started.

The open flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is open. When the opening flag 203i is on, it indicates that the lottery gate 310 is open, and when it is off, it indicates that the lottery gate 310 is closed. The opening flag 203i is normally set to off, and is turned on after the opening of the lottery gate 310 is set in the various settings for performing the lottery by the lottery device 300 (S1603, S1604 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, when the lottery by the lottery device 300 is detected and the lottery gate 310 is closed, the lottery is turned off (S1608, S1609 in FIG. 35).

The rotating body flag 203j is a flag indicating the direction of the sorting rotating body 341 arranged inside the lottery device 300, and when the position of the sorting rotating body 341 shifts before and after the power is turned on, the sorting rotating body 341 is rotated. It is used to return the arrangement of the body 341 to the state before the power was turned off. When the rotating body flag 203j is on, it indicates that the distribution rotating body 341 is swinging to the left side, and when it is off, it indicates that the sorting rotating body 341 is swinging to the right side. The rotating body flag 203j is switched in conjunction with the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 by the position detection sensor 263, and the distribution rotating body 341 is swung to the left by the position detection sensor 263 (face down state). The rotating body flag is turned on when it is detected to be present, and turned off when it is detected that the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the right (face-up state).

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, a flow path switching valve 331a and 331b in the lottery device 300 are driven to flow a game ball. A flow path solenoid 265 for switching the path is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, the input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown), a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and each entry port in the lottery device 300. A winning sensor 420 that detects the entry of a game ball, a position detection sensor 263 that detects the direction of the distribution rotating body 341 in the lottery device 300, and a rotation motor 264 for correcting the direction of the distribution rotating body 341 are connected. The MPU 201 performs various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208, the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253, the ball entry signal output from the winning sensor 420, the detection signal of the position detection sensor 263, and the like. To execute.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the content of the effect, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The variation pattern table 222a is stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and a special effect flag 223e. ing.

The variation pattern table 222a is a table used for determining the mode of the variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, by the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the mode of the rough fluctuation pattern such as "off normal reach", "shared normal reach", and "shared special reach". The fluctuation pattern table 222a is used to determine a detailed mode of the fluctuation pattern based on the mode of the rough fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command, and is used to determine a rough mode of the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command. A plurality of detailed variation pattern modes that can be selected are defined for each mode.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize when the main control device 110 wins the start. Therefore, various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is obtained. , The main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b manages the reserved ball number. It has become.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variation display is added by entering the ball into the first entry port 64, or in the main control device 110, the variation display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command, and specially It is stored in the symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1407 in FIG. 40). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2701 in FIG. 41), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1702 in FIG. 43). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1404 in FIG. 40), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1707 in FIG. 43). The stop type selection flag 223d is also turned off when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The special effect flag 223e is in a state where the distribution rotating body 341 arranged inside the lottery device 300 is swung to the left side (see FIG. 11A), and the game ball can be entered in the next lottery. When the mouth is in either the probability-changing ball opening 503 or the probability-changing ball opening 504 (that is, the state in which it is confirmed that the special symbol will be transferred to the high-probability state in the next lottery by the lottery device 300). , It is a flag for making a variation pattern effect in a special mode different from usual. This special effect flag 223e is turned on when a loop state command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S3702 in FIG. 42), and is turned off when a normal state command output from the main controller 110 is received. (See S3704 in FIG. 42).

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 40) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control program (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) executed after the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 44) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 44).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 21, the power is turned on by the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 21 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 21 (b). On the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the image of the “x” symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in FIG. 21 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", it is shown in FIG. 21 (c). The displayed image is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 21 (b) and 21 (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry into the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the device is not used.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the demo production is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variation effect was stopped. Therefore, the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect and one display data table corresponding to the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. Information on effects and characters is defined as one or more according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backs A to. Information that specifies whether to display a back image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because the symbol changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 14). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 23). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 23).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 23, in the example of FIG. 23). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 44) (see S1805 in FIG. 44). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 55 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 46 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 46B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 46B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 46 (b) see S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 47 to 51) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 55 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 55 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later, which describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the display data can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 46 (b). ), The pointer update process (see FIG. 54) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one (see S3201 in FIG. 54).

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 24) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 24, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 starts an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 46 (b). ) Is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 in FIG. 52). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231. It is said. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3513 in FIG. 56). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3514 in FIG. 56). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 47).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, the display process of displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 46B) is executed, it is performed (see S3602 in FIG. 57).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. NS.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. NS. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 25 to 37. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt processing, first, the reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When it reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it clears to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S104), and then the special symbol variation process is executed (S104). The start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate is passed along with the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67. The process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Unless the special symbol is in the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S208). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S209: No) has not elapsed, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 27. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is decided whether it will be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of the lottery this time is a big hit of a special symbol (S211: Yes), the lottery flag 203h is turned on (S212), and this process ends.

In the process of S211 if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S213), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1. If the above is the case (S213: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S214), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S213: No), the processing of S214 is skipped and the main processing is terminated.

Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is an execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "big hit of special symbol" or "missing of special symbol" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are used. This is a process for determining the effect pattern of the variable effect (variable effect pattern).

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired. (S301).

Next, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 and the first random number table 202a, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S302). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a one by one. As described above, there are three random number values of "7,107,282" stored in the first random number table 202a for the low probability when the special symbol has a low probability. , The random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol at the time of high probability of the special symbol is stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability, "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78". , 83,99,106,112,122,134,140,151,168,176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 ". ..

Further, whether the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol can be determined by referring to the state of the probability variation flag 203e. Specifically, when the probability variation flag 203e is on, it is a high probability state of the special symbol, and when the probability variation flag 203e is off, it is a low probability state of the special symbol. In the processing of S302, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a according to the state of the probability variation flag 203e, and when these values match, it is special. Judge that it is a big hit of the symbol.

If it is determined in the processing of S302 that the jackpot is a special symbol (S302: Yes), the display mode at the time of jackpot is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S301 (S302: Yes). S303). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the jackpot of two types of special symbols (big hit). It is determined which of the A and the jackpot B) is the jackpot type. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (front route jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is a jackpot. It is determined to be B (back route jackpot) (see FIG. 19B).

In the process of S303, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, in order to display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol common to the jackpot types (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S304). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S304, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

For example, as the fluctuation pattern for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach" are specified. , Various types of "shared normal reach", various types of "shared super reach", and various types of "shared special reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns shared by jackpot A and jackpot B, and various types of "special reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for jackpot A. Is stipulated, and various "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are stipulated as fluctuation patterns for both hit and miss.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S302: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S305). In the process of S305, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", set the reach that is out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S306). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S304, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To determine.

When the process of S304 or the process of S306 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S304 or the process of S306 is set (S307). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S303 or S305 is set (S308). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 24). NS. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S308 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and when there is a starting winning. , The process for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the process for executing the pre-reading of the lottery result in the special symbol from the values indicated by the various held random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203c is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The hold ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c from the hold ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above are set to RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the hold fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, based on the various counter values stored in the processing of S406, the winning / failing of the lottery in the special symbol (whether it is a big hit or not), the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S407). Here, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit depends on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406 and the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 19A). It is determined by comparing (hit value) one by one. As described above, there are three random number values of "7,107,282" stored in the first random number table 202a for the low probability when the special symbol has a low probability. , The random number value that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol at the time of high probability of the special symbol is stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability, "4,11,28,38,45,52,64,78". , 83,99,106,112,122,134,140,151,168,176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285,299 ". ..

Further, whether the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol is determined by referring to the probability variation flag 203e. Specifically, when the probability variation flag 203e is on, it is a high probability state of the special symbol, and when the probability variation flag 203e is off, it is a low probability state of the special symbol. In the processing of S407, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a according to the state of the probability variation flag 203e, and when these values match, it is special. Judge that it is a big hit of the symbol.

Then, when it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the processing of S406 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table. It is determined which of the two types of special symbol jackpots (big hit A, jackpot B) is the jackpot type. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (a jackpot in which the flow path in the lottery device 300 is switched to the front route, a front route jackpot). However, if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined that it is a jackpot B (a jackpot in which the flow path in the lottery device 300 switches to the back route, a jackpot on the back route) (see FIG. 19B).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment, the front / rear out reach is set as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the processing of S406. It is determined whether it is a reach other than the front-back deviation, or a complete deviation. Here, if the probability change flag 203e is on, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Determine the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", it is determined that it is completely out of range, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", it is determined that it is reach other than the front and rear deviation. However, if it is "98,99", it is determined that the reach is out of front and back. On the other hand, when the probability change flag 203e is off, the stop type is determined by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", it is determined that it is completely out of range, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", it is determined that it is reach other than the front and rear deviation. However, if it is "98,99", it is determined that the reach is out of front and back.

Next, the fluctuation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The fluctuation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is set to the predicted lottery result or the predicted stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) from the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202. It will be selected accordingly. In the variation pattern table, for example, as variation patterns for disconnection, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disengagement normal reach", "disengagement super reach", "disengagement special reach" Various types are specified, and various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for jackpot A and jackpot B, and "special" is specified as fluctuation patterns for jackpot A. Various types of "reach" are specified, and various types of "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are specified as fluctuation patterns for both hit and miss. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type).

If the winning / failing of the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and the fluctuation pattern are predicted by the processing of S407, then the predicted winning / failing of the lottery, the predicted stopping type, and the predicted stopping type are determined. A winning information command including the predicted fluctuation pattern is set (S408), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25).

The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning / failing, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern from the winning information command, and stores the information as the winning information in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entry port 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. Includes during and during. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. If the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S609). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to be a hit. This is because the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state), so that the electric accessory attached to the first entry opening 64 is released. This is to prevent the ball that is to be won in the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entry opening 64, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first entry opening 64 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the first one Many balls enter the ball entry port 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 becomes the maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state.

In the processing of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 19 (c)).

In the process of S608, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the processing of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607 is low. Based on the random number table per ordinary symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see FIG. 19 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the special symbol is currently being hit. Whether or not it is determined (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first entry port 64 as much as possible, even if the ball hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case where the normal symbol is missed. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. The opening period of the electric accessory associated with 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. . In addition to setting to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S612: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the variation in the second symbol display device 83. The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the release period of the first entry port 64 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the first entry port 64.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1009) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next, the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? Is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 is set (S625), and this process is completed. When the start of opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry port 67, and if the ball has passed, the ball has passed. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entry port 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S702). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entry port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entry port 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the number of normal symbol reserved balls The value (M) of the counter 203d is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the first of the free hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area of (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the hold second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the hold third area is set, and if the value is 3, the hold fourth area is set as the first area.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S913 in this case as well.

If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S913 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 34, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S913). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S914, S915) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S914, S915) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 33, but in the rotating body position initialization process (see FIG. 33) of S910, the position of the sorting rotating body 341 arranged inside the lottery device 300 is set as necessary. And fix it. After the completion of the rotating body position initialization process (S310), the process proceeds to the process of S911, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and various types are sent to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The execution of the production is permitted (S911). Next, the interrupt is permitted (S912), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the rotating body position initialization process (S910) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this rotating body position initialization process (S910).

As described above, this rotating body position initialization process (S910) is a process of correcting the position of the distribution rotating body 341 arranged inside the lottery device 300 as necessary. The case where correction is necessary is, for example, a case where the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 has changed between the time when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the time when the power is turned on next. The distribution rotating body 341 can be arranged in a state of swinging to the right (face-up state) (see FIG. 11B) and a state of swinging to the left (face-down state) (FIG. 11). (See (a)) exists. The state of swinging to the right (face-up state) occurs when initialization is performed (that is, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on) or when the game ball is turned on. Passed through the guidance passage 408c provided in the distribution rotating body 341 (see FIG. 14). On the other hand, the state of swinging to the left (face-down state) is when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408b provided in the distribution rotating body 341 (see FIG. 13).

In the rotating body position initialization process (S910), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1501), and it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. (S1501: Yes) shifts the process to S1502. On the other hand, in the process of S1501, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (that is, it is turned off), it is further determined whether or not the rotating body flag 203j is turned on (S1503) and turned on. If it is determined that it is not (that is, it is off), the process shifts to S1502.

In the process of S1502, the rotation motor 264 for rotating the distribution rotating body 341 is driven, and the distribution rotating body 341 is arranged in a state of swinging to the right (face-up state) (see FIG. 11B). It is rotated about the shaft 406 so as to be (S1504), and this process is completed and the process returns to the start-up process.

In the process of S1503, when it is determined that the rotating body flag 203j is on (S1503: Yes), the state of the sorting rotating body 341 before turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10 is swinging to the left (face down). (State), so the rotation motor 264 for rotating the distribution rotating body 341 is driven, and the distribution rotating body 341 is swung to the left (face down state). (Refer to FIG. 11A), this process is completed, and the process returns to the start-up process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1009 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1012 and S1013 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls is corresponded to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command and the winning information command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 26) and the starting winning processing (see FIG. 28) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 36) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened or closed. The lottery gate process is executed (S1004). In the lottery gate processing (S1004), the stop symbol of the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated (that is, a lottery for whether or not to set the special symbol in a high probability state is performed. The lottery gate 310 is opened (at the timing performed by the lottery device 300). Further, when it is detected that a game ball has entered the lottery gate or the maximum opening time (for example, 30 seconds) of the lottery gate 310 has elapsed, the lottery gate 310 is closed. Further, in this process, it is detected which of the time-saving entry slot 501 and the probability variation entry openings 501 to 504 the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 has entered, and the game ball enters the lottery gate 310. Performs processing according to the entrance of the ball. In the present embodiment, the lottery gate process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

After the lottery gate processing (S1004) is completed, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed and the jackpot control for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65. The process is executed (S1005). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, a rotating body position detection process for determining the arrangement of the sorting rotating body 341 arranged inside the lottery device 300 based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263 is performed (S1006). In the present embodiment, the rotating body position detection process (S1006) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

When the rotating body position detection process (S1006) is completed, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first entry port 64 is executed (S1007). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 29), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1008). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S304 or the process of S306 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed in the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S304 or the process of S306 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) ends, the first symbol display device The change display executed in 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S303 or the process of S305 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1009). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 29), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29) after ending the variable display. (Lighting display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1010), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1010: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1011). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1011: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1011: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1012, S1013).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1012). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1009 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1010, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1010: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 31 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1014 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1014), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1015). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1016), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1017), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S1010 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1009, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1012 and S1013 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the lottery gate process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this lottery gate processing process (S1004). This lottery gate process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34), and controls the lottery gate of the lottery device 300 for drawing whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol. , This is a process for detecting the entry port where the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 enters.

In the lottery gate processing, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery flag 203h is on. When it is determined that the lottery flag 203h is on (S1601: Yes), it indicates that it is the timing to start the lottery as to whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol, so the lottery device 300 performs the lottery. (S1602 to S1604), turn off the lottery flag 203h (S1605), and end this process.

In various settings for performing lottery by the lottery device 300, first, the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set based on the jackpot type (S1602). Specifically, if the jackpot type is "big hit A", the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set as the front route, and if the jackpot type is "big hit B", the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set in the back. Set to the root. When the processing of S1602 is completed, the opening of the lottery gate 310 is set so that the game ball can enter the inside of the lottery device 300 (S1603). After that, by turning on the release flag 203i, it is shown that the lottery gate 310 is open (S1604), and various settings are completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery flag 203h is not on (that is, is off) as a result of the processing of S1601 (S1601: No), it is determined whether or not the release flag 203i is on, and the release flag 203i is set. If it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off) (S1606: No), the processes of S1607 to S1612 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1613. On the other hand, when it is determined that the open flag 203i is on (S1606: Yes), it indicates that the lottery gate 310 is open, so it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the lottery gate 310. (S1607).

In the process of S1607, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the lottery gate 310 (S1607: Yes), the game ball necessary for performing the lottery by the lottery device 300 has entered the lottery device 300. Therefore, in order to prevent the game ball from entering the lottery device 300 thereafter, the lottery gate 310 is closed (S1608), the open flag 203i is turned off (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1613. ..

In the process of S1607, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the lottery gate 310 (S1607: No), it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is satisfied (S1610). Here, the condition that the lottery gate 310 is closed without the game ball entering the lottery gate 310 is that the maximum opening time (for example, 30 seconds) of the lottery gate 310 has elapsed. If it is determined that the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is not satisfied (that is, within the maximum opening time of the lottery gate 310) (S1610: No), the process proceeds to S1613. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is satisfied (that is, the maximum opening time of the lottery gate 310 has elapsed) (S1610: Yes), the probability change flag 203e is turned off and the time saving medium counter 203f is set. 100 is set (S1611), and a time-saving jackpot game is set (S1612). Then, the lottery gate is closed (S1608), the open flag 203i is turned off (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1613.

In the process of S1613, based on the detection results of the winning sensors 420a to 420d, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered any of the probabilistic entry ball openings 502 to 504 (S1613). When it is determined that the ball has entered any of the probability variation entry ports 502 to 504 (S1613: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is turned on (S1614), and the start of the probability variation jackpot game is set (S1615). Then, it is determined whether or not the entry port into which the game ball has entered is the probability variation entry slot 503 (S1616), and if it is determined to be the probability variation entry slot 503 (S1616: Yes), the voice lamp control is performed. A normal state command is set as a command to be transmitted to the device 113 (S1618), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1616, when it is determined that the entry port into which the game ball has entered is not the probability variation entry port 503 (that is, the probability variation entry ball port 502 or the probability variation entry ball port 504) (S1616: No), a loop state command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1617), and this process is terminated.

Here, the normal state command and the loop state command will be described in detail. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the probabilistic entry ball port 503, the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the right based on the game ball passing through the guidance passage 408c. (See FIG. 14). When the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the right, in the next lottery by the lottery device 300, the game ball is a time-saving entry slot 501, which is an entry slot arranged on the right side of the lottery device 300, or a probability change entry. Since the ball will enter one of the ball mouths 502 (see FIG. 16A), it does not necessarily shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the next jackpot, and the game ball enters the ball in a short time. If you enter the mouth 501, you will be in a low-probability state with a special symbol.

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the probability-changing ball opening 502 or the probability-changing ball opening 504, the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the left (see FIGS. 13 and 15), so that the lottery device 300 In the lottery at the time of the next big hit by, the entry port to which the game balls are distributed is the probability variation entry slot 503 or the probability variation entry slot 504, which is the entry slot arranged on the left side of the lottery device 300. (See FIG. 16 (b)), even after the next big hit, the game shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the probabilistic ball opening 502 or the probabilistic ball opening 504 than the game ball enters the probabilistic ball opening 503.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has entered the probability-changing ball port 502 or the probability-changing ball port 504 (S1616: No), the voice lamp control device 113 is in a loop state which is advantageous for the player. It is configured to send a command (loop state command) indicating that it has transitioned to. Then, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 41, the voice lamp control device 113 indicates that the player is currently in an advantageous state based on receiving the loop state command. The effect (loop state effect) is configured to be executable. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the present is an advantageous state due to the occurrence of the loop state effect, which is an effect different from the usual one, and thus the loop state, which is an advantageous state for the player. It is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing that he / she is in an advantageous state even though he / she is in the middle.

On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the probabilistic entry ball port 503 (S1616: Yes), the voice lamp control device 113 is in a normal state indicating that the current state is not the loop state (that is, the normal state). It is configured to send commands. The voice lamp control device 113 can determine whether or not to execute the loop state effect based on which of the normal state command and the loop state command is received.

Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. In the process of S1613, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered any of the probabilistic entry ports 502 to 504 (S1613: No), whether or not the game ball has entered the time-saving entry slot 501. Is determined based on the detection result of the winning sensor 420c (S1619), and if it is determined that the ball has not entered the time-saving entry slot 501 (S1619: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, in the process of S1619, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the time-saving entry slot 501, it shifts to the low-probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, so the probability change flag 203e is turned off and the time-saving medium counter 203f Is set to 100 (S1620) to set the start of the time-saving jackpot game (S1621). Then, as a command to be output to the voice lamp control device 113, a normal state command for notifying that the current state is not in the loop state (that is, the normal state) is set (S1622), and this process is terminated.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1005). This jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and a specific winning opening (see FIG. 34). Large opening port) This is a process for opening or closing 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the process of S1612, S1615, or S1621 of the lottery gate processing (see FIG. 35) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. do. In the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), 0 is set to the value of the round number counter 203 g (S1102), and this process is terminated. The number of rounds during the jackpot is determined by the round number counter 203g.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1103). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S1103: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1103, if the special symbol is in the jackpot (1103: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1105), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1106). The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. After setting the number of rounds command, 1 is added to the value of the number of rounds counter 203g to match the number of rounds of the newly started round with the value of the number of rounds counter 203g (S1107), and this process ends. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (S1108). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls are played. When a prize is won (for example, 10 pieces), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

If it is determined in the process of S1108 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1108: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1108: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1109), and the round number counter 203g is used. It is determined whether or not the value is 8 (S1110). If it is determined in the process of S1110 that the value of the round number counter is not 8 (that is, it is any of 1 to 7) (S1110: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is 8 (S1110: Yes), the current end timing of 8 rounds (that is, the final round) is set, so the end of the jackpot is set (S1111), and this Ends the process and returns to the main process.

Next, the rotating body position detection process (S1006) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this rotating body position detection process (S1006). This rotating body position detection process (S1006) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34), the arrangement of the sorting rotating body 341 is stored in the rotating body flag 203j, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Is also a process for returning the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 to the same arrangement as immediately before the power is turned off at the time of power recovery.

In this rotating body position detection process (S1006), first, it is determined whether or not the rotating body flag 203j is on (S2501). When it is determined that the rotating body flag 203j is not on (that is, off) as a result of the processing of S2501 (S2501: No), the arrangement of the distributed rotating body 341 is ostensibly in the previous rotating body position detection processing (S2501: No). Since it indicates that the arrangement was (swinged to the right), whether or not the current arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 is ostensibly (swinged to the right) based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263. By determining whether or not, it is determined whether or not the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 has changed between the previous rotating body position detection process and the current rotating body position detecting process (S2502).

Then, when it is determined that the current arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 is in the face-up state (the state of swinging to the right) (S2502: Yes), the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 is at the time of the previous rotating body position detection process. Since it has not changed from, this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 is in a face-down state (a state of swinging to the left side) (S2502: No), the distribution rotating body 341 has been subjected to since the time of the previous rotating body position detection process. Since it indicates that the arrangement has changed, the rotating body flag 203j is turned on (S2503) to end this process.

In the process of S2501, when it is determined that the rotating body flag 203j is on (S2501: Yes), the current arrangement of the sorting rotating body 341 is ostensibly (on the right side) based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263. If it is determined whether or not it is in a swinging state (S2504), and if it is determined that the current arrangement of the sorting rotating body 341 is in a face-down state (swinging state to the left) (S2504: No), sorting is performed. Since the arrangement of the rotating body 341 has not changed since the time of the previous rotating body position detection processing, this processing is ended and the process returns to the main processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 is in an ostensibly state (a state of swinging to the right) (S2504: Yes), the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 from the time of the previous rotating body position detection process Indicates that is changing, so the rotating body flag 203j is turned off (S2505) to end this process.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1316 (see FIG. 39) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1313 in FIG. 39), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1316. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1316 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1316. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1316 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the data shifts to S1208.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1316, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1316 is executed (see S1315 in FIG. 39). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1316 is executed, the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1316 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1211) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S1208 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after, for example, the power supply is completely cut off, so that the processing of S1208 is performed via the processing of S1204 to S1206. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1209, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process shifts to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that when the processing of S1208 is reached via the processing of S1204 to S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1301 this time was executed (S1301), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S1302 to S1310 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1311 and the variation display setting process of S1312 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1312 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process proceeds to the process of S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage is changed and the rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image according to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a possessable effect, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1307 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to the process of S1311. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1311). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. When the command determination process (S1311) is completed, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

When the processing of S1312 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1313). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1313 (S1313: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1315), and the power-off process is executed (S1316). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1317), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power off processing, the occurrence of the interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1313 (S1313: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1314), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1314: No), the process returns to the process of S1301 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1314: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. It is a process.

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation pattern selection process for selecting the mode of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed (S1402), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type selected here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 43) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1403). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1403: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1404), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1405), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 43) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1403: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1406). Then, when the hold ball number command is received (S1406: Yes), the value included in the received hold ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). The number of holdings N) of the fluctuation display in the above is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1407). Further, in the process of S1407, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1407 is completed, the process returns to the main processing.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize) or when a special symbol lottery is performed, so that the starting winning is won. Is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the processing of S1407 to the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning prize is detected or special. At the time of the symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1407 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1406, when the reserved ball number command is not received (S1406: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1408). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1408: Yes), various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) is extracted as winning information from the received winning information command (S1409). After the processing of S1409 is completed, next, the winning information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) extracted in the processing of S1409 is the first of the empty areas (first area to fourth area) of the winning information storage area 223a. It is stored in the area (S1410) and returns to the main process.

In the process of S1408, if the winning information command is not received (S1408: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1411). Then, when the round number command is received (S1411: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1412), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number command (S1411: Yes). S1413), this process is terminated. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1411, when the round number command is not received (S1413: No), then the special effect setting process for determining whether or not the current state is the loop state is executed (S1414). .. Based on the determination result by this special effect execution process, it is determined whether or not to perform a special effect suggesting a loop state which is an advantageous state for the player.

When the process of S1414 is completed, it is then determined whether or not another command has been received, the process according to the received result is executed, and (S1419) this process is terminated. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114.

Next, the variation pattern selection process (S1402) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1402). This fluctuation pattern selection process (S1402) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1402 in FIG. 40), and as described above, the main control device 110 This is a process for selecting the type of variation pattern executed in the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern command from.

In the variation pattern selection process (S1402), first, the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2701), and then it is determined whether or not the special effect flag 223e is on (S2702).

Then, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is on, the fluctuation pattern type for the loop state is extracted from the fluctuation pattern types based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 (S2703). , End this process. In the process of S2703, in addition to the variation pattern type that is selected even in the normal state, a variation pattern type that is not selected in the normal state can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that the state is special to the player by selecting the variation pattern effect of the mode dedicated to the loop state different from the normal state and displaying it on the third symbol display device 81. .. In addition, the mode dedicated to the loop state includes, for example, a character that does not appear in the normal state appears during the fluctuation of the third symbol, a symbol different from the normal state is displayed, a sound effect different from the normal state, and the like. Sound effects are performed, etc.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2702: No), among the fluctuation pattern types based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the normal state The variation pattern type for is extracted (S2704), and this process is terminated. Based on the variation pattern type extracted by the processing of S2703 or S2704, the variation pattern effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the current state is in the loop state based on the state of the special effect flag 203e, and if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the loop state, the player is notified. The mode of the variation pattern production for suggesting that the present is in an advantageous state can be selected. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the present is an advantageous state by executing the variation pattern effect in a mode different from the usual one, and thus the loop state is an advantageous state for the player. It is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing that he / she is in an advantageous state even though he / she is in the middle.

In the loop state, the fluctuation pattern type selected in the normal state may not be selected at all. As a result, the player can determine whether or not the current state is in the loop state by performing the fluctuation pattern effect only once, so that the player is in the loop state even though it is in the loop state. It is possible to more reliably suppress quitting the game without noticing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the special effect setting process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the special effect setting process (S1414). This special effect setting process (S1414) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1414 in FIG. 40), and as described above, the current state is It is a process for determining whether or not it is in a loop state and executing a variable pattern effect in an effect mode according to whether or not it is in a loop state.

In the special effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a loop state command has been received (S3701). The loop state command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fact that the game ball has entered either the probability-changing ball opening 502 or the probability-changing ball opening 504 in the above-mentioned lottery gate processing (see FIG. 35). This is a command that is output, and is a command that indicates that the player has transitioned to a loop state that shifts to a high-probability state of a special symbol not only after the current jackpot but also after the next jackpot.

When it is determined that the loop state command has been received (S3701: Yes), the special effect flag 223e is turned on to indicate that the current state is in the loop state (S3702), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the loop state command has not been received (S3701: No), it is subsequently determined whether or not the normal state command has been received (S3703). The normal state command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fact that the game ball has entered either the time-saving entry slot 501 or the probability variation entry slot 503 in the above-mentioned lottery gate processing (see FIG. 35). It is a command that is output, and it is a command that indicates that it has shifted to the normal state that may shift to either the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol after the next big hit. ..

When it is determined that the normal state command has been received (S3703: Yes), the special effect flag 223e is turned off to indicate that the current state is not in the loop state (S3704), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3703, if it is determined that the normal state command has not been received (S3703: No), this process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 41), the state of the special effect flag 223e set in this process is determined, and the variation pattern is executed in a special mode for the loop state, or for the normal state. It is determined whether to execute the variation pattern in the mode. As a result, during the loop state, the variation pattern effect is executed in a mode different from the usual mode, so that the player can easily recognize that the present is an advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing that the current state is in the loop state even though the current state is in the loop state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the variation display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S1312). This variation display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1706 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1702), and then the fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 41), S2703 or S2704, is performed. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In the process of S1705, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1707), and then in the process of S1405 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

Next, the extracted stop type is set as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1709), and the display stop for notifying the display control device 114 based on the set stop type. A type command is generated, the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1710), and this process is terminated. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 57. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 44, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a large amount of time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR type ROM has a high speed because a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S1902, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 44) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S1801) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 45, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S1902. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S1902 and S1902, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 44. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1803, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S1804). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S1804, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S1805). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 55 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 55 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)), a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 21 is drawn. The determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 46 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 46 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. This can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entering (starting prize) at the first entry port 64, and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. 21 (b) and 21 (c) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period. A simple variable effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that the transfer takes a long time, and the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S1805, interrupt permission is set (S1806), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (a). FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (b). FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 24) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 46B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the command determination process (S2102) is executed, and then the display setting process (S2103) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51.

In the display setting process (S2103), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2104). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2103) or the simple display setting process (S2109). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), which are determined in the task process (S2104), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete out) is set. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 21 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed to display the image of S2104. Move to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2102), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 47, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202), and then the command The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2203).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2204), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2301).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter fluctuation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2306), the variation pattern command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2305, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S2302e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is timed by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 47. In the processing of S2204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variable type command (S2206: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2207), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (various jackpots, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, or complete out of order) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2401). , The change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by comparing the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) is executed. The stop symbol after the production is finally set (S2402).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (S2403) and end this process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2104), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2403, and the specified stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S2402.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2206, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2206: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2208). If there is a display round number command (S2208: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2209), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S2601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S2603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2604). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2605), the fanfare command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 47. In the processing of S2208, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2208: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2210), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S2210: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2211), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 51 (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S3303) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S2801). .. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are displayed. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2802), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S2801 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S2802. .. Then, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task process (S2104), when it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by S2802 is specified. Therefore, the type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM address of the normal video RAM 236 corresponding to the back image is specified. do.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2802, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 47. In the processing of S2210, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2210: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2212), and there is an error command. If (S2212: Yes), the error command processing is executed (S2213), and the process returns to the processing of S2201.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (b). FIG. 51 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S2902), and the error command is set. The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S2902 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S2902, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 47. When it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2212 (S2212: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2219), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

In the processing of S2201 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes). ), The processing of S2202 to S2219 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2201 to S2219 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2201 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) is also processed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 21 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 48) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 49), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and the other commands are the commands. Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 48) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2301. Further, since the image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on required in that case are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. In the process of S2302, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3001: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S3002), S3003 to S3004 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S3003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to, and all the error discrimination set to be turned on is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3101).

In the task processing (S2104), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 52. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3005.

In S3005, the pointer update process is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3201, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S3203), and if it is a demo display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this processing is completed. And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3203: No). S3206), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 52 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the types of sprites (display objects) that compose the image are specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S3006 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates are displayed for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S3009).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S3009: No), the confirmation display has not yet been produced and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. As such, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2104), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S3015, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmation display flag is on (S3009: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: No), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3017) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3018). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing contents can be set to.

In the process of S3016, if the demo display flag is on (S3016: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, one of the variation images at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. A process of setting the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, which specifies that the image (either of FIGS. 21B and 21C) to be stopped and displayed, is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S3301 (S3301: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (b). FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3402). In the process of S3402, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3403. Further, as a result of the processing of S3401, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3403.

In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 46 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 46 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 47 to 51) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) (see S3301: No in FIG. 55 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 is displayed by image data of frequently displayed images such as a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, a voice lamp control device 113, a display control device 114, and the like. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the determination is made, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the third operation is performed by the player at an arbitrary timing. It is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S3502), and if it is the transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3504), and the process proceeds to S3505.

Further, in the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

In the process of S3506, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3506: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3507. Further, as a result of the processing of S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3505: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3507.

In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S3509). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3509: No), there is no image data to be transferred, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S3509: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S3510), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3511). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3512), and the process proceeds to S3513.

In the process of S3513, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513). The discrimination in the process of S3513 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is a normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S3513, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3513 (S3513: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3514). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S3514, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3515), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, if the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the back image is changed. The image data used in the image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2106), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 24 (S3601). That is, in the processing of S3601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2104). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the process of S3602 (S3603). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 46B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be a "special symbol jackpot", and after the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is confirmed and displayed, the lottery device 300 specializes after the jackpot. A lottery will be held to determine whether or not to shift to the high-probability state of the symbol. In this lottery, the game balls that have entered the lottery device 300 are entered from any of a plurality of entry ports (short-time entry ball opening 501 and probability variation entry ball opening 501 to 504) arranged in the lottery device 300. Whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol is determined based on whether or not the ball enters the ball mouth. Further, the lottery device 300 is provided with flow path switching valves 331a, 331b and a distribution rotating body 341 that control the traveling direction of the game ball that has entered the lottery device 300, and the game is played according to these states. The entrance to which the ball enters is determined.

The states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are determined according to the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B), and when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the game ball flows down to the front side of the distribution rotating body 341. It switches to the direction (see FIG. 9B). On the other hand, when the jackpot type is jackpot B, the game ball switches in the direction of flowing down to the back side of the distribution rotating body 341 (see FIG. 9A). Further, the state of the distribution rotating body 341 is switched according to which of the four guidance passages 408a to 408d provided in the distribution rotating body 341 the game ball passes through.

Specifically, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408a in a state where the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right side (that is, a state in which the guidance passages 408a and 408b are directly below the entrance 411), the distribution rotation body The game ball enters the time-saving entry slot 501 without changing the state of 341 (that is, while swinging to the right). Therefore, even when the next big hit is won, the distribution rotating body 341 remains in the state of swinging to the right, and if the game ball is distributed to the guidance passage 408a again, the special symbol will be continuously in a low probability state. In some cases.

When the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408b with the distribution rotating body 341 swinging to the right, the distribution rotating body 341 rotates to the left around the axis 406 based on the weight of the game ball, and the game ball Enters the probability change ball opening 502. Therefore, when the next big hit is won, the game ball reaches the distribution rotating body 341 in a state where the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left side (that is, a state in which the guidance passages 408c and 408d are directly below the entrance 411). Therefore, next time, the ball will be entered into either the probability-changing ball opening 503 or the probability-changing ball opening 504. That is, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408b, not only the game shifts to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, but also the next jackpot always shifts to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. It is.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408c in a state where the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left side (that is, a state where the guidance passages 408c and 408d are directly below the entrance 411), the weight of the game ball is applied. Based on this, the distribution rotating body 341 rotates to the right around the axis 406, and the game ball enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 503. Therefore, when the next big hit is won, the game ball reaches the distribution rotating body 341 in a state where the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right side (that is, a state in which the guidance passages 408a and 408b are directly below the entrance 411). Therefore, next time, the ball will be entered into either the time-saving entry slot 501 or the probability variation entry slot 502. In other words, after the big hit this time, it will shift to the high probability state of the special symbol, but in the next big hit, there is a possibility that it will shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit, but it will also move to the low probability state of the special symbol. There is also the possibility of migrating.

Further, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408d with the distribution rotating body 341 swinging to the left side, the state of the distribution rotating body 341 does not change (that is, the game ball remains swinging to the left side). Enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 504. Therefore, even if the jackpot is won next time, the distribution rotating body 341 remains in the state of swinging to the left, so next time, the ball should be entered into either the probability variation entry 503 or the probability variation entry 504. It becomes. That is, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408d, not only the game shifts to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, but also the next jackpot always shifts to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. It is.

In this way, if the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the left, regardless of whether the game ball passes through the guidance passages 408c or 408d, it always shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, so that the player Can recognize that the result of the lottery by the lottery device 300 is a high probability state of the special symbol only by confirming that the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the left side, and the lottery by the lottery device 300. You can check the situation with confidence.

On the other hand, when the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the right, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol, so that the lottery result by the lottery device 300 is changed to the high probability state of the special symbol. It will be confirmed while holding both the expectation for the transition and the anxiety about the transition to the low probability state of the special symbol.

Therefore, the orientation of the distribution rotating body 341 is confirmed, and if it swings to the left side, it gives the player a sense of security, and if it swings to the right side, it gives the player a sense of expectation and anxiety. Therefore, it is possible to play a game with sharpness.

Furthermore, if the game ball is distributed to the guidance passage 408b or the guidance passage 408d, not only the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, but also the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the next big hit. Since the game is confirmed, the player is guaranteed three times of big hits, which will be won in the high probability state of this big hit, the next big hit, and the special symbol that will be transferred after the next big hit. This can be recognized, a great sense of satisfaction can be given to the player, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the left side, it shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol after the next big hit. That is, since the special symbol is continuously won in the high probability state, it is in a very advantageous state for the player. Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 10 is in an advantageous state, a variation pattern effect different from the usual mode can be selected. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the present is an advantageous state by executing the variation pattern effect in a mode different from the usual one, and thus the loop state is an advantageous state for the player. It is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing that he / she is in an advantageous state even though he / she is in the middle.

In the present embodiment, the lottery device 300 is arranged to the right of the front view with respect to the variable display unit 80, but the present invention is not limited to this position, and a game ball can enter the lottery gate 310. As long as it is in any position, it may be arranged at any position. Further, the lottery gate 310 is composed of a lid-shaped gate as shown in FIG. 6, but instead of this, a shutter-shaped gate that opens and closes up and down may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution rotating body 341 is configured to be able to switch to a state of swinging to the right or to a state of swinging to the left according to the guidance passage through which the game ball has passed. In the next lottery after the game ball enters the ball, the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously generated by making it possible to enter only the probability variation entry ball opening 503 or the probability variation entry ball opening 504. Although it is configured to win twice or more, it may be realized in a controlled manner.

For example, the first hit type selection table 202b is won for the first hit (when a big hit is won in the low probability state of the special symbol), and the first hit type selection table 202b1 for the first hit and the high probability state of the special symbol are won. It may be configured to provide the first type selection table 202b2 for the loop for the case. In this case, the first hit type selection table 202b1 for the first hit shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, and in the next lottery, the first hit type selection table 202b2 for the loop state is used for the jackpot and the special symbol. The jackpot that shifts to the low probability state is specified, while the first hit type selection table 202b2 for the loop state shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, but the first hit in the next lottery. Specify the jackpot in which the first hit type selection table 202b1 is used for the first hit, and the jackpot in which the first hit type selection table 202b2 for the loop state is used in the next lottery after shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol. Just do it.

In the present embodiment, the lottery by the lottery device 300 is executed before the big hit game is started, but the lottery by the lottery device 300 may be executed during the big hit game. For example, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 may be opened in the first round.

In this case, the ejection ball detection sensor 422 of the lottery device 300 may be configured to give a prize ball to the player each time one game ball is detected. Then, in the round in which the lottery is executed, the lottery gate 310 is opened until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won, similar to the operation of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a in the other rounds. It may be configured to be. That is, in the round in which the lottery is performed, the lottery device 300 also serves as the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. By executing the lottery by the lottery device 300 during the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the player from having the jackpot game simply to obtain a ball, and to improve the player's interest in the jackpot game. be able to.

Further, in the case where the lottery is performed by the lottery device 300 during the big hit game, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a may be closed in the round in which the lottery is performed. That is, the lottery device 300 may be configured to have the role of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. In this case, the lottery device 300 is defined as the first specific winning opening, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is defined as the second specific winning opening, and the first specific winning opening and the second specific winning opening are defined according to the jackpot type. It may be configured to change the opening pattern with. Then, the setting of the flow path may be configured to be switched for each round.

For example, regardless of the jackpot type, the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set as the front route in the first round, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set as the back route in the second round. If the jackpot type is jackpot A, only the first specific winning opening (lottery gate 310) is set to open in one round, and only the second specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) is opened in the 2nd to 8th rounds. Set to be set. Since the first specific winning opening (lottery gate 310) is opened only in the first round in which the front route is set, the game ball always advances the front route in the lottery by the lottery device 300.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is jackpot B, only the second specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) is set to be open in the first round and the third to eighth rounds, and the first specific winning opening (lottery) is set in the second round. It is set to open only the gate 310). Since the first specific winning opening (lottery gate 310) is opened only in the second round in which the back route is set, the game ball always advances in the back route in the lottery by the lottery device 300.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 64. In the first embodiment described above, only two types of jackpot A and jackpot B are provided as jackpot types of special symbols, and the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched according to the jackpot type.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the jackpot A and the jackpot B, the jackpot C and the jackpot D having the number of rounds of 2R, and the jackpot A and the jackpot having the number of rounds of 2 rounds are the small hits. It is configured to provide B.

The state of small hit A and small hit B does not change after the end of each small hit, and if any small hit is won in the low probability state of the special symbol, the special symbol is low even after the end of the small hit. The probability state is maintained, and conversely, if any small hit is won in the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol is maintained even after the end of the small hit. In addition, if any of the small hits is won in the time saving state, the game is started from the continuation of the time saving state even after the end of the small hit.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to open the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 before the start of the small hit even when the small hit is won, and the operation of the lottery gate 310 is as follows. , It will be exactly the same as when the jackpots A to D are won. The difference between the small hit and the big hit is that the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 is discharged from the ball discharge passage 323 without proceeding to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later. That is, the player cannot recognize whether the winning is a big hit or a small hit until it can be determined whether or not the game ball advances to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later.

Therefore, when the lottery gate 310 is opened, the player first expects that the game ball advances to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later (that is, this hit is one of the big hits). , When the game ball advances to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later, it is expected that the game ball will enter any of the probabilistic entry ball openings 502 to 504, and further, after the start of the jackpot game, the ball will be released. The game will be played with the expectation that it will be a big hit in many 8 rounds. Therefore, the expectation of the player can be raised on a regular basis, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that in the main control device 110, the contents of the first type selection table 202b of the ROM 202 are partially changed. The point is that the small hit type selection table 202e is added, and the small hit flag 203k is provided in the RAM 203. Further, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and a part of the process included in the main process (FIG. 34) are different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The first embodiment describes other configurations, other processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 58, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The RAM 203 included in the main control device 110 of the present embodiment is provided with a small hit flag 203k in addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not it is the opening timing of the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 when the small hit is won, and is turned on when it is the timing to open the lottery gate 310. NS. On the other hand, the small hit flag 203k is turned off after setting the opening of the lottery gate 310.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the contents of the ROM 202 included in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 shows the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first embodiment, a small hit type selection table 202e is provided (FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (c)). Further, in the first hit type selection table 202b, the pachinko machine of the first embodiment is added in that the tables of "big hit C" and "big hit D" are added in addition to "big hit A" and "big hit B". It is different from 10.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), in the first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "0 to 39", the jackpot type is "big hit A". .. Further, when the random number value is "50 to 89", the jackpot type is "big hit B". Further, the jackpot type when the random number value is "40 to 49" is "big hit C", and the jackpot type when the random number value is "90 to 99" is "big hit D". The "big hit C" and the "big hit D" added in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment are both jackpots with a maximum number of rounds of two.

"Big hit C" and "Big hit D" are the flow path switching valves 331a, in the transition lottery to the high probability state of the special symbol performed by the lottery device 300 (see FIG. 5) after the winning of the big hit is confirmed. According to 331b (see FIG. 9), the flow path through which the game ball passes is divided into a flow path on the front side (front route) or a flow path on the back side (back route) of the rotating body 341. That is, in "big hit C", the flow path on the front side (front route) is switched (see FIG. 9B), and in "big hit D", the flow path on the back side (back route) is switched (FIG. 9). See (a)).

"Big hit C" and "Big hit D" are big hits with a smaller number of rounds (that is, a smaller number of prize balls can be acquired by the player) than "Big hit A" and "Big hit B", so the lottery device 300 If the game ball enters inside and the jackpot game starts by the game ball entering one of the entrances, the player can expect to pay out more prize balls in 8 rounds. Expect a big hit ("Big hit A" or "Big hit B"). Therefore, if the jackpot is 8 rounds as expected by the player, a greater sense of satisfaction can be given.

The small hit type selection table 202e defines the random number value of the first hit random number counter C1 when a small hit is won for each small hit type (FIG. 59 (c)). In the first hit random number counter C1, when the random number value is "15 to 24", the small hit type is "small hit A". Further, when the random number value is "141-150", the small hit type is "small hit B".

As described above, the states of "small hit A" and "small hit B" do not change after the end of each small hit, and if any small hit is won in the low probability state of the special symbol, the small hit is small. The low probability state of the special symbol is maintained even after the end of the hit, and conversely, if any small hit is won in the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol is maintained even after the end of the small hit. .. In addition, if any of the small hits is won in the time saving state, the game is started from the continuation of the time saving state even after the end of the small hit.

Further, "small hit A" and "small hit B" are used when the lottery gate 310 is opened by the lottery device 300 (see FIG. 5) after the winning of the small hit is confirmed (to a high probability state). Whether to set the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b (see FIG. 9) as the front flow path (front route) when performing a fake operation in which the lottery is not actually performed by pretending to be a transition lottery. There is a difference in whether to use the flow path (back route) on the back side. That is, in "small hit A", it is switched to the flow path on the front side (front route) (see FIG. 9B), and in "small hit B", it is switched to the flow path on the back side (back route) (see FIG. 9B). (See FIG. 9 (a)).

Actually, even if each small hit is won, the game ball does not advance to the traveling direction distribution portion 330 or later where the flow path switching valves 331a, 331b are arranged, so that the flow path switching valves 331a, 331b There is no direct effect on the game even if switching is performed, but by performing the switching operation of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b in the same manner as when various jackpots are won, the winning is a jackpot or a small hit. It is difficult for the player to determine whether or not there is a jackpot, and the expectation of winning the jackpot can be maintained for a longer period of time.

<Regarding the control process in the second embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. First, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In each of the special symbol variation processes (S104), S201 to S211 and S213 and S214, the processes of S201 to S211 and S213 and S214 of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as is executed. Then, in the special symbol variation processing in the second embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S211 that the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is not a big hit of the special symbol. (S211: No), then determines whether or not the lottery result this time is a small hit of a special symbol (S221). Then, if it is determined that the special symbol is not a small hit (S221: No), the process proceeds to S213. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit (S221: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is turned on (S222), and this process is terminated.

By turning on the small hit flag 203k, in the small hit gate processing (S1021) described later with reference to FIG. 62, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened before the start of the small hit, and a special symbol is displayed. It can be pretended to be a lottery to move to a high probability state. Therefore, it is possible to delay the timing at which the player can recognize whether the winning is a small hit or a big hit, so that the player's expectation for the big hit and the expectation for the high probability state of the special symbol can be maintained for a longer time. Can be added.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control device 110.

Among the main processes of the main control device 110, in each of the processes S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to S1017, S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S1017 is executed. Then, in the main process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment, when the process of S1004 is completed, the small hit gate process (S1021) is executed. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 62, the small hit gate processing (S1021) opens the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 when a small hit is won, and shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol. It is a process for operating as if a lottery is performed.

When the small hit gate process is completed, the big hit control process 2 (S1022) is then executed instead of the big hit control process (FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. Similar to the jackpot control process (FIG. 36), the jackpot control process 2 is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.
Further, when the big hit control process 2 (S1022) is completed, the small hit control process (S1023) is executed. This small hit control process (S1023) is a process for executing various effects according to the small hit and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. When the small hit control process (S1023) is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S1006.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the small hit gate processing (S1021) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control measure 110 will be described. As described above, in the small hit gate processing (S1021), when a small hit is won, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened, and a lottery as if to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol is drawn. Is a process for operating as if is performed.

In the small hit gate processing (S1021), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203k is on (S3801). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is on (S3801: Yes), a setting is made to fake the transition lottery to the high probability state of the special symbol based on the winning of the small hit. Specifically, first, the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to a route determined according to the small hit type (S3802), and the opening of the lottery gate 310 is set (S3803). Next, the release flag 203i is turned on (S3804), the small hit flag is turned off (S3805), and the present process is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is not on (that is, it is off) (S3801: No), then it is determined whether or not the release flag 203i is on (S3806), and the release flag 203i is set. If it is on (S3806: Yes), it indicates that the lottery gate 310 is open, so it is determined whether or not a ball has been detected in the lottery gate 310 (S3807).

When it is detected that a game ball has entered the lottery gate 310 (S3807: Yes), the lottery gate 310 is closed (S3808) so that no additional game ball enters the lottery gate 310. , The release flag 203i is turned off, and the process proceeds to S3812.
On the other hand, when it is not detected that the game ball has entered the lottery gate 310 (S3810: No), it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is satisfied (S3810). The closing condition of the lottery gate 310 other than the entry of the game ball is that the maximum opening period (for example, 30 seconds) of the lottery gate 310 elapses.

If it is determined that the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is satisfied as a result of the processing of S3810 (S3810: Yes), the start of the small hit game is set (S3811), and the closing of the lottery gate 310 is set (S3811). S3808), the release flag 203i is turned off (S3809), and the process proceeds to S3812. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is not satisfied (S3810: No), the processing of S3808, S3809, and S3811 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3812. If it is determined in the process of S3806 that the release flag 203i is not on (that is, it is off) (S3806: No), the processes of S3807 to S3809 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3812.

In the process of S3812, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the ball discharge passage 323 (S3812), and if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball discharge passage 323, the small hit game is started. After setting (S3813), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball discharge passage 323, this process is terminated as it is.

If the start of the small hit game is set at the timing when the ball entering the lottery gate 310 is detected, the small hit game starts shortly after it is determined whether or not the game ball reaches the traveling direction distribution unit 330. Without giving a feeling of expectation that the game ball advances to the traveling direction distribution unit 330, the player may recognize that this hit is a small hit, and there is a risk that the interest will be lost. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if it is a small hit, the small hit game is not started until it is determined that the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 has passed the ball discharge passage 323. It is configured so that the player can maintain the expectation for the big hit for a longer time by delaying the timing when it is possible to judge whether it is a small hit or a big hit.

Next, the jackpot control process 2 (S1022) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1022).

In each of the jackpot control processes 2 of S1101 to S1111, the same processes as those of S1101 to S1111 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, in the jackpot control process 2 in the second embodiment, when the process of S1109 is completed, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (S1121), and the jackpot A or jackpot B is determined. If it is determined (S1121: Yes), the process proceeds to S1110.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot this time is neither jackpot A nor jackpot B (that is, jackpot C or jackpot D) (S1121: No), then whether or not the value of the round number counter is 2. (That is, whether or not it is the second round) is determined (S1122), and when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is 2 (that is, it is the second round) (S1122: Yes), the number of rounds. Means that is the end timing of the jackpot C or the jackpot D, which is the jackpot of two rounds. Therefore, the process shifts to the process of S1111 to set the end of the jackpot (S1111), and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is not 2 (that is, 1) (S1122: No), since the jackpot game of the second round remains, this process is terminated as it is.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, jackpot types having different numbers of rounds are provided. By performing the processes of S1121 and S1122 of the jackpot control process 2 (S1022), the jackpot game with the number of rounds according to the jackpot type is performed. Can be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the small hit control process (S1023) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this small hit control process (S1023). As described above, this small hit control process (S1023) is a process for executing various effects according to the small hit and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

In the small hit control process (S1023), first, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit A or the small hit B (S3901). The start of the small hit is set in the processing of S3811 or S3813 of the small hit gate processing (see FIG. 62).

If it is determined as the start timing of the small hit A or the small hit B as a result of the processing of S3901 (S3901: Yes), 0 is set to the value of the round number counter 203g and the present processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the start timing of the small hit A nor the start timing of the small hit B (S3901: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit game is currently in progress (S3903).

Then, when it is determined that the small hit game is not currently in progress (S3903: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit game is currently in progress (S3903), it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (S3904). Then, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S3904), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S3905), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S3904). S3906). The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. After setting the round number command, 1 is added to the value of the round number counter 203g to match the number of rounds of the newly started round with the value of the round number counter 203g (S3907), and this process ends. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S3904, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S3904: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is satisfied (S3908). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls are played. When a prize is won (for example, 10 pieces), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

If it is determined in the process of S3908 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied (S3908: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S3908: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S3909), and the round number counter 203g. It is determined whether or not the value is 2 (S3910). If it is determined in the process of S3910 that the value of the round number counter is not 2 (that is, 1) (S3910: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is 8 (S3910: Yes), the end timing of the second round (that is, the final round) is set, so the end of the small hit is set (S3911). This process ends and returns to the main process.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, as the type of "special symbol jackpot", the rounds during the jackpot game are 8 rounds of jackpot A and the jackpot B, and the rounds during the jackpot game. Is configured to provide a jackpot C and a jackpot D for two rounds. By providing a 2-round jackpot with a small number of prize balls that can be obtained, the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that he / she will win the 8-round jackpot with a large number of prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, if the player wins the jackpot of 8 rounds as expected, the player can be given a greater sense of satisfaction. That is, by providing the jackpot C and the jackpot D with a small number of balls, the joy of winning the jackpot A and the jackpot B with a large number of balls is increased, and the gratitude of the jackpot A and the jackpot B can be enhanced.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a small hit A and a small hit B are provided in addition to the various big hits. When various jackpots are won, based on the lottery result performed by the lottery device 300, after the jackpot, the special symbol is shifted to the high probability state, or the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state and the normal symbol is shortened. However, in the case of a small hit, the state immediately before winning the small hit continues even after the end of the small hit game. That is, when the small hit A or the small hit B is won, the lottery device 300 does not perform a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when the small hit A or the small hit B is won, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened and the lottery device 300 is opened before the small hit game is started. It is configured so that a game ball can be put inside the ball. Further, the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are also switched to the front route or the back route in the same manner as when the jackpot is won. Then, the game ball that has entered is configured to be discharged from the discharge passage 323 without flowing down to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later. As a result, even if various small hits are won, it seems as if a lottery is performed for the player as to whether or not the game ball entered in the lottery device 300 shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol. Can be made. Therefore, the player cannot distinguish whether the winning ball is a big hit or a small hit until it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has flowed down to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later, and the expectation for the big hit. The feeling can be sustained for a longer period of time. Then, if the jackpot is as expected by the player, a greater sense of satisfaction can be given. In other words, by providing small hits A and small hits B where the lottery for transitioning to the high probability state of the special symbol is not performed, it is a pleasure to win various big hits that may shift to the high probability state of the special symbol. In addition, it is possible to enhance the gratitude of various jackpots.

During the game, the player determines whether the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b provided in the traveling direction distribution unit 330 of the lottery device 300 are in the front route state or the back route state. It can be visually recognized. In addition, the player also determines whether the state of the distribution rotating body 341 provided in the ball entry port distribution unit 340 of the lottery device 300 is a state of swinging to the left or a state of swinging to the right during the game. It can be visually recognized. When the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the back route and the distribution rotating body 341 is swung to the right, the game ball that has entered the lottery device 300 is a time-saving ball entry port. I will enter 501. That is, it shifts to a low probability state of a special symbol. Therefore, in such a case, the player feels that he / she does not want the game ball to proceed to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later, and therefore enters the lottery device 300 in the expectation that this hit will be a small hit. The whereabouts of the ball will be confirmed.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, it is expected that the pachinko machine 10 will switch to the front route, which is an advantageous state for the player, from the time when the third symbols are aligned until the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched. It is possible to have a player play a game. When the game ball flows down the front route, the ball enters either the probability-changing ball opening 502 or the probability-changing ball opening 504, so that the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the left (FIG. 13). , See Fig. 15), this is because the next lottery will also shift to a high-probability state of special symbols.

Further, from the time when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the front route until the game ball enters the lottery device 300, the game ball advances to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later (that is, this hit is It is possible to have the player play the game with the expectation that it will be a big hit. Further, from the start of the jackpot game to the end timing of the second round, the player can be expected to enter the third round and perform the jackpot game. This is because there are only two types of jackpots, an 8-round jackpot and a 2-round jackpot, so it is confirmed that the jackpot is an 8-round jackpot at the stage of entering the third round.

On the other hand, if the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the back route side when a hit (any of various big hits and various small hits) is won, when the game ball advances to the traveling direction distribution unit 330, It will flow down the back route. Therefore, the state of the distribution rotating body 341 becomes a state of swinging to the right side (see FIGS. 12 and 14), which is a disadvantageous state as compared with the state of swinging to the left side. It is possible to have the player play the game with the expectation that it will not proceed to 330 or later (that is, this hit is a small hit).

Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game at various timings with various expectations depending on the conditions such as the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the state of the distribution rotating body 341. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 72. In the second embodiment described above, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the lottery device 300 for performing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol is placed in front of the variable display unit 80. It was arranged in the right direction of the view, and was configured to draw a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a high-probability state of a special symbol before the start of the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, the jackpot game starts, and the specific winning opening (large opening opening) is started. When the opening port) 65a is opened, a game ball can be inserted into the lottery device 300.

Since the lottery gate 310 is arranged inside the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, the open / closed state of the lottery gate 310 and the game balls that have entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are drawn. Whether or not the ball has entered the gate 310 is difficult for the player to see, but each configuration of the lottery device 300 after the flow path 320 is configured to be visible to the player as in the other embodiments. There is.

In addition to the lottery device 300, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a can be discharged into the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a when the game ball passes through. A ball discharge passage 701 (not shown) is provided, and when the lottery gate 310 is closed, the game ball is discharged via the ball discharge passage 701. .. On the other hand, if the game ball enters the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a when the lottery gate 310 is open, the game ball can enter the lottery device 300 from the lottery gate 310. The game ball that has entered the lottery device 300 is discharged from the ball discharge passage 323 or the ball discharge passage 421. Even when the lottery gate 310 is open, the discharge passage 701 does not enter the lottery gate 310 due to the trajectory of the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. May progress to.

With the above configuration, it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity by the lottery device 300 while acquiring the prize ball simply by launching the game ball aiming at the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, four types of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, and jackpot D are provided as jackpot types of special symbols, and the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b according to the jackpot type. Although the number of rounds in the jackpot game was switched, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, there are 6 types of jackpot types (front route jackpot A, front route jackpot B, front route jackpot C, back route jackpot A, back route). The number is increased to jackpot B and back route jackpot C).

The front route jackpot A and the front route jackpot B are jackpots with 8 rounds of jackpot. In addition, the front route jackpot C is a jackpot with two jackpot rounds. In the front route jackpots A to C, the lottery gate 310 is opened when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set to distribute the game ball to the front route.

The back route jackpot A and the back route jackpot B are jackpots with 8 rounds of jackpot. In addition, the back route jackpot C is a jackpot with two jackpot rounds. In the back route jackpots A to C, the lottery gate 310 is opened when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set to distribute the game ball to the back route.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 66, but in each jackpot, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the front route or the back route according to the number of rounds of the jackpot.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment is that the content of the first type selection table 202b of the ROM 202 is changed in the main control device 110. , And, instead of the small hit flag 203k provided in the RAM 203, a round start flag 203l, a closing flag 203m, a lottery execution flag 203n, a big hit end flag 203o, and a passage opening flag 203p are provided. Further, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and a part of the process included in the main process (FIG. 61) are different from the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. The second embodiment describes other configurations, other processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 65, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The RAM 203 included in the main control device 110 of the present embodiment replaces the small hit flag 203k provided in the RAM 203 of the second embodiment with the round start flag 203l, the closing flag 203m, the lottery execution flag 203n, and the big hit end flag 203o. , The passage opening flag 203p is provided. Since other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The round start flag 203l is a flag indicating the timing for determining whether or not to open the lottery gate 310, and is turned on when a new round is started in a big hit or a small hit (see S1134 in FIG. 69). , After setting the opening of the lottery gate 310, it is turned off (see S4007 in FIG. 71).

The closing flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not it is the timing to close the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 in the big hit game, and the round ends during the big hit and the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is closed. If so, it is turned on (see S1135 in FIG. 69). On the other hand, it is turned off at the start of the jackpot and when the lottery gate 310 is set to be closed.

The lottery execution flag 203n is a flag indicating whether or not the lottery device 300 has executed the lottery for shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol. It is turned on when it is detected that the ball has entered any of the entry ports, and is turned off at the start of the jackpot (see S1133 in FIG. 69).

The jackpot end flag 203o is turned on when the jackpot end is set (see S1137 in FIG. 69) and turned off at the start of the jackpot (see S1134 in FIG. 69). Further, the passage opening flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not the lottery gate 310 is opened and the game ball can enter the guidance passage 321. The flag is turned on when the lottery gate 310 is opened. (See S4006 in FIG. 71), it is turned off at the start of a big hit or when the lottery gate 310 is closed (see S4005 and S4014 in FIG. 71).

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the contents of the ROM 202 included in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 shows the configuration of the first type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 included in the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. In the first hit type selection table 202b of the second embodiment, the correspondence relationship between the random value of the first hit type counter and the jackpot type is defined, but in the third embodiment, in addition to this, the jackpot The state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the state of the lottery gate 310 for each number of rounds are defined for each jackpot type.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the third embodiment, when the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 0 to 9, the front route jackpot A is won. Further, in the front route jackpot A, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route in the first round, the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round. Further, in these rounds, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened, and a game ball can enter the guidance passage 321.

On the other hand, in the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, and the eighth round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the back route. Further, in these rounds, the lottery gate of the lottery device 300 is not opened, and therefore, the game ball cannot enter the guidance passage 321.

When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 10 to 59, the front route jackpot B is won. Further, in the front route jackpot B, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route in the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, and the eighth round. Further, among these rounds, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened in the rounds other than the second round, and the game ball can enter the guidance passage 321.

On the other hand, in the 1st round, the 3rd round, the 5th round, and the 7th round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the back route. Further, in these rounds, the lottery gate of the lottery device 300 is not opened, and therefore, the game ball cannot enter the guidance passage 321.

When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 60 to 69, the front route jackpot C is won. In the front route jackpot C, in the second round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route, and the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened to enter the guidance passage 321. Can enter the ball. On the other hand, in the first round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the back route. Then, since the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is not opened, the game ball cannot enter the guidance passage 321.

When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 70 to 74, the back route jackpot A is won. In the back route jackpot A, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the back route in the first round, the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round. Further, in these rounds, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened, and a game ball can enter the guidance passage 321.

On the other hand, in the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, and the eighth round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route. Further, in these rounds, the lottery gate of the lottery device 300 is not opened, and therefore, the game ball cannot enter the guidance passage 321.

When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 75 to 95, the back route jackpot B is won. Further, in the back route jackpot B, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the back route in the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, and the eighth round. Further, among these rounds, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened in the rounds other than the second round, and the game ball can enter the guidance passage 321.

On the other hand, in the 1st round, the 3rd round, the 5th round, and the 7th round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route. Further, in these rounds, the lottery gate of the lottery device 300 is not opened, and therefore, the game ball cannot enter the guidance passage 321.

When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 96 to 99, the back route jackpot C is won. In the back route jackpot C, in the second round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the back route, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened, and the game ball is sent to the guidance passage 321. It becomes possible to enter the ball. On the other hand, in the first round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route. Then, since the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is not opened, the game ball cannot enter the guidance passage 321.

As described above, even if the lottery gate 310 is open, it is not always possible for the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a to proceed into the lottery gate 310, and the ball discharge passage 701 You may enter the ball. In addition, the round may end without any ball entering the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a in one round. For these reasons, if the game ball does not enter the lottery gate in the round in which the lottery gate 310 is opened inside the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, the player enters the lottery round. Since it is not possible to determine whether or not it was, just checking the status of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is whether it is a jackpot on the front route (front route jackpots A to C) or a jackpot on the back route (back route jackpots A to C). ) I can't tell. Therefore, the expectation that the current jackpot is a jackpot on the front route that is advantageous to the player can be maintained for a longer period of time.

When the small hit A is won, the operation of the flow path distribution valves 331a and 331b is switched in the same way as the front route big hit C, but the lottery gate 310 is not opened during the small hit. Further, when the small hit B is won, the operation of the flow path distribution valves 331a and 331b is switched in the same manner as the back route big hit C, but the lottery gate 310 is not opened during the small hit.

In this way, by making the operation of the flow path distribution valves 331a and 331b common between a part of the case of the big hit and the case of the small hit, the big hit is small just by confirming the operation of the flow path distribution valves 331a and 331b. It can be difficult to determine whether it is a hit or not. Therefore, the expectation for the big hit can be maintained for a longer time.

The first type selection table 202b is not limited to the combination shown in FIG. 66. For example, the round for opening the lottery gate 310 may be limited to only one round regardless of the jackpot type. Further, for example, the passage switching valves 331a and 331b may operate in common, and only the round for opening the lottery gate 310 may be changed.

<Regarding the control process in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 to 72, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In each of the special symbol variation processing (S104), S201 to S211, S221, and S213, S214, respectively, S201 to S211, S221, and S213 of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S214 is executed. Then, in the special symbol variation processing in the third embodiment, in the processing of S211 it is determined that the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is a big hit of the special symbol. In the case (S211: Yes), then the start of the jackpot game is set (S231), and this process ends. Further, in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S221 that the lottery result of this time is a small hit of a special symbol (S221: Yes), the start of the small hit game is set (S232), and the present End the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control device 110.

Among the main processes of the main control device 110, in each of the processes S1001 to S1003 and S1006 to S1017, S1001 to S1003 and S1006 to the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 61) in the second embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S1017 is executed. Then, in the main process of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment, when the process of S1003 is completed, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) is executed instead of the jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 63) in the second embodiment. .. Similar to the jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 63), the jackpot control process 3 is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

When the big hit control process 3 is completed, the small hit control process 2 (S1032) is executed instead of the small hit control process (FIG. 64) in the second embodiment. Similar to the small hit control process (FIG. 64) in the second embodiment, the small hit control process 2 (S1032) executes various effects according to the small hit and opens the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. Or it is a process for closing.

When the small hit control process 2 (S1032) is completed, the flow path switching process (S1033) is then executed. This flow path switching process (S1033) is a process for setting the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the lottery gate 310. When this flow path switching process (S1033) is completed, the small hit setting process (S1034) is executed. This small hit setting process (S1034) is a process of switching the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b during the small hit. When the small hit setting process (S1034) is completed, each process after S1006 is executed.

Next, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 3 (S1031).

In each of the jackpot control processes 3 of S1101 to S1111 and S1122, the same processes as those of S1101 to S1111 and S1122 of the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 63) in the second embodiment are executed. NS. Then, in the jackpot control process 3 of the third embodiment, when the process of S1102 is completed, the round start flag 203l, the closing flag 203m, and the lottery execution flag 203n are turned off (S1131 to S1133). Further, the jackpot end flag 203o and the passage opening flag 203p are also turned off after the processing of S1102 (not shown).

Further, in the jackpot control process 3, when the process of S1105 is completed, the round start flag 203l is turned on (S1134), and it is the timing to set the open / closed state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the lottery gate 310. After showing, the process proceeds to the process after S1106. Based on the fact that the round start flag is turned on by the process of S1134, various settings according to the jackpot type are performed by the flow path switching process (S1033) described later.

Further, in the jackpot control process 3, when the process of S1109 is completed, the closing flag 203m is turned on to indicate that it is the closing timing of the lottery gate 310 (S1135). Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot game is the back route jackpot C or the front route jackpot C (that is, whether or not it is a jackpot for two rounds) (S1136). As a result of the processing of S1136, if it is determined that neither the back route jackpot C nor the front route jackpot C (that is, it is a jackpot of 8 rounds) (S1136: No), the process proceeds to S1110.

On the other hand, if it is determined as the back route jackpot C or the front route jackpot C as a result of the processing of S1136 (S1136: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the round number counter 203g is 2 (S1122), 2 If not (that is, if it is 1,) this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the round number counter 203g is 2 (S1122: Yes), the end of the jackpot is set (S1111), the jackpot end flag 203o is turned on (S1137), and this process is terminated.

Next, the small hit control process 2 (S1032) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process 2 (S1032).

In each of the small hit control processes 2 of S3901 to S3911, the same processes as those of S3901 to S3911 of the small hit control process (see FIG. 64) in the second embodiment are executed. Then, in the small hit control process 2 in the third embodiment, when the process of S3902 is completed, the round start flag 203l is turned off (S3921), and this process ends. When the processing of S3905 is completed, the round start flag 203l is turned on in order to set the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b according to the small hit type in the small hit setting process (see FIG. 72) described later. (S3922), S3906 and subsequent processes are executed.

Next, the flow path switching process (S1033) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this flow path switching process (S1033). The flow path switching process (S1033) is a process for setting the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the lottery gate 310.

In this flow path switching process (S1033), first, it is determined whether or not the round start flag 203l is on (S4001), and when it is determined that the round start flag 203l is on (S4001: Yes), the jackpot type is determined. The flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set based on the first type selection table 202b (S4002). For example, when the jackpot type is the front route jackpot B and the value of the round counter 203g is 5 (that is, when it is the start timing of the 5th round), in the first hit type selection table 202b, "▲ Since it is specified that the flow path is the back route, the setting of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the back route.

In the present embodiment, since the round start flag 203g is turned on at both the round start timing of various big hits and the round start timing of various small hits, the round start flag 203g is set based on the round start timing of the small hits. It may be turned on and shift to the processing of S4002, but in this case, it is configured to determine that it is not a big hit (that is, a small hit) and end this processing.

When the processing of S4002 is completed, it is specified whether or not to open the lottery gate 310 based on the jackpot type and the first hit type selection table 202b (S4003). For example, when the jackpot type is the front route jackpot B and the value of the round counter 203g is 5 (that is, when it is the start timing of the 5th round), in the first hit type selection table 202b, "▲ ”Is attached, and it is stipulated that the lottery gate 310 is closed so that the game ball cannot proceed to the guidance passage 323. Therefore, it is specified that the lottery gate 310 is closed. ..

When the processing of S4003 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the specific result of whether or not to open the lottery gate 310 indicates the closure of the lottery gate 310 (S4004), and the specific result indicates the closure. If it is (S4004: Yes), the lottery gate 310 is closed, the passage opening flag 203p is turned off (S4005), and the process proceeds to S4007. On the other hand, if the specific result is not closed, that is, it indicates that the lottery gate 310 is open (S4004: No), the lottery gate 310 is opened and the passage opening flag 203p is turned on (S4006). The process proceeds to S4007. In the process of S4007, the round start flag 203 g is turned off (S4007), and the present process is terminated.

In the process of S4001, when it is determined that the round start flag 203l is not on (that is, it is off) (S4001: No), it is determined whether or not the closing flag 203m is on (S4008). Then, when it is determined that the closing flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S4008: No), the processing of S4009 to S4014 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4015.

On the other hand, if the closing flag 203m is on (S4008: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag 203o is on (S4009), and if it is not on (that is, if it is off), the jackpot end timing is determined. Therefore, the processing of S4010 and S4011 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S4012.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end flag 203o is on (S4009: Yes), it is determined whether or not the lottery execution flag 203n is on (S4010). If the lottery execution flag 203n is on (S4010: Yes), a game ball has already been placed in any of the entry ports (one of the time-saving entry opening 501 and the probability variation entry opening 501 to 504) in the lottery device 300. Since it is determined whether to shift to the high-probability state or the low-probability state of the special symbol after the ball is entered and the jackpot ends, the process of S4011 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4012.

On the other hand, if the lottery execution flag 203n is off (S4010: No), it means that it has not been determined whether to shift to the high-probability state or the low-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. The probability change flag 203e is turned off, 100 is set in the time reduction / medium counter 203f (S4011), and the process proceeds to S4012 so that the jackpot does not end without the state after the end being determined. That is, if it is not decided whether to shift to the high-probability state or the low-probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot even just before the end of the jackpot, the game ball enters the time-saving entry slot 501. It will be in the same state as it was.

In the process of S4012, it is determined whether or not the passage opening flag 203p is on (S4012), and if the passage opening flag 203p is on (S4012: Yes), the lottery gate 310 is opened, so that it is opened. The lottery gate 310 is closed (S4013), the passage opening flag 203p is turned off (S4014), and the process proceeds to S4015. On the other hand, if the passage opening flag 203p is not on (that is, if it is off), the processing of S4013 and S4014 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4015.

Next, in the process of 4015, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered any of the entrances of the probability variation entrances 502 to 504 based on the detection results of the winning sensors 420a to 420d (S4015). If it is determined that a ball has been detected in one of the probabilistic ball entrances (S4015: Yes), the probabilistic flag 203e is turned on (S4016) in order to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, and further. , The lottery execution flag 203n is turned on to end this process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered any of the probabilistic entry ports 502 to 504 (S4015: No), whether or not the game ball has entered the time-saving entry slot 501. Based on the detection results of the winning sensors 420a to 420d (S4017), if it is determined that the ball has entered (S4017), the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state after the jackpot is completed, and the time of the normal symbol is shortened. In order to set the state, the probability variation flag 203e is turned off, 100 is set in the time saving / medium counter (S4018), and the lottery execution flag 203n is turned on to end this process. Further, in the process of S4017, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the time-saving entry slot 501, the main process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the main process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the small hit setting process (S1034) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this small hit setting process (S1034). The small hit setting process is a process of switching the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b during the small hit.

In this small hit setting process (S1034), first, it is determined whether or not the round start flag 203g is on (S4101), and if it is determined that the round start flag 203g is on (S4101: Yes), the round counter The flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set based on the value of 203 g and the small hit type (S4102). As described above, the small hit A and the front route big hit C have the same setting of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b in each round. That is, if the small hit type is small hit A, the flow path regardless of whether the value of the round counter 203g is 1 or 2 (that is, whether it is the first round or the second round). The settings of the switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the front route (see FIG. 66). Similarly, the small hit B and the back route big hit C have the same settings of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b in each round. That is, if the small hit type is small hit B, the flow path regardless of whether the value of the round counter 203g is 1 or 2 (that is, whether it is the first round or the second round). The setting of the switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the back route (see FIG. 66).

After setting the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b by the processing of S4101, the lottery gate 310 is then closed to prevent the game ball from entering the guidance passage 323 (S4103), and the round start flag 203l is turned off. Then (S4104), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round start flag 203l is off in the processing of S4101, the processing of S4102 to S4104 is skipped and the main processing is terminated as it is.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment has a configuration in which the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a. The lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are provided at different positions, and the game ball is played to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a until the lottery result by the lottery device 300 is confirmed. If the configuration is such that the ball cannot be entered, if the game ball does not enter the lottery gate 310 well, the game ball will be consumed, and the player may feel that the ball has been lost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the start of the big hit game, only by launching the game ball aiming at the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, the lottery opportunity by the lottery device 300 is obtained while getting the ball. Can be done. Therefore, since a lot of game balls are not consumed for the lottery device 300 to perform the lottery, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling that he / she has lost.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery by the lottery device 300 is also performed during the jackpot game, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched according to the round, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched. Since the pattern of is also different depending on the jackpot type, it is difficult for the player to grasp the round in which the lottery by the lottery device 300 is performed.

Therefore, since the player can be made to perform the jackpot game while carefully checking the state of the lottery device 300, the jackpot game becomes like a monotonous work merely for obtaining a ball. It can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a and the lottery gate 310 (opening of the guidance passage 321) are opened with almost no time lag. Similarly, the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a and the closing of the lottery gate 310 were performed with almost no time lag. On the other hand, the opening / closing timing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a may be configured to deviate from the timing of the start of the round. Further, the opening / closing timing of the guidance passage 321 may be configured to deviate from the opening / closing timing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

The difference in opening / closing timing will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a timing chart showing the timing of opening and closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a and the timing of opening and closing the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310) in one round during the jackpot game. .. In FIGS. 73 (a) and 73 (b), the chart described as "large opening" indicates the open / closed state of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, which is referred to as "guidance passage". The chart described shows the open / closed state of the guide passage 321 (open / closed state of the lottery gate 310). Further, in each chart, "open" indicates an open state, and "closed" indicates a closed state.

In FIG. 73A, the jackpot type is one of the front route jackpots A to C, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are in the front route state, and the jackpot type is the back. When the route jackpot is any of A to C and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are in the back route state (that is, the game ball can enter the guide passage 321). It is a timing chart which shows the timing of opening and closing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, and the timing of opening and closing of the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310) in the case of the round.

As shown in FIG. 73A, there is a time lag (for example, 3 seconds) before the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened with respect to the start timing of the round. Then, a time lag (for example, 2 seconds) occurs between the opening of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and the opening of the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310). As a result, the game ball can be entered into the guidance passage 321 after the settings of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are surely switched, so that the game ball is distributed in the traveling direction during the switching of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b. It is possible to prevent the game ball from advancing on a route opposite to the setting of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b after passing through the unit 330.

Further, there is a time lag (for example, 2 seconds) between the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and the closing of the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310). As a result, the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a just before the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is also entered into the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310). Therefore, the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is closed before the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a reaches the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310). , It is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

In FIG. 73 (b), the jackpot type is one of the front route jackpots A to C, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are in the back route state, and the jackpot type is the back route. One of the route jackpots A to C, and the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is the state of the front route (that is, the game ball cannot enter the guidance passage 321). It is a timing chart which shows the timing of opening and closing of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a in (in the case of a round), and the timing of opening and closing of the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310).

As shown in FIG. 73 (b), the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 2 seconds) before the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, and the specific winning opening (large opening) is opened. The opening port) 65a is configured to be opened at the timing when the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is closed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310). Further, as described above, since the guide passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is configured to be recognized in the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, the player can recognize the opening. Even if the lottery is not held, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the lottery may be held in this round.

The timing at which the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is opened depends on whether or not the round allows the game ball to enter the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310). The timing at which the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is opened in all rounds is specified before the winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, instead of before or after the opening) 65a is opened. You can do it.

Then, in a round that allows the game ball to enter the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310), the flow path is switched in order to allow the game ball to enter after the setting of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is completely completed. The valves 331a and 331b may be configured to be set at the same time as the start of a new round.

With this configuration, even if the opening timing of the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is confirmed, whether or not the round allows the game ball to enter the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310). Since it is not possible to determine whether or not this round is a round in which a lottery for transitioning to a high probability state of a special symbol is performed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not this round is a round in which the player's expectation is maintained for a longer period of time. Can be done.

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the lottery device 300 is provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, and among the game balls that have entered the lottery gate 310, the game balls that can proceed to the guidance passage 322 The passage closing valve 324 was provided so as to be limited to one ball. The game ball whose progress to the guide passage 322 is restricted by the passage closing valve 324 is configured to be discharged to the outside of the lottery device 300 through the ball discharge passage 323.

On the other hand, in this modification, all the game balls that have entered the lottery gate 310 can proceed to the guidance passage 322. That is, the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are not provided so that all the game balls that have entered the lottery gate 310 can reach the distribution rotating body 341.

Further, in the present embodiment, based on the entry port (one of the time-saving entry opening 501 and the probability variation entry opening 501 to 504) into which the game ball first enters after the lottery gate 310 is opened, After the jackpot ends, it is configured to determine whether to set the special symbol to the high probability state or the special symbol to the low probability state.

With this configuration, the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 can be omitted, so that the lottery device 300 can be made compact. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a and the lottery device 300 provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 15, the operation of the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a in the round in which the lottery gate 310 is opened will be described.

As described above, in this modification, since the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are not provided, the ball enters the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and goes to the open lottery gate 310. All the game balls that have entered the ball reach the traveling direction distribution unit 330. As described above, in the traveling direction distribution unit 330, the route on which the game ball travels is determined according to the jackpot type, and in the case of the front route jackpots A to C, the flow path switching valve 331a of the traveling direction distribution unit 330 , 331b is the state shown in FIG. 9B (the state of the front route). Therefore, the game ball flows down to the front side of the distribution rotating body 341. On the other hand, in the case of the back route jackpots A to C, the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b of the traveling direction distribution unit 330 are the states shown in FIG. 9A (the state of the back route). Therefore, the game ball flows down to the back side of the distribution rotating body 341.

First, the state of the back route and the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right side will be described with reference to FIG. In the state of the back route and the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right side, the game ball that first reaches the distribution rotating body 341 advances in the guidance passage 408a (FIG. 12A). As described above, the game ball that has traveled through the guidance passage 408a (FIG. 12 (b)) falls as it is without swinging the distribution rotating body 341 and enters the time-saving entry slot 501 (FIG. 12 (c)). ). That is, the entry port for the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is the time-saving entry opening 501. As a result, after the jackpot ends, the special symbol shifts to a low-probability state, and the normal symbol is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of fluctuations is 100).

Further, in the same round of the jackpot, the game ball that subsequently reaches the distribution rotating body 341 also advances in the guidance passage 408a, so that all the game balls do not swing the distribution rotating body 341 and the time-saving entry port. Enter 501. Therefore, when the back route is in the state at the start of the round and the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the right, the jackpot is the same as when the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are provided. At the end of the process, the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the right, and at the same time, it shifts to a low probability state of the special symbol and during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of fluctuations is 100) of the normal symbol. It will be in a short time state.

Further, the state of the front route and the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right side will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 15. In the state of the front route and the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right side, the game ball that first reaches the distribution rotating body 341 advances in the guidance passage 408b. As described above, the game ball that has traveled through the guidance passage 408b is hindered by the ball stop portion 403a (FIG. 13 (a)). After that, based on the weight of the game ball being applied to the ball stop portion 403a, the distribution rotating body 341 rotates until it swings to the left side (FIG. 13B), and the distribution rotating body 341 rotates. After the operation is completed, the game ball falls and enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 502. That is, the entry port at which the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a first enters is the probability variation entry opening 502. As a result, after the jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in the same round of big hits, the game ball that subsequently reaches the distribution rotating body 341 advances in the guidance passage 408d due to the direction of the distribution rotating body 341 changing to the left (FIG. 15). Then, as described above, the game ball flowing down the guidance passage 408d (FIG. 15 (a)) enters the probabilistic entry ball port 504 without swinging the distribution rotating body 341 (FIG. 15 (c)). Therefore, the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 enters the probability variation ball opening 504 without swinging the distribution rotating body 341, except for the game ball that first reaches the distribution rotating body 341.

Therefore, when the front route is in the state of the front route at the start of the round and the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the right, the jackpot is the same as when the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are provided. At the end of the process, the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the left, and shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol.

Further, the state of the back route and the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left side will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 14. In the state of the back route and the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left side, the game ball that first reaches the distribution rotating body 341 advances in the guidance passage 408c. As described above, the game ball that has traveled through the guidance passage 408c is hindered by the ball stop portion 405a (FIG. 14 (a)). After that, based on the weight of the game ball being applied to the ball stop portion 405a, the distribution rotating body 341 rotates until it swings to the right (FIG. 14B), and the distribution rotating body 341 rotates. After the operation is completed, the game ball falls and enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 503. That is, the entry opening for the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is the probability variation entry opening 503. As a result, after the jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in the same round of big hits, the game ball that subsequently reaches the distribution rotating body 341 advances in the guidance passage 408a due to the direction of the distribution rotating body 341 changing to the right (FIG. 12). Then, as described above, the game ball flowing down the guidance passage 408a (FIG. 12 (a)) enters the time-saving entry slot 501 without swinging the distribution rotating body 341 (FIG. 12 (c)). Therefore, the game balls that have entered the lottery gate 310 enter the time-saving ball entrance 501 without swinging the distribution rotating body 341, except for the game balls that first reach the distribution rotating body 341. As described above, since the state after the end of the jackpot is set based on the type of the entry slot that first enters the ball, the game ball other than the game ball that first reaches the distribution rotating body 341 is the time-saving entry slot. No matter how many balls enter 501, the setting of the state after the big hit is not overwritten.

Therefore, when the back route is in the state at the start of the round and the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the left, a big hit is performed as in the case where the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are provided. At the end of the process, the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the right, and shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol.

Next, the state of the front route and the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left side will be described with reference to FIG. In the state of the front route and the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left side, the game ball that first reaches the distribution rotating body 341 advances in the guidance passage 408d (FIG. 15A). As described above, the game ball that has traveled through the guidance passage 408d (FIG. 15 (b)) falls as it is without swinging the distribution rotating body 341 and enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 5034 (FIG. 15 (c)). ). That is, the entry opening for the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is the probability variation entry opening 504. As a result, after the jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol.

Further, in the same round of the jackpot, the game ball that subsequently reaches the distribution rotating body 341 also advances in the guidance passage 408d, so that all the game balls are probable change balls without swinging the distribution rotating body 341. Enter the ball into the mouth 504. Therefore, when the front route is in the state of the front route at the start of the round and the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the left, a big hit is performed as in the case where the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are provided. At the end of the process, the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the left, and shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol.

As described above, in this modification, the lottery gate 310 is based on the entry port (either the time-saving entry opening 501 or the probability variation entry opening 501 to 504) in which the game ball first enters after the lottery gate 310 is opened. By configuring so as to determine whether the special symbol is in the high-probability state or the special symbol is in the low-probability state after the jackpot is completed, even if a plurality of game balls advance to the distribution rotating body 341, a lottery is performed. The lottery result by the device 300 can be the same result as other embodiments. Further, the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 at the end of the jackpot can be the same as that of other embodiments.

As a result, the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 can be omitted, and the lottery device 300 can be made compact, so that the degree of freedom in arranging the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a can be increased.

In the third embodiment and the modified example of the third embodiment, the lottery device 300 is provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, and the opening pattern of the lottery gate 310 and the switching pattern of the flow path are arranged. Was changed according to the jackpot type. On the other hand, the lottery device 300 may be provided outside the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the lottery device 300 and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a may be used as the specific winning openings, respectively. In this case, the lottery device 300 is defined as the first specific winning opening, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is defined as the second specific winning opening, and the lottery gate 310 is opened in the first type selection table 202b. In the round in which the game ball can enter the guidance passage 321, the first specific winning opening (lottery device 300) is opened and the second specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) is closed. On the other hand, in the round in which the lottery gate 310 is closed to limit the game balls to the guidance passage 321 in the first hit type selection table 202b, the first specific winning opening (lottery device 300) is closed and the second specific winning opening is closed. (Specific winning opening 65a) may be opened.

In the third embodiment and the modified example of the third embodiment, the lottery device 300 is provided inside one specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, but the specific winning opening (large opening opening) is 2 The game balls that have won the special winning opening (large opening opening) 65a1, 65a2) and the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a1 are configured to flow down to the front side of the distribution rotating body 341, and the specific winning opening is provided. The game ball winning the mouth (large opening) 65a2 may be configured to flow down to the back side of the distribution rotating body 341. Then, in the round in which the lottery gate 310 is stipulated to be opened in the first type selection table 202b, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a1 is opened and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a2 is closed. do. On the other hand, in the round in which the lottery gate 310 is stipulated to be closed in the first type selection table 202b, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a1 is closed and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a2 is opened. do it. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide the lottery gate 310 and the traveling direction distribution unit 330, so that the lottery device 300 can be made compact.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 81. In the first embodiment described above, when it is detected that the ball has entered the probability change entry ball port 502 or the probability change entry ball port 504, the voice lamp control device 113 shifts to a loop state which is advantageous for the player. It is configured to send a command (loop state command) indicating. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute the variation pattern in a special mode for the loop state based on receiving the loop state command, and can suggest that the player is in an advantageous state at present. It was configured like this.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in addition to the variation pattern effect, the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot is executed in a mode corresponding to the state of the lottery device 300 and the like. It is configured so that it can be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the stop symbol of the jackpot is stopped, the lottery device 300 is used to draw a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol before the start of the jackpot game. However, in the present embodiment, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened at the start of the eighth round, which is the final round, to shift to a high probability state of the special symbol. It is configured as follows.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that in the voice lamp control device 113, the ROM 222 has a jackpot battle variation pattern table 222b and a jackpot battle selection table 222c. Is provided, and the state flag 223f is provided in the RAM 223. Further, a part of the processing included in the command determination processing (FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The first embodiment describes other configurations, various processes executed by the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 74, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. The ROM 222 included in the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment is provided with a jackpot battle variation pattern table 222b and a jackpot battle selection table 222c in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment. Further, the RAM 223 included in the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment is provided with a state flag 223f in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The jackpot battle fluctuation pattern table 222b is used to determine the detailed mode of the fluctuation pattern based on the mode of the rough fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command as in the fluctuation pattern table 222a. For each general mode of the variation pattern notified by the command, a plurality of detailed variation pattern modes that can be selected are defined. The difference between the jackpot battle variation pattern table 222b and the variation pattern table 222a is that the jackpot battle variation pattern table 222b defines an effect mode of the variation pattern effect in which the winning of the jackpot is notified.

The jackpot battle selection table 222c defines the mode of the display effect performed in the third symbol display measure 81 during the jackpot, and the selectable effect mode differs depending on the state of the lottery device 300 and the like. ..

The state flag 223f is a flag indicating which of the states A to F defined in the state setting table (not shown later) is the current state, and the mode of the fluctuation pattern is selected from the jackpot battle fluctuation pattern table 222b. This flag is taken into consideration when the game is to be performed (see S2713 in FIG. 80) or when the effect mode during the big hit is selected from the jackpot battle selection table 222c (see S4206 in FIG. 81).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a big hit is obtained in the present embodiment, and the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit. The production mode will be described.

FIG. 75 is a state setting table showing the flow of the effect of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. This state setting table is set in ROM 222. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has three states, state A, state C, and state E, as states when the variable pattern effect that becomes a big hit is executed by the third symbol display device 81, and each state. The selected variation pattern effect is different.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has three states, state B, state D, and state F, as states when the display effect is executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game. In each state, the effect mode of the selected display effect is different.

In each of the states A to F, a story-like effect is executed, and it is suggested whether or not it is in a loop state or whether or not it shifts to a high-probability state of a special symbol according to the result of the executed effect. It is configured as follows. Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described in order from the state A.

The state A refers to the normal state (that is, in the low probability state of the special symbol), and the jackpot type of the jackpot won while staying in the state A is either jackpot A or jackpot B. A common production is performed. Specifically, when a jackpot is won in state A, the main character with a shield and a sword searches for an enemy monster and encounters it in a variable pattern production in which the jackpot is notified. .. In this production, you can meet monsters, and when the battle starts, a stop symbol indicating a big hit is confirmed and displayed. Further, when the stop symbol indicating the jackpot is confirmed and the jackpot game is started, the state B is entered (see state A in FIG. 75).

In addition, in the deviation fluctuation production, the main character searches for the enemy, but the production that the enemy cannot be found (the enemy cannot be met) is executed. As a result, it is not possible to determine whether the effect of searching for the enemy is a big hit or a miss, so that the player can pay attention to the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 until the end. ..

FIG. 76A shows the display content when the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed in the effect performed in the state A. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the characters "Battle started !!" are displayed above the scene where the hero and the enemy are glaring at each other, and the player can tell that the battle between the hero and the enemy will start from now on. Is notified to. Further, in the upper right of the third symbol display device 81, a state in which three "8" symbols are aligned is displayed. As described above, the stop symbol at the time of a big hit is not limited to "8".

Below the main character and the enemy, HP gauges showing the hit points of each character are displayed. The HP gauge is a gauge that represents the vitality of each character, and in a battle between the main character and an enemy, the gauge decreases when attacked by the opponent, and when the gauge becomes 0, it becomes a knockout state. Details will be described later, but if the HP gauge of the main character is exhausted due to the enemy's attack, it is suggested to the player that the player will shift to the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends, and conversely by the main character's attack. When the HP gauge of the enemy becomes 0, it suggests to the player that the player shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends.

The state B is a state in which the stop symbol indicating the jackpot is confirmed and displayed in the state A, and the jackpot game is started. In this state B, the battle production between the main character and the enemy is settled in the 8th round, which is the final round of the jackpot, and whether to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol It is suggested.

Specifically, if the hero attacks the enemy, sets the enemy's HP gauge to 0, and can destroy the enemy, it is suggested that after the jackpot ends, it will shift to a high probability state of a special symbol. .. On the other hand, if the hero is attacked by an enemy and the hero's HP gauge becomes 0, it is suggested that after the jackpot ends, the game shifts to a low probability state of a special symbol. Further, when the state B shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, the transition to the state C is performed, but when the transition to the low probability state of the special symbol shifts, the transition to the state A occurs. That is, unless the jackpot A is won and the state shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, the state A and the state B are repeated (see the state B in FIG. 75).

The state C is a state in which the main character wins the enemy in the state B and shifts after the end of the jackpot game in which the victory effect is performed, and the effect to be executed is the same as the state A. The difference from the state A is that if the jackpot is won in the state A, the symbol indicating the jackpot is confirmed and then the state B is entered, whereas if the jackpot is won in the state C, the jackpot is won. The difference is that the symbol to be shown shifts to the state D after being confirmed and displayed (see the state C in FIG. 75).

The state D is a state in which the stop symbol indicating the jackpot is confirmed and displayed in the state C, and the jackpot game is started. Even in this state D, if the main character can set the enemy's hit points to 0 in the 8th round, which is the final round of the jackpot as in the state B, it is suggested that after the jackpot ends, it will shift to the high probability state of the special symbol. Will be done.

On the other hand, unlike the state B, in the state C, even if the main character is attacked by the enemy, the HP gauge does not become completely 0 and the state becomes a pinch. The state D is a state in which the state D shifts only when the state B shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, but when the state B shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, the ball enters the lottery device 300. This is a case where the game ball enters the probability variation entrance 501 after rotating the state of the distribution rotating body 341 to the leftward arrangement (see FIG. 13). Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game performed in the state D, it is confirmed that the special symbol will shift to the high-probability state regardless of the jackpot type, suggesting that the special symbol will shift to the low-probability state. However, it is not necessary to produce the main character's HP gauge to be 0.

However, if the jackpot B is won with the distribution rotating body 341 swinging to the left, the game ball that has entered the lottery device 300 will be distributed to the guidance passage 408c of the distribution rotating body 341, and the distribution rotating body 341 will be distributed. After rotating the state to the right direction, the ball enters the probabilistic entry ball port 503 (see FIG. 14), so if the jackpot B is won again next time, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol. It will be in a state where there is a possibility that it will end up.

Therefore, if the jackpot type is jackpot B in state D, the main character attacks from the enemy in the display effect to suggest that there is a risk of shifting to the low probability state of the special symbol after the next jackpot. It is configured to perform an effect that causes a pinch in response to it. In addition, the effect of becoming a pinch is executed, and after the jackpot is completed, the state shifts to the state E (see the state D in FIG. 75).

FIG. 76B shows the effect performed in the final round (8th round) of the jackpot B when the jackpot B is won in the state C and the state D is entered. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), the main character has been attacked by the enemy's rush, and the HP has decreased significantly. By putting the hero in a pinch state by the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player is informed that the player is in a disadvantageous state (a state in which the distribution rotating body 341 is swung to the right). It can be easily recognized.

In addition, after being attacked by the enemy's rush in FIG. 76 (b), the hero is blown away by the impact of the rush, and both the hero and the enemy lose sight of each other. Therefore, although the details will be described later, in the state E of the transition after the end of the jackpot game, the main character searches for the enemy again.

Further, in the state D, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, the game ball that has entered the lottery device 300 flows down the guidance passage 408d. Therefore, since the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 does not change in the state of being swung to the left side (see FIG. 15), the state shifts to the state C again. That is, unless the jackpot B is won and the state shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol, the state C and the state D are repeated (see the state D in FIG. 75).

The state E is a state in which the jackpot B is won in the state C, and the hero shifts after the hero is attacked by the enemy and becomes a pinch in the state D. Searches for the enemy, and if he can meet the enemy, the jackpot will be confirmed. On the other hand, in the state E, when searching for an enemy or encountering an enemy, a preliminary effect that is not performed in the state A or C is performed.

Specifically, when the hero discovers medicinal herbs while searching for an enemy (see Fig. 77 (a)), or when he encounters an enemy, a dog character who is a friend of the hero assists the hero. (See FIG. 77 (b)). If you discover the herbs, you can suggest that you may be able to recover the damage caused by the attack received from the enemy in state D, and you can suggest that the resistance to the enemy will improve if your friends help.

These effects are likely to be performed if the winning jackpot in the state E is the jackpot A, and are difficult to be performed if the winning jackpot is the jackpot B (see state E in FIG. 75). By performing this effect, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player to destroy the enemy. If a jackpot is won in the state E, the state F is entered after the symbol indicating the jackpot is confirmed and displayed (see the state E in FIG. 75).

The state F is a state in which the stop symbol indicating the jackpot is confirmed and displayed in the state E, and the jackpot game is started. In this state F as well, as in the state B and the state D, if the enemy is attacked and the HP gauge of the enemy is set to 0, it is suggested that the state shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. However, in the state F, the HP gauge may be reduced or fellow characters may be merged, so that the mode is different from the state B and the state D.

Specifically, when shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends, the effect of destroying the enemy is executed in the display mode as shown in FIG. 78 (a), and the special symbol has a low probability after the jackpot ends. When shifting to the state, the effect of defeating the enemy is executed in the mode of display as shown in FIG. 78 (b). If the enemy is defeated, the state C shifts to the state C after the jackpot ends, and if the enemy loses, the state A shifts to the state A after the jackpot ends.

In addition, when the enemy is defeated in the state F, the HP gauge is restored after the victory and the HP is restored to the perfect state. As a result, the HP is always in a perfect state in the state C, so it is confirmed whether or not the present is in an advantageous state (that is, the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 is swung to the left) just by checking the HP of the main character. can do.

<Regarding the control process in the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment. This command determination process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) of the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process of determining a command received from the main control device 110 as described above.

Among the command determination processes of the voice lamp control device 113, in each of the processes S1401, S1403 to S1410, and S1419, S1401 and S1403 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processing as each processing of ~ S1410 and S1419 is executed. Then, in the command determination process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S1401 is completed, the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1421) is replaced with the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 41) in the first embodiment. To execute. The variation pattern selection process 2 is a process for selecting the variation pattern effect corresponding to each of the above-mentioned states A, C, and E.

If the determination result in the process of S1408 is No, it is determined whether or not a command related to the jackpot game has been received (S1422). The commands related to the jackpot game include all commands related to the jackpot such as the round number command, the opening command, and the interval command.

If it is determined in the process of S1422 that a command related to the jackpot game has been received (S1422: Yes), the jackpot effect processing is executed (S1423), and this process is terminated. This jackpot effect processing (S1423) is a process for setting the display effect during the jackpot in the above-mentioned states B, D, and F. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command related to the jackpot game has not been received (S1422: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1419), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1421) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 114 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern selection process 2.

Of the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1421), in the process of S2701, the same process as the process of S2701 of the variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 41) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, in the variation pattern selection process 2 of the fourth embodiment, when the process of S2701 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 indicates a jackpot variation pattern. (S2711).

In the process of S2711, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot is shown (S2711: Yes), then the status flag 223f is set from the status setting table (FIG. 75) and the jackpot type (S2712). Next, based on the setting content of the state flag 223f, the fluctuation pattern for the jackpot is selected (S2713), and this process is terminated. For example, when the state flag 223f indicates the state E and the jackpot type is jackpot A, an effect of acquiring medicinal herbs or an effect of encountering an enemy with a companion coming to help is performed.

In the process of S2711, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot is not shown (that is, it is the fluctuation pattern of the deviation), the fluctuation pattern for deviation is extracted from the received command (S2714), and this processing is terminated. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the jackpot effect processing (S1423) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 114 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this jackpot effect processing.

In the jackpot effect processing (S1423), first, it is determined whether or not the opening command has been received (S4201), and if it is determined that the opening command has been received (S4201: Yes), the state setting table (FIG. 75) is displayed. The status flag is set from the jackpot type (S4202). For example, when the state flag 223f indicates the state C and the jackpot type is the jackpot B, the state flag is updated to indicate the state D (see state D in FIG. 75).

Then, the pattern of the jackpot effect is set based on the state of the set state flag 223f (S4203), and this process is terminated. For example, if the state flag 223f is set to indicate the state D and the jackpot type is jackpot B, the effect that the hero is attacked by the enemy and becomes a pinch is set as the jackpot effect.

If it is determined in the process of S4201 that the opening command has not been received, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the ball entry port different from the setting of the state flag 223f (S4204). For example, when the setting of the state flag 223f indicates the state B and the jackpot type is jackpot B, the game ball should enter the time-saving entry slot 501, but with respect to the pachinko machine 10. If the ball enters any of the probabilistic entry points 502 to 504 due to vibration, etc., the jackpot ends even though it has been decided that the main character will be defeated. Since it later shifts to a high-probability state of a special symbol, there is a risk of giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Therefore, in the processing of S4204, if it is determined that the ball has entered a ball entry port different from the setting of the state flag 223f (S4204: Yes), the ball is attacked by the enemy and collapses according to the type of the different entry port. The main character stands up with the last power and sets the effect of attacking and destroying the enemy, or conversely, the defeated enemy gets up and attacks the main character, and the main character loses in reverse. (S4205), and this process is terminated.

By performing the processing of S4205, the game state after the end of the big hit and the result of the display effect during the big hit can be matched, so that the game state after the end of the big hit and the result of the display effect during the big hit It is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player due to the discrepancy.

In the process of S4204, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the ball entry port different from the setting of the state flag 223f (that is, the ball has entered the ball entry port as set by the state flag 223f) (S4204: No). , The mode of the display effect during the jackpot is set based on the jackpot effect pattern set in the process of S4203 (S4206), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is configured to execute a series of productions with a story based on the state of the distribution rotating body 341 of the lottery device 300, the winning jackpot type, and the like. ing. Further, these series of effects are configured to be executed in a variable pattern effect in which the jackpot stop symbol is displayed and a display effect during the jackpot game executed after the variable pattern effect.

As a result, the game ball that has entered the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 has entered any of the entry ports (time-saving entry opening 501 and probability variation entry opening 501 to 504). Even if you overlook this, by checking the result of the display effect executed in the third symbol display device 81, you can easily recognize whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. be able to.

Further, also in the present embodiment, the distribution rotating body 341 of the lottery device 300 is configured to be visible to the player, and the player can confirm the distribution rotating body 341 in a state advantageous to the player (that is, that is). It is configured so that it can be recognized whether or not the distribution rotating body 341 is in a state of swinging to the left side). However, when a player who is not accustomed to the game plays the game, he / she may play the game without knowing what is different between the state where the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right side and the state where the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left side.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the display effect during the jackpot game not only suggests whether or not to shift to the high-probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot, but also the HP of the main character is in the high-probability state of the special symbol. It is configured so that it can be recognized whether or not the current state is advantageous depending on whether the state is sufficient or in a pinch state in which HP is decreasing. Therefore, even a player who is not accustomed to the game can easily recognize whether or not the current state is advantageous.

In the present embodiment, only two types of HP gauges of the main character are provided, that is, a pinch state or a perfect state, but other states may be provided. For example, in addition to the perfect state and the pinch state, the state where the HP gauge is reduced by about 20%, the state where the HP gauge is reduced by half, and the state where the HP gauge is reduced by about 70% are added. Is also good. In this case, the state of the HP gauge of the main character is configured to be stored in the RAM 223, and the HP gauge is held while the high probability state of the special symbol continues, and the special symbol is held. It may be configured to reset when the state shifts to the low probability state of. As a result, the display effect can be changed in a natural flow including the HP gauge, so that it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the present embodiment, the lottery is performed by the lottery device 300 in the eighth round, but the lottery may be performed in another round. Further, after the stop symbol indicating the big hit is confirmed and displayed, the lottery may be performed before the start of the big hit game.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 105. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the lottery device 300 is provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, and among the game balls that have entered the lottery gate 310, the game balls that can proceed to the guidance passage 322. The passage closing valve 324 was provided so that the number of balls was limited to one ball. The game ball whose progress to the guide passage 322 is restricted by the passage closing valve 324 is configured to be discharged to the outside of the lottery device 300 through the ball discharge passage 323. Further, during the jackpot, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the open / closed state of the lottery gate 310 are switched for each round based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 66). Was. Further, the game ball distributed to the front route or the back route by the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b flows down any of the guide passages 408a to 408d of the distribution rotating body 341, and the time saving entry port 501, Alternatively, the ball is configured to enter any of the probabilistic entry ball ports 502 to 504.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a second variable winning device 140 capable of entering a game ball is provided in addition to the variable winning device 65. The second variable winning device 140 includes a second specified winning opening (second large opening) 140a, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a, and opening / closing thereof. It is equipped with a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening and closing of the plate forward with the lower side as the axis. Like the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In addition, in the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily opening the open state where the ball can easily win the second specified winning opening (second large opening) 140a. Form.

Further, in the present embodiment, instead of the lottery device 300 (see FIG. 5) used in the first to fourth embodiments, the lottery device 700 is configured to draw the game state after the jackpot is completed. The lottery device 700 is provided inside the second variable winning device 140. Although the details will be described later, the lottery device 700 of the present embodiment is provided with an entry slot distribution unit 740 (see FIGS. 92 to 95) for distributing the game ball to the entry slot, and the game ball is provided. It is configured to set the game state after the end of the big hit based on the type of the ball entrance. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a game ball that has entered either the front route guide hole 742a or the back route guide hole 742b provided on the upper surface of the ball entry port distribution portion 740 is inserted. , The distribution rotating body 741 is configured to distribute the ball to either the time-saving entry port 501 or the probability variation entry port 502 to 504.

All the game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a are configured to enter either the front route guidance hole 742a or the back route guidance hole 742b. .. The game ball that has entered the front route guide hole 742a is configured to flow down the flow path (front route) on the front side of the distribution rotating body 741. Further, the game ball that has entered the back route guide hole 742b is configured to flow down the flow path (back route) on the back side of the distribution rotating body 741.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the start of the jackpot is set, it is based on the type of the ball entry port (one of the time-saving entry ball opening 501 and the probability variation entry ball opening 501 to 504) in which the game ball first enters. Therefore, it is configured to determine whether the special symbol is in the high-probability state or the special symbol is in the low-probability state after the jackpot ends. The second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is configured to be opened only in the first round, and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is configured to be opened in the second and subsequent rounds. doing. That is, the opportunity to draw a lottery for the game state to be transferred after the big hit is limited to the first round of the big hit.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, only the opening / closing operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is changed according to the big hit type, and the way of switching between the back route and the front route is a big hit. It is configured to be the same regardless of the type. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are provided to switch between the back route and the front route (see FIG. 9), but in the present embodiment, instead of these, the pachinko machine 10 is provided. A flow path switching valve 731 (see FIG. 85) is provided. The flow path switching valves 331a and 331b may be applied instead of the flow path switching valve 731.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time-saving entry ball port 501 and the probability variation entry ball port 503 are arranged on the front side of the front view, and the probability variation entry ball port 502 and the probability variation entry ball port 504 are on the back side of the front view. (The placement of the ball entrance is reversed from that of other embodiments). Therefore, if the game ball flows down the front route, it may enter the time-saving entry slot 501, so that the special symbol may be in a low probability state after the big hit, but when the game ball flows down the back route. , Basically, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol. That is, the state in which the back route is selected is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the state in which the front route is selected.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is that the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is different from the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Port) 140a is provided, and a lottery device 700 is provided after the second specific winning port (second large opening) 140a. The flow path switching valve 731 (FIG. 85) is replaced with the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b. (See) is provided. Further, in the main control device 110, the content of the first hit type selection table 202b of the ROM 202 is the same as the content of the first hit type selection table 202b of the first embodiment, and the small hit type selection table 202e is abolished. The point is that the second large opening switching table 202f, the flow path switching table 202g is provided, and the RAM 203 has a timing counter 203q, a ball entry standby flag 203r, a large opening opening flag 203s, a flow path flag 203t, The point that the payout flag 203u is provided, the round start flag 203l, the closing flag 203m, the lottery execution flag 203n, the jackpot end flag 203o, and the passage opening flag 203p are deleted.

Further, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and a part of the process included in the main process (FIG. 68) are different from the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. The third embodiment describes other configurations, other processes executed by the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<About the configuration of the lottery device in the fifth embodiment>
First, the configuration of the lottery device 700 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 96.

FIG. 82 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82, in the present embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is provided below the front view of the game board 13, and the second variable winning device 140 is in front of the game board 13. It is provided on the right side of the view. In addition, a lottery device 700 is provided directly below the second variable winning device 140. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a of the second variable winning device is guided to the lottery device 700. Since the lottery device 700 of the present embodiment is provided inside the board surface of the game board 13, the lottery device 700 does not hinder the progress of the game ball. Further, since the portion of the board surface of the game board 13 of the present embodiment on the front side of the lottery device 700 is made of a transparent member, the player can use the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a. It is possible to check how the game ball that has entered the game flows down during the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the outline of the second variable winning device 140 and the lottery device 700 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an outline of the second variable winning device 140 and the lottery device 700.

As shown in FIG. 83, the lottery device 700 is provided directly below the second variable winning device 140, and reaches the second variable winning device 140 via the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. All the game balls that have entered are configured to flow down to the lottery device 700. The joint portion between the second variable winning device 140 and the lottery device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86 that follow.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a second variable winning device 140 and a flow path leading to the lottery device 700 provided inside the second variable winning device 140. As shown in FIG. 84 (a), a substantially rectangular parallelepiped region in which a game ball can enter through the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is provided inside the second variable winning device 140. ing. A lottery device guide hole 141 leading to the ball entry port distribution portion 740 is provided in the central portion of the bottom surface of this substantially rectangular parallelepiped-shaped region. All the game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a enter the lottery device guide hole 141.

As shown in FIG. 84B, the left and right sides of the bottom surface of the second variable winning device 140 are provided with inclinations (inclined portions 142a, 142b) so that the game ball descends in the direction of the lottery device guide hole 141. Has been done. Further, these inclined portions 142a and 142b are configured so that the upper end of the inclination is at the same height as the lower side of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is suppressed from staying inside the second variable winning device 140, and the drawing device guide hole 141 is surely reached. You can enter the ball.

Downstream of the lottery device guide hole 141, the traveling direction for distributing the game ball to the flow path on the front side of the front view (front flow path 732a) or the flow path on the back side of the front view (back side flow path 732b). A distribution unit 730 is provided. Inside the traveling direction distribution unit 730, a flow path switching valve 731 (see FIG. 85 (b)) for switching the flow path in which the game ball travels is provided. When the game ball is distributed to the front flow path 732a by the flow path switching valve 731, the ball enters the front route guide hole 742a provided on the front side of the upper surface of the ball entry port distribution portion 740, and the distribution rotation is performed. Proceed through the flow path (front route) on the front side of the body 741. On the other hand, when the game ball is distributed to the back side flow path 732b, it enters the back route guide hole 742b provided on the back side of the upper surface of the ball entry port distribution portion 740, and enters the back side of the distribution rotating body 741. Proceed through the flow path (back route).

Next, the traveling direction distribution unit 730 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. 85 (a) is a plan view of the second variable winning device 140 as viewed from above, and FIG. 85 (b) shows the second variable winning device 140 and the traveling direction distribution unit 730 in FIG. 85 (a). It is sectional drawing in the case of cutting along the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb shown in 1.

As shown in FIGS. 85 (a) and 85 (b), a lottery device guide hole 141 is provided in the center of the bottom surface of the variable winning device 140. Further, a flow path switching valve 731 for switching the flow path through which the game ball flows down is provided downstream of the lottery device guide hole 141. The drive shaft 731a of the flow path switching valve 731 and the flow path solenoid 265 are electrically connected, and by controlling the flow path solenoid 265, the flow path switching valve uses the drive shaft 731a as a rotation axis. The 731 is configured to be rotatable. As a result, the flow path switching valve 731 can be tilted toward the front or the back. Further, as described above, on the downstream side of the flow path switching valve 731, the front side flow path 732a is provided on the front side of the front view, and the back side flow path 732b is provided on the back side of the front view.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the state of the flow path switching valve 731 when the game ball flows down the front side flow path 732a and the back side flow path 732b will be described.

FIG. 86 (a) shows a state in which the flow path switching valve 731 is switched (tilted) to the front side by controlling the flow path solenoid 265, and the flow path switching valve 731 is cut along the line LXXXXVb-LXXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of the case. As shown in the figure, when the flow path switching valve 731 is switched to the front side, the tip portion of the flow path switching valve 731 is in contact with the inner wall portion on the front side of the traveling direction distribution portion 731. That is, the front side flow path 732a is shielded by the flow path switching valve 731, and the game ball cannot advance to the front side flow path 732a. On the other hand, the upper part of the back side flow path 732b is open so that the game ball can proceed. Therefore, when the game ball enters the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a with the flow path switching valve 731 switched to the front side, the game ball enters the back side flow path 732b. Flow down.

Further, FIG. 86 (b) is a cross-sectional view when the flow path switching valve 731 is switched (tilted) to the back side and cut along the line LXXXXVb-LXXXXVb (see FIG. 85 (a)). As shown in the figure, when the flow path switching valve 731 is switched to the back side, the tip portion of the flow path switching valve 731 is in contact with the inner wall portion on the back side of the traveling direction distribution portion 731. That is, the back side flow path 732b is shielded by the flow path switching valve 731, and the game ball cannot proceed to the back side flow path 732b. On the other hand, the upper part of the front flow path 732a is open so that the game ball can proceed. Therefore, when the game ball enters the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a with the flow path switching valve 731 switched to the back side, the game ball enters the front side flow path 732a. Flow down.

As shown in FIGS. 86A and 86B, the tip portion of the flow path switching valve 731 (that is, the portion in contact with the inner wall of the traveling direction distribution portion 730) is located at a higher position with respect to the drive shaft 731a. It becomes. That is, the flow path switching valve 731 is in a state of being inclined in the downward direction toward the flow path partition portion 733. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has reached the flow path switching valve 731 from stopping on the flow path switching valve 731, and to reliably advance the game ball to the lottery device 700.

Next, a modified example of the traveling direction distribution unit 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. When the flow path switching valve 731 is used, the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted in order to ensure that the game ball does not stand still on the upper part of the flow path switching valve 731 and proceeds to the lottery device 700. It was composed of. Therefore, it is necessary to secure a height sufficient to incline the flow path switching valve 731. On the other hand, in this embodiment, a flow path switching member having a substantially flat plate shape is used to switch the flow path through which the game ball flows. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the traveling direction distribution unit 730 from becoming vertically long.

87 (a) and 87 (b) are both perspective views of a modified example of the second variable winning device 140. Inside the second variable winning device 140, it is controlled whether the game ball is distributed to the front flow path (front route) of the rotating body 741 or to the back flow path (back route). A flow path switching member 734 is provided for this purpose. FIG. 87 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path of the back route is opened by the flow path switching member 734, and FIG. 87 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the flow path of the front route is opened. Is. First, with reference to FIG. 87 (a), a state in which the flow path of the back route is opened will be described.

As shown in FIG. 87 (a), in this modified example, a recess is provided in the center of the bottom surface (between the inclined portion 142a and the inclined portion 142b) of the region inside the second variable winning device 140, and the recessed portion is provided. A front guide hole 143a for guiding the game ball to the front route guide hole 742a provided on the upper surface of the ball entry port distribution portion 740 is provided on the front side of the bottom surface of the device. Further, on the back side of the bottom surface of the recessed portion, a device back guide hole 143b for guiding the game ball to the back route guide hole 742b of the lottery device 700 is provided. Further, a flow path switching member 734 that can be slidably displaced back and forth of the second variable winning device 140 is arranged in the recessed portion.

The height and width of the flow path switching member 734 are configured to be the same as the height and width of the recess provided on the bottom surface of the second variable winning device 140. Since the width of the flow path switching member 734 is the same as the width of the recessed portion, there is no gap between the left and right inner wall portions of the recess and the left and right outer wall portions of the flow path switching member 734. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from getting stuck between the recess and the flow path switching member 734, so that the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a It is possible to prevent the second variable winning device 140 from staying inside.

Further, since the height of the flow path switching member 734 is equal to the height of the recessed portion, the height of the upper surface of the flow path switching member 734 coincides with the height of the lower ends of the inclined portion 142a and the inclined portion 142b. That is, the inclined portion 142a and the inclined portion 142b are smoothly connected to the upper surface of the flow path switching member 734. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from getting stuck between the left and right outer walls of the flow path switching member 734 and the inclined portion 142a or the inclined portion 142b. It is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the opening port) 140a from staying inside the second variable winning device 140.

The flow path switching member 734 is electrically connected to the flow path solenoid 265, and is either the front side (see FIG. 87 (a)) or the back side (see FIG. 87 (b)) of the second variable winning device 140. It can be slid and displaced to either. A notch having a size sufficient for the flow path switching member 734 to pass through is provided on the back side of the second variable winning device 140 so that the flow path switching member 734 moves back and forth through this notch. It is driven by the flow path solenoid 265.

The flow path switching member 734 is provided with a ball passage hole 734a having a size that allows the game ball to pass through, and the game ball that has reached the flow path switching member 734 can flow down through the ball passage hole 734a. .. Further, as described above, the flow path switching member 734 slides and displaces the recessed portion on the bottom surface of the second variable winning device 140 toward the front side or the back side of the front view, so that the flow path switching member 734 has a guide hole in front of the device. It is in a state of being directly above the 143a and the device back guide hole 143b.

FIG. 87A shows a state in which the tip of the flow path switching member 734 is slidably displaced by the flow path solenoid 265 until it comes into contact with the inner wall on the front side (player side) of the second variable winning device 140. There is. When the flow path switching member 734 is slidably displaced toward the front side, the device front guide hole 143a is in a state where the upper side is closed by the flow path switching member 734. That is, the game ball cannot pass through the guide hole 143a in front of the device. Further, the center of the ball passage hole 734a provided in the flow path switching member 734 coincides with the center of the device back guide hole 143b. Therefore, since the device back guide hole 143b is directly below the ball passage hole 734a, the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 140 passes through the ball passage hole 734a and the device back guide hole 143b, and is a lottery device. It is in a state where it can flow down to the back route guide hole 742b of 700. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a flows down the flow path (back route) on the back side of the distribution rotating body 741.

FIG. 87B shows a state in which the flow path solenoid 265 slides and displaces the inner portion of the flow path switching member 734 including the ball passage hole 734a until it projects to the outside of the second variable winning device 140. ing. In this case, the back route guide hole 742b is closed on the upper side by the flow path switching member 734. That is, the game ball cannot pass through the device back guide hole 143b. Further, when the flow path switching member 734 is slid and displaced to the back side, nothing obstructs (exposes) the upper side of the device front guide hole 143a. That is, the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 140 can flow down to the front route guide hole 742a of the lottery device 700 via the device front guide hole 143a. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a flows down the flow path (front route) on the front side of the distribution rotating body 741.

In this way, by setting the flow path switching member 734 in a state where the flow path switching member 734 is slide-displaced toward the front side of the front view or in a state where the flow path switching member 734 is slide-displaced toward the back side of the front view by the flow path solenoid 265, the second variable winning prize is obtained. The flow path through which the game ball that has entered the device 140 flows down can be set to either the front route or the back route.

Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the game ball entered into the second variable winning device 140 in each of the state where the flow path switching member 734 is slid and displaced toward the front side and the state where the flow path switching member 734 is slid and displaced toward the back side. The route through which is carried out will be described.

FIG. 88A is a diagram showing a path through which the game ball travels in a state where the flow path switching member 734 is slidably displaced toward the front side of the front view. As shown in FIG. 88 (a), the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 140 via the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is provided on the flow path switching member 734. It passes through the ball passage hole 734a and the device back guide hole 143b located directly below the ball passage hole 734a, and enters the back route guide hole 742b of the ball entry port distribution portion 740. As a result, the game ball flows down the flow path (back route) on the back side of the distribution rotating body 741.

Further, FIG. 88B is a diagram showing a path through which the game ball passes in a state where the flow path switching member 734 is slid and displaced to the back side by the flow path solenoid 265. As shown in FIG. 87 (b), the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 140 through the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a passes through the guide hole 143a in front of the device. , The ball enters the route guide hole 742a in front of the ball entry port distribution unit 740. As a result, the game ball flows down the flow path (front route) on the front side of the distribution rotating body 741.

As described above, in this modification, by controlling the arrangement of the flow path switching member 734 by the flow path solenoid 265, the game ball can be reliably advanced to the flow path to be flowed down.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 89 to 95, the ball entry slot distribution unit 740 provided in the lottery device 700 will be described in detail.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the structure of the ball entrance distribution unit 740. FIG. 89 (a) is a front perspective view when the ball entry port distribution unit 740 is observed from the front right direction, and FIG. 89 (b) is a front view when the ball entry port distribution unit 740 is observed from the front left direction. It is a front perspective view. As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b), the ball entry port distribution unit 740 includes a distribution rotating body 741 and forms a flow path forming unit 743 in which the game ball travels, and a flow path thereof. It is composed of a cover member 744a mounted on the front side of the forming portion 743 and a cover member 744b mounted on the back side of the flow path forming portion 743.

A front route guide hole 742a is bored on the front side of the front view, and a back route guide hole 742b is bored on the back side of the front view. As described above, the game ball that has entered the front route guide hole 742a advances through the flow path (front route) on the front side of the distribution rotating body 741, and the game ball that has entered the back route guidance hole 742b is distributed and rotated. Proceed through the flow path (back route) on the back side of the body 741.

On the right side of the ball entry port distribution unit 740, the probability variation entry port 503 (front side of the front view) and the probability variation entry port 504 (back side of the front view) are used as entry ports for the game balls to be distributed by the distribution rotating body 741. ) Is provided (see FIG. 89 (a)). Further, on the left side surface of the ball entry port distribution unit 740, the time-saving ball entry 501 (front side) and the probabilistic ball entry 502 (front view) are used as the ball entry points for which the game balls are distributed by the distribution rotating body 741. (Back side) is provided (see FIG. 89 (b)). If the entry port to which the game ball is first distributed after the start of the jackpot is the time-saving entry slot 501, the game shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. On the other hand, when the entry port to which the game ball is first distributed is the probability variation entry opening 502 to 504, the state shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit.

Further, the game ball that has entered each entry port is discharged to the outside of the lottery device 700 after the entry is detected by any of the winning sensors 420a to 420d corresponding to each entry port. Since the configuration for discharging the game ball to the outside is the same as that of the ball discharging unit 350 (see FIG. 11) of another embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, unlike other embodiments, when the game ball flows down the front route, the ball is configured to enter either the time-saving entry slot 501 or the probability variation entry slot 503, and the game is played. When the ball flows down the back route, it is configured to enter either the probability-changing ball opening 502 or the probability-changing ball opening 504. Therefore, when the back route is selected, it is configured to be advantageous to the player. In detail, when the front route is selected and the ball enters the time-saving entry slot 501 or the probability variation entry slot 503, the entry slot to which the game balls are distributed in the next big hit lottery by the lottery device 700 Since it is a time-saving entry slot 501 or a probability variation entry slot 502, there is a possibility that a special symbol will be in a low probability state after the next big hit. On the other hand, when the back route is selected and the game ball enters the probability-changing ball opening 502 or the probability-changing ball opening 504, the ball-entry port to which the game ball is distributed is selected by the lottery device 700 at the next big hit. Since it becomes the probability variation entry ball opening 503 or the probability variation entry ball opening 504, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol not only after the current big hit but also after the next big hit.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the back route is configured to be more advantageous to the player, the game ball is pulled toward the front side by using a magnet or the like, and the game ball is illegally moved to the front route. Even if it is advanced, it will be disadvantageous for the illegal player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the illegal act of changing the trajectory of the game ball by using a magnet or the like.

Further, since the flow path forming portion 743 and the cover members 744a and 744b are made of a transparent material (for example, PS material), a game in which the ball enters the front route guide hole 742a or the back route guide hole 742b. The player can visually recognize the progress of the game ball until the ball enters one of the entry ports (time-saving entry opening 501 or probability variation entry opening 501 to 504).

FIG. 90 is an exploded front perspective view of the ball entry port distribution unit 740. The flow path forming portion 743 is provided with a region for storing a substantially fan-shaped distribution rotating body 741 directly below the front route guide hole 742a and the back route guide hole 742b. That is, the distribution rotating body 741 is arranged directly below the front route guide hole 742a and the back route guide hole 742b. Further, the distribution rotating body 741 is configured to be swingable to the left and right around the substantially cylindrical rotating body support shafts 806a and 806b, and the game ball is inserted according to the direction in which the distribution rotating body 741 is swinging. You can change the entrance to the ball. The relationship between the direction in which the distribution rotating body 741 is swinging and the ball entry port into which the game ball enters will be described later with reference to FIGS. 92 to 95.

The rotating body support shafts 806a and 806b of the distribution rotating body 741 are inserted into the cover member 744a mounted on the front side of the flow path forming portion 743 and the cover member 744b mounted on the back side, respectively. Bearing portions 746a and 746b are provided. The bearing portions 746a and 746b are both recessed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and the radius of the recessed portion is slightly larger than the radius of the rotating body support shafts 806a and 806b (that is, the rotating body support shaft is recessed in the recessed portion). The size is such that 806a and 806b can be inserted and can be freely rotated). When the cover members 744a and 744b are attached to the flow path forming portion 743, the rotating body support shafts 806a and 806b are inserted into the bearing portions 746a and 746b, respectively. The distribution rotating body 741 can be stably swung as a rotating shaft.

Further, on the surface of the cover member 744a on the flow path forming portion 743 side, guidance passages 745a and 745c are provided so that the game ball traveling through the flow path (front route) on the front side of the distribution rotating body 741 can flow down the upper surface. Has been done. The guidance passage 745a is a passage inclined downward toward the time-saving entry slot 501. Due to this inclination, the game ball that has advanced to the guidance passage 745a can flow down to the time-saving entry slot 501. Further, the guide passage 745c is a passage inclined in a downward direction toward the probabilistic entry ball port 503. Due to this inclination, the game ball that has advanced to the guidance passage 745c can flow down to the probabilistic entry ball port 503.

On the other hand, on the surface of the cover member 744b on the flow path forming portion 743 side, guidance passages 745b and 745d are provided so that the game ball traveling through the flow path (back route) on the back side of the distribution rotating body 741 can flow down the upper surface. Has been done. The guide passage 745b is a passage inclined downward toward the probabilistic entry ball port 502. Due to this inclination, the game ball that has advanced to the guidance passage 745b can flow down to the probabilistic entry ball port 502. Further, the guide passage 745d is a passage inclined in a downward direction toward the probabilistic entry ball port 504. Due to this inclination, the game ball that has advanced to the guidance passage 745d can flow down to the probabilistic entry ball port 504.

Of the joints between each passage (guidance passages 745a to 745d) and each cover member (cover members 744a, 744b), the upper surface side of each passage gently draws an arc (curves). It has a shape. As a result, when the game ball passes through each passage, the inside (the side close to the distribution rotating body 741) can flow down. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the inner wall portion of each cover member from coming into contact with the game ball, it is possible to prevent the cover member and the flow path forming portion 743 from being separated during the game.

Further, a magnet 747a and a magnet 747b are provided on the surfaces of the cover member 744a and the cover member 744b on the flow path forming portion 743 side, respectively. Further, magnets 807a and 807b are also provided on the front side and the back side of the distribution rotating body 741, respectively. When the cover members 744a and 744b are attached to the flow path forming portion 743, the magnet 747a, the magnet 807a, and the magnet 747b are in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 does not swing to the right or left (neutral state). And the magnet 807b are provided at overlapping positions.

Here, the magnet 747a and the magnet 807a are installed so as to repel each other when the distribution rotating body 741 swings and is displaced to a position where it is in a neutral state. Similarly, both the magnet 747b and the magnet 807b are installed so as to repel each other. Therefore, even if the distribution rotating body 741 swings slightly due to vibration applied to the distribution rotating body 741, the magnets 807a and 807b provided on the side surface portion of the distribution rotating body 741 and the cover member 744a, Since the magnets 747a and 747b provided on the 744b repel each other, it is possible to prevent the distribution rotating body 741 from rotating beyond the portions of the magnets 747a and 747b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the distribution rotating body 741 from being switched even though the game ball has not passed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the structure of the distribution rotating body 741 arranged inside the ball entry port distribution unit 740 will be described. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing the structure of the distribution rotating body 741. FIG. 91 (a) is a front perspective view of the distribution rotating body 741 swinging to the left, and FIG. 91 (b) is a front perspective view of the sorting rotating body 741 swinging to the right. Further, FIG. 91 (c) is a front view in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 is not swinging to the right or left (neutral state), and FIG. 91 (d) is a front view in which the sorting rotating body 741 is also to the right. It is a plan view in a state where it does not swing to the left (neutral state).

As shown in FIGS. 91 (a) and 91 (b), the distribution rotating body 741 is provided with a substantially fan-shaped partition member 801. By providing the partition member 801 even if vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 or the game ball and the cover members 744a and 744b repel each other, the game ball is disconnected from the flow path in which the game ball was traveling. It can be suppressed that it ends up.

Further, on the front side of the partition member 801 there is a ball repulsion portion 802 that bounces the game ball that has flowed down the front route to the left in the front view, and a concave shape that receives the game ball that has flowed down the front route and hinders the progress. A ball stopper 804 is provided. The game ball bounced off by the ball repulsion portion 802 flows down the guide passage 745a provided in the cover member 744a and enters the time-saving ball entrance 501. On the other hand, when the game ball is received by the ball stop portion 804, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stop portion 804. Due to this load, the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right in the front view. As a result, the game ball falls from the ball stop portion 804 onto the guidance passage 745c, and enters the probability variation ball opening 503 through the guidance passage 745c.

On the other hand, on the back side of the partition member 801 is a ball repulsion portion 803 that bounces the game ball that has flowed down the back route to the right in the front view, and a concave shape that receives the game ball that has flowed down the back route and hinders the progress. A ball stopper 805 is provided. As shown in FIGS. 91 (c) and 91 (d), the ball repulsion portion 803 and the ball stop portion 805 have the same shape as the ball repulsion portion 802 and the ball stop portion 804 described above. That is, the shape of the distribution rotating body 741 is the same when viewed from the front direction and when viewed from the back direction.

The game ball bounced off by the ball repulsion portion 803 flows down the guide passage 745d provided in the cover member 744b and enters the probabilistic entry ball port 504. On the other hand, when the game ball is received by the ball stop portion 805, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stop portion 805. Due to this load, the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left in the front view. As a result, the game ball falls from the ball stop portion 805 onto the guide passage 745b, and enters the probabilistic entry ball port 502 through the guide passage 745b.

Next, the operation of the game ball flowing down to the distribution rotating body 741 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 92 to 95. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the operation of the distribution rotating body 741 and the game ball when the game ball flows down the back route in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right, and FIG. 93 is a diagram showing the operation of the distribution rotating body 741 and the game ball. It is a figure which shows the operation of the distribution rotating body 741 and the game ball when the game ball flows down the front route with 741 swinging to the right side. Further, FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the operation of the distribution rotating body 741 and the game ball when the game ball flows down the back route in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left, and FIG. 95 is a diagram showing the operation of the distribution rotating body 741 and the game ball. It is a figure which shows the operation of the distribution rotating body 741 and the game ball when the game ball flows down the front route with the rotating body 741 swinging to the left side.

First, with reference to FIG. 92, a case where the flow path is set to the front route and the distribution rotating body 741 is swung to the right side will be described. Since the flow path of the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is set to the front route, it enters the front route guide hole 742a via the front side flow path 732a. It spheres and flows down the flow path (front route) on the front side of the distribution rotating body 741 (see FIG. 92 (a)).

In the state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right, the ball repulsion portion 802 is located directly under the front route guide hole 742a, so that the game ball flowing down the front route collides with the ball repulsion portion 802 (FIG. 92 (FIG. 92). b) See). As a result, the game ball is bounced to the left in the front view, so that it travels through the guidance passage 745a and enters the time-saving ball entrance 501. That is, the entry port for the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is the time-saving entry opening 501. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, the special symbol shifts to a low-probability state, and the normal symbol is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the number of fluctuations is 100).

Further, in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right side, the ball repulsion portion 802 forms a slope having an inclination in the direction of rising toward the upper right direction, so that the game ball falling from above the vertical direction is the ball repulsion portion. By colliding with 802, a force in the direction of rotating the distribution rotating body 741 to the right acts. However, when the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right, there is no room for the distribution rotating body 741 to rotate to the right, so even if the game ball collides with the ball repulsion portion 802, the distribution rotating body 741 The state does not change.

In the same round of big hits, the game balls that subsequently reach the distribution rotating body 741 also proceed on the front route, so that all the game balls do not swing the distribution rotating body 741 and the time saving entrance 501 Enter the ball. Therefore, all the game balls that first enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a enter the time-saving entry opening 501 without changing the state of the distribution rotating body 741.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 93 (b) and 93 (c), when the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right, the bottom surface on the left side of the partition portion 801 is in contact with the flow path forming portion 743, but is viewed from the front. The lower part of the ball repulsion portion 802 arranged on the front side and the lower part of the ball stop portion 805 arranged on the back side of the front view do not come into contact with the guide passage 745a and the guide passage 745b, respectively, and a space is created. It is configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower portion of the ball repulsive portion 802 and the lower portion of the ball stop portion 805 from repelling each other with the guide passage 745a and the guide passage 745b due to the impact when the game ball collides with the ball repulsion portion 802. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distribution rotating body 741 that had been swung to the left due to the impact of the game ball colliding with the ball repulsion portion 803 from rotating to the right and switching to the state of swinging to the right. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 92 (a) to 92 (c), in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right, a flow path passing through the lower end of the ball repulsion portion 802 and the center of the flow path through which the game ball flows down. It is configured to intersect the center line O. That is, since the ball repulsion portion 802 is in a state of being closer to the right side with respect to the flow path, the game ball flowing down the flow path is hard to hit the upper side of the ball repulsion portion 802. Here, as the ball moves toward the upper side of the ball repulsion portion 802, the distance from the rotation axis of the distribution rotating body 741 increases. Therefore, when the game ball collides with the upper side of the ball repulsion portion 802, the distribution rotating body 741 moves to the right due to the impact of the collision. The force in the direction of rotating to becomes stronger. When the force in the direction of rotating to the right becomes stronger, the force with which the bottom surface of the partition portion 801 pushes the flow path forming portion 743 also becomes stronger based on the force in the direction of rotating to the right. Therefore, the reaction received by the partition portion 801 from the flow path forming portion 743 is also strong, so that the distribution rotating body 741 is likely to bounce off, and there is a high possibility that the distribution rotating body 741 is switched to a state of swinging to the left. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the game ball is hard to hit the upper side of the ball repulsion portion 802, thereby suppressing the rebound of the distribution rotating body 741 and causing an impact when the game ball collides with the ball repulsion portion 802. Based on this, it is prevented that the distribution rotating body 741 is switched to the state of swinging to the left side.

Next, the state of the back route and the state in which the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right side will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 95. In this state, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a has a flow path set to the back route, so that the back route guide hole 742b is passed through the back side flow path 732b. The ball enters the ball and flows down the flow path (back route) on the back side of the distribution rotating body 741.

In the state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right, the ball stop portion 805 is located directly under the back route guide hole 742b, so that the game ball flowing down the back route is received by the ball stop portion 805 (FIG. 93 (a). )reference). When the game ball is received, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stop portion 805. That is, since a force acting in the direction of rotating the distribution rotating body 741 to the left, the distribution rotating body 741 rotates to the left and swings to the left (see FIG. 93 (b)).

Further, when the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left side, the ball stop portion 805, which is a part of the distribution rotating body, also rotates and tilts to the left side, so that the slope is formed in the downward direction to the lower left. Therefore, the game ball received by the ball stop portion 805 rolls down from the ball stop portion 805 based on the tilt of the ball stop portion 805, advances through the guide passage 745b, and reaches the probabilistic entry ball opening 502. Enter the ball. That is, the entry port for the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is the probability variation entry opening 502. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol.

In the same round of big hits, the game ball that subsequently reaches the distribution rotating body 741 also proceeds on the back route. As described above, the distribution rotating body 741 is in a state of swinging to the left based on the load due to the weight of the game ball that first reaches the distribution rotating body 741. Therefore, the ball repulsion portion 803 is located directly below the back route guide hole 742b (see FIG. 95 (a)), and the game ball flowing down the front route collides with the ball repulsion portion 803 (FIG. 95 (b). )reference). As a result, the game ball is bounced to the right in the front view, so that it travels through the guidance passage 745d (see FIG. 95 (c)) and enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 504.

That is, the game ball that first enters the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a switches the distribution rotating body 741 to a state in which it swings to the left, and enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 502. Then, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a after the second ball enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 504 without changing the state of the distribution rotating body 741.

Further, in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right side, the gap between the upper end portion of the ball stop portion 805 and the ceiling portion of the guidance passage 745d is configured to be less than one game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the back route guide hole 742b from advancing into the guidance passage 745d. Further, by providing a gap between the ball stop portion 805 and the ceiling portion of the guide passage 745d, the distribution rotating body 741 is rotating to the left based on the load due to the weight of the game ball, and then flows down. Suppresses that the game ball is sandwiched between the ball stop portion 805 and the inner wall portion of the flow path downstream of the back route guide hole 742b, and the distribution rotating body 741 cannot operate on either the right side or the left side. be able to.

Next, a state of the front route and a state in which the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left side will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 94. Since the flow path of the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a in this state is set to the front route, the front route guide hole 742a passes through the front side flow path 732a. The ball enters the ball and flows down the flow path (front route) on the front side of the distribution rotating body 741.

In the state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left, the ball stop portion 804 is located directly under the front route guide hole 742a, so that the game ball flowing down the front route is received by the ball stop portion 804 (FIG. 94 (a). )reference). When the game ball is received, a load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the ball stop portion 804. That is, since a force acting in the direction of rotating the distribution rotating body 741 to the right, the distribution rotating body 741 rotates to the right and swings to the right (see FIG. 94 (b)).

Further, when the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left side, the ball stop portion 804, which is a part of the distribution rotating body 741, also rotates and tilts to the right side, so that a slope is formed in the downward direction in the lower right direction. Therefore, the game ball received by the ball stop portion 804 rolls down from the ball stop portion 804 based on the tilt of the ball stop portion 804, advances through the guide passage 745c, and reaches the probabilistic entry ball opening 503. Enter the ball. That is, the entry port for the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is the probability variation entry opening 503. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol.

In the same round of big hits, the game ball that subsequently reaches the distribution rotating body 741 also proceeds on the front route. As described above, the distribution rotating body 741 is in a state of swinging to the right based on the load due to the weight of the game ball that first reaches the distribution rotating body 741. Therefore, the ball repulsion portion 802 is located directly below the front route guide hole 742a (see FIG. 92 (a)), and the game ball flowing down the front route collides with the ball repulsion portion 802 (FIG. 92 (b). )reference). As a result, the game ball is bounced to the right in the front view, so that it travels through the guidance passage 745a (see FIG. 92 (c)) and enters the time-saving ball entrance 501.

That is, the game ball that first enters the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a switches the distribution rotating body 741 to a state in which it swings to the right, and enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 503. Then, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a after the second ball enters the time-saving entry opening 501 without changing the state of the distribution rotating body 741.

As described above, when the game state after the end of the big hit is set based on the type of the ball entrance where the game ball first enters, the setting is maintained during the big hit. That is, it is configured so that the setting of the game state after the end of the big hit is not overwritten. Therefore, the game state after the jackpot is special is based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a in the first ball enters the probability variation entry opening 503. If the symbol is set to a high probability state, even if a game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a after the second ball enters the time-saving entry opening 501, The game state after the jackpot ends does not become a low probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a configuration in which the number of game balls that can advance to the distribution rotating body 741 is limited to one, so that the structure of the lottery device 700 can be made compact.

Further, in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left side, the gap between the upper end portion of the ball stop portion 804 and the ceiling portion of the guidance passage 745a is configured to be less than one game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball that has entered the front route guide hole 742a from advancing into the guidance passage 745a. Further, by providing a gap between the ball stop portion 804 and the ceiling portion of the guide passage 745a, the distribution rotating body 741 is rotating to the left based on the load due to the weight of the game ball, and then flows down. Suppresses that the game ball is sandwiched between the ball stop portion 804 and the inner wall portion of the flow path downstream of the front route guide hole 742a, and the distribution rotating body 741 cannot operate on either the right side or the left side. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a case where the flow path is set to the back route and the distribution rotating body 741 is in a state of swinging to the left side will be described. Since the flow path of the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is set to the back route, it enters the back route guide hole 742b via the back side flow path 732b. It spheres and flows down the flow path (back route) on the back side of the distribution rotating body 741 (see FIG. 95 (a)).

In the state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left, the ball repulsion portion 803 is located directly under the back route guide hole 742b, so that the game ball flowing down the back route collides with the ball repulsion portion 803 (FIG. 95 (FIG. 95). b) See). As a result, the game ball is bounced to the right in the front view, so that it travels through the guidance passage 745d and enters the probabilistic entry ball opening 504. That is, the entry port for the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is the probability variation entry opening 504. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol.

Further, in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left side, the ball repulsion portion 803 forms a slope having an inclination in the direction of rising toward the upper left direction, so that the game ball falling from vertically above is the ball repulsion portion. By colliding with 803, a force in the direction of rotating the distribution rotating body 741 to the left acts. However, when the distribution rotating body 741 is in a state of swinging to the left, there is no room for the distribution rotating body 741 to rotate to the left, so even if the game ball collides with the ball repulsion portion 803, the distribution rotating body 741 The state does not change.

In the same round of big hits, the game balls that subsequently reach the distribution rotating body 741 also proceed on the back route, so that all the game balls do not swing the distribution rotating body 741 and the probabilistic entry ball opening 504. Enter the ball. Therefore, all the game balls that first enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a enter the probabilistic entry ball opening 504 without changing the state of the distribution rotating body 741.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the ball entry port (time saving ball entry port 501, and the time saving ball entry port 501) in which the game ball first enters after the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is opened. Based on any of the probabilistic entry ball openings 502 to 504), it is configured to determine whether to set the special symbol in the high probability state or the special symbol in the low probability state after the jackpot ends, and a plurality of games. The sphere is configured so that it can proceed to the distribution rotating body 741. As a result, the configuration for limiting the number of game balls advancing to the distribution rotating body 741 to one can be omitted, so that the configuration of the lottery device 700 can be made compact.

Next, how the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a and the flow path switching member 734 operate in the first round will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a time chart showing the operations of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a and the flow path switching member 734 in the first round. FIG. 96 (a) shows the control when the game ball is caused to flow down to the front route (when the winning jackpot is jackpot A), and FIG. 96 (b) shows the control when the game ball is caused to flow down to the back route. The control of the case (when the winning jackpot is jackpot B) is shown.

First, with reference to FIG. 96 (a), the operation when the game ball is caused to flow down to the front route will be described. In FIG. 96A, the upper diagram shows the elapsed time from the start of the first round and the state (closed or open) of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a. It shows the correspondence. On the other hand, the lower view of FIG. 96A shows the correspondence between the elapsed time from the start of the first round and the open flow path (front side flow path 732a or back side flow path 732b). Is shown.

When the game ball is allowed to flow down to the front route, first, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened immediately after the start of the first round. This open state is a very short time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and immediately closes the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. Then, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed until 7 seconds have passed from the start of the first round. On the other hand, from the elapse of 7 seconds to the end of the first round, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is opened. Then, at the end of the first round, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed. The first round of the jackpot continues until a predetermined time elapses (until 30 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls win the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a).

On the other hand, the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted toward the front side of the second variable winning device 140 (that is, the front side flow path 732a is blocked until 6.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round. The back side flow path 732b is open). Then, after 6.5 seconds have passed, the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted toward the back side of the variable winning device 140 by the flow path solenoid 265 (that is, the front side flow path 732a is opened, and the back side flow path is opened. It is switched to the state where the 732b is blocked). After the flow path switching valve 731 is completely switched to the back side, the flow path switching valve 731 is kept tilted to the back side even after the first round is completed.

When the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted toward you, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened for a short period immediately after the start of the first round (for example, 0. 2 seconds), and it is difficult for the game ball to enter. Therefore, basically, it is more than 7 seconds after the start of the first round that the game ball enters the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a, and the flow path switching valve 731 is on the back side. Since it has been switched to the tilted state (the state where the front side flow path 732a is open), if the jackpot A is won, the ball enters the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a. The game ball can flow down to the front flow path 732a (see FIG. 86 (a)). Therefore, the game ball can be entered into the front route guide hole 742a and flow down the flow path (front route) on the front side of the distribution rotating body 741.

Here, it is the jackpot A and the jackpot B that open the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a for a short period immediately after the first round starts, and at the start of the first round. This is because the operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a in the above is common. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96 (b), but when the jackpot B is won, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is opened at the start of the first round. In accordance with the operation at the time of the big hit B, even in the case of the big hit A, the second specific winning opening (second big opening) 140a is opened at the start of the first round. As a result, when the first round starts, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to determine the jackpot type based on the state of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a. Therefore, it is possible to keep the expectation that the player has won the jackpot B, which is advantageous for the player, for a longer period of time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96 (b), the operation when the game ball is caused to flow down to the back route will be described. In FIG. 96 (b), the upper diagram shows the elapsed time from the start of the first round and the state (closed or open) of the second fixed winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a. It shows the correspondence. On the other hand, the lower view of FIG. 96B shows the correspondence between the elapsed time from the start of the first round and the open flow path (front side flow path 732a or back side flow path 732b). Is shown.

When the game ball is allowed to flow down to the back route, first, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is set to be open until 5 seconds have passed from the start of the first round. On the other hand, during the period from the lapse of 5 seconds to the end of the first round, the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is closed. This closed state is maintained until the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, the operation of the flow path switching valve 731 is exactly the same as the operation described with reference to FIG. 96 (a). That is, until 1.5 seconds after the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed (6.5 seconds after the start of the first round), it is set to be tilted toward you. It can be switched to the state of leaning to the back side. Therefore, while the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is open, the flow path switching member 734 is always tilted toward the front side, so that the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is open. ) The game ball that has entered 140a can flow down to the back flow path 732b (see FIG. 86 (b)). Therefore, the game ball can be entered into the back route guide hole 742b and advanced to the flow path (back route) on the back side of the distribution rotating body 741.

Further, it is the second specific winning opening (second large opening) that switches the arrangement of the flow path switching valve 731 1.5 seconds after the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed. Mouth) This is to ensure that all the game balls that have entered 140a proceed to the back route. That is, even if the game ball enters just before the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed, the flow path switching valve 731 is kept in the front side position for 1.5 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting (tilting direction) of the flow path switching valve 731 from being switched while the game ball remains inside the second variable winning device 140.

As described above, the operations of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a and the flow path switching valve 731 in the first round of the jackpot have been described in detail, but these are states other than the first round. Is configured to be set to each initial state. The initial state of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a indicates a closed state. The initial state of the flow path switching valve 731 is a state in which the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted to the back side (that is, a state in which the front side flow path 732a is opened and the back side flow path 732b is shielded). .. Therefore, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed based on the end of the first round, and is kept in the closed state until the first round of the next big hit is started. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is open regardless of the state immediately before the power is turned off. It is set to the closed state.

On the other hand, the flow path switching valve 731 is kept tilted to the back side from the end of one round until the next big hit. Then, after the jackpot stop symbol is confirmed and displayed, the game is switched to a state of being tilted toward the front side until the first round starts, and after the start of the first round, the above-mentioned operation is performed. Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erasing switch 122 turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is switched to a state of being tilted toward the front side regardless of the state immediately before the power is turned off.

The timing of switching the flow path and the timing of opening and closing the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a for each jackpot type are not limited to this embodiment. For example, in jackpot A, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is not opened immediately after the start of the first round, and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is not opened until 7 seconds have passed from the start of the first round. The two large openings) 140a may be configured to be closed. As a result, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened only during the period when the front flow path 732a is open, so that the game ball can be reliably advanced to the front flow path 732a. Can be done.

Further, for example, in the jackpot A, the timing at which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened is 27 seconds after the start of the jackpot, and the game ball opens the second specific winning opening (second large opening). Mouth) It may be configured so that it is difficult for the ball to enter 140a. Similarly, in the jackpot B, the period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is open is set to 3 seconds from the start of the first round, and the game ball is the second specific winning opening (second large opening). It may be configured so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the opening port) 140a. As a result, when the game ball is launched into the lottery device 700 in the first round, the player can feel a sense of tension, so that the jackpot is merely a task for obtaining the ball. It can be suppressed. Further, in each jackpot, the period during which the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is opened may be lengthened (for example, 10 seconds). As a result, the game ball can be easily advanced to the inside of the lottery device 700 in the first round, so that the lottery by the lottery device 700 can be easily received. Therefore, it is possible to play the first round while giving the player a sense of security.

Further, in the present embodiment, one round is continued until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 game balls are won in the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a. It is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to continue until 12 seconds have passed, or until 10 game balls have won a prize in the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a. With this configuration, in the case of jackpot A, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened 7 seconds after the start of the first round, and the second is 12 seconds after the start of the first round at the maximum. 2 The specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a will be closed. That is, since the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened for a maximum of 5 seconds, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is opened for the same time as when the jackpot B is won. ) 140a can be opened. Therefore, the prize balls obtained in one round can be equalized between the jackpot A and the jackpot B. Further, in the jackpot B, if 5 seconds elapse before 10 game balls are won in the 1st round, the period until the end of the 1st round can be shortened. That is, even if the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed and the player launches the game ball, the period during which the prize ball cannot be obtained can be shortened, so that the player gets bored. It can be suppressed that it ends up.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the first round of the jackpot, the flow path switching valve 731 is started from the state of being tilted toward the front side, but is started from the state of being tilted toward the back side, and is started from the state of being tilted toward the back side in the middle of the first round. It may be configured to switch to a state of being inclined to. The state of the flow path switching valve 731 before the start of the big hit is a state of being tilted to the back side (that is, a state in which the game ball can pass through the front route). It is not necessary to tilt the path switching valve 731 toward the front side. Therefore, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened before the flow path switching valve 731 is completely tilted to the back side, and the game ball advances to the back side flow path 732b despite the jackpot B. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Further, in the present embodiment, the state in which the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted toward the back side is the initial state, but the state in which the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted toward the front side may be set as the initial state. As a result, the setting at the start of the first round matches the initial state, so that it is not necessary to switch the setting of the flow path switching valve 731 by the time the first round of the jackpot starts. Therefore, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened before the flow path switching valve 731 is completely tilted to the back side, and the game ball advances to the back side flow path 732b despite the jackpot B. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

<About the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. In addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the third embodiment, the RAM 203 included in the main control device 110 of the present embodiment includes a time counter 203q, a ball entry standby flag 203r, a large opening flag 203s, a flow path flag 203t, and a payout flag 203u. It is provided. On the other hand, the round start flag 203l, the closing flag 203m, the lottery execution flag 203n, the jackpot end flag 203o, and the passage opening flag 203p provided in the RAM 203 in the third embodiment are deleted. Since other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

The timekeeping counter 203q is a counter that measures the elapsed time from the start of the jackpot round and the elapsed time from the start of the interval period. Based on the time measured by the timekeeping counter 203q, the opening and closing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a can be controlled (see S4503 in FIG. 103), and the route through which the game ball can flow (front route, It controls the switching of the back route) (see S4603 in FIG. 104).

The ball entry standby flag 203r is a flag indicating whether or not the game ball has entered any of the entry ports (time-saving entry ball opening 501 and probability variation entry ball opening 501 to 504) during the jackpot. This ball entry standby flag 203r is set to on when setting the start of the jackpot (see S241 in FIG. 99), and one of the ball entry ports (time saving ball entry port 501 and probability variation entry ball port 501 to 504). It is set to off when it is detected that the game ball has entered the ball (see S4310 and S4315 in FIG. 105). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters one of the entrances in a state where the entry standby flag 203r is set to ON, the pachinko machine 10 corresponds to the entry. It is configured to shift to the above state after the jackpot ends.

The large opening opening flag 203s is a flag indicating whether or not the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is in the open state, and when the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is opened. It is set to on (see S4507 in FIG. 103) and turned off when the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed (see S4510 in FIG. 103).

The flow path flag 203t is a flag indicating whether the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a can pass through the front route or the back route. If it is in a state where it can pass through the front route (that is, a state in which the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted toward the back side), it is set to ON (see S4610 in FIG. 104), and it is in a state where it can pass through the back route (that is, the flow path). If the switching valve 731 is tilted toward the front side), it is set to off (see S4607 in FIG. 104).

The payout flag 203u is a flag indicating whether or not the prize ball is to be paid out by detecting the entry of the game ball into the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a. The payout flag 203u is set on after setting the state after the jackpot ends (see S4310 and S4315 in FIG. 105), and is set off at the start of the jackpot (see S1142 in FIG. 101).

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 included in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98A shows the configuration of the ROM 202 included in the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment. In the present embodiment, the ROM 202 included in the main control device 110 has a second large opening switching table 202f and a flow path instead of the small hit type selection table 202e provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. A switching table 202 g is provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the content of the first type selection table 202b of the present embodiment has the same configuration as that of the first type selection table 202b of the first embodiment. That is, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (front route jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined to be a jackpot B (back). It is judged that it is a route jackpot).

The second large opening opening switching table 202f is a table referred to for opening and closing the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a during the first round of the jackpot, and is a table referred to for opening and closing the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a. The state of the second large opening) 140a is defined in association with the value of the timekeeping counter 203g (see FIG. 98 (c)). Specifically, in the case of jackpot A, the value of the timekeeping counter 223g is a value corresponding to the range of 0 to 7 seconds, and it is defined that the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is closed. , It is stipulated that the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened after 7 seconds. If 7 seconds or more have passed since the start of the first round, the flow path through which the game ball flows is set to the front route (see FIG. 96 (a)), so that the second specific winning opening (second) The game ball that has entered the large opening) 140a flows down the front route.

Further, in the case of jackpot B, the value of the time counter 223g is a value corresponding to the range of 0 to 5 seconds, and it is defined that the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is open for 5 seconds. After that, it is defined that the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a is opened. During the 5 seconds from the start of the first round, the flow path through which the game ball flows is set to the back route (see FIG. 96 (b)), so the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a The game ball that enters the ball flows down the back route.

The flow path switching table 202g provides a flow path through which the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a flows down during one round of the jackpot and during the interval period after the end of the first round. It is a table referred to for switching, and the state of the flow path is defined in association with the value of the timekeeping counter 203g.

Specifically, the flow path is defined as the back route from the start of one round until 6.5 seconds have passed. As described above, in the case of jackpot B, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed 5 seconds after the start of the first round, so that the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed. There is a 1.5 second margin between the time when the is closed and the time when the flow path is switched. As a result, even if the game ball enters just before the closing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a, the flow path can be switched after surely advancing to the back route.

Further, after 6.5 seconds have passed from the start of the first round, the flow path is defined to be the front route until the end of the first round. As described above, the setting of the flow path is controlled so as to be the front route except for the first round of the jackpot. Therefore, even after the first round is completed, the flow path is maintained in the state of the front route. The state of this front route continues until the next big hit is won and the route is switched to the back route.

<Regarding the control process in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 105. First, FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment. This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In each of the special symbol variation processing (S104), S201 to S211, S221, and S213, S214, respectively, S201 to S211, S231, and S213 of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 67) in the third embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S214 is executed. Then, in the special symbol variation processing in the fifth embodiment, in the processing of S211 it is determined that the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start processing is a big hit of the special symbol (this time). S211: Yes), when the start of the jackpot game is set (S231), then the ball entry waiting flag 203r is set to off (S241), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control device 110.

Among the main processes of the main control device 110, in each of the processes S1001 to S1003 and S1006 to S1017, S1001 to S1003 and S1006 to the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 68) in the third embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S1017 is executed. Then, in the main process of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S1003 is completed, the jackpot control process 4 (S1041) is executed instead of the jackpot control process 3 (FIG. 69) in the third embodiment. .. The jackpot control process 4 executes various effects according to the jackpot, opens or closes the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or opens or closes the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a. It is a process for opening or closing.

When the big hit control process 4 is completed, the ball entry detection process (S1042) is executed instead of the small hit control process 2 (FIG. 70) in the third embodiment. This ball entry detection process (S1042) is performed after the jackpot ends, based on the type of the ball entry port (short-time entry ball opening 501 and probability variation entry ball opening 501 to 504) in which the game ball first enters after the jackpot starts. This is a process for setting the game state of. When this ball entry detection process (S1042) is completed, each process after S1006 is executed.

Next, the jackpot control process 4 (S1041) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 4 (S1041).

In each of the jackpot control processes 4 (S1041), S1101 to S1104 and S1108 to S1111, the same processes as the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 69) in the third embodiment are executed. Then, in the jackpot control process 4 (S1041) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S1102 is completed, instead of the processes of S1131 to S1133 of the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 69) in the third embodiment, S1141 and S1142 Executes the processing of.

Specifically, it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot (S1101: Yes), the value of the round number counter 203g is set to 0 and reset (S1102), and then the flow path switching member 734 is placed on the front side of the front view. By driving to, the flow path is set to the back route (S1141). Then, the large opening flag 203s, the flow path flag 203t, and the payout flag 203u are set to off (S1142), and this process ends.

Further, in the jackpot control process 4 (S1041) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S1104 is completed, instead of each process of S1134, S1135, S1107 of the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 69) in the third embodiment, Round start processing is executed (S1143). This round start process (S1143) is a process of setting the start of a round at the timing of starting each round of jackpots. When the round start process (S1143) is completed, this process ends. The details of the round start process (S1143) will be described later with reference to FIG. 102.

Further, in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 69) in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is not satisfied in the processing of S1108 (S1108: No). However, in the present embodiment, the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is satisfied in the processing of S1108. When it is determined that the process has not been performed (S1108: No), the second large opening setting process (S1144) and the flow path setting process (S1145) are executed, and then the process is terminated. The second large opening opening setting process (S1144) is a process for setting the opening and closing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a, and the flow path setting process (S1145) is the second variable winning device 140. This is a process for setting the inner flow path to either the front route or the back route. The details of the second large opening setting process (S1144) and the flow path setting process (S1145) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104.

In addition, in the jackpot control process 4 (S1041) in the fifth embodiment, when the process of S1109 is completed, the process of S1146 is executed instead of the process of S1135 and S1136 in the third embodiment, and the process proceeds to the process of S1110. Transition. In this process of S1146, the large opening flag 203s is turned off (S1146).

Further, in the processing of S1110, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is 8 (S1110: Yes), the processing of S1147 is performed. In the process of S1147, the flow path flag 203t and the payout flag 203u are set to off (S1147). When the processing of S1147 is completed, the end of the jackpot is set (S1111), and the main processing is completed.

Next, the round start process (S1143) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this round start process (S1143). The round start process (S1143) is a process for making various settings for starting a new round.

In this round start process, first, a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S4401). The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. After setting the round number command, 1 is added to the value of the round number counter 203g to match the number of rounds of the newly started round with the value of the round number counter 203g (S4402).

When the processing of S4402 is completed, the value of the time counting counter 203q is then reset to time the elapsed time from the start of a new round (S4403), and whether or not the value of the round number counter 203g is 1. Determine (S4404).

As a result of the processing of S4404, if it is determined that the value of the round number counter 203g is not 1 (that is, it is any of 2 to 8) (S4404: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened. After setting (S4405), this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the round number counter 203g is 1, the process of S4405 is skipped and the main process is terminated as it is. By this process, the opening of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a can be set at the start of the 2nd to 8th rounds, and the player can be given an opportunity to obtain a large number of prize balls.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the second large opening setting process (S1144) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the second large opening setting process (S1144). The second large opening opening setting process (S1144) is a process for setting the opening / closing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a in one round in which the state after the jackpot is completed is drawn by the lottery device 300. be.

In this second large opening setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter 203g is 1. (S4501). Then, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter 203g is not 1 (that is, 2 to 8) (S4501: No), the present is 2 to 8 rounds (and the interval period before the start of these rounds). Since it is not necessary to drive the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4501, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter 203g is 1 (S4501: Yes), first, in order to open / close the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a, first , The second large opening switching table 202f is read out (S4502). Then, of the read second large opening switching table 202f, the portion corresponding to the jackpot type this time is compared with the value of the timekeeping counter 203q, and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is compared. The state is specified (S4503), and it is determined whether or not the current period is the period in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a should be opened (S4504).

In the processing of S4504, when it is determined that the current period should be the open state (S4504: Yes), it is determined whether or not the large opening flag 203s is set to ON (S4505), and the large opening flag 203s is set to ON. If this is done (S4505: Yes), it indicates that the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a has already been opened, so that this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4505, when it is determined that the large opening flag 203s is not on (that is, it is off) (S4505: No), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed. Since it indicates that the state is set, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is set to the open state (S4506), the large opening flag 203s is set to ON (S4507), and this processing is performed. To finish. By setting the large opening flag 203s to ON in the processing of S4507, in the second large opening setting processing (S1144) from the next time onward, in the processing of S4505, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a Is determined to have already been released, so the process can be terminated as it is.

Further, in the processing of S4504, when it is determined that the present is not the period in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a should be opened (that is, the period in which it should be closed) (S4504). : No), then it is determined whether or not the large opening flag 203s is set to off (S4508), and if it is determined to be off (S4508: Yes), the second specific winning opening (second) has already been determined. Since it indicates that the large opening) 140a is in the closed state, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4508, when it is determined that the large opening flag 203s is not off (that is, it is on) (S4508: No), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is opened. Since it indicates that the state is set, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed (S4509), the large opening flag 203s is set to off (S4510), and this processing is performed. To finish. By setting the large opening flag 203s to off in the processing of S4510, in the second large opening setting processing (S1144) from the next time onward, in the processing of S4508, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a Is determined to have already been released, so the process can be terminated as it is.

Next, the flow path setting process (S1145) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing this flow path setting process (S1145). The flow path setting process (S1145) is a process for setting the flow path through which the game ball flows down to either the front route or the back route in the first round in which the state after the jackpot is completed is drawn by the lottery device 700. be.

In the flow path setting process (S1145), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter 203g is 1. (S4601). Then, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter 203g is not 1 (that is, 2 to 8) (S4601: No), the current time is any of 2 to 8 rounds (or the interval before the start of these rounds). Since it is a period) and there is no need to switch the flow path, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter 203g is 1 (S4601: Yes), first, in order to set the flow path, the flow path switching table 202g is read out (S4602). Then, the read flow path switching table 202 g is compared with the value of the timekeeping counter 203q to identify the state of the flow path (front route, back route) (S4603), and the current period is the period to be set as the back route. It is determined whether or not there is (S4604).

In the process of S4604, when it is determined that the current period should be set to the back route (S4604: Yes), it is determined whether or not the flow path flag 203t is set to off (S4605), and it is set to off. If this is done (S4605: Yes), it indicates that the flow path has already been set to the back route (the flow path switching valve 731 is tilted toward the front side), so that this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4605, when it is determined that the flow path flag 203t is not off (that is, it is on) (S4605: No), it means that the flow path is set to the front route. By tilting the path switching valve 731 toward the front side, the back side flow path 732b is opened, and the game ball is set so that the game ball can travel on the back route through the back route guide hole 742b (S4606). Then, the flow path flag 203t is set to ON (S4607), and this process is terminated. By setting the large opening flag 203s to off in the processing of S4607, it is determined that the flow path has already been set to the back route in the processing of S4605 in the next and subsequent flow path setting processing (S1145). , The process can be terminated as it is.

Further, in the processing of S4604, when it is determined that the current period is not the period to be set in the back route (that is, the period to be set in the front route) (S4604: No), then the flow path flag 203t is turned on. If it is determined whether or not it is set to (S4608), and if it is determined that it is on (S4608: Yes), it indicates that the flow path has already been set to the front route, so this process is terminated as it is. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S4608, when it is determined that the flow path flag 203t is not on (that is, is off) (S4608: No), it indicates that the flow path is set to the back route. Therefore, by tilting the flow path switching member 731 to the back side, the front side flow path 732a is opened, and the game ball is set so that the game ball can advance the front route through the front route guide hole 742a (S4609). Then, the flow path flag 203u is set to ON (S4610) to end this process. By setting the flow path flag 203u to ON in the process of S4610, it is determined that the flow path has already been set to the front route in the process of S4608 in the next and subsequent flow path setting processes (S1145). The process can be terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the ball entry detection process (S1042) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. This ball entry detection process (S1041) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 100) of the main control device 110, and as described above, the game ball first enters the ball after the jackpot starts. This is a process for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot based on the type of the mouth (short-time entry ball opening 501 and probability variation entry ball opening 501 to 504).

In the ball entry detection process (S1042), first, it is determined whether or not the payout flag 203u is on (S4301). When it is determined that the payout flag 203u is on in the processing of S4301 (S4301: Yes), it indicates that the jackpot is in progress and the lottery of the gaming state after the jackpot is completed is completed. It is determined whether or not it is detected that the game ball has entered the winning opening (large opening opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a (S4303).

When it is determined that the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a has been detected in the processing of S4303 is detected (S4303: Yes). , The payout of the prize ball to be given to the player is set (S4304), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if no game ball has entered either the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a (S4303: No), the process of S4304 is performed. Skip and end this process as it is.

In the process of S4301, if it is determined that the payout flag 203u is not on (that is, it is off) (S4301: No), then it is determined whether or not the entry waiting flag 203r is set to on (S4302). ). If it is determined in the processing of S4302 that the ball entry waiting flag 203r is not on (that is, it is off) (S4302: No), it means that the current period is not the period for drawing the game state after the jackpot ends. Therefore, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball entry standby flag 203r is on (S4302: Yes), it is determined that the game ball has entered one of the probability variation entry ports (probability variation entry ball ports 502 to 504). It is determined whether or not it has been detected (S4305), and if it is determined that it has been detected that a game ball has entered, the probability variation flag 203e is turned on to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot ends. (S4306).

When the processing of S4306 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the entry port into which the game ball has entered is the probability variation entry port 503 (S4307), and if it is determined to be the probability variation entry port 503 (S4307). : Yes), a normal state command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S4309), and the process shifts to S4310. On the other hand, in the process of S4307, when it is determined that the entry port into which the game ball has entered is not the probability variation entry port 503 (that is, the probability variation entry ball port 502 or the probability variation entry ball port 504) (S4307: No), a loop state command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S4308), and the process shifts to S4310.

The loop state command set in the process of S4308 or the normal state command set in the process of S4309 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the main process executed by the MPU 201 (FIG. FIG. It is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of (see 100). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 switches the mode of the effect to be executed depending on whether the normal state command or the loop state command is received. Specifically, when a loop state command is received, an effect suggesting that the loop state is advantageous to the player is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing that the player is in the loop state.

In the process of S4310 executed after the process of S4308 or S4309 is completed, the entry waiting flag 203r is set to off and the payout flag 203u is set to indicate that the lottery of the game state after the end of the big hit is completed. Is set to on (S4310) to end this process.

In the process of S4305, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered any of the probabilistic ball entrances (probability change ball ports 501 to 504) (S4305: No), then the time saving ball slot 501 is reached. It is determined whether or not it is detected that the game ball has entered (S4311). Then, when it is determined that it has not been detected that the game ball has entered the time-saving entry slot 501 (S4311: No), then the end condition of the first round, which is a round in which the game state after the big hit is drawn. Is determined whether or not is satisfied. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the round.

If it is determined in the process of S4312 that the end condition of the first round is not satisfied (S4312: No), it means that the period of drawing the game state after the end of the big hit continues, so this process is performed as it is. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the end condition of the first round is satisfied (S4312: Yes), the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is closed without setting the game state after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, in order to shift the game state after the jackpot to the low probability state of the special symbol, the process is shifted to S4313.

Here, if one round ends without entering any of the entry ports (short-time entry entry 501 and probability variation entry entry 501 to 504), the game shifts to a low-probability state of a special symbol. The reason for this is to prevent the player from shifting to a high-probability state of a special symbol that is advantageous to the player simply by not launching the game ball in the first round. That is, when a game ball does not enter any of the entry ports (time-saving entry opening 501 and probability variation entry opening 501 to 504), the state is configured to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol. Then, by the game method of not launching the game ball until the end of the first round and launching the game ball after the second round, while winning the prize ball in the 2nd to 8th rounds, the high probability state of the special symbol is continued. You can continue. Therefore, in order to prevent the hall in which the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is installed from suffering a disadvantage, any of the entry ports (time-saving entry opening 501 and probability variation entry opening 501 to 504) However, if the game ball does not enter, it is configured to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol.

Returning to FIG. 105, the description will be continued. In the process of S4311, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the time-saving entry slot 501 (S4311: Yes), in order to shift the game state after the end of the jackpot to the low probability state of the special symbol, S4312 The process is skipped and the process is transferred to S4313.

In the process of S4313, the probability variation flag 203e is set to off, and 100 is set to the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f (S4313). As a result, after the jackpot ends, the special symbol shifts to the low-probability state, and the normal symbol is shortened for 100 fluctuations.

When the processing of S4313 is completed, a normal state command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S4314). Then, in order to indicate that the lottery of the game state after the end of the big hit is completed, the entry waiting flag 203r is set to off, the payout flag 203u is set to on (S4315), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to draw the game state after the end of the jackpot by the lottery device 700 in the first round of the jackpot. Then, by switching the setting of the flow path switching valve 731 during one round of the jackpot, the flow path (front route or back route) in which the game ball travels can be switched. Further, the switching timing of the flow path switching valve 731 is fixed regardless of the jackpot type, and the opening timing of the second specific winning opening (second major opening opening) 140a is changed according to the jackpot type, so that the game ball can be played. It is configured to control the route to proceed. As a result, the game ball can be advanced to the same flow path (front route or back route) for each jackpot type.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of game balls that can be entered into the lottery device 700 is unlimited in the first round of drawing the game state after the jackpot is completed. That is, all the game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 140 are configured to be discharged to the outside via the lottery device 700. As a result, the configuration for limiting the game balls that can enter the lottery device 700 can be omitted, so that the configuration of the lottery device 700 can be simplified.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the guide passage 745a for guiding the game ball to each entry port (short-time entry ball opening 501 and probability variation entry ball opening 501 to 504) in the ball entry port distribution unit 740. ~ 745d are provided on the cover members 744a and 744b. That is, the passage is provided in a member different from the flow path forming portion 743 including the distribution rotating body 741. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the vibration when the game ball flows down the guide passage to be conducted to the distribution rotating body 741, so that the distribution rotating body 741 moves in the opposite direction based on the vibration when the game ball flows down. It is possible to suppress the rotation.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the magnet 807a provided on the distribution rotating body 741 and the magnet 747a provided on the cover member 744a repel each other, and the magnet 807b provided on the distribution rotating body 741 , The magnet 747b provided on the cover member 744b repels each other to prevent the distribution rotating body 741 from swinging to the opposite side due to vibration or the like, but the configuration is not limited to this configuration. ..

For example, magnets may be provided at the right end and the left end of the partition portion 801 provided on the distribution rotating body 741. Further, among the flow path forming portions 743, a portion of the flow path forming portion 743 that comes into contact with the right end of the partition portion 801 in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right and a left end of the partition portion 801 in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left. A magnet may be arranged at a portion that comes into contact with the magnet. Further, the magnet provided on the distribution rotating body 741 side and the magnet provided on the flow path forming portion 743 side may be oriented so as to attract each other. As a result, the distribution rotating body 741 can be stably stopped by being attracted to the magnet provided in the flow path forming portion 743 in a state of being swung to the right side or the left side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the distribution rotating body 741 rotates due to the influence of vibration or the like and swings to the opposite side.

Further, among the flow path forming portions 743, the portion that contacts the right end of the partition portion 801 in the state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right and the left end of the partition portion 801 in the state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left. A cushioning material may be provided at each of the portions in contact with the water. As a result, the state of the distribution rotating body 741 is switched, and the impact when the right end or the left end of the partition portion 801 collides with the flow path forming portion 743 can be alleviated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the opposite side due to the bounce due to the collision. A cushioning material may be provided in the partition portion 801 of the distribution rotating body 741, or the partition portion 801 and the entire flow path forming portion 743 may be composed of the cushioning material.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the portions where the distribution rotating body 741 and the flow path forming portion 743 come into contact with each other are limited to both end portions of the partition portion 801 but are not limited to this. For example, in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right side, the lower portion of the ball stop portion 804 may be configured to come into contact with the guide passage 745c. Similarly, the lower portion of the ball repulsion portion 803 and the guide passage 745d may be configured to come into contact with each other. Further, in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the left, the lower portion of the ball stop portion 805 and the guidance passage 745b, and the ball repulsion portion 802 and the guidance passage 745a may be configured to come into contact with each other. As a result, the impact when the game ball collides with the ball repulsion portions 802 and 803 and the impact when the game ball is received by the ball stop portions 804 and 805 are conducted and dispersed in the respective guide passages 745a to 745d. be able to. Therefore, the impact received by the ball repulsion portions 802 and 803 and the ball stop portions 804 and 805 can be alleviated.

Further, when the ball repulsion portions 802, 803 and the ball stop portions 804 and 805 are brought into contact with each of the guide passages 745a to 745d, a cushioning material may be provided at each contact portion. As a result, the impact received by the ball repulsion portion 802,803 and the ball stop portion 804,805 can be further mitigated. Further, since the cushioning material absorbs the impact when the ball repulsion portions 802, 803 and the ball stop portions 804 and 805 collide with the respective guide passages 745a to 745d, it is possible to prevent the distribution rotating body 741 from bouncing back. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the distribution rotating body 741 swings in the opposite direction due to the impact when it collides with each of the guide passages 745a to 745d.

Further, a convex protrusion is provided at the lower part of the ball repulsion portion 802, 803 and the ball stop portion 804, 805, and a concave recess is provided in the guide passages 745a to 745b. It may be configured so that it fits with the concave recess. That is, in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 swings to the right, a convex protrusion provided at the lower part of the ball repulsion portion 803 and the ball stop portion 804, and a concave portion provided in the guide passage 745d and the guide passage 745c, respectively. In a state where the dents of the shape are fitted and the distribution rotating body 741 is swung to the left side, the convex protrusions provided at the lower parts of the ball repulsion portion 802 and the ball stop portion 805, respectively, It may be configured so that the concave recesses provided in the guide passage 745a and the guide passage 745b are fitted with each other. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the distribution rotating body 741 to rotate, so that it is possible to prevent the distribution rotating body 741 from switching to a state of swinging in the opposite direction due to vibration or the like.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered the front route guide hole 742a and the back route guide hole 742b provided on the upper surface of the ball entry port distribution portion 740 are guided to the distribution rotating body 741. The flow paths for each are configured in a straight line, but the flow path is not limited to this. For example, the shape of the flow path for guiding the game ball that has entered the front route guide hole 742a to the distribution rotating body 741 may be configured to be "inverted" when viewed from the front. .. With this configuration, the game ball flows down the flow path in the lower left direction in the front view, and falls from the flow path to the distribution rotating body 741. That is, when the game ball falls from the flow path to the distribution rotating body 741, it falls in a state of being urged in the lower left direction, so that the game ball is swung to the right while the distribution rotating body 741 is swinging. It is possible to make it difficult to collide with the ball repulsion portion 802. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the distribution rotating body 741 rebounds based on the impact when the game ball collides with the ball repulsion portion 802 and switches to the state of swinging to the left.

Similarly, the flow path for guiding the game ball that has entered the back route guide hole 742b to the distribution rotating body 741 may be configured to have a "dogleg" shape when viewed from the front. With this configuration, the game ball flows down the flow path in the lower right direction in the front view, and falls from the flow path to the distribution rotating body 741. That is, when the game ball falls from the flow path to the distribution rotating body 741, it falls in a state of being urged in the lower right direction, so that the game ball is in a state where the distribution rotating body 741 is swinging to the left. Can make it difficult for the ball to collide with the ball repulsion portion 803. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the distribution rotating body 741 rebounds based on the impact when the game ball collides with the ball repulsion portion 803 and switches to the state of swinging to the right.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the inner diameter of the front flow path 732a for allowing the game ball to flow down to the front route guide hole 742a of the entry port distribution portion 740 is configured to be the same regardless of the position. Similarly, the inner diameter of the back side flow path 732b for flowing down to the back route guide hole 742b, the flow path for guiding the game ball entering the front route guide hole 742a to the rotating body 741, and the back. The inner diameter of the flow path for guiding the game ball that has entered the route guide hole 742b to the rotating body 741 is also configured to be the same regardless of the position, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each of the above flow paths may be tapered. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the position where the game ball flows down from varying, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball deviates from the flow path corresponding to the jackpot type.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution rotating body 741 is fixed in the direction of rotating in the left-right direction in the front view, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ball is rotated 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise around a straight line passing through the center of the upper surface and the center of the bottom surface of the ball entry port distribution portion 740 in the direction of rotation toward the front side and the back side. Orientation) may be used. This makes it difficult for the player to confirm the traveling direction of the game ball, so that the game ball first enters any of the entry ports (short-time entry ball opening 501 and probability variation entry ball opening 5023 to 504). It can be difficult to confirm whether the ball has hit. Therefore, since the lottery result by the lottery device 700 becomes ambiguous, it is possible to continue to hold the expectation that the special symbol will shift to the high probability state even after the first round is completed.

Further, the lottery device 700 may be rotated at a constant speed during the jackpot. As a result, the direction in which the player can easily recognize the path of the game ball traveling inside the lottery device 700 (the direction in which the distribution rotating body 741 rotates in the left-right direction) and the direction in which it is difficult to recognize the path of the game ball (direction in which the distribution rotating body 741 rotates in the left-right direction). The direction in which the distribution rotating body 741 rotates toward the back or the front) can be repeated. Therefore, depending on the timing at which the game ball enters the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a, the game ball in which the game ball has entered can be immediately recognized, and after the big hit is completed. It is possible to realize a different state of playability, that is, a state in which the game state of is not clearly recognized.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and a second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a are provided, and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is provided in the first round. The large opening) 140a was opened, and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a was opened in the 2nd to 8th rounds, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is provided, and in all rounds, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is provided at the timing based on the second large opening switching table 202f. May be configured to open and close. Further, in all rounds, the flow path switching valve 731 may be switched at the timing specified in the flow path switching table 202g. As a result, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a can be used to perform both the lottery of the game state after the big hit and the acquisition of the prize ball during the big hit. Large opening) 65a can be omitted. Therefore, the production cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by simplifying the configuration.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game state after the end of the big hit is drawn by lottery in the first round of the big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the eighth round, which is the final round of the jackpot, the lottery device 700 may be used to draw a lottery for the game state after the jackpot ends. By performing the lottery in the 8th round, it is possible to delay the timing at which the type of entry port (short-time entry slot 501 or probability variation entry slot 501 to 504) into which the game ball enters is determined. It is possible to keep the player feeling the expectation of entering the probabilistic ball opening 502 or the probabilistic ball opening 504, which is advantageous for the player, for a longer period of time.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the state of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is determined based on the setting of the large opening flag 203s, but the second specific winning opening (second large opening) is determined. A sensor for determining whether the open opening (open opening) 140a is open or closed may be provided, and the state of the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 140a may be determined based on the detection result of the sensor. In addition, when the detection result of the sensor indicates an open state even though the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a is set to be closed, or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a If the detection result of the sensor indicates a closed state even though the opening of the sensor is set, an error may be notified. As a result, when the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a does not operate normally due to a failure, repair can be performed immediately based on the notification.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

For example, in the above embodiment, a plurality of jackpot types are provided, and the directions of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b (or flow path switching valves 731) are changed according to the jackpot types to determine the route through which the game ball passes. It was decided whether to use the front route or the back route. On the other hand, the route through which the game ball entering the lottery device 300 (or the lottery device 700) passes may be randomly selected as the front route or the back route. That is, the jackpot type may be configured so as not to affect the flow path of the game ball flowing down in the lottery device 300 (or in the lottery device 700). As a configuration for randomly distributing the flow path of the game ball, for example, a known crune means (two-hole crune) having two through holes is used as a flow path switching valve 331a, 331b (or a flow path switching valve 731). ) May be provided instead. Then, when the game ball that has reached the two-hole crune passes through one of the two through holes of the two-hole crune, it is brought to the front side of the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741). When it flows down and passes through the other through hole, it may be configured to flow down to the back side of the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741). With this configuration, does the game ball flow down to the front side of the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) until the game ball actually passes through one of the through holes of the two-hole crune? , It is possible to make it impossible to determine whether it flows down to the back side. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player feeling the expectation that the game ball will pass through the route on the front side, which is advantageous for the player, for a long time.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erasing switch 122 turned on, the setting of the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) is swung to the right. It was configured to reset to (face-up state), but without changing the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741), each ball entry port (time saving ball entry 501, and probability change) The correspondence between the ball mouths 502 to 504) and the state of transition after the end of the big hit may be changed. That is, when it is determined that the state of the distribution rotating body 341 is a state of swinging to the left (face-up state) based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263, the game ball enters the time-saving entry slot 501. After the jackpot ends, the setting is changed to the high probability state of the special symbol, and when the game ball enters the probability variation entry ball opening 504, the setting is changed to the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up by turning on the power, the initial setting can be performed only by changing the setting of the ball entry port by software. Therefore, the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) The rotating motor 264 for returning the machine to the initial position can be omitted, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

If it is detected that the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) has swung to the left when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erasing switch 122 turned on, a hole is formed. The store clerk may be configured to notify the clerk of the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) to switch to the state of swinging to the right. As a result, the rotation motor 264 for returning the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) to the initial position (the state of swinging to the right) can be omitted. Therefore, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Further, while the notification is being performed, the game may be stopped so that the normal game cannot be performed. Here, the game stopped state is, for example, a state in which the prize ball is not paid out even if the game ball enters the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 140a, or the probability changing entry ball. Even if the game ball enters the mouths 502 to 504, the state does not shift to the high probability state of the special symbol, or even if the operation handle is operated, the game ball cannot be launched. Point to. That is, even if the player plays a game, it means that the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) cannot receive the benefit of swinging to the left side.

As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erasing switch 122 turned on, the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b (or the flow path switching) are performed regardless of the state immediately before the power is turned off. The state of the valve 731) is set to the initial state. Therefore, when the game ball is thrown into the lottery device 300 (or the lottery device 700) with the sorting rotating body 341 (or the sorting rotating body 741) swinging to the left, the sorting rotating body 341 (or the sorting rotating body 741) is thrown into the lottery device 300 (or the lottery device 700). ) Switches to the state of swinging to the right (see FIGS. 14 and 94). That is, when it is notified that the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) is in a state of swinging to the left when the power is turned on, the clerk in the hall sends the game ball to the lottery device 300 (or the lottery device 700). The distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) can be easily switched to the state of swinging to the right by throwing only one ball. The game ball thrown in by the clerk advances in the guidance passage 408c (or the guidance passage 745c) and enters the probability variation entry ball port 503, but as described above, the game is stopped until the notification is canceled. The transition to the high probability state of the special symbol is suppressed. Therefore, the state of the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) can be reset without changing the state of the gaming machine.

Further, instead of the detection result of the position detection sensor 263, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, and then the distribution rotation is performed based on the type of the ball entry port that first enters the ball. It may be configured to determine whether or not the body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) is in a state of swinging to the left. Specifically, when the game ball first enters the probability-changing ball opening 503 and the probability-changing ball opening 504 in which the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) can enter the ball while swinging to the left. May be configured to display an error. As a result, not only the rotary motor 264 but also the position detection sensor 263 can be omitted, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, even if the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) is swung to the left side, the game is played as it is. May be configured so that As a result, if the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) swings to the left when the power is turned off, the sorting rotating body 341 (or the sorting rotating body 741) swings to the left even after the power is turned on. The player can start the game as it is. Therefore, for example, in a hall where the power is turned on to the gaming machines with the RAM erasing switches 122 turned on all at once when the store is opened, the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) of each pachinko machine 10 is used during the closing time of the hall. It is advantageous for the player to check the state or to search for the pachinko machine 10 in which the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) is swung to the left when the store is opened. That is, since the number of players who play games in the hall when the store is opened or closed can be increased, the operating rate of the hall can be increased.

In addition, when the ball enters the probability change ball opening 502 or the probability change ball port 504 in the previous big hit, the distribution rotation body 341 (or the distribution rotation body 741) is in a state of swinging to the left, so the distribution rotation The state in which the body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) swings to the left is basically a high-probability state of a special symbol. However, if the power is turned off in this state and the power is restored with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, the setting of the high probability state of the special symbol is erased, and the state shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) is in a special state of swinging to the left and a low probability state of the special symbol. It may be configured to perform a display effect dedicated to this special state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing that the distribution rotating body 341 (or the distribution rotating body 741) is in a state of swinging to the left.

In the first to fourth embodiments, the distribution rotating body 341 is mounted on the rectangular floor 401, the pair of rectangular passage walls 402, and the floor below the shaft 406 in the guide passages 408b and 408c. A pair of inclined portions 403b, 405b extending obliquely from 401 to the floor portion 401, and ball stoppers 403a, 405a provided at the ends of the inclined portions 403b, 405b opposite to the floor portion 401. However, the distribution rotating body 341 is not limited to this shape. For example, it may have a windmill shape.

In the first to fourth embodiments, the guide passage 408a and the guide passage 408d of the distribution rotating body 341 are extended to the downstream side of the shaft 406, and the game flows down the guide passage 408a or the guide passage 408d. Even if the sphere passed through the shaft 406, it was configured to flow down on the floor portion 401 (see FIGS. 12 (b) and 15 (b)). On the other hand, of the guide passage 408a and the guide passage 408d, the passage on the downstream side of the shaft 406 may be abolished. Instead of deleting the passage on the downstream side of the shaft 406 of the distribution rotating body 341, a passage on the downstream side of the shaft 406 may be provided on the cover portion 423 side. That is, the guide passage 408a and the guide passage 408d are provided on the right back side of the cover portion 423 in the front view and on the left front side of the cover portion 423 in the front view, on the downstream side of the shaft 406. When the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right with respect to the shaft 406, the guidance passage 408a of the distribution rotating body 341 and the passage on the right back side of the cover portion 423 in the front view are combined with each other to form the above embodiment. It is configured to form a guidance passage similar to the guidance passage 408a. When the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left with respect to the shaft 406, the guidance passage 408d of the distribution rotating body 341 and the passage on the left front side of the cover portion 423 in front view are engaged with each other to guide the above embodiment. A guidance passage similar to the passage 408d is formed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the load due to the weight of the game ball on the passage on the downstream side of the shaft 406. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the guidance passage 408a or the guidance passage 408d, the ball is distributed. It is possible to reliably prevent the rotating body 341 from rotating due to the weight of the game ball and swinging to the opposite side.

In the first to fourth embodiments, the case where the game ball passes through the front route is more advantageous for the player than the case where the game ball passes through the back route, but the back route is more advantageous than the front route. It may be configured to be. That is, the time-saving entry ball opening 501 and the probability variation entry ball port 503 may be arranged on the back side of the front view, and the probability variation entry ball port 502 and the probability variation entry ball port 504 may be arranged on the front side of the front view. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts in which the game ball is attracted to the front side by a magnet or the like and the game ball is advanced to the front route.

In the fourth embodiment, as a mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, an effect in which the main character and the enemy fight is executed, and the main character wins the enemy in the display effect during the jackpot game. By doing so, it was suggested that after the end of this big hit, it would shift to the high-probability state of the special symbol, and after the end of the next big hit, it would shift to the high-probability state of the special symbol. On the other hand, even if you do not check the result of the battle with the enemy to the end, you may prepare a production that makes it clear that the hero will win. For example, when shifting to a high probability state of a special symbol this time and after the end of the next big hit, a palm-sized enemy may appear with a certain probability (for example, 10%). By the appearance of an enemy whose size is significantly smaller than that of a normal enemy, it is possible to convince the player that the main character will win when the enemy appears. Also, during the fluctuation production that becomes a big hit in state A, state C, and state E, the hero discovers a treasure box containing treasure without encountering an enemy with a certain probability (for example, 10% when winning big hit A). It may be configured so that the effect is performed. Then, in the production during the jackpot game after the production of discovering the treasure is performed, the production of bringing the treasure back to the family may be performed. By performing the production of discovering the treasure, it is possible to convince the player that the game will shift to the high probability state of the special symbol before the start of the jackpot game and after the end of the next jackpot. .. In this way, by giving a plurality of variations to the production, it is possible to have not only a feeling of expectation that the high-probability state of the special symbol is continuous, but also a feeling of expectation that a rare production will be performed. It is possible to further improve the interest in the game of the person.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is not provided. Things can be mentioned. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

A pachinko machine may be a combination of some or all of the above-described embodiments.

In addition to the pachinko machine of the present invention, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Structure of accessory for determining probability change for 2 times)
Front to either the entry port where the game ball can enter, the first and second areas where the game ball that has entered the entry port can enter, and either the first area or the second area. A player is provided with a distribution means for distributing the game balls that have entered the entry ball opening, and based on the fact that the game balls have entered the first area, the player has more than the case where the game balls have entered the second area. In a gaming machine that shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the distribution means shifts to a first state in which the game ball can be distributed to the first region, and to the first region or the second region. A variable means capable of changing the game ball to a second state in which the game ball can be distributed, and a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game ball can pass in the first state. The variable means includes a third flow path and a fourth flow path through which the game ball can pass in the second state, and the variable means allows the game ball to pass through the second flow path. In this case, the distribution means is changed from the first state to the second state, and when the gaming ball passes through the third flow path, the distribution is performed from the second state to the first state. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that the means is variable.

According to the game machine A1, the variable means can distribute the game ball to the first state, which is a state in which the game ball can be distributed to the first region, and the game ball to the first region or the second region. It is variable to the second state, which is a state. Then, in the first state, the game ball can pass through the first flow path and the second flow path, and in the second state, the game ball can pass through the third flow path and the fourth flow path. .. Here, when the game ball passes through the second flow path, the state of the distribution means is changed from the first state to the second state by the variable means, and when the game ball passes through the third flow path, The state of the sorting means is changed from the second state to the first state by the variable means. As a result, if the distribution means is changed to the first state, the player is informed that the game ball is distributed to the first area and shifts to the special game state in the next distribution performed by the distribution means. It can be recognized. Therefore, from the time when the sorting means is changed to the first state until the next sorting is performed by the sorting means, the player feels reassured and satisfied with the transition to the special gaming state. It has the effect of allowing you to play games while hugging.

In the gaming machine A1, the third flow path allows the passed game ball to enter the first region, and the fourth flow path allows the passed game ball to enter the second region. A game machine A2 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball that has passed through the third flow path enters the first region, and the game ball that has passed through the fourth flow path enters the second region. , The game ball enters the first region and shifts to the special game state, and the state of the sorting means changes to the first state. Therefore, since it is possible to continuously shift to the special gaming state which is advantageous for the player, the player who recognizes that the game ball has shifted to the special gaming state based on passing through the third flow path Therefore, there is an effect that a sense of security and satisfaction can be given to the continuous special game state.

A3 of the gaming machine A1 or A2, wherein the variable means can change the state of the sorting means based on the weight of the passing game ball.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 or A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the state of the distribution means is changed by the variable means based on the weight of the passing game ball, the state of the distribution means can be changed by the variable means by a natural operation. Therefore, there is an effect that the state of the sorting means is changed at an unnatural timing, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the gaming machine or the hall.

A4 of the gaming machines A1 to A3, wherein the variable means includes a variable suppressing means for suppressing the state of the sorting means from changing when the gaming ball has not passed.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the switching of the state of the distribution means in the state where the game ball has not passed is suppressed by the variable suppressing means, the distribution means is first at a timing different from the timing when the distribution means is changed by the variable means. It is possible to prevent the player from being switched from the state to the second state, causing damage to the player or causing distrust of the game machine or the hall.

<Characteristic B group> (Display effect according to the state of the flow path and structure for the double loop)
A winning / failing determination means for executing a winning / failing determination based on the establishment of the lottery condition, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the winning / failing determination result by the winning / failing determination means, and an effect of the identification information displayed on the display means. The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game which is advantageous to the player after the effect mode specifying means for specifying the mode and the identification information indicating the predetermined hit / fail determination result are displayed, and the privilege game execution means for the privileged game execution means. A game state specifying means for specifying whether the game state to be executed is a first game state or a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the game is executed. In the gaming machine having If so, the fall setting means for ending the set continuation state and setting the first game state to a fall state in which the first game state is easily specified by the game state specifying means, and the continuation setting means for the continuation. It has an effect mode changing means for changing the effect mode specified by the effect mode specifying means based on whether the state is set or the fall state is set by the fall state setting means. The gaming machine B1 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine B1, the gaming state specifying means is set to the continuous state in which the second gaming state is set to the second gaming state a plurality of times in a row so that the continuous setting means can be easily specified. When the game state specifying means is set to the continuous state, the fall setting means ends the continuous state and sets the first game state to the fall state, which is a state in which the continuous state can be easily specified. Here, the effect mode specified by the effect mode specifying means is changed based on whether the continuation state is set by the continuation setting means or the fall state is set by the effect mode setting means. NS. As a result, the player can determine whether or not the current state is the continuation state only by checking the effect mode displayed on the display means, so that the mode indicating the continuation state is displayed as the effect mode. This has the effect of giving the player a sense of security that the second gaming state is easily identified a plurality of times in a row.

In the game machine B1, after the identification information indicating the predetermined hit / fail determination result is displayed and before the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game execution means is completed, the game state identification means has been specified. The suggestion display control means for controlling the display means to display the suggestion effect suggesting the state is provided, and the suggestion display control means suggests that the specific result by the game state specifying means is the second gaming state. When controlling the display effect to be displayed on the display means, the display is based on whether the continuation state is set by the continuation setting means or the fall state is set by the fall state setting means. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that it specifies a suggestive effect to be caused.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the display means is controlled to display a display effect suggesting that the specific result by the game state specifying means is the second gaming state, the suggestion display control means indicates an identification indicating a predetermined hit / fail determination result. The display means is controlled so as to display a suggestion effect suggesting a state specified by the game state specifying means after the information is displayed and before the execution of the privilege game by the privilege game executing means is completed. Therefore, by displaying the suggestion effect on the display means, there is an effect that the player can feel reassured that the second game state is easily specified a plurality of times in a row. .. In addition, since the player can be made to play the game with the expectation that the suggestion effect will be displayed on the display means during the privilege game, the effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved can be improved. be.

In the gaming machine B2, the continuation setting means sets the continuation state when the specific result of the gaming state specifying means is the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the specific result by the game state specifying means is the second game state, the continuation state is set by the continuation setting means, so that the second game state is passed when the continuation state is reached. Since it is possible to prevent the state from the continuation state to the first identification by the game state specifying means to become the first gaming state, the player can continue the first gaming state. It is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game before being specified by the game state specifying means first.

In the gaming machine B3, the suggestion display control means can suggest that the continuation setting means has been set to the continuation state in the suggestion effect.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the suggestion effect, the suggestion display control means suggests that the continuation state has been set by the continuation setting means, so that the player can easily recognize that the continuation state has been set. Therefore, since it is possible to recognize that the second gaming state has become a state in which it is easy to be identified a plurality of times in succession by being set to the continuous state, it is possible to make the player play the game with peace of mind. There is an effect.

<Characteristic C group> (Distribution in two stages at the time of probabilistic lottery)
Based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination, and the privileged game that is advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the winning / failing determination by the winning / failing determination means. The privilege game execution means and the game state to be executed after the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means are the first game state and the second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. In a gaming machine having a gaming state specifying means for specifying which state is to be set, the gaming state specifying means is based on the first lottery and a second lottery different from the first lottery. The first game state and the second game state are specified respectively, and as the first lottery, the first specific state in which the first game state is more easily specified than the second game state and the first specific state. The first lottery means for drawing which of the second specific state in which the second gaming state is more easily specified than the first specific state is set, and the second specific state as the second lottery. Even when is set, it is characterized by having a second lottery means for drawing whether or not to set a special state in which the second gaming state is more easily specified than the second gaming state. Pachinko machine C1.

According to the gaming machine C1, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are each specified by the gaming state specifying means based on the first lottery and the second lottery different from the first lottery. Then, as the first lottery, the first specific state in which the first game state is more easily specified than in the second game state and the second specific state in which the second game state is more easily specified than the first specific state. Which of the specific states is set is drawn by the first lottery means. Here, even when the second specific state is set as the second lottery, whether or not to set a special state in which the second game state is more easily specified than the second game state is drawn by the second lottery means. Will be done. As a result, in the identification of one game state by the game state specifying means, two lottery opportunities are given, one is the lottery by the first lottery means and the other is the lottery by the second lottery means. You can feel that you have more opportunities to receive it. Further, even if the result of the lottery by the first lottery means indicates the first specific state, it is expected that the result will be a lottery result in which the special state is set by the second lottery means without discouraging the player. Since the game can be played, there is an effect that the state can be sufficiently enjoyed by the game state specifying means.

In the gaming machine C1, the second lottery means draws a lottery as to whether or not to set a special state at the next identification by the gaming state specifying means based on the identification being performed by the gaming state specifying means. A gaming machine C2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the identification is performed by the game state specifying means, whether or not to set the special state at the time of the next identification by the game state specifying means is drawn by the second lottery means. As a result, even if the lottery result by the first lottery means indicates the first specific state, if it is drawn that the special state is set by the second lottery means, the first specific state is specified by the first lottery means. It is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player for the state being drawn, and it is possible to have the player play the game in anticipation that the identification will be performed in the special state at the time of the next identification by the game state identification means. Further, when the lottery result by the first lottery means shows the second specific state and the lottery result by the second lottery means shows the special state, the advantageous state for the player continues. Since the player can recognize it, there is an effect that a sense of security and satisfaction can be given to the player.

In the gaming machines C1 or C2, the gaming state specifying means is based on the entry port where the game ball can enter and the game ball entering the entry opening, and the privileged game execution means. Based on the first area in which it is specified that the gaming state executed after the execution of the privileged game is set to the first gaming state, and the gaming ball that has entered the entrance of the ball enters the privileged game. The game state executed after the execution of the privilege game by the game execution means is provided with a second area specified to be the second game state, and the first lottery and the second lottery are sent to the entrance. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it determines whether to guide the gaming ball to the first region or the second region by changing the flow direction of the entering gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state is that the game state executed after the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means is set as the first game state based on the game ball entering the ball entrance port entering the first area. Specified by specific means. Then, based on the game ball entering the ball entry port entering the second area, the game state executed after the scoring game is executed by the privilege game execution means is set as the second game state. Specified by specific means. Here, it is determined by the first lottery and the second lottery whether to guide the game ball to the first region or the second region by changing the flow direction of the game ball that has entered the ball entrance. This has the effect that the player can easily determine the result of the lottery by the first lottery and the second lottery only by confirming the flow direction of the game ball.

In the gaming machine C3, the second lottery means is a gaming machine characterized in that it draws whether or not to set a special state based on the distribution of the game balls to the first region or the second region. C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the distribution to the first area or the second area, whether or not to set the special state is drawn by the second lottery means, so that the player can draw the timing of the lottery performed by the second lottery means. Has the effect of being able to easily recognize.

In the gaming machine C4, the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game ball can pass in the special state, and the third flow path in which the passage of the game ball is restricted in the special state. The second flow path includes a flow path and a fourth flow path, and the second lottery means determines that the special state is set when the game ball passes through the third flow path, and determines that the second flow path is set. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that it is determined to release the special state when the gaming ball passes through.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the special state, the game ball can pass through the first flow path and the second flow path. Then, in the special state, the game ball is restricted from passing through the third passage and the fourth passage. Here, when the game ball passes through the third flow path, it is determined by the second lottery means that the special state is set. Further, when the game ball passes through the second flow path, it is determined by the second lottery means that the special state is released. As a result, the player can determine that the special state has been set only by confirming that the game ball passes through the third flow path, and thus confirms that the game ball passes through the third flow path. There is an effect that the player who has performed the game can play the game while having a sense of security and satisfaction that the identification is performed in the special state in the next identification by the game state specifying means.

In the gaming machine C5, the third flow path causes the passed game ball to enter the second region, and the fourth flow path allows the passed game ball to enter the first region. A gaming machine C6 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the game ball that has passed through the third flow path enters the second region and the game ball that has passed through the fourth flow path enters the first region, the player passes through the third flow path. By recognizing that, it is possible to recognize that the transition to the second gaming state, which is more advantageous than the first gaming state, and the next lottery performed by the second lottery means are performed in the special state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player who recognizes that the game ball has passed through the third flow path can be given a great sense of satisfaction and a sense of security for the continuous advantageous state.

<Characteristic D group> (Suppresses two or more game balls from entering the distribution means)
Front to either the entry port where the game ball can enter, the first area and the second area where the game ball entered into the entry port can enter, and either the first area or the second area. A distribution means for distributing the game balls that have entered the entry ball opening, and a switching means for switching to a ball entry permission state that allows the game balls to enter the entry ball opening for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. It is provided with a transition means for shifting to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than when the gaming ball enters the second region based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the first region. The distribution means can be changed into a first state in which the game ball can be distributed to the first region and a second state in which the game ball can be easily distributed to the second region. When one game ball that has entered the ball entry port reaches the distribution means, the game ball that has entered the ball entry port after the game ball reaches the distribution means. The gaming machine D1 is provided with a limiting means for limiting the fact that the ball is allowed to enter the ball at least while the ball is allowed to enter the ball.

According to the game machine D1, the game ball that has entered the ball entry port is distributed to either the first region or the second region by the sorting means, and the game ball is delivered to the ball entry port based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. Entering the ball is permitted for a predetermined period by the switching means. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first region, the transition means shifts the gaming state to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball enters the second region. .. Further, the variable means changes the sorting means into a first state in which the game ball can be distributed to the first region and a second state in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second region. Here, when one game ball that has entered the ball entry port reaches the distribution means, at least the game ball that has entered the ball entry port after the game ball reaches the distribution means. While the ball is allowed, it is restricted by the limiting means. As a result, it is possible to prevent two or more game balls from being distributed to the first region or the second region by the distribution means in one distribution by the distribution means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to the plurality of gaming balls being distributed to different regions in one distribution.

The gaming machine D1 is provided with a winning / failing determination means for executing the winning / failing determination based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and when the determination result of the winning / failing determination means is a predetermined result, the restriction by the limiting means is released. The gaming machine D2, which is provided with a releasing means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the winning / failing determination is executed by the winning / failing determination means. Then, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the hit / fail determination means is a predetermined result, the restriction by the limiting means is released by the limiting releasing means. As a result, every time the determination result by the hit / miss determination means becomes a predetermined result, the player can be made to perform the distribution by the sorting means. You can check the result separately. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the gaming machine D1 or D2 includes a discharging means for discharging a game ball whose reach to the sorting means is restricted by the limiting means to the outside of the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the game ball whose access to the distribution means is restricted by the limiting means is discharged to the outside of the game area by the discharging means, the game ball whose access to the distribution means is restricted stays in the game area. It is possible to prevent the remaining game ball from being used as it is at the time of distribution by the next distribution means. As a result, every time the distribution is performed by the distribution means, the player can launch the game ball to the entrance, so that the distribution can be performed at the player's favorite timing. This has the effect of improving the interest in the game.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, in the variable means, the gaming ball that has entered the ball entrance by the sorting means is distributed to either the first region or the second region. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that it can be changed to either one of the first state and the second state based on the above.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the ball entry port is distributed to either the first region or the second region by the distribution means, the distribution means is moved to the first state and the second state by the variable means. It is variable to one of the states. By defining the timing for switching the state of the distribution means, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the timing at which the distribution means is switched.

In the gaming machine D4, a variable suppressing means for suppressing the variable means from being changed to either the first state or the second state by the variable means in a state where the gaming ball has not reached the sorting means. A gaming machine D5 characterized by being equipped.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is suppressed by the variable suppressing means that the game ball is changed to either the first state or the second state by the variable means when the game ball has not reached the sorting means. As a result, the distribution means is switched from the first state to the second state at a timing different from the timing when the distribution means is changed by the variable means, which causes damage to the player or the game machine or the hall. It has the effect of suppressing distrust.

<Feature E group> (Switch the flow path at the timing of the attacker)
The entry port where the game ball enters and the state of the entry port are set to the entry permission state where the game ball is easy to enter and the entry restriction state where the entry of the game ball is restricted. In a gaming machine provided with a ball opening setting means and the privileged game advantageous to the player is given by switching to the ball entry permission state by the ball entrance setting means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the entry It is advantageous for the player when the game ball enters the first area where the game ball that has entered the ball mouth can enter, and compared with the case where the game ball enters the first area. The second region and the flow path in which the game ball that has entered the ball entrance port travels to the first flow path or the second flow path in which the game ball is more likely to travel to the second region than the first flow path thereof. The state of the distribution means for distributing to the flow path and the state of the distribution means are the first state in which the game ball is distributed to the first flow path based on the progress of the privilege game, and the second state. As a state setting means for setting the state of the ball at least once in the second state which is a state of being distributed to the flow path, and as a setting content for setting the state of the ball slot by the ball slot setting means in the privilege game of 1. , The first setting content in which the ball entry permission state is set when the state setting means is set to the first state, and the ball entry permission state when the second state is set. The gaming machine E1 is provided with a selection means for selecting one setting content from a plurality of setting contents including at least a second setting content to be set.

According to the game machine E1, the flow path through which the game ball that has entered the ball entry port travels is moved to the first flow path or a second region from the first flow path by the distribution means. It is distributed to the second flow path where it is easy to proceed. The state of the distribution means is divided into a first state in which the game ball is distributed to the first flow path by the state setting means and a second state in which the game ball is distributed to the second flow path based on the progress of the privilege game. It is set at least once. As a setting content for setting the state of the ball entrance by the ball entry setting means in the privilege game of 1, the first setting content in which the ball entry permission state is set when the state setting means is set to the first state. One setting content is selected by the selection means from a plurality of setting contents including at least the second setting content in which the ball entry permission state is set when the second state is set.

As a result, when the first setting content or the second setting content is selected by the selection means, the game ball that has entered the ball entry port proceeds to the same flow path regardless of the player's game method. Therefore, the player can play the game by his / her favorite game method. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious about the game.

In the gaming machine E1, the gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the selection means selects either the first setting content or the second setting content.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, either the first setting content or the second setting content is selected by the selection means, so that the ball is entered in all the privilege games. A game ball that has entered the mouth can be advanced to the same flow path regardless of the player's game method. Therefore, since the player can play the game by his / her favorite game method, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious about the game.

The gaming machine E1 or E2 includes a lottery means for drawing whether or not a predetermined lottery result is obtained, and the selection means is set as described in the second setting when the lottery by the lottery means results in a predetermined lottery result. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the content is selected.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E1 or E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, whether or not the predetermined lottery result is obtained is drawn by the lottery means, and when the predetermined lottery result is obtained, the second setting content is selected by the selection means, so whether or not the predetermined lottery result is obtained. Depending on the situation, it is possible to determine whether the ball entry permission state is set in the first state or the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that various playability can be realized according to the ratio in which the ball entry permission state is set in the second state, depending on the lottery content by the lottery means.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming ball that has passed through the first flow path is distributed to the first region or the second region, and the gaming ball that has passed through the second flow path is distributed to the second region. A gaming machine E4 characterized by being provided with area distribution means for distributing to.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming ball that has passed through the first flow path is distributed to the first region or the second region by the region distribution means, and the first region is Since the game ball that has passed through the two flow paths is distributed to the second region by the area distribution means, it is possible to recognize whether or not it is advantageous for the player just by checking the flow path through which the game ball passes. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine E4, the area distribution means has a first distribution state in which a game ball that has passed through the first flow path is distributed to the first area, and a game ball that has passed through the first flow path is the first. A variable means that can be changed to a second distribution state that distributes to two regions, and a first that allows a game ball that has passed through the first flow path to pass through in the first distribution state. One passage, a second passage through which the game ball passing through the second flow path can pass, and a game ball passing through the first flow path in the second distribution state. The third passage is provided with a third passage, and a fourth passage through which the game ball passing through the second passage can pass, and the variable means is used when the game ball passes through the second passage. When the distribution means is changed from the first distribution state to the second distribution state and the game ball passes through the third passage, the second distribution state is changed to the first distribution state. The gaming machine E5, characterized in that the area distribution means is variable.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the gaming machine is divided into a first distribution state in which the game ball passing through the first flow path is distributed to the first region and a second distribution state in which the game ball passing through the first flow path is distributed to the second region. The state of is variable. In the first distribution state, the game ball that has passed through the first flow path passes through the first passage, and the game ball that has passed through the second flow path passes through the second passage. In the second distribution state, the game ball that has passed through the first flow path passes through the third passage, and the game ball that has passed through the second flow path passes through the fourth passage. When the game ball passes through the second passage, the area distribution means is changed from the first distribution state to the second distribution state by the variable means, and when the game ball passes through the third passage, the second distribution means is changed. The area distribution means is changed by the variable means from the distribution state to the first distribution state.

As a result, if the area distribution means is changed to the second distribution state, the game ball is distributed to the second area in the next distribution performed by the area distribution means, which is advantageous for the player. It can be recognized by the player. Therefore, from the time when the area distribution means is changed to the second distribution state until the next distribution is performed by the area distribution means, the player feels a sense of security and satisfaction that it will be advantageous. There is an effect that you can play a game while holding a.

In the gaming machine E5, the first passage allows the passed game ball to enter the first region, and the second passage allows the passed game ball to enter the second region. The gaming machine E6 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5, the gaming ball that has passed through the first passage enters the first region, and the gaming ball that has passed through the second passage enters the second region. Therefore, if the game ball passes through the second passage, the game ball enters the second area and becomes a state advantageous to the player, and the area distribution means is changed to the second distribution state. NS. In the second distribution state, since the game ball is distributed to the second area by the area distribution means, it is possible to make the player recognize that the state is continuously shifted to a state advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have a sense of security and satisfaction for the continuous advantageous state.

In the gaming machines E1 to E6, the gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the first flow path is located on the front side of the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 to E6, the first flow path is located on the front side of the second flow path, so that the game ball is located in the front side as compared with the case where the game ball advances on the front side. It is advantageous for the player to move to the side. Therefore, even if the game ball is illegally pulled toward the front by using a magnet or the like, there is no merit for the cheating person, so that there is an effect that the cheating can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine E7, the first passage is located on the front side of the second passage, and the third passage is located on the front side of the fourth passage. Game machine E8 to play.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first passage is located on the front side of the second passage and the third passage is located on the front side of the fourth passage, even if it is in the first distribution state, it is in the second distribution state. However, it is more advantageous for the player that the game ball passes through the passage located on the back side than that the game ball passes through the passage located on the front side. Therefore, even if the game ball is illegally pulled toward the front by using a magnet or the like, there is no merit for the cheating person, so that there is an effect that the cheating can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, an information acquisition means for periodically acquiring elapsed time information corresponding to the elapsed time since the start of the privileged game is provided, and the distribution means is provided by the information acquisition means. Based on the acquired elapsed time information, the game machine E9 is characterized in that the flow path in which the game ball travels is distributed to either the first flow path or the second flow path. ..

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the elapsed time information corresponding to the elapsed time since the start of the privilege game is periodically acquired by the information acquisition means. Based on the elapsed time information acquired by the information acquisition means, the flow path in which the game ball travels is distributed by the distribution means to either the first flow path or the second flow path. As a result, the operation of the distribution means can be made the same in each privilege game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust due to the variation in the operation of the sorting means.

The gaming machine E9 is characterized in that the ball entry opening setting means sets the state of the ball entry port to the ball entry permission state based on the elapsed time information acquired by the information acquisition means. Game machine E10 to play.

According to the game machine E10, in addition to the effect of the game machine E9, the state of the ball entry port is set to the ball entry permission state by the ball entry port setting means based on the elapsed time information acquired by the information acquisition means. Therefore, it is possible to control the setting of the flow path by the sorting means and the setting of the ball entry port by the ball entry port setting means based on the same elapsed time information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the setting of the flow path and the setting of the ball entry permission state from being deviated from each other.

<Characteristic F group> (Structure in which the accessory does not easily bounce)
Front to either the entry port where the game ball can enter, the first area and the second area where the game ball entered into the entry port can enter, and either the first area or the second area. A player is provided with a distribution means for distributing the game balls that have entered the entry ball opening, and based on the fact that the game balls have entered the first area, the player has more than the case where the game balls have entered the second area. In a gaming machine that shifts to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the distribution means is a first state in which the gaming balls can be distributed to a plurality of flow paths through which the gaming balls can pass and the first region. And a variable means capable of varying the game ball into a second state in which the game ball can be distributed to the first region or the second region, and the variable means includes the plurality of flow paths. Among them, the gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the first state and the second state are changed based on the passage of the gaming ball through a part of the flow paths.

According to the game machine F1, the distribution means can distribute the game ball to the first region or the first region or the second region, which is a state in which the game ball can be distributed to the first region by the variable means. It is variable to the second state, which is a state. The first state and the second state are changed by the variable means based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a part of the flow paths through which the game ball can pass.

As a result, the player can be made to recognize whether or not the game ball enters the first region in the next distribution based on the state of the distribution means. Therefore, from the time when the sorting means is changed to the first state until the next sorting is performed by the sorting means, the player feels reassured and satisfied with the transition to the special gaming state. It has the effect of allowing you to play games while hugging.

In the gaming machine F1, the plurality of flow paths are the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game ball can pass in the first state, and the game in the second state. It is composed of a third flow path and a fourth flow path through which the ball can pass, and the variable means starts from the first state when the game ball passes through the second flow path. The distribution means is changed to the second state, and when the game ball passes through the third flow path, the distribution means is changed from the second state to the first state. A game machine F2 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first state, the game ball can pass through the first flow path and the second flow path, and in the second state, the game ball passes through the third flow path and the fourth flow path. Is allowed to pass. When the game ball passes through the second flow path, the distribution means is changed from the first state to the second state by the variable means, and when the game ball passes through the third flow path, the second state is changed by the variable means. The sorting means is variable from the state to the first state.

As a result, the state of the distribution means can be changed according to which of the plurality of flow paths the game ball passes through, and the flow path through which the game ball that reaches the distribution means next time passes. Is changed, so that the player can predict the area to be distributed next time by the distribution means depending on the state of the distribution means and the flow path through which the game ball passes. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the gaming machine F2 includes a variable suppressing means for suppressing the variable distribution means when the gaming ball passes through the first flow path or the fourth flow path.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, the variable suppressing means suppresses the variable distribution means when the gaming ball passes through the first flow path or the fourth flow path. , It is possible to prevent the hole from being disadvantageous because it changes to the second state even though it has passed through the first flow path. Further, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust because the game ball changes to the first state even though the game ball has passed through the fourth flow path.

In the gaming machine F3, the distribution means is swingable, and the first state is a state in which the distribution means swings on the opposite side to the second state. Game machine F4.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the first state is a state in which the distribution means is swung to the opposite side to the second state, so that the player can easily change the current state. It has the effect of being able to be recognized.

In the gaming machine F4, the distribution means is arranged in a ball entry area provided inside the ball entry port, and the variable suppression means is provided in the distribution means and the ball entry area. It is composed of magnets installed so as to repel each other, and is installed at the position closest to the distribution means when it swings to an intermediate state between the first state and the second state. A gaming machine F5 characterized by being a magnet.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the distribution means is arranged in the ball entry area provided inside the ball entry port. When the variable suppressing means is composed of a sorting means and magnets installed in a direction that repels each other in the ball entry region, and the sorting means swings to an intermediate state between the first state and the second state. It is installed in the position closest to.

As a result, even if the distribution means fluctuates due to the influence of vibration or the like, it is possible to prevent the state of the distribution means from switching. Therefore, even though the game ball does not pass through the second flow path, the state of the sorting means is switched from the first state to the second state, which suppresses the disadvantage to the hole. be able to. Further, even though the game ball has not passed through the third flow path, the state of the sorting means is switched from the second state to the first state, and the player is distrustful of the game machine or the hall. It has the effect of suppressing the feeling.

In the gaming machine F4, the distribution means is arranged in a ball entry area provided inside the ball entry port, and the variable suppression means is provided in the distribution means and the ball entry area. A gaming machine characterized in that it is composed of magnets installed in a direction of attracting each other, and the distribution means is installed at the closest position in the first state or the second state. F6.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the distribution means is arranged in the ball entry area provided inside the ball entry port. The variable suppressing means is composed of a sorting means and a magnet installed in a direction of attracting each other to the ball entry region, and the sorting means is installed at the position closest to each other in the first state or the second state.

As a result, the distribution means in the first state or the second state can be stably stopped by the attractive force of the magnet, so that there is an effect that the distribution means can be suppressed from swinging due to the influence of vibration or the like. ..

In the gaming machine F5 or F6, the distribution means has a portion that contacts the inner wall of the ball entry region when the first state is changed to the second state, and the second state to the first state. The gaming machine F7 is characterized in that the portion that comes into contact with the inner wall of the ball entry region is made of a material capable of absorbing an impact when the value is changed to.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5 or F6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a portion that contacts the inner wall portion of the ball entry region when changing from the first state to the second state, and a portion that contacts the inner wall portion of the ball entry region when changing from the second state to the first state. Is made of a material that can absorb shocks.

As a result, even if the distribution means and the inner wall portion of the ball entry region come into contact with each other when the first state is changed to the second state or the second state is changed to the first state, the contact It is possible to prevent the sorting means from bouncing off due to an impact. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the return to the state before the state of the sorting means is switched due to the bounce even though the state is switched.

A gaming machine F8, wherein in any of the gaming machines F4 to F7, the sorting means is configured to be visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F4 to F7, the sorting means is configured to be visible to the player, so that the states of the sorting means are the first state and the second state. There is an effect that the player can easily recognize which of the states is.

In the gaming machine F8, the sorting means swings to the right or left side in a front view.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F8, the sorting means swings to the right or left side in the front view, so that the player can easily determine whether it is the first state or the second state. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the game machines F1 to F9, the variable means can change the state of the distribution means based on the weight of the passing game ball.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F9, the state of the sorting means is changed based on the weight of the passing game ball, so that the state of the sorting means is changed by the variable means. Can be changed by natural movement. Therefore, there is an effect that the state of the sorting means is changed at an unnatural timing, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the gaming machine or the hall.

The gaming machine Z1 in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E10, and F1 to F10, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E10, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C6, D1 to D5, E1 to E10, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The featured gaming machine Z3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

<Others>
For gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery will be drawn to determine whether or not a game ball will win a jackpot based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and whether or not to shift to a probability fluctuation state will be drawn separately during the jackpot. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from becoming a mere task for getting a lot of balls, and to play the game during the jackpot with the expectation of shifting to a probability fluctuation state, and to improve the interest of the player in the game. There is something I'm trying to do.

Some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are provided with a plurality of routes through which the gaming ball can pass in a predetermined area where the gaming ball can enter only when the lottery in the probability fluctuation state is performed. In this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuates after the end of the jackpot, depending on which route the game ball is distributed to among the plurality of routes provided in the predetermined area. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-180999)
However, in such a gaming machine, although it is possible to draw a lottery as to whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state after the current jackpot, it is also possible to determine whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state after the next jackpot. There wasn't. As a result, every time a jackpot is hit, the player feels uneasy that the lottery in a state of probability fluctuation may be leaked, and even if the jackpot is won, the player will not be relieved. There was a problem.

This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problem, and among a plurality of routes for performing a lottery in a probability fluctuation state, the next probability depends on the route passed by the game ball. By configuring the route through which the game ball can pass during the lottery in the fluctuating state to be changeable, the game ball to a route other than the route that shifts to the probability fluctuating state (the route that shifts to the low probability state). It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of providing a pattern in which the progress of the game is restricted, and which can suppress giving anxiety to the player every time a big hit is made.

In addition, in such a gaming machine, when a lottery is made as to whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state after a big hit, the game ball is sent to a route other than the route that shifts to the probability fluctuation state (the route that shifts to the low probability state). As it progressed, there was no room for reversal and it shifted to a low-probability state. As a result, the lottery becomes dull, and there is a risk that the player cannot fully enjoy the lottery.

This technical idea was made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and by configuring the lottery to perform a multi-stage lottery when performing a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a probability fluctuation state. Even if the lottery result of 1 shows a disadvantageous result for the player, depending on the result of another lottery, it is possible to expect the winning of the probability fluctuation state, and the player can fully enjoy the lottery. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be played.

Further, in such a gaming machine, if two or more gaming balls enter a predetermined area for lottery in a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a probability fluctuation state once, the gaming balls are drawn in one lottery. Passed through multiple routes, and there was a risk that the gaming machine would malfunction.

This technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and is a predetermined area for performing a lottery when a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to a probability fluctuation state using a game ball. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the entry of two or more gaming balls into the ball.

Further, in such a gaming machine, the route on which the gaming ball that has entered the predetermined region travels changes depending on the angle of entry of the gaming ball into the predetermined region, vibration, and the like. As a result, every time a jackpot is hit, there is a risk that the player may be worried that his or her own game method may affect the route on which the game ball travels. That is, there is a problem that every time a big hit is made, the player feels uneasy.

The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing anxiety from being caused to a player.
<Others>
For gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery will be drawn to determine whether or not a game ball will be a big hit based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and whether or not to shift to a probability fluctuation state will be drawn separately during the big hit. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from becoming a mere task for obtaining a large number of balls, to allow the player to play the game during the jackpot with a sense of expectation of shifting to a probability fluctuation state, and to improve the interest of the player in the game. I am trying to.
Some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are provided with a plurality of routes through which the gaming ball can pass in a predetermined area where the gaming ball can enter only when the lottery in the probability fluctuation state is performed. In this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuates after the end of the jackpot, depending on which route the game ball is distributed to among the plurality of routes provided in the predetermined area (for example, Patent Document). 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-180999).
However, in such a gaming machine, the route on which the gaming ball that has entered the predetermined region travels changes depending on the angle of entry of the gaming ball into the predetermined region, vibration, and the like. As a result, every time a jackpot is hit, there is a risk that the player may be worried that his or her own game method may affect the route on which the game ball travels. That is, there is a problem that every time a big hit is made, the player feels uneasy.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing anxiety from the player.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the game machine of the technical idea 1 has a ball entry port into which the game ball enters and the state of the ball entry port, a ball entry permission state in which the game ball can easily enter, and a game ball. The game is provided with a ball-entry opening setting means for setting the ball-entry restricted state in which the ball is restricted, and is switched to the ball-entry permitted state by the ball-entry opening setting means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. This is a privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and is compared with the first area in which the game ball that has entered the ball entrance can be entered and the case where the game ball enters the first area. The second region, which is advantageous for the player when the game ball enters, and the flow path through which the game ball that has entered the ball entrance port travels are the first flow path or the first flow path thereof. The state of the distribution means for distributing the game ball to the second flow path in which the game ball is more likely to advance to the second region and the state of the distribution means is determined by the game ball in the first flow based on the progress status of the privilege game. The state setting means for setting the first state, which is a state of being distributed to the road, and the second state, which is a state of being distributed to the second flow path, at least once, and the above-mentioned ball entry in the above-mentioned privilege game of 1. As the setting contents for setting the state of the ball entry port by the mouth setting means, the first setting content in which the ball entry permission state is set when the first state is set by the state setting means, and the above-mentioned It is provided with a selection means for selecting one setting content from a plurality of setting contents including at least the second setting content in which the ball entry permission state is set when the second state is set.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and the selection means selects either the first setting content or the second setting content.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 includes a lottery means for drawing whether or not a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, and the selection means is a lottery by the lottery means. When a predetermined lottery result is obtained, the second setting content is selected.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the flow path in which the game ball that has entered the ball entry port travels is the first flow path or a second region than the first flow path by the distribution means. It is distributed to the second flow path where the game ball can easily advance. The state of the distribution means is divided into a first state in which the game ball is distributed to the first flow path by the state setting means and a second state in which the game ball is distributed to the second flow path based on the progress of the privilege game. It is set at least once. As a setting content for setting the state of the ball entrance by the ball entry setting means in the privilege game of 1, the first setting content in which the ball entry permission state is set when the state setting means is set to the first state. One setting content is selected by the selection means from a plurality of setting contents including at least the second setting content in which the ball entry permission state is set when the second state is set.
As a result, when the first setting content or the second setting content is selected by the selection means, the game ball that has entered the ball entry port proceeds to the same flow path regardless of the player's game method. Therefore, the player can play the game without paying attention to his / her own game method. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious about the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, either the first setting content or the second setting content is selected by the selection means. Therefore, in all the privilege games, the game ball that has entered the ball entrance can be advanced to the same flow path regardless of the player's game method. Therefore, since the player can play the game by his / her favorite game method, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious about the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, whether or not the predetermined lottery result is obtained is drawn by the lottery means, and the predetermined lottery result and the predetermined lottery result are obtained. In that case, the second setting content is selected by the selection means, so whether the ball entry permission state is set in the first state or the second state depends on whether or not the predetermined lottery result is obtained. Can be decided. Therefore, there is an effect that various playability can be realized according to the ratio in which the ball entry permission state is set in the second state, depending on the lottery content by the lottery means.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
64 1st entrance (pass / fail judgment means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
300 lottery device (state identification means, distribution means)
310 lottery gate (ball entry means)
403a ball stop (first state setting means)
405a ball stop (second state setting means)
501 Time-saving ball entrance ( second area)
502 to 504 Probability change entrance ( first area)
S302 discrimination means
S1612, S1615, S1621 Bonus game execution means
S2703, S2704, S2713 Production mode specifying means, type setting means
S4203 Display control means, effect control means

Claims (3)

The entry port where the game ball enters and the state of the entry port are set to the entry permission state where the game ball is easy to enter and the entry restriction state where the entry of the game ball is restricted. In a gaming machine provided with a ball opening setting means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is given by switching to the ball entry permission state by the ball entrance setting means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.
The first area where the game ball that has entered the ball entrance can enter, and
A second area, which is advantageous for the player when the game ball enters the first area, as compared with the case where the game ball enters the first area.
The flow path in which the game ball that has entered the ball entry port advances is distributed to the first flow path or the second flow path in which the game ball easily advances to the second region rather than the first flow path thereof. Sorting means and
The state of the distribution means is a first state in which the game ball is distributed to the first flow path and a state in which the game ball is distributed to the second flow path based on the progress of the privilege game. A state setting means that sets two states at least once, and
As a setting content for setting the state of the ball entry port by the ball entry port setting means in the privilege game of 1, the ball entry permission state is set when the first state is set by the state setting means. Select one setting content from a plurality of setting contents including at least the first setting content and the second setting content in which the ball entry permission state is set when the second state is set. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the selection means selects either the first setting content or the second setting content. Equipped with a lottery means to draw a lottery whether or not the result will be a predetermined lottery
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the selection means selects the second setting content when the lottery by the lottery means results in a predetermined lottery result.

Images